The Journey of Tune, son of Victor
Tomorrow will be the greatest day of my life. For eight long years, I have trained first as a humble page, then as a squire, and now, at last, standing on the precipice of my final trials. The journey has been grueling, filled with sleepless nights, aching limbs, and moments of doubt. Yet I have endured.
— Tune, son of Victor
An immersive narrative that combines epic action, deep character development, and a rich mythology that will expand your understanding of the Warcraft universe.
Tomorrow will be the greatest day of my life.
For eight long years, I have trained—first as a humble page, then as a squire, and now,
at last, standing on the precipice of my final trials. The journey has been grueling, filled
with sleepless nights, aching limbs, and moments of doubt. Yet I have endured. Tomorrow,
I shall stand before the knights of the Silver Hand and take my oaths, becoming what I
have always dreamed of—a paladin of the Light.
If only my father could be here to see it.
I made him a promise before he passed—that I would follow this path, that I would
wield my blade in service of the Light. And now, on the eve of my greatest test, I find myself
yearning for his presence, his steady voice, his reassuring hand upon my shoulder.
But he is gone. And so, I must steel myself alone.
I have chosen to spend this final night not in the comfort of the barracks, nor within
the hallowed halls of the monastery, but in a place that has always felt sacred to me—a
secluded cave, deep within the woods outside the city. A place where, as a child, I would
steal away to play, pretending to be a knight of legend, wielding a wooden sword against
imaginary foes. But tonight, there will be no childish games—only prayer, meditation, and
preparation.
The road is silent as I ride beneath the pale glow of the moon, its silver light spilling
through the twisted arms of the trees. The great oaks and elms of Darrowmere Forest
stand like ancient sentinels, their leaves whispering softly in the night breeze. Cool air
brushes against my face, carrying with it the familiar scents of damp earth, wildflowers,
and distant hearthfires from the villages beyond.
Beneath me, my father’s old warhorse moves with steady grace. He is no longer the
mighty steed of his younger days, but he remains loyal, steadfast, and unyielding, much
like the man who once rode him into battle. I run my fingers through his coarse mane. Old
boy, we have come far together.
The path winds deeper into the woods, where civilization fades and the world
becomes still and sacred. Here, beneath the vast expanse of the heavens, I feel the
presence of the Holy Light, not in spoken prayers or grand cathedrals, but in the quiet hum
of nature, in the rhythm of my own heartbeat, in the very breath that fills my lungs.
At last, I reach the cave.
The entrance yawns before me—a dark, familiar refuge carved into the hillside, its
stone walls cold yet welcoming. The night is deathly silent, save for the distant hoot of an
owl and the faint rustling of leaves. As I step inside, a wave of nostalgia washes over
me.
Here, within these walls, I had once carved my name into the stone, swearing as a
boy that I would become a hero. Here, I had hidden away during summer storms, listening
2
to the thunder rumble like the war drums of some unseen battle. This cave has always
been my sanctuary, and tonight, it shall be my place of communion with the Light.
I remove my gloves and kneel upon the smooth, timeworn rock, pressing my hands
together in prayer. The air within the cave is heavy, charged with something unseen—a
presence, a warmth, a quiet power that seems to resonate from the very walls.
I close my eyes and breathe deeply.
Tomorrow, I shall prove myself worthy. Tomorrow, I shall take my vows.
But tonight, it is only me, the Light, and the path that lies ahead.
The cave is still and silent, save for the distant drip of water deep within its stony
recesses. The air is cool, almost biting, but I pay it no heed. I kneel on the rough ground,
pressing my hands together in prayer, my eyes closed. The flickering light of my candle
casts long, wavering shadows across the stone walls, fragile against the darkness.
I breathe deeply, steadying my heart, centering myself as I was taught. My thoughts
drift, as they always do, to the Light—warm, golden, and eternal. In my mind’s eye, I can
almost see it, glowing like the dawn, as if I stand beneath the great stained glass of
Stratholme’s cathedral.
Tonight, I seek its guidance. May the Light fill me. May it grant me strength for the trials
ahead.
The cave remains silent, but as the minutes stretch on, I begin to feel something
stirring. A warmth spreads through the air—not the natural heat of my own breath, but
something greater, unseen, yet deeply familiar. It surrounds me like a presence, and the
f
ine hairs on my arms stand on end.
Then, from the depths of my mind, something shifts.
The darkness behind my eyelids fades, and I find myself standing in endless golden
mist. There is no ground beneath my feet, no sky above—only a vast, radiant void
stretching beyond all comprehension.
Then, a figure emerges from the mist. A spirit.
His presence feels familiar, though I do not know why.
His voice is soft, distant, yet filled with urgency:
“Find me.”
I step forward, heart pounding. “Who are you?” I ask.
The spirit does not answer.
“Find me.”
The words ring in my ears, pulling at something deep within me, something I do not
understand. I open my mouth to speak again, but a great gust of wind sweeps through the
mist, tearing it apart like smoke in a storm.
And just like that, the vision vanishes.
The golden mist is gone.
3
Now, I stand in the heart of a war camp, surrounded by the clamor of soldiers
preparing for battle. The scent of smoke, sweat, and steel fills the air. Banners flap in the
wind, their colors unfamiliar, and I hear the distant sound of horns calling warriors to
formation.
I turn, looking around—faces I do not know, warriors clad in strange armor, carrying
weapons of unfamiliar craftsmanship. Some are human, but others are not. I catch
glimpses of elves, dwarves, and even a gnome, the small figure adjusting a pair of brass
rimmed goggles before tightening the straps on a back-mounted contraption of gears
and tubing.
And they are all looking at me.
Then a voice calls out:
“Commander! What are your orders?”
I spin toward the speaker—a grizzled dwarf, his beard streaked with gray, his armor
battered from years of battle. His expression is expectant. He is waiting for me to decide.
They all are.
My throat goes dry. Commander? Me?
I don’t know these people. I don’t know where I am, what battle this is, or how I
came to be here. My mind races, searching for answers, but none come.
I try to speak, to ask them who they are, what we are fighting for—but before the words
can leave my lips, the world around me shatters like glass.
The battlefield is gone.
Now, I stand upon a storm-swept cliff, the wind roaring in my ears, rain slashing down
like silver knives. Thunder rumbles above, shaking the earth beneath my feet. My armor is
heavier than before, grander, and the warhammer in my grip pulses with the Light.
Before me stands an orc shaman.
His robes are deep crimson and black, his staff crackling with raw elemental power.
His tusked face is lined with age and wisdom, and his piercing gaze holds no hatred—only
understanding.
We have fought, that much is clear. But neither of us has fallen. We are warriors. We
are equals.
Slowly, the orc takes a step back, lowering his staff. His expression is solemn, but he
does not look defeated. Instead, he does something I do not expect—
He places a fist against his chest and bows his head.
I hesitate, stunned. But something deep within me stirs—a truth I do not yet
understand, but one that feels right. I lift my warhammer, then press my fist to my chest,
returning the gesture.
The duel is over. There is no victory or defeat—only respect.
The rain slows. The storm fades.
4
And then the vision does, too.
I gasp as my eyes snap open.
The cave is dark once more, the candle beside me guttering its last, casting long,
f
lickering shadows against the walls. The air is still and quiet, save for my own
breathing.
I press a hand to my chest, trying to still my racing heart. The visions are gone, but their
echo remains, heavy in my mind.
A lost soul calling for me. A battle where I command warriors I do not know. A duel
where an orc is not my enemy, but my equal.
The meanings are unclear, but I do not fear them.
Whatever the Light has shown me, whatever awaits me in the years ahead—I will face
it. The Holy Light is with me, and that is all I need.
I rise to my feet, feeling the first faint warmth of dawn spilling through the cave’s
entrance. For the briefest moment, the sunlight glows with an almost divine radiance,
and I take it as a sign.
“I am ready,” I whisper, feeling the Light settle within my heart. “For whatever is to
come.”
And with that, I step out of the cave, into the new day—into my new life as a paladin
of the Silver Hand.
As I step out of the cave, the first rays of morning sunlight spill across the land,
casting the world in hues of gold and crimson. The warmth touches my skin, gentle yet
invigorating, and I close my eyes for a brief moment, letting the Light’s embrace wash over
me.
A deep breath fills my lungs—clean, crisp air, carrying the scent of damp earth and
wildflowers. The distant hum of a waking world reaches my ears: birds singing from the
treetops, the rustle of wind through the branches, the soft murmur of a nearby stream
winding its way through the glade.
I open my eyes and gaze out over the countryside. The rolling fields of Lordaeron
stretch before me, bathed in golden light. Trees stand tall along the roadside, their autumn
leaves ablaze in reds, oranges, and golds, shimmering like fire in the morning sun.
Wildflowers—bluebells, lilies, and daisies—dot the grassy meadows, their colors more
vivid than I can ever remember.
The day could not be more perfect.
For a moment, I let myself simply be—no worries, no burdens, only the quiet certainty
that today marks the beginning of the life I have always dreamed of.
Then, with a final glance toward the cave—the place where the Light granted me
visions of a future I do not yet understand—I mount my horse and turn toward
Stratholme.
5
The morning is bright and clear as I ride along the winding road to Stratholme, the
golden fields and crimson autumn leaves swaying gently in the breeze. The warmth of
the sun rests on my shoulders, filling me with peace.
Today is the day. The day I become a paladin.
I keep my posture straight, my mind calm, repeating the sacred words of the Light
under my breath.
Respect, Tenacity, Compassion.
The virtues of a paladin, the foundation of our order.
I have trained for this moment for years, and soon, I will stand before my brothers and
sisters in the courtyard of the Grand Cathedral, ready to prove my strength, my faith, and
my purpose.
Then, a sound breaks my focus—a pained voice calling for help.
I pull on the reins, and my horse slows. Just ahead, near the side of the road, I see
him—an elderly man, slumped against a fallen log, gripping his leg with a pained
expression. His simple clothes are torn, dirt smeared across his arms.
I dismount immediately. “Are you hurt, sir?”
The man groans, shaking his head. “Thieves… young fools, barely older than boys. Took
my horse, knocked me down.” He winces, clutching his swollen ankle. “Damn thing—
hurts like the Nether itself.”
I kneel beside him, carefully removing his boot. His ankle is swollen, red, but not
broken—only twisted.
“You’re fortunate,” I say gently. “It’s not as bad as it looks.” I place my hands over his
injury and close my eyes. A paladin is a healer as well as a warrior.
I breathe deeply, focusing on the warmth of the Light within me. It stirs, answering my
call, and a soft golden glow spreads from my hands, sinking into the injured flesh. I feel
the Light’s energy flow through me, knitting the damaged tendons, easing his pain.
The old man exhales sharply. His expression shifts from discomfort to relief.
“By the Light,” he whispers, flexing his foot. “The pain is nearly gone!”
I nod with a small smile. “The Light provides for those in need. You should still rest it for
a day or two.”
The man chuckles. “You have a good heart, lad. The world could use more like you.”
Then, his eyes narrow thoughtfully. “If you still want to do more good today, they rode off
that way.” He gestures toward the tree line. “You seem brave enough. I’m sure your
superiors would be proud if you chased them down.”
I pause, considering his words.
The righteous fury of a paladin calls for justice, for standing against those who do
harm. I could track them, retrieve his horse, perhaps even teach those thieves a
lesson.
But I know better.
6
Justice is not the same as vengeance. The Light does not burn for glory or retribution.
It shines to protect and heal.
I rise to my feet. “Your safety is my priority. The thugs can be dealt with later—but for
now, I will escort you to Stratholme.”
The old man studies me for a long moment before nodding, as if seeing something in
me he did not expect.
“A wise choice,” he says. “A paladin’s choice.”
I help him onto my horse, ensuring he is seated safely before leading us toward the
gates of Stratholme.
By the time we reach Stratholme, the city is fully awake. Merchants arrange their stalls
in the marketplace, their voices carrying through the streets as they call out their wares.
The scent of freshly baked bread and roasting meat drifts from the bakeries, mixing with
the faint, ever-present aroma of the canals that weave through the city.
The great Cathedral of the Light stands in the distance, its ivory spires gleaming
against the clear blue sky. The sight fills me with pride—soon, I will kneel before that
altar, no longer a mere trainee, but a paladin of the Silver Hand.
As I approach the training grounds near the cathedral, I spot the others—a dozen or so
trainees, all dressed in simple tunics, all sharing the same anticipation in their eyes.
They stand in small groups, stretching, speaking in hushed tones, some whispering last
minute prayers.
I dismount, secure my horse, and step forward with a smile. “May the Light be with
you.”
A few nod and return the blessing. There is no rivalry here—no competition. There is
room for all who are worthy, for all who serve with faith and honor. I wish nothing but
success for my brothers and sisters, for today, we stand as equals in devotion to the
Light.
A familiar voice calls my name, and I turn just in time to see Edric Faol striding toward
me, a wide grin on his face.
“Ah, there you are!” he says, clapping a hand on my shoulder. “I was starting to think
you got lost in prayer and forgot we had trials today.”
I chuckle. “Something like that.”
Edric has been one of my closest friends for years, ever since I first trained with the
Silver Hand. A head taller than most, broad-shouldered and always quick with a joke,
he carries himself with the confidence of a man born to wield a warhammer. His golden
hair is cropped short, his features sharp yet warm—a reflection of his sister.
His sister… Adele.
The thought of her brings a warmth to my chest, but I push it aside. Focus. The trials
come first.
7
Edric folds his arms, studying me. “You look different,” he says after a moment, tilting
his head. “Calm. More at peace.”
I pause, glancing toward the rising sun. Should I tell him? The visions still linger in my
mind—the spirit calling to me, the battlefield where I commanded warriors I do not know,
the duel with the orc. But even as the images flicker in my thoughts, I do not feel troubled
by them.
I meet his gaze and smile. “I trust the Light. That is enough.”
Edric raises an eyebrow but then chuckles, shaking his head. “You’re starting to sound
like an old priest.”
“Maybe,” I say, grinning. “Or maybe I just know this is what we were meant for.”
His expression softens, and he nods. “Aye. That we do.”
Together, we turn toward the training grounds, ready to face whatever trials await.
Today, our dream of joining the Silver Hand will become reality.
The courtyard of the Grand Cathedral of the Light is filled with the golden glow of
the morning sun, its rays glinting off polished armor and fluttering banners. The white
marble steps leading to the great doors of the cathedral seem to shimmer, as if blessed
by the Light itself.
We stand in a semi-circle before the senior paladins, their presence alone enough to
command silence. They watch us closely, studying every movement, every breath. This
is no ordinary test—this is judgment.
I shift my stance, feeling the weight of this moment. This is what I have trained for.
What we have all trained for. Today, we prove ourselves.
Then, amidst the crowd, I hear it.
“Tune! Tune!”
I turn sharply at the sound of my name, my heart leaping in my chest.
There, just beyond the gathered initiates, I see them—my mother, standing tall
despite the tears welling in her eyes, and beside her, Adele—the woman I love, the woman
who will soon be my wife. Edric’s sister.
She looks at me, her eyes filled with pride, her hands clasped together. She believes
in me. They both do.
And in that moment, I feel it—something beyond sight, beyond sound. A presence,
warm and familiar, lingering just beyond the veil of the living.
Father.
I cannot see him, yet I know he is here, watching as I stand on the threshold of my
greatest trial.
I will make them proud. I will make him proud. The Light is with me.
A sudden, commanding voice shatters my thoughts.
“Trainees, to your places!”
8
I snap my attention back to the front. The voice belongs to Highlord Gavinrad the
Dire—a towering man clad in gilded armor, his presence as unyielding as the hammer at
his hip. His voice rings across the courtyard, filled with the weight of authority and
expectation.
“You stand before the Light, before the Silver Hand, and before your people! Now,
you shall prove yourselves worthy.”
A hush falls over the crowd. The moment has come.
“The First Trial begins! The Trial of Strength!”
A murmur spreads among us. We knew this would be the first test. This is where we
prove our combat prowess, decision-making, and restraint. A paladin is not just a
warrior—they are a protector, a shield for the weak, and a blade against the
wicked.
Gavinrad’s sharp gaze sweeps across us.
“You will face both single combat and multiple opponents. We will judge your
skill, your discipline, and your restraint. A paladin does not fight for glory. A paladin
f
ights with wisdom, with purpose. Let the Light guide your every strike!”
He raises his arm, and in an instant, the crowd erupts in cheers as the first matches
are called.
I roll my shoulders, steady my breathing, and step forward onto the training ground,
my heart pounding in rhythm with the roar of the crowd. Around me, weapons clash,
boots scrape against the stone, and voices call out in challenge.
The trial has begun.
Let the Light guide my moves.
The roar of the crowd still lingers in my ears, but my focus is on the faces around me.
The other trainees—no, not trainees anymore, but brothers and sisters of the Silver
Hand—stand shoulder to shoulder, each of us catching our breath, our hearts still
pounding from the combat trials.
I meet Edric’s gaze, and we exchange a knowing nod. We all did well. We fought with
skill, discipline, and honor. Not one of us let the Light down.
For a brief moment, we simply stand together, pride swelling in our chests. We have
honored our families, our training, and the Holy Light itself.
Then, just as the realization settles in that this was only the first trial, a powerful voice
cuts through the air.
“Stand tall, paladins of the Silver Hand!”
I blink. Paladins?
9
Highlord Gavinrad the Dire steps forward, his golden pauldrons gleaming under the
sun, his piercing gaze sweeping across us. He stands tall, unshaken, the weight of
countless battles behind him. And yet, his expression is not stern—it is proud.
“You have proven yourselves. You have passed the trials. Today, you are no longer
squires, no longer trainees. You are paladins.”
The words hit me like a hammer to the chest.
We… we are already paladins?
I glance at the others. Their expressions mirror mine—confusion, disbelief, then
awe.
But… what about the other trials? The test of faith, the test of wisdom?
I barely have time to process before a figure approaches me, stepping through the
gathered crowd. A priest, clad in the white and gold robes of the Church of the Holy Light.
He holds something in his hands—a small wooden warhammer, carved with the
symbol of the Silver Hand.
A token of knighthood.
I lift my gaze to his face, and my breath catches in my throat.
It’s him.
The old man from the road.
My heart pounds in my chest as I stare at him, realization crashing over me like a
wave.
It was a test.
No—it was two tests.
I had proven my ability to heal the wounded, but more than that—I had chosen
compassion over personal glory. Instead of chasing down the thieves, I had put the
safety of the innocent first.
Without even knowing, I had already passed the Trial of the Light and the Trial of
Wisdom.
I take the wooden warhammer from his hands, my fingers tracing the smooth carvings
along its handle. The weight of it is light, but the meaning behind it is immeasurable.
I look back up at the priest, my voice barely a whisper. “It was all a test…”
The priest smiles knowingly. “Everything is a test. A paladin is tested not only when the
world is watching, but when no one is. The Light sees all, and the Light saw you.”
My throat tightens, and I bow my head in reverence.
“You are a paladin at last, Tune.”
Highlord Gavinrad steps forward once more, raising a gauntleted hand, and the crowd
falls silent.
10
“You stand before us as knights of the Silver Hand, blessed by the Light, bound by
duty.”
His voice is firm, filled with the weight of responsibility, but there is warmth there
too.
“Your families are proud. Your city is proud. But know this—the trials were only the
beginning.”
His gaze sharpens as he looks over us, his presence as unshakable as the stone
beneath our feet.
“A paladin’s duty does not end when the battle is won. It does not end when you
take off your armor, nor when you kneel before the altar. It is a burden you will carry
for the rest of your days.”
The crowd listens in hushed reverence, and I feel the weight of his words settle deep
in my chest.
“You are now shields for the innocent. Swords against the darkness. Lights that
shall never falter, even in the shadow of despair.”
His gaze sweeps over us one final time.
“Rise, paladins of the Silver Hand.”
I inhale sharply, then lift my head. We stand tall.
The cheers of the people explode around us, a deafening chorus of joy and
celebration. Families rush forward, and before I can even take a breath, I see her.
Adele.
She is running toward me, her golden hair catching the sunlight, tears shimmering in
her eyes. Beside her, my mother follows, her hands pressed over her mouth, overwhelmed
with emotion.
The moment she reaches me, she throws her arms around my neck, holding me
tight.
“You did it!” she breathes. “You did it, Tune!”
I hold her close, my heart pounding, my own emotions threatening to spill over.
My mother steps forward next, her lips trembling as she reaches up to cup my face, her
eyes filled with love, pride, and something deeper—something only a mother can
understand.
Her voice is barely a whisper.
“Your father would be so proud.”
The words hit me harder than any hammer ever could.
For a moment, I swear I can feel him—his presence beside me, unseen but felt in my
very soul.
11
I swallow the lump in my throat and nod, my voice raw with emotion. “I know.”
I turn back to Edric, who claps a hand on my shoulder with a grin.
“Well, brother,” he says, smirking. “Looks like we made it after all.”
I exhale, smiling despite the burning in my eyes. “Aye. We did.”
As I stand there, surrounded by those I love, the weight of this moment settles upon
me.
I am a paladin.
And my true journey has only just begun.
The bells of Stratholme’s Grand Cathedral ring loud and joyous, echoing through the
streets as the sun begins to set. The trials are over. The oaths have been taken. We are
paladins.
And now, we celebrate.
The entire city of Stratholme has come alive in honor of this day, for it is not only our
victory—it is theirs as well. Families, merchants, soldiers, and priests alike spill into the
main square, where long wooden tables have been set up, lined with plates of roasted
meats, fresh bread, and sweet honeyed apples. Barrels of ale and wine are cracked
open, mugs overflowing as laughter and music fill the air.
Flickering lanterns and glowing braziers bathe the city in warm light, casting golden
reflections upon the canals that weave through Stratholme’s heart. At every corner, bards
pluck at lutes and strum harps, their songs weaving through the night like an
enchantment, a melody that no one can resist.
A group of young children race through the streets, wooden swords in hand,
pretending to be paladins of the Silver Hand. They clash in mock battles, shouting, “For
Lordaeron! For the Light!” as they swing their makeshift weapons at invisible foes.
A circle of dancers twirls in the square, their feet tapping in perfect rhythm with the
beat of the tambourines and fiddles. The scent of spiced cider drifts through the air,
mingling with the rich aroma of herbed sausages and roasted boar.
Nearby, a burly blacksmith has set up an arm-wrestling contest, challenging anyone
bold enough to face him. A dwarf merchant takes up the challenge, slamming his mug
of ale down before gripping the blacksmith’s wrist with a grin. A rowdy crowd gathers,
cheering wildly as their hands lock in battle.
Even the priests of the Light, though usually solemn, partake in the celebration—
some offering blessings to the newly anointed paladins, others simply smiling and
drinking their fill, grateful for a night of peace and joy.
I move through the celebration, taking it all in, breathing in the joy, the warmth, the
life of my city. For so long, we have trained, fought, and bled for this moment. And now,
here it is. It is real.
I hear laughter and turn just in time to see Edric, already deep into his second mug of
ale, being dragged into the dancing circle by a bright-eyed tavern maiden. He stumbles at
12
f
irst, but after a few spins, he grins and moves with surprising grace. “A paladin must be
light on his feet!” he shouts, twirling his partner to the sound of cheers.
I laugh, shaking my head, but before I can step away, a familiar hand takes mine.
Adele.
She looks up at me, her eyes alight with happiness. “Come, my paladin,” she says,
pulling me into the dance.
And for the first time in years, I let go.
The world spins in colors of gold and crimson, the music pulses in my chest, and for
a moment, there is no duty, no burden—only this moment, this joy, this love.
As we dance beneath the glow of lanterns, her laughter is brighter than any Light I
have ever known.
As the night deepens, the celebration slows, but the warmth lingers. Some have
fallen asleep at the tables, their mugs still in hand. Others sit by the canals, sharing
stories, basking in the glow of the city they love.
I find myself standing with my mother, Adele, and Edric, overlooking the water, the
reflections of the lanterns dancing like stars upon its surface.
“Tomorrow,” Edric says softly, his voice no longer filled with laughter, but with
something deeper—understanding. “Tomorrow, we begin.”
The weight of it settles in my chest. The celebration will end. The real work begins.
Tomorrow, we will receive our first assignments.
My mother places a hand on my shoulder, her grip gentle but firm.
“No matter where the Light takes you, my son,” she says, “you will always have a
home here.”
I nod, swallowing past the lump in my throat. “And I will always return.”
Adele leans into my side, her fingers lacing with mine. “Then we will wait for you,” she
whispers.
I close my eyes for a brief moment, savoring the warmth of this night. The laughter. The
love. The peace before the storm.
Then, with the first light of dawn breaking on the horizon, I take a deep breath and
steel myself for what is to come.
Tonight, we celebrate. Tomorrow, we serve.
The first rays of morning light spill over the rooftops of Stratholme, washing the city in soft hues of gold and amber. The warmth chases away the last remnants of the night’s revelry, as the people of the city rise with purpose once more.
For us, the new paladins of the Silver Hand, the celebration is over. Duty calls.
13
We gather at the Cathedral of the Light, standing tall beneath its towering spires. The joy of yesterday still lingers in my heart, but now, as we wait for our first assignments, a new feeling takes hold—anticipation, a touch of nervousness.
I glance at Edric, standing beside me. He wears the same expression I feel—steady, but alert. Ready, but uncertain.
“This is it,” I think. “Our first orders as paladins.”
The high-ranking paladins stand before us, their silver-trimmed armor gleaming in the morning sun. Their presence alone is enough to make the gathered crowd fall silent, watching as the newly anointed paladins receive their first commands.
At the center stands Highlord Gavinrad the Dire, a figure of imposing strength, his great warhammer resting at his side. His voice carries across the courtyard, filled with authority and certainty.
“You swore your oaths not for comfort, but for service. Today, you will take your f irst steps as true paladins of the Light. Some of you will remain here, watching over the cities and towns of Lordaeron. Others will ride to distant outposts, where our presence is needed most.”
One by one, assignments are given. Some are sent to Andorhal, others to Brill or Southshore. Then, Gavinrad’s piercing gaze lands on us.
“Tune. Edric.” He pauses, letting the weight of the moment settle. “You ride for Hearthglen, where you will serve under Uther the Lightbringer.”
A ripple of whispers spreads through the initiates.
Uther.
Uther the Lightbringer.
My stomach tightens, my hands clenching into fists at my sides. The leader of the Silver Hand. The greatest paladin to ever live.
I glance at Edric, who looks just as stunned as I feel.
To serve under Uther himself is an honor beyond words—but it is also a burden. The expectations will be higher. The eyes upon us, sharper.
We must not fail.
With our assignment given, the rest of the morning is spent preparing for the road ahead.
Inside the cathedral’s armory, we gather what we need—a fresh cloak, extra rations, a whetstone to keep our blades sharp. Our armor is cleaned and polished, though the wear of training is still visible in its creases.
Edric swings his pack over his shoulder and sighs. “Feels strange, doesn’t it?”
I raise an eyebrow. “What does?”
14
He gives me a smirk. “That we’re actually leaving. Yesterday, we were trainees, worrying about our trials. Today, we ride out as paladins of the Silver Hand.”
I can’t help but smile. “And tomorrow?”
Edric chuckles. “Tomorrow, we’ll be old and grizzled like Gavinrad, telling young recruits about the ‘good old days.’”
I laugh, shaking my head. “Let’s survive our first orders before we start planning our retirement.”
By midday, we ride beyond Stratholme’s gates, the city’s white stone walls shrinking in the distance as we move onto the open road.
The journey ahead will take the better part of two days. Though the road is well patrolled and safe, it is long, stretching through the heart of Lordaeron’s countryside.
The landscape unfolds before us—a land untouched by war, peaceful and prosperous.
Golden fields of wheat and barley sway gently in the breeze, their scent thick and sweet.
Farmers wave as we pass, their children running barefoot through the fields, shouting and laughing.
Small villages dot the countryside, thatched-roof cottages lined with hanging herbs and drying linens.
The road winds toward Darromere River, where we must cross the great stone bridge. As we approach, I pause for a moment, watching the water flow steadily beneath us, reflecting the clear sky above.
How many have crossed this bridge before me, heading toward their own fate?
As if reading my thoughts, Edric mutters, “Hard to believe how peaceful everything is.”
I nod. “The Light blesses these lands.”
But as we continue, my thoughts drift back to the visions I had in the cave.
A spirit calling for me. A battlefield where I commanded warriors I did not know. A duel with an orc who was not my enemy.
Even now, their meanings remain hidden. But I trust the Light. I trust that when the time comes, I will understand.
“What do you think our orders will be?” Edric asks after a while, breaking the silence.
I exhale, considering. “Something to test us, no doubt. Perhaps helping patrol the area, guarding shipments, or reinforcing the keep.”
Edric grins. “Or maybe we’ll get lucky and just polish armor for a month.”
I roll my eyes. “If that’s the case, I’m going back to Stratholme.”
15
We share a laugh, and for a while, the journey feels easy, comfortable. But beneath the surface, I know that this is just the beginning.
Something in my gut tells me that our true trials are still ahead.
The road has been long, but as we crest the final hill, Hearthglen comes into view, and my breath catches in my throat.
The fortress town of the Silver Hand is nothing like Stratholme. There are no grand canals, no bustling markets, no idle citizens strolling the streets. This is a warrior’s city, a paladin’s city.
The tall stone walls rise like a bulwark of faith, standing strong against the world. The banner of the Silver Hand, emblazoned with the symbol of the Light, flutters proudly atop the highest tower. Inside the walls, everything is purpose-driven—every man and woman here is either training, resting, or preparing for duty.
As we approach the gates, I see squires polishing armor, knights drilling formations, priests tending to the wounded, and blacksmiths hammering away at fresh suits of plate. Everywhere I look, there is movement, discipline, and focus.
“This is different,” I think. Stratholme was a city with paladins. But Hearthglen is a city of paladins.
Edric lets out a low whistle. “By the Light…”
This is what a stronghold of the Silver Hand looks like.
As we ride through the gates, we are immediately noticed.
A group of seasoned paladins, resting near a training ring, glance up from their meals and smirk as we dismount. One of them—a broad-shouldered man with graying hair— grins and calls out.
“Look at these fresh-faced whelps! Stratholme finally ran out of priests, so they sent us choir boys instead?”
Laughter erupts from the group, and another shakes his head. “Hope you like the cold, rookies! Because Uther doesn’t care where you’re from—only if you can hold a hammer!”
I straighten my posture, not wanting to give them the satisfaction of looking uneasy. Edric just chuckles under his breath. “Great. We haven’t even unpacked, and we’re already ‘rookies.’”
I smirk. “Better than ‘choir boys.’”
As we continue deeper into the courtyard, something catches my eye—a gathering of paladins near one of the larger sparring circles. The air is thick with the clash of steel on steel, the grunts of exertion, and the bark of commands.
At first, I assume it’s just another training session. But then, I see him.
Prince Arthas.
And he is fighting three paladins at once.
16
My steps slow, my breath stilling as I watch.
The prince is a blur of movement, his warhammer sweeping in precise arcs, each strike meeting its mark or forcing his opponents to retreat. His golden hair is damp with sweat, but his expression is focused, unshaken.
One of the paladins feints, trying to catch him off guard, but Arthas reacts instantly— sidestepping and bringing his hammer down in a swift, controlled blow. The opponent barely manages to block before being driven back.
He isn’t just holding his own. He is dominating.
His command of the Light is as strong as his blade, and with every strike, I feel the raw power radiating from him.
Edric exhales beside me. We don’t speak, but we don’t need to. We both think the same thing.
I want to be like him one day.
But the “show” ends as soon as another figure approaches.
The crowd of paladins shifts as Uther the Lightbringer himself strides toward the ring, f lanked by a group of senior knights.
His presence is undeniable. His gleaming golden armor, the lion’s mane of silver hair, the hammer at his hip—everything about him exudes leadership, wisdom, and strength. The paladins immediately step aside as he arrives, their backs straightening.
Arthas halts his sparring, stepping back and placing a fist over his heart in salute.
“So, you’re the new recruits from Stratholme.”
The voice is deep, measured, commanding.
Uther’s gaze moves over us, his blue eyes weighing, judging. His mere presence makes me want to stand taller, to be better.
“Welcome to Hearthglen.”
He doesn’t linger. He doesn’t need to. With a simple nod, he turns and strides off, his fellow knights falling into step behind him.
I exhale only when he’s gone.
Uther the Lightbringer just acknowledged us.
As Uther departs, two of the paladins who had followed him remain behind. They approach us, offering polite but firm nods.
One is a stocky, bald knight with a thick beard and a scar across his nose. The other is tall, lean, and sharp-eyed, with short brown hair and a weathered expression.
The bearded one speaks first, his voice rough but not unkind.
17
“I am Sir Aldric Belmont. This is Sir Roderic Vaughn. We’ll be your overseers while you’re stationed in Hearthglen.”
The taller paladin, Roderic Vaughn, folds his arms. “Your first lesson? Get some rest. You’ll need it.”
Aldric grins. “You’ll be joining a patrol at first light. We ride to and from Andorhal. Let’s see if you Stratholme lads can handle real work.”
Edric smirks. “Just point us where we need to go.”
Roderic raises an eyebrow. “That’s what we like to hear. Now, come on. You need to see the grounds.”
We are led through the fortress town, taking in everything with fresh eyes.
The Barracks – Simple, sturdy wooden bunks, not nearly as grand as the quarters in Stratholme, but built for warriors, not nobles.
The Training Grounds – Wide open fields where paladins spar, practice hammer drills, and run through formation training. Some trainees wear weighted armor, pushing their limits.
The Blacksmith – The rhythmic clang of hammers on metal fills the air. The forges burn hot as smiths craft armor and weapons, their faces streaked with soot.
The Chapel – A smaller but equally reverent version of Stratholme’s cathedral, where priests offer blessings and paladins kneel in silent prayer.
The Mess Hall – Long wooden tables filled with fresh bread, roasted meats, and tankards of water and ale. Squires and knights eat together, laughing, sharing stories.
Everywhere we look, we see a fortress running like a well-oiled machine. Everyone has a purpose. Everyone has their role.
And now, we have ours.
As the sun sets over the stronghold, we finally make our way to the barracks. The day has been long, overwhelming, but invigorating.
As I lay on my bunk, staring at the wooden ceiling above, I let everything sink in.
We are no longer trainees. No longer rookies.
Tomorrow, we ride on our first patrol.
Edric, lying on the bunk beside mine, exhales. “You still awake?”
“Yeah.”
“…Think we’ll be ready?”
I don’t hesitate. “We have to be.”
Silence lingers between us, then he chuckles. “I still can’t believe we saw Arthas fight today.”
I smirk. “One day, we’ll be fighting like that.”
18
Edric snorts. “One day, maybe. Not tomorrow.”
I close my eyes, letting exhaustion take over. The Light is with us. We are ready.
Tomorrow, we begin.
The first light of dawn filters through the small windows of the barracks, casting golden streaks across the wooden beams overhead.
I am already awake.
So is Edric.
Neither of us could sleep much, though we said nothing of it. The excitement—the anxious energy of what today brings—keeps us from resting.
Today is our first real job as paladins of the Silver Hand.
I sit on my bunk, carefully running a cloth over my breastplate, polishing every inch until the silver glows in the dim morning light. Across from me, Edric sharpens his blade, his expression focused, almost serious.
For the first time since we arrived in Hearthglen, the reality of our duty settles over us.
We are no longer trainees in a courtyard. No longer youths learning the way of the Light.
Today, we step into the Eastweald as true paladins.
Once our armor is cleaned and our weapons honed, we step out of the barracks into the cool morning air, waiting for our orders. The fortress is already awake—soldiers preparing for drills, blacksmiths at their forges, priests offering morning prayers at the chapel.
Before long, Sir Aldric Belmont and Sir Roderic Vaughn, the same senior paladins from last night, approach.
“Morning, rookies.” Aldric smirks, crossing his thick arms. “Hope you got some rest, because you’re about to get a real taste of service.”
Edric grins. “We’re ready.”
Roderic nods. “You’d better be. Today, you’ll be joining separate patrols.”
I blink, glancing at Edric. Separate?
Sir Aldric turns to me. “Tune, you’ll be patrolling the roads into Andorhal from the north. Your patrol leader will be Justicar Maric Thorne—a seasoned knight of the Silver Hand. You follow his lead, and you learn from him.”
I nod, straightening. Maric Thorne.
19
Justicar Thorne approaches then—a towering man, built like a warhorse, with short dark hair streaked with gray and piercing hazel eyes that seem to see straight through me. His face is weathered from years of service, but not unkind.
“So, you’re Tune. The young paladin from Stratholme.” His voice is calm, steady, like a river that does not break under the current.
“Yes, Justicar.”
He studies me for a moment, then nods. “Good. You listen, you learn, and you fight when needed. That’s all I ask.”
Alongside Justicar Thorne, four Lordaeron soldiers stand waiting. They are not paladins. They are warriors, trained and tested, and their presence is a reminder that not all who serve the Light wield its blessings.
Each of them carries a distinct air about them:
Sergeant Willem Graves – The oldest and most experienced among them, perhaps in his late forties. His face is lined from years of battle, and a long scar runs down his cheek. He stands tall, his chainmail battered but well-kept. His steel-gray eyes measure me carefully.
Corporal Daveth Orwyn – A broad-shouldered man in his early thirties, with a thick beard and a missing tooth. He adjusts his leather bracers as he listens, his expression unreadable.
Private Halwin “Hal” Mercer – Young, probably my age or just a year or two older. He carries himself well but lacks the same confidence as the others. His armor is newer, less worn. His brown hair is unkempt, his expression eager but uncertain.
Private Elric Donahue – Thin, wiry, and quick-eyed. He carries a bow instead of a sword, his fingers tapping against the wood absentmindedly. His blond hair is pulled back, and his gaze is always watching, calculating.
They all nod toward me as introductions are made. Some with respect, others with quiet skepticism.
They have seen war. I have not.
As we gather, Justicar Thorne explains our mission.
“Andorhal is one of the most important cities in Lordaeron. Its granaries supply food to the entire kingdom. If trade routes are disrupted, villages will starve. We keep the roads safe.”
He folds his arms. “Banditry is on the rise, and where there are thieves, there are worse things. We are not here to hunt trouble—but if trouble finds us, we deal with it.”
The words weigh heavy in my mind.
This is more than a simple patrol.
This is ensuring that Lordaeron’s people—our people—can survive.
20
Aldric grins, clapping Edric on the shoulder. “But first, we eat. A man fights best with a full belly.”
We head toward the mess hall, where long wooden tables are filled with fresh bread, steaming porridge, and roasted meats.
The soldiers and paladins sit together, laughing between bites, some already teasing the new recruits again.
Sergeant Graves notices me hesitate before sitting and gestures toward an open spot. “Eat, lad. You’ll need your strength.”
I nod and take my seat, breaking apart a warm loaf of bread.
Edric, seated at another table with his patrol, meets my gaze for a moment. We exchange a brief look.
This is it.
No turning back now.
I swallow my last bite and take a deep breath.
Soon, we march.
The days turn to weeks.
For the first time since our arrival at Hearthglen, life as a paladin of the Silver Hand is… peaceful.
Patrol after patrol, we ride the roads of the Eastweald, keeping watch over villages, trade routes, and farmsteads. No bandits. No raiders. No trouble.
A part of me feels eager—impatient, even. I have trained for years, honed my skills, prepared for battle. And yet, here we are, riding through quiet roads with nothing to show for it.
But deep down, another part of me is grateful.
If this is all I ever do, if I never have to swing my blade in anger—then the Light is truly watching over us.
That peace, however, does not last forever.
It is late afternoon when we spot the caravan.
A line of wooden carts, heavy with sacks of grain, slowly creaks along the dirt road heading east toward Andorhal. The merchants guiding the wagons look anxious, gesturing and shouting at several figures near the grain.
As we ride closer, I see them clearly—six or seven ragged children, barely into their teens, pulling at the sacks, stuffing what they can into torn cloth bags.
They are thin, dirty, exhausted, their faces filled with desperation, not malice.
I feel my grip tighten on my sword, but I do not draw it.
They are not the enemy.
21
The merchants see us approaching and immediately rush forward, pointing angrily at the children.
“Paladins! Finally! Do your duty! We work hard all year, and these little rats steal from us!”
The children freeze, their eyes wide with fear. One of them—a boy, no older than thirteen—steps forward, his hands trembling as he drops the stolen grain.
“I… I’m sorry,” he stammers. “We’re just hungry.”
Justicar Maric Thorne does not react immediately. He simply dismounts from his steed and strides forward, his gaze calm, measured.
“Where are your parents?” he asks.
The boy hesitates, then lowers his head. “They died. To trolls. A long time ago.”
A girl beside him wipes her nose, stepping forward as well. “We… we’re alone. There are more of us back at our camp. We just wanted some food.”
A heavy silence falls over the patrol.
This isn’t a crime of greed. This is a crime of desperation.
I glance at the Justicar, expecting him to reprimand them. Instead, he turns to me.
“Tune.” His voice is calm, but firm. “A paladin must be empathetic—to feel the energy of those around us. Tell me, what do you sense?”
I inhale deeply, focusing not just on their words, but on the feeling in the air—the raw emotion that lingers between them.
“I feel no deception, sir,” I reply. “They are only afraid. And starving.”
Justicar Thorne nods. “Very well. Then what do you think we should do?”
I hesitate, glancing at the merchants, who glare at me expectantly, then at the children, who watch in fear.
I know that stealing is wrong. But I also know that letting our own people starve to death is unforgivable.
I take a breath. “They must be punished for stealing… but not with cruelty. We should help them find shelter, honest work—somewhere they can earn their keep and no longer need to steal to survive.”
The Justicar studies me for a moment, then turns to the children.
“If you are hungry, you ask for help. You do not steal.” His voice is gentle but unyielding. “And if you are old enough to steal, then you are old enough to work.”
The children look at each other, uncertain.
22
“We can help you find shelter,” the Justicar continues. “There are farms in need of hands—places where you will have a roof over your heads and food on your tables in exchange for honest labor.”
The boy looks up, wide-eyed. “You… you’d do that?”
The Justicar nods.
The children whisper among themselves, then, reluctantly, the boy speaks. “We can work. But… we have more friends in our camp.”
“Then we shall escort you,” the Justicar replies. “We will see for ourselves, and we will ensure you are not alone any longer.”
He reaches into his pack and pulls out a loaf of bread, handing it to the boy. “For now, take this.”
The children stare at it, then at us, as if unsure whether to trust their luck. Slowly, the boy reaches out and takes it, his hands shaking.
For the first time, I see something in his eyes that wasn’t there before.
Hope.
The road stretches before us, winding through the rolling countryside of the Eastweald, where farms once stood proud, their fields heavy with grain. But as we pass each one, a grim pattern emerges.
The farms are abandoned.
Houses stand silent, doors left ajar, shutters broken, tools scattered in the dirt. Chickens and cattle roam untended, the marks of their hooves and paws now the only signs of life.
Justicar Thorne reins in his horse, scanning the empty homesteads.
“What happened here?” his voice is calm, but there is a weight behind it.
The older boy, the one who first spoke to us at the caravan, shifts uncomfortably. He keeps his gaze forward.
“Trolls,” he says after a pause. “A raiding party. They killed our parents.”
I glance at him, but before I can say anything, the girl—the one who had spoken up earlier—shakes her head fiercely.
“No,” she says. “They didn’t kill them. The trolls took them.”
A cold knot forms in my stomach. I turn to the Justicar, hoping he will contradict her. Hoping there is another explanation.
But when I meet his gaze, there is no denial. No comfort. Only the heavy truth of a man who has seen this before.
“For blood sacrifices,” Justicar Thorne says quietly.
The words settle like a stone in my chest.
23
I look back at the older boy—his jaw clenches, his hands tighten into fists, but he says nothing. He knows. He has known all along. But still, he had tried to spare the younger ones from that horror.
How does someone so young already carry so much weight?
We ride on in silence after that.
When we reach the camp, it is smaller than I expected—no more than a dozen makeshift tents hidden in the forest, tucked between trees and out of sight. It is clear these children have survived only through caution and desperation.
The moment we arrive, the others emerge, wide-eyed and wary. They are thin, dirt streaked, dressed in tattered clothes, but their eyes hold something that keeps them standing.
Determination.
Some of the younger ones hide behind their older siblings, staring at us with both awe and fear.
“Who are they?” one of the children whispers.
The boy from before—their leader, for lack of a better term—steps forward.
“Paladins,” he says simply. “They’re here to help.”
The children glance at one another, still uncertain. The idea of help is as foreign to them as a warm hearth and a full meal.
I look around. Many of them are too young to work. Even the older ones are barely more than thirteen or fourteen.
The boy steps closer to the Justicar, his face set with quiet resolve.
“If you find places for all of us, the older ones will work. We’ll work hard, sir. We’ll protect the younger ones. We’ve been taking care of each other for months… we just need food.”
He says it like a bargain—an exchange of services. He is not asking for charity. He is offering labor, willing to do whatever it takes to ensure his people—his family— survive.
I feel my throat tighten.
I turn to Justicar Thorne, my voice steady.
“We should find work for the older ones, sir. And take the younger children to Andorhal. There, they will have a future.”
The Justicar watches me for a moment, then nods.
“By the Light, it shall be done.”
As the sun begins to set, we make camp among the children, sharing what little rations we carry. The soldiers keep a watchful eye on the surroundings, but tonight, there 24
is no battle, no bloodshed—only the quiet rustling of the trees and the distant sound of owls.
As I sit by the fire, staring into the flames, my thoughts are heavy.
This is the reality of the Eastweald. There are so many farms, so many families living in secluded places, far from patrol routes, far from aid. We cannot protect every inch of Lordaeron. And the trolls… they know this.
A harsh truth, one that I do not know how to change.
But at least tonight, we have done right by these children.
Tomorrow, we will find them homes, find them shelter. The older ones will find work, and the younger ones will be given a chance for a future.
It is not a perfect victory, but it is something.
For tonight, that will have to be enough.
By sunrise, we set out.
With Justicar Thorne leading the way, we travel from farm to farm, speaking with the elder farmers—the ones who have land, shelter, and years of wisdom.
Most of them agree to take the children in. Not out of pity, but because they understand hardship, they understand loss. Many of them have already lost sons, daughters, or grandchildren to war, disease, or the dangers of the wilds.
“A pair of helping hands is never unwelcome,” an old farmer tells me as he kneels to meet the gaze of two young boys. “You work hard, you’ll eat well. That’s the way of things.”
One by one, the children find homes.
We make sure siblings stay together—a small but important mercy. I see relief in their eyes, but also fear. They are leaving behind the only life they have known.
But they will not sleep hungry. They will not fear the next sunrise. That is enough.
By late afternoon, only the youngest remain—the ones too small to work a farm, the ones who need true caretakers. They will go to Andorhal.
It feels like a victory. A rare, undeniable victory.
But as we ride toward Andorhal, I cannot shake the feeling that it is only temporary.
If we do not find the trolls… if we do not stop them… then more children will suffer. More homes will burn. And more farms will stand empty.
Night has fallen by the time we reach Andorhal.
The town is alive with activity—merchants unloading shipments of grain, guards patrolling the streets, and blacksmiths finishing their work for the day.
25
But it is quieter than Stratholme, smaller, simpler. A town built around its granaries, its purpose clear: Andorhal feeds Lordaeron.
As we dismount, the children are taken to the town’s chapel, where the priests and caretakers will find homes for them.
I feel relief.
For once, I feel like we made a difference.
We head to the inn, where a hot meal awaits us. The scent of roasted meat, fresh bread, and spiced cider fills the air. It is a comfort I did not realize I needed.
We sit at a long wooden table, the weariness of the road settling into our bones. The soldiers drink and laugh, speaking of lighter things for the first time in days.
Then, Justicar Thorne turns to me.
“We’ll have a few days’ break soon, Tune. What do you plan to do with your free time?”
I pause, setting my tankard down. The answer comes easily.
“Sir, I would like to spend my free time searching for these troll raids.”
The laughter at the table dies down slightly. The soldiers exchange glances.
The Justicar sighs, shaking his head. “Easy there, paladin. The trolls are dangerous enemies, and we are just a small patrol. To take a raiding party head-on, we need a bigger force.”
“But, sir,” I press, “there has to be something we can do.”
Thorne watches me carefully. He takes a slow sip of his drink, then sets it down.
“I’ll tell you what, Tune,” he says. “In a few days, before we head back to Hearthglen, we’ll search for any trace of the trolls. But we do not engage. If we find signs of them, we report back to Uther. If he deems it necessary, he will gather a stronger force to deal with them.”
“How does that sound?”
I nod. “Sounds good, sir. Thank you.”
I hesitate, then add: “And sir… don’t think I’m eager for battle. It’s just… when I think of those kids, I can’t stop wondering how many more are out there.”
The Justicar’s expression softens.
“I know, Tune.” He places a hand on my shoulder, his grip firm. “We will do what we can.”
“But tonight, we rest.”
I nod, letting out a slow breath. He is right.
Tomorrow, the fight continues.
The next few days pass in quiet frustration.
26
Despite our best efforts, we find no trace of the trolls. No tracks, no burned-out camps, no signs of recent movement. It’s as if they have vanished into the deep woods, waiting.
But they are out there. I know they are.
By the time we return to Hearthglen, I feel the exhaustion in my bones. Even a paladin needs rest, and our patrol has earned it.
But the thought lingers in my mind—the orphans, the abandoned farms, the silent threat that still looms over the Eastweald.
I hope they will do something about it.
They must.
Upon our return, Justicar Thorne immediately heads to report our findings to the senior paladins. He speaks to them for some time, discussing what we saw, what we didn’t see, and what should be done next.
That evening, after dinner, Sir Aldric Belmont—the bald, battle-worn paladin who had been among the first to greet us in Hearthglen—comes to find us.
He walks into the barracks, hands behind his back, his usual gruff expression in place.
“You lads did good,” he says simply. “Those kids would have been lost without you.”
I stand, nodding. “Thank you, sir.”
He looks me over, then the others.
“I want you to know we take the troll threat seriously. After hearing Justicar Thorne’s report, we’ve decided to send a tracker—someone skilled in the wilds, someone who knows how to find a trail where most men would miss it.”
My heart beats faster.
This is our chance. If we can find their trail, we can learn where the trolls are hiding, where they will strike next.
I hesitate for only a moment before speaking.
“Sir,” I ask, “this tracker… could I go with him?”
Sir Aldric raises an eyebrow. “Eager for a fight, are we?”
I shake my head. “No, sir. I just… I want to help. And I want to learn. Tracking skills could be useful one day, if he doesn’t mind having me around.”
The senior paladin chuckles, crossing his arms. “Well, you have a few days off, so I don’t see a problem with it.”
Then he gives me a knowing look.
27
“But you’ll have to convince him first. Trackers don’t like company. They prefer to work alone.”
I nod. “Understood, sir.”
Sir Aldric claps a heavy hand on my shoulder. “Good. Just don’t do anything stupid, kid.”
“No, sir.”
I say it with confidence, but deep down, I know… if I convince this tracker to take me, I am stepping into a world I do not yet understand.
The way of the hunter is different from the way of the warrior.
And I am about to learn why.
Dawn has barely broken when I step into the mess hall.
The air is cool and crisp, Hearthglen still quiet, save for the distant ringing of the blacksmith’s hammer and the low murmur of early risers gathering for breakfast.
Inside, the hall is mostly empty, save for a few tired soldiers finishing their meals before heading to their morning drills.
And at one of the long wooden tables, sitting alone, is the one I’m looking for.
A dwarf.
He is exactly as I expected—and nothing like I expected.
His thick, red beard is streaked with gray, tangled and wild, beads woven into the braids along his chin. His weathered face is lined with years of experience, his eyes a sharp storm-blue, scanning everything around him with the quiet focus of a hunter.
His armor is not plate, nor chainmail, but thick leather, reinforced in places with patches of fur and worn steel buckles. Across his back, a long-barreled rifle rests in a sturdy leather sling, and at his belt, I see a hunting knife with a carved bone handle.
Even seated, he looks dangerous.
He tears into his meal with no ceremony, chewing on thick boar meat and fresh bread, washing it down with a tankard of what I assume is ale, despite the hour.
I take a breath, then approach.
He doesn’t look up as I step beside the table.
“Are you Dain Firebeard?”
The dwarf keeps chewing for a moment before finally flicking his gaze up to me.
“Aye. Who’s askin’?”
“Tune, of the Silver Hand.”
“A paladin, eh?” He snorts, leaning back. “Yer kind ain’t usually keen on sneakin’ about the woods.”
I nod. “No, sir. That’s why I’d like to learn.”
28
Dain watches me carefully now, setting his tankard down. “Learn what, exactly?”
“Tracking. Reading the land. Finding signs of movement. You’ve been sent to track the trolls, and I’d like to come with you.”
He lets out a low, gruff chuckle, shaking his head. “And why would I let some greenhorn in clanky armor stomp along my trail, scarin’ off the tracks before I can even find ‘em?”
I expected resistance. He’s testing me.
So I stand my ground.
“I won’t get in your way,” I say, keeping my voice steady. “I only want to observe. To learn. I won’t slow you down.”
Dain squints at me, scratching his beard. “You ever track anything before, lad?”
“Not yet.”
“Ever gone huntin’? Even a rabbit?”
“No, sir.”
He clicks his tongue, shaking his head. “Light preserve me, ye don’t even know how to follow droppings, do ye?”
I hold my breath, keeping my posture straight. “No, sir.”
Dain leans forward, folding his arms. “Then why do ye want to come? What’s in it for ye?”
I exhale, thinking before I answer.
“Because I want to do more than react. We patrol, we wait for trouble to find us, and by the time we do, it’s too late.” “The trolls are out there. More farms will burn, more families will suffer, unless we stop them. But we can’t stop them if we can’t find them.”
Dain watches me carefully, expression unreadable.
“And if ye do find them, lad?”
“Then we report back. We don’t engage, not alone. Justicar Thorne made that clear. But if we find signs—if we know where they’re hiding—then Uther will send a force to deal with them properly.”
For the first time, Dain Firebeard actually looks impressed.
He leans back, taking another sip of ale before muttering, “Well, ye ain’t a fool, at least.”
The dwarf exhales through his nose, shaking his head.
“I don’t work with people. I don’t like talkin’. I don’t like explainin’ things. I sure as hell don’t like babysittin’ green paladins.”
“I understand.”
29
“Ye’ll slow me down.”
“I won’t.”
“Ye’ll scare off the tracks.”
“Not if I listen and do as I’m told.”
Dain huffs, looking at me again, this time as if weighing something in his mind.
Then he grunts, shoving the last of his meal into his mouth and standing up.
“Fine. But listen close, lad—ye keep quiet, ye keep yer eyes open, and ye do exactly as I say. Ye make noise, ye step where ye shouldn’t, or ye think ye know better than me, I’ll send ye back to Hearthglen on yer arse. Got it?”
I nod, standing straight. “Understood, sir.”
Dain nods, picking up his rifle and slinging it over his shoulder.
“Then let’s go.”
As we step out of the mess hall, I hear something—a deep, heavy huffing sound.
Then I see it.
A bear.
A massive, thick-furred beast, waiting near the stables, watching us with small black eyes. Its coat is a rich brown, its shoulders broad and powerful.
I stop dead in my tracks, my hand instinctively reaching for my sword.
“What is that?”
Dain grins, patting the bear’s side as he passes.
“That, lad, is Hrokk.”
The bear lets out a low, rumbling growl. My fingers tighten around my sword’s hilt.
Dain smirks. “Don’t worry. He’s friendly.”
I exhale in relief.
“As long as ye stay on my good side.”
I freeze. The bear grunts, stepping closer, sniffing at me with curiosity.
Dain chuckles. “Come on, then. We’ve got trolls to find.”
The morning sun hangs low in the sky as we ride out of Hearthglen, following the same road my patrol once traveled when we found the orphaned children.
It feels different now.
30
No unit of soldiers riding beside me. No Justicar Thorne leading the way. Just me, a grizzled dwarven tracker, and a massive brown bear trotting along beside us.
I’ve trained for years with knights and warriors. But this? This is different.
Dain Firebeard rides slightly ahead of me, his posture relaxed, but his eyes never still. He sees things I don’t—every broken branch, every shift in the dirt, every sound carried by the wind.
For a while, we ride in companionable silence, but eventually, he speaks.
“So, lad,” Dain says without looking back. “What’s yer story?”
I glance at him. “What do you mean?”
He snorts. “Come on now, I know why I’m out here. Tracking beasts, huntin’ things, it’s what I do. But you? A fresh paladin, just got yer boots broken in, an’ already volunteering for the hard work. That’s unusual. So tell me—why?”
I think for a moment before answering.
“I was born in Stratholme. My father served in the army—fought in the Second War. I promised him I’d become a paladin before he passed.”
Dain nods, stroking his beard. “Aye. A warrior’s son. That explains part o’ it.”
He pauses, then throws another question at me.
“An’ what do you think it means? Bein’ a paladin?”
I straighten in the saddle. “To serve. To protect the innocent. To bring justice to those who would harm others.”
Dain chuckles. “Textbook answer.”
I frown slightly. “It’s the truth.”
“Aye, maybe. But tell me, lad—if the day comes when the Light don’t give ye answers… what will ye do then?”
I don’t have an immediate answer.
Dain glances back, giving me a knowing look before letting the question hang.
“Somethin’ to think about.”
By mid-morning, we reach the first of the abandoned farms.
The place is exactly as I remember it—empty houses, broken doors swaying in the wind, fields overgrown and untended. It should have been a place full of life. Instead, it is nothing.
Dain dismounts, landing lightly despite his heavy frame. I follow his lead.
The moment his boots touch the ground, his entire demeanor changes.
He is no longer a traveling dwarf. He is a hunter now.
31
I remain silent, keeping close, watching carefully as he moves through the area, reading the land like a book.
Dain crouches near a patch of disturbed earth, running his fingers over it. He sniffs the air lightly, listening, feeling.
Hrokk, his massive bear, sniffs the ground beside him, grunting softly.
“They were here, alright,” Dain mutters. “But not recently.”
I kneel beside him. “How long ago?”
He runs a hand through his beard, considering.
“Months, maybe. No fresh signs, nothin’ recent.”
“So they’re long gone.”
He shakes his head. “Not necessarily. Tracks this old don’t tell us where they are, but they tell us where they were going.”
He stands, dusting off his hands, then nods toward the tree line.
“If they came through here, I’d wager they went into the woods. That’s where we go next.”
Once we enter the dense tree line, everything changes.
Silence is paramount now.
Dain moves like a shadow, stepping carefully, avoiding loose twigs, dry leaves, anything that might make a sound.
I do my best to follow, but it is harder than it looks.
A paladin is trained to march, to fight, to be seen. But a hunter? A hunter is trained to listen, to wait, to remain unseen.
The forest is thick and endless, the light dim beneath the canopy of leaves. We move slowly, searching for any sign of recent passage.
Hours pass.
At times, Dain stops abruptly, kneeling to inspect a footprint, a broken branch, a cluster of disturbed leaves.
Sometimes, I see nothing at all.
But he sees everything.
I say nothing. I only watch, learn, and follow.
The sun begins to dip behind the hills.
Dain finally exhales, rubbing his neck.
“No fresh signs today. We camp here. Continue at first light.”
I nod, relieved for the chance to rest.
32
We find a small clearing, just off a game trail. It is secluded enough to keep a low fire, though Dain insists on keeping it small. “Trolls ain’t the only things out in these woods,” he warns.
“You take first watch, lad. Keep yer ears open. If ye hear anything unnatural—wake me. No hesitation.”
I nod, gripping my sword as I settle in by the fire.
Dain pulls his cloak over himself and leans against Hrokk, the great bear grumbling softly before curling beside him like a massive, living shield.
Soon, the only sounds are the distant hoots of owls, the whisper of leaves in the wind.
As I sit there, staring into the dark woods, I know:
Tomorrow, we will find something. One way or another.
The first light of dawn filters through the dense canopy of the Eastweald, casting long golden streaks across the forest floor. The world is silent, save for the rustling of leaves and the distant calls of waking birds.
Dain Firebeard moves ahead, eyes sharp, steps light. I follow, stepping exactly where he steps, making no sound.
We have been tracking the faintest of signs—disturbed soil, snapped branches, a shift in the wind. I would have missed all of it, but Dain sees it clear as day.
Then, at midday, we find it.
A clearing.
And at its center—a nightmare.
I freeze the moment we step into the clearing.
A massive stone altar, slick with dried blood, stands at the center. The remains of charred wood and burnt cloth surround it, suggesting a fire had been lit here recently.
But the worst part is the bones.
Skulls, ribs, femurs—all scattered across the ground, picked clean by carrion birds. Some human. Some animal.
I force myself to swallow the bile rising in my throat.
Dain steps forward, calm as ever, running a hand across the engraved symbols on the altar. He mutters something in Dwarvish under his breath.
“They been here,” he says simply.
I exhale slowly, trying to steady my breathing. I knew trolls practiced dark rituals— but seeing it in person is different.
Dain crouches near a set of footprints leading away from the site.
33
“They moved. Not too long ago. Maybe when they ran out o’ corpses.”
I shudder at the words but say nothing.
How many lives were taken here? How many people suffered before the end?
Dain stands, brushing dirt from his hands.
“Come on, lad. We keep following their steps.”
And so, we move on.
As the hours pass, the forest feels different.
At first, it’s subtle. A shift in the air. The way the wind no longer moves the branches. The way the birds have stopped singing.
The deeper we go, the heavier it becomes.
Something is wrong.
I feel it, deep in my chest, a growing unease, a sense of being watched.
But I say nothing.
Dain knows better. He would tell me if something was truly wrong.
So I stay silent, gripping the reins of my horse tighter, my knuckles white.
By the time night falls, the feeling is nearly unbearable.
Then, Dain suddenly stops.
Dain lifts a closed fist—a silent signal to halt.
I immediately obey, stopping beside him as he scans the darkness ahead.
Then, in a low whisper, he says:
“They’re close.”
He unslings his rifle, checking the powder, his expression unreadable. Then, he turns to me.
“Stay here with the horse and my ram.”
I blink. “What?”
“I move alone now. Be back soon.”
I hesitate. I want to protest—to insist that I go with him. But I don’t.
He knows what he’s doing.
So, I nod. “Understood.”
Dain gives a small grunt of approval, then vanishes into the shadows of the trees, moving like a ghost.
Time crawls.
34
The only sounds are the soft breaths of my horse and the low huffing of Hrokk, who sits beside me like a living wall of muscle and fur.
I watch the trees, gripping the hilt of my sword—not out of fear, but because I don’t know what else to do with my hands.
What did Dain find? How many trolls are there? What are they planning?
Minutes feel like hours.
Then—a rustling.
Dain reappears, his movements quick and urgent. He gestures for silence.
I tense.
Dain stops beside me, eyes sharp, voice low.
“The troll raiding party is ahead. Stay silent.”
A chill runs down my spine.
“What now?” I whisper.
He glances over his shoulder, scanning the woods.
“We move back to Hearthglen and report. Then it’ll be Uther’s call.”
I hesitate. A part of me burns with curiosity.
What did he see? What were they doing? How many of them?
But I don’t ask.
I simply nod. “Understood.”
We move slowly at first, retreating carefully, making no sound.
Only when we are far enough away do we mount our steeds.
Then, without a word, we ride.
Through the dark woods, through the silent fields, past the abandoned farms. We do not stop. We do not look back.
We ride through the night, all the way to Hearthglen.
Because now we know where the enemy is. And soon, Lordaeron will answer.
The gates of Hearthglen come into view just as the first light of morning begins to touch the treetops.
We don’t slow down.
35
Dain says nothing, his expression unreadable as he urges his ram forward, his pace urgent. The moment we ride through the gates, he dismounts in one swift motion and heads straight for the keep.
Straight to Uther.
I pull my horse to a stop, watching him go. He doesn’t look back.
I exhale, feeling the weight settle in my chest. It’s out of my hands now.
Now we wait.
The mess hall is already lively, filled with soldiers and knights taking their breakfast, preparing for another day of drills and patrols.
But as I step inside, I feel distant.
I was out there all night. I saw what the trolls had done. I saw the bones.
The warm scent of fresh bread and roasted meat does little to stir my appetite, but I force myself to eat.
There will be a battle soon. I need my strength.
Back in the barracks, I find Justicar Maric Thorne waiting, his arms crossed as he leans against a wooden post.
He studies me for a moment before speaking.
“You found the trolls, didn’t you?”
I look up, meeting his gaze.
“Yes, sir.”
His sharp eyes narrow slightly. “I can see it in your face—you saw something.”
I nod slowly, taking a breath.
“We found them. But before that, we found… an altar.”
Thorne remains silent, waiting.
I clench my fists. “It was full of bones. Scattered remains everywhere. Maybe the parents of those kids. Maybe others.”
My voice tightens, the horror still fresh.
“It was horrible, sir.”
For the first time, the Justicar’s usual hardened expression softens. He places a firm hand on my shoulder.
“At least the children are safe now.”
His words are meant to comfort me, but I can only nod.
Safe. But for how long?
36
A few hours pass.
Then, the bells of Hearthglen ring, a deep and commanding sound.
A summons.
All knights, paladins, and soldiers are called to gather at the center of Hearthglen.
Uther is ready to give his judgment.
The courtyard is filled with warriors—paladins in gleaming plate, foot soldiers gripping spears, knights adjusting their armor.
At the center, standing atop the stone steps of the keep, is Uther the Lightbringer himself.
He stands tall and unwavering, his golden armor polished to a gleam, his great hammer resting in his grasp.
The murmurs die down as his voice booms across the courtyard.
“We have received troubling news.”
“A troll raiding party, deep in the Eastweald. They have burned farms, taken captives, and defiled the land with dark rituals.”
A hush falls over the gathered warriors.
“This ends now.”
His blue eyes sweep over the assembled knights.
“We will not allow our people to live in fear. We will not allow the innocent to suffer. The Light calls upon us to act—and act we shall.”
“We march at dusk. And we will not return until this threat is ended.”
The soldiers slam their fists to their chests, a roar of “For the Light!” echoing through the courtyard.
A force is being assembled. A strong one.
And I will be part of it.
Uther begins assigning roles, selecting the finest warriors for the strike force.
At the front, leading the attack, will be:
Sir Aldric Belmont – The bald, battle-worn senior paladin, his hammer heavy with years of experience. Three Justicars – Veteran paladins, each leading smaller groups in the battle. Maric Thorne is among them. A Priest of the Light – A healer, ensuring wounded soldiers can be brought back from the brink. Two High Elf Mages – Cloaked in elegant blue and gold robes, masters of arcane fire and frost. 37
Twenty Lordaeron Soldiers – The bulk of the force, trained footmen wielding swords and spears. Dain Firebeard – The tracker, scout, and sharpshooter, rifle in hand.
And among them, I am called.
“Tune, you and Justicar Thorne will ride with us.”
I step forward without hesitation, placing a fist over my chest.
“Yes, sir.”
Dain Firebeard snorts from nearby. “Hah. Looks like ye gettin’ more than a lesson in trackin’, lad.”
I glance at him. “Will you be joining us?”
He grins, slinging his rifle over his shoulder.
“Wouldn’t miss it.”
The afternoon is spent preparing weapons, armor, and supplies.
Paladins kneel in the chapel for final prayers, soldiers check their blade edges, and battle strategies are discussed.
I take a moment to check my own gear—my sword, my armor, my faith.
This will be my first real battle. No simple patrol. No watching from the sidelines. This is war.
And as the sun begins to set behind the hills, the strike force mounts up.
We ride into the Eastweald at dusk.
We ride through the cold night, our cloaks pulled tight, our eyes fixed on the road ahead. The only sounds are the steady rhythm of hooves on dirt and the occasional clink of armor shifting with movement.
No one speaks much.
Everyone knows the threat is serious.
This isn’t a routine patrol. This isn’t just another raid to break up some bandits. This is war.
But as the night stretches on, a thought gnaws at me.
Why was I chosen?
There were other paladins—more experienced, stronger, wiser.
And yet, I am here.
I ride closer to Justicar Thorne, my voice low.
“Sir, it’s an honor to be chosen for this strike force, but… why me?”
He glances at me, his expression unreadable.
38
“There were other paladins. More experienced ones. Why me?”
For a moment, he says nothing.
Then, with a calm certainty, he answers.
“I spoke with Uther about you.”
I tense slightly.
“You helped track the trolls. You wanted to make a difference. We decided to grant you the honor of finding justice—for the kids we found, for any future victims.”
I swallow, feeling the weight of his words.
“I know you wanted in, so here you are.”
I nod, straightening in my saddle.
“Thank you, sir. I won’t let you down.”
“I know you won’t.”
He doesn’t say anything else. He doesn’t need to.
We ride on in silence, the only sound the wind rustling through the Eastweald.
As we draw closer, I catch glimpses of the two high elf mages riding near the center of the formation.
Elves.
They look different from us, their movements graceful, their armor ornate, their f lowing blue and gold robes shifting like water in the wind.
I have seen magic before, of course. Priests channel the Light. Paladins radiate its power.
But magecraft is something else entirely.
I must admit—I am curious to see them in action. Their spells are said to be as deadly as they are beautiful.
The darkness deepens as we enter the dense forest, our pace slowing to a careful march.
The air is thicker here, the weight of the night pressing down on us.
Ahead, Dain Firebeard takes the lead once more, his rifle resting in his grip, his eyes scanning every shadow.
We move carefully, every step deliberate.
Then, suddenly, he raises a fist.
“Stop.”
Everyone halts instantly.
The air is silent. No wind. No birds.
39
Dain glances over his shoulder, speaking in a low, firm voice.
“We’re close enough. Dismount.”
We move quickly, but quietly, securing our mounts behind the tree line.
Sir Aldric Belmont—the bald senior paladin leading the strike—steps forward with Dain. Together, they advance deeper, moving ahead to scout the area.
We wait.
The forest feels different now. Heavier.
A minute passes. Then another.
When they return, Sir Aldric’s face is set like iron.
“It’s as we expected. The trolls are gathered in a clearing not far from here. They have numbers, but so do we. This ends tonight.”
He begins assigning positions, his voice calm, commanding, absolute.
Two soldiers will remain behind to guard the mounts. The paladins, led by Aldric and the Justicars, will spread out, attacking from multiple angles. One high elf mage will attack from the front, the other from the rear. The foot soldiers will break into small units, cutting off any escape.
I listen carefully, waiting for my orders.
Then, Sir Aldric looks at me.
“And you, Tune… you will stay with the priest.”
I blink. “Sir?”
His eyes lock onto mine.
“You are still young. You have strength, but battle is not just about strength. You will stay with the priest and protect him if needed. Understood?”
I hesitate for only a second before nodding. “Yes, sir.”
It’s not what I wanted, but I do not question his command.
The priest is important. If the wounded fall, he must be there to bring them back.
And I will make sure he survives.
Slowly, carefully, we begin to move into position.
The paladins fan out, the soldiers split into their squads, the mages prepare their incantations.
I keep close to the priest, a man in simple white robes, clutching a staff engraved with holy symbols. His face is calm, but his eyes are heavy with the knowledge of what is to come.
40
Patience. Silence. Discipline.
I tighten my grip on my sword, my heart pounding in my chest.
The battle is about to begin.
And when it does…
The Light help us all.
I glance at the priest beside me.
His face is calm, his grip firm on his staff. He has done this before.
I look ahead, scanning the battlefield before the fight even begins.
Dain Firebeard has disappeared into the trees.
No doubt, he’s climbing, taking position, his rifle trained on the battlefield, ready to strike.
We wait.
And wait.
No sounds.
Not from us. Not from the trolls.
Are they sleeping? Meditating? If so, the Light is already with us. But the anticipation… it is unbearable.
When will it start?
Then, suddenly—it does.
The attack begins in a perfect storm of divine fury and disciplined steel.
Paladins charge from all sides, hammers and swords glowing with radiant power, striking down any troll that tries to stand. The foot soldiers move in precision, cutting off escape routes, striking down any who try to run. The elven mages, standing apart, their hands alight with crackling power, unleash devastation.
The elves do not waste their power on lesser trolls.
No—their spells are aimed at two figures standing near the central altar.
Trolls clad in dark robes, their skin painted with strange, glowing markings.
Shadow priests.
One lifts a staff of bone, chanting in a guttural, unnatural voice. The other raises a hand, his fingers curling, black magic forming in his palm.
But before the spell can be unleashed—
41
A storm of ice erupts from one mage’s hands, freezing the shadow priest in place. The second mage raises both arms—lightning arcs between them before crashing down in a furious explosion.
The air shakes with the force of the spell. The dark priests scream.
But the battle continues.
A troll duelist, faster than the others, lunges at a Justicar.
With a fluid, precise movement, the Justicar sidesteps, deflects the strike, and brings his hammer down in a single motion—breaking the troll’s spine with a crack.
Another troll hurls a spear at a soldier, aiming to break through the line.
The soldier raises his shield—the spear shatters against steel, and before the troll can retreat, three more blades cut him down.
Every troll who tries to run is struck down.
Every warrior moves with precision.
This is not a skirmish.
This is not a disorganized battle.
This is a strike force that has done this before.
And they are perfect.
I barely have time to take it all in when—
Two trolls emerge from the darkness—charging straight for me and the priest.
My heartbeat quickens. But beside me, the priest does not move.
Not an inch.
Not even a flicker of fear in his expression.
He stands, calm and firm.
He trusts me. He believes I will protect him.
And so I will.
A shot rings through the trees.
One troll jerks violently, blood spraying from his skull as he collapses.
I look up—Dain Firebeard is perched high, rifle smoking, already shifting for his next shot.
But the second troll doesn’t stop.
He keeps charging—straight at me.
I step forward, raising my left hand.
42
“Be judged by the Light.”
A flash of holy energy erupts around the troll’s throat—he chokes, screaming in pain, clawing at his own burning flesh.
But he does not fall.
He is strong. He will not go down easily.
He keeps coming.
Then I will meet him head-on.
I raise my blade, stepping in front of the priest.
Steel meets flesh.
My blade sinks deep into the troll’s chest. He roars, the force of his charge nearly knocking me back.
He refuses to die.
He snarls, raising his massive arms, trying to crush me, but I hold my ground.
I do not back down. I will not back down.
The troll’s breath grows ragged.
His muscles tremble.
His weight shifts.
His strength leaves him.
And finally—he collapses, his blood staining my armor, my blade still buried in his chest.
I step back, pulling my sword free, my breath heavy.
The priest has not moved.
Not once.
The fight continues.
I lose track of how long it lasts.
Minutes? Hours?
All I know is that when the final troll falls, a new sound fills the air.
Silence.
No war cries. No spells crackling. No blades clashing.
Just silence.
43
I tighten my grip on my bloodied sword, feeling my chest rise and fall.
It is done.
The trolls are dead.
The battle is over.
And yet, as we stand around their altar, there is no celebration.
There is no cheering, no boasting, no calls of victory.
Only the heavy silence of warriors who did what had to be done.
The priest moves quietly among the wounded, offering healing where needed. There aren’t many.
This strike force acted with precision. With discipline.
I was blessed to be part of it.
And I did my part.
I glance down at the troll I killed, his massive form sprawled in the dirt, his blood staining my armor.
My first kill.
I thought it would feel different.
Should I feel bad?
I don’t.
Not exactly.
He wasn’t stopping. He would have killed me. I had to do it.
I feel a weight, but not guilt.
Not guilt. Not yet.
Across from me, Justicar Thorne watches. His gaze flickers to the dead troll, then back to me.
He understands without words what is going through my mind.
He says nothing.
Because there is nothing to say.
The paladins fan out, searching the remains of the troll encampment.
They turn over crates, lift cloth coverings, open wooden cages.
And then we find them.
Bones.
Human bones.
44
The parents of those children? Other victims?
We will never know.
There are no survivors.
Just remnants of lives stolen, homes destroyed, families torn apart.
Sir Aldric Belmont kneels beside one of the scattered skulls, running a gloved hand over its surface. His expression is hard as iron.
“They won’t harm anyone else,” he says.
No one argues.
As the paladins finish their search, Dain Firebeard approaches me.
His rifle is slung over his back, his expression unreadable beneath the tangled mess of his red beard.
He stops beside me, looking down at the troll I killed.
Then he looks back at me.
“You did good, kid.”
I don’t know why, but his words mean something.
I nod, unsure what to say.
Then he adds, with a small, knowing grin:
“I’m proud of ye.”
“What now, sir?” one of the soldiers asks.
We look around—the troll corpses, the ruined altar, the scattered bones of their victims.
Sir Aldric stands tall, hammer in hand, his decision swift.
“We burn them.”
“The trolls, sir?”
“All of it,” he replies. “Their bones, their weapons, their altars—nothing of their filth will remain here.”
And so, we gather wood, break apart their crude shelters, stack the bodies high.
One of the high elf mages steps forward, raising her hands.
She whispers something in Thalassian, and then—
A spark.
45
Fire erupts from her fingers, a sudden flash of brilliant orange, igniting the pile instantly.
The flames roar into the night, smoke rising high, carrying away the last remnants of this dark place.
We stand watching, silent, until it is done.
By the time we return to our mounts, the sky is already beginning to brighten.
We have fought through the night. Now, we ride home with the dawn.
No one speaks much.
We are weary, bloodied, but victorious.
I stare ahead, the road stretching before us, my mind unsettled.
The trolls are dead. The land is safe. The mission was a success.
Then why does it feel so heavy?
As we ride, I glance at my bloodstained sword.
The priest I protected sits upright in the saddle, as calm as he was before the f ight.
Dain rides beside me, Hrokk trotting steadily at his side, unbothered by the night’s events.
And behind us, the fires of the troll camp still glow faintly against the morning sky.
I breathe in the cold air, feeling the weight of my armor, the soreness in my muscles.
And I whisper, under my breath:
“For the Light.”
And so, we ride.
Back to Hearthglen. Back home.
For now.
When we return to Hearthglen, we are granted a few days of Honor’s Rest.
It is well-earned. Our armor is battered, our swords stained with blood, our bodies sore from the battle. Yet it is not my body that troubles me most—it is my thoughts.
I spend most of the time at the chapel, kneeling in quiet prayer beneath the high stained-glass windows. The light of the morning sun pours through, casting golden rays across the stone floor.
I do not pray because my faith is shaken.
The Light was with us that night. I have no doubt of that.
46
No, I pray for something else.
Strength and wisdom. Strength to continue doing my duty. Wisdom to understand the path I walk. And to never… never let myself grow used to the horrors of battle.
There is nothing righteous about the cries of the dying.
If that day ever comes—if the screams of the fallen no longer trouble me—then I will know the Light has turned its gaze from me.
But Honor’s Rest does not last forever.
Soon, we resume our patrols, riding the roads of the Eastweald, protecting our people and our lands.
The troll threat seems to have faded, at least for now. No fires burn on the horizon. No survivors speak of raiding parties.
But now there is a new concern.
Orcs.
Whispers grow of orcs escaping from their internment camps, entire bands of them vanishing into the wilds.
Every traveling merchant we encounter brings more news.
“The camps can’t hold them anymore.” “There was a raid south of Andorhal.” “They killed a whole garrison in Hillsbrad.”
We hear stories of freed orcs, led by someone they call Thrall.
No one knows if the rumors are true, but I feel it.
It is only a matter of time before we face some of them ourselves.
When I am given another Honor’s Rest, I spend most of my time studying.
If we are to face new threats, then I must understand them.
I visit the archives of Hearthglen, speaking with priests, scholars, and scribes. They show me books filled with worn pages, ancient texts chronicling the Second War, the wars before that, and records of the trolls and orcs.
Troll society is complicated, far more than I expected. Not all trolls are bloodthirsty raiders, though their history is filled with violence.
Some trolls live in isolated clans, others in great empires, and some practice druidic and shamanistic traditions.
I learn of shadow priests, of their belief in Loa spirits, powerful beings that guide their people and shape their magic.
47
And I learn that trolls can heal, though they do not use the Holy Light. Instead, they draw upon spiritual energies, invoking ancient Loa blessings.
I also study the orcs, seeking to understand their culture and magic.
They, too, are not the monsters many believe them to be. Once, they lived as clan based warriors, led by shamans—not as conquerors, but as spiritual caretakers of their lands.
Their shamans wield magic connected to the natural world—the elements themselves. They heal the wounded, call upon the strength of stone and storms, and speak with the spirits of the dead.
They do not follow the Light, but their magic is real. And powerful.
Still, I know that not all orcs have renounced the darkness. The Horde, after all, once marched on our lands with fury and destruction.
But even now, I wonder.
They can’t all be bloodthirsty savages. Can they?
What drives them now? What does freedom mean to them?
I close the book in front of me and lean back, lost in thought.
Months have passed.
Our patrols through the Eastweald have become routine—the occasional thief, bandits harassing merchants, minor disputes between farmers.
Nothing we cannot handle. Nothing like the horrors of war.
But then—a scream.
We spot her running from a small farmhouse, her dress torn from the rush, her breath ragged.
Her eyes are wild with panic.
“Please! Help! They took my baby!”
We urge our mounts forward.
I jump from my horse and move to her side, checking for wounds—but there are none.
She is not hurt.
But some wounds do not bleed.
Someone stole her child. That is worse than any blade wound.
My mind races.
Trolls? Could they be back? No… trolls take captives for sacrifices, but they wouldn’t steal a lone infant. Who would do such a thing?
Before I can ask more, she points toward her farm.
48
“My father! Please, he saw them! Help him!”
We ride hard, galloping toward the small farmstead.
An elderly man lies on the ground, his chest heaving as he struggles to catch his breath.
The moment he sees us, his face lights with relief.
“By the Light! Paladins!”
I dismount, moving to his side.
“Sir, do you need help? Are you hurt?”
He waves a trembling hand.
“No—I’m fine. Just go after them! Please!”
He points, his voice urgent.
“They went that way—into the woods!”
We ride hard, hooves pounding against the dirt, our hearts racing.
It does not take long to find their trail.
They are on foot. They cannot outrun us.
The moment we reach the forest’s edge, the tracks become clear—four sets of footprints leading deeper into the woods.
We dismount, drawing our weapons.
They are close.
The baby’s cries echo faintly through the trees.
They will not escape.
We move swiftly, silently, through the trees.
Within minutes, we spot them.
Four men, dressed in ragged clothes, armed with daggers and crude swords.
But our eyes go straight to the one holding the baby.
The leader—a wiry man with a scar running down his cheek—holds the infant tightly against his chest, his other hand gripping a knife, pressed to the child’s throat.
I grit my teeth, every muscle in my body tensing.
Light preserve us.
We surround them.
Our Justicar Maric Thorne steps forward, sword raised.
49
“You cannot escape. Surrender, and we will spare your lives.”
The leader grins, unfazed.
“This baby is worth good money.”
My stomach turns.
The leader presses the blade closer to the baby’s skin.
“And besides…” he adds, his smile twisting into something darker. “Death might be better than living cursed.”
A chill runs down my spine.
Cursed?
I glance at the Justicar. His expression remains firm, controlled.
But I know—we cannot wait.
The tension is high.
We need a plan.
We need to save that child.
I keep my sword raised, my eyes locked on the scarred leader, but my thoughts are elsewhere.
Cursed.
I glance at Justicar Maric Thorne. He is not just focused on the standoff—he knows something.
I see it in the way his jaw tightens, the way his fingers flex against his hilt.
What does he know that I do not?
But before I can ask—he acts.
With one swift motion, Justicar Maric Thorne raises his left hand.
“The Light will not suffer the wicked.”
A flash of divine power erupts from his palm, striking the thief’s throat in a blinding burst of holy energy.
The man screams, the knife falling from his hand as pain wracks his body. His legs buckle beneath him, and he collapses to the ground, convulsing.
No hesitation. No warning. The Justicar acted.
But there is no time to think.
The baby slips from his grasp.
I lunge forward, arms outstretched.
For a split second, everything slows.
50
If I am too slow—if I fail—
I catch the baby.
A moment later, I stumble back onto one knee, cradling the infant against my chest.
He is safe. Unharmed. But his tiny cries pierce the air.
I exhale, clutching him closer as relief washes over me.
Thank the Light.
But there is no time to dwell on it.
Our soldiers react immediately, moving in unison.
The three remaining thieves drop their weapons without a fight, throwing up their hands in surrender.
They are scared, hopeless—broken men.
But their leader remains on the ground, clutching his throat, eyes wild with fear.
“I won’t talk! I won’t talk!”
His voice is hoarse, panicked.
“He will curse me! He sees me now! I won’t talk!”
I look at Maric Thorne.
He is not watching the prisoners.
Instead, he is staring into the distance, his expression dark.
Thinking. Calculating.
Then, finally, he speaks.
“Maybe you don’t have to talk.”
I stare at him.
What does he know?
With the baby safely in my arms, we ride back to the farmstead.
The moment the mother sees her child, she collapses to her knees, sobbing.
“By the Light! My baby! My baby!”
I hand him back to her, and she clutches him tightly, pressing kisses to his head, whispering prayers of gratitude.
The old man, her father, grips my shoulder with tears in his eyes.
“Thank you. Thank you, all of you.”
There is no greater reward than this moment.
51
But our duty is not yet finished.
With the family’s permission, we secure the four captives inside the barn, posting armed guards at the doors.
The thieves do not resist.
The leader, however, does not stop whispering.
“He sees me now. He sees me now. I am already dead.”
His eyes dart frantically toward the woods.
Who is “he”?!
Justicar Maric Thorne gives orders to the soldiers.
“Stay here. Do not let anyone near them.”
Then, he turns to me.
“Tune, you’re coming with me.”
I straighten. “Where, sir?”
His gaze flickers to the tree line, then beyond.
“To investigate.”
And so, once more, we ride into the unknown.
We ride through the woods, our horses moving swiftly beneath the heavy morning sky.
I have so many questions, but I do not ask them.
Not yet.
Justicar Maric Thorne will tell me what I need to know.
Instead, I watch him closely, studying his expressions, his posture, his silence.
He knows something. And whatever it is—it troubles him.
The trees begin to thin, and as we ascend a small hill, Maric Thorne pulls his horse to a stop.
I do the same, turning to him.
He breathes in deeply, then finally speaks.
“I know these lands.”
I stay silent, waiting.
“Beyond these hills, there is an estate. It belonged to a fallen lord—a noble of Lordaeron who once held wealth and influence.”
I frown. “What happened to him?”
52
Maric’s gaze darkens.
“Rumors say he was driven mad when his wife died. He turned to dark magics, desperate to bring her back.”
A cold wind brushes against my skin.
Necromancy.
The word sticks in my throat.
The Justicar continues, his voice firm but grim.
“If the thieves came this way, trying to sell a baby and speaking of curses, it cannot be a coincidence.”
My stomach tightens.
Humans turning to dark magic. Stealing children. As if trolls and orcs weren’t enough threats.
I nod. “So we go check it out.”
Maric gives a slow nod.
“If he is alone, we will handle it.”
I grip my sword tightly.
And so, we ride.
The estate comes into view as we crest the next hill.
A large house, once grand, now lifeless.
The land around it is withered, untended, forgotten by time. The fences are rotting, the garden is overgrown, the road leading up to it cracked and broken.
A place abandoned, yet not empty.
We move slowly, keeping to the edges of the property, scanning the area.
No guards. No movement. No life.
Yet, as we approach the front door, I feel it.
A chill in the air.
Not from the wind. Not from the cold.
Something unnatural.
We stop at the main door.
Then, we hear it.
A voice. Chanting. Low, rhythmic, unnatural.
53
The sound of spellcraft.
Maric Thorne and I exchange glances.
He tests the door.
Unlocked.
Whoever is inside was waiting for visitors.
Waiting for the thieves to bring them the child.
Maric exhales. “Be ready.”
I grip my sword.
Then we step inside.
The moment we enter, my breath catches.
This is not a home.
Not anymore.
The air is heavy, suffocating, tainted with wrongness.
The walls are covered in strange symbols, painted in dried black ink—or blood.
The furniture is overturned, the paintings torn, the wooden beams cracked and rotting.
It smells of decay, of dust, of something worse lurking beneath it all.
And then, we see him.
A thin, haggard figure stands in the center of the room, his back to us.
He does not turn.
He is dressed in fine robes, now tattered and stained with dark sigils.
His white hair is wild, his frame skeletal, as if the life has been drained from him.
But the worst part is what stands before him.
An altar.
A stone slab, large enough to hold…
A child.
My blood runs cold.
What was he planning?
I glance at Maric Thorne.
His face is hardened, unreadable, his hand resting on the hilt of his blade.
Then, the chanting stops.
54
The fallen lord goes silent.
Slowly, his head tilts to the side, as if listening to something.
Then, finally—he speaks.
“You are not the ones I was expecting.”
The air hangs heavy with the scent of burnt wax, ink, and something far fouler.
The fallen lord still faces away from us, standing before his twisted altar.
His shoulders rise and fall with slow, measured breaths.
He knows we are here.
Justicar Maric Thorne steps forward, his voice firm but calm.
“Lord Auren Blackwood, I presume?”
The fallen lord chuckles, a low, dry sound, as if amusement has long since turned to bitterness.
“Am I supposed to be impressed that you know my name?”
He finally turns to face us.
His gaunt face, his hollowed eyes, the pale blue veins creeping along his skin—this is a man who has not slept, not eaten, not lived for a long time.
His gaze flickers over us, unimpressed.
“One day, the entire kingdom of Lordaeron will know my name.”
Justicar Thorne does not draw his sword.
He does not threaten.
Instead, he meets Blackwood’s gaze with something deeper—pity.
“Stop this madness.”
The words are not shouted, not demanded.
They are spoken like a plea.
“Your wife is dead, Blackwood. You cannot bring her back.”
The fallen lord’s hands curl into fists. His jaw tightens.
But he does not deny it.
Instead, his eyes burn with defiance.
“Oh, but I can.”
“And I will. I am so close.”
Justicar Thorne does not waver.
55
“We saved the baby. We arrested the thieves. There is nothing left for you now.”
Blackwood’s entire frame trembles.
For a moment, I see something else beneath the madness—desperation.
Then—rage.
“Damn you!”
He raises his hands, dark energy crackling around his fingertips—
But Maric moves first.
With a single step forward, the Justicar slams his fist into Blackwood’s stomach.
A heavy gasp escapes the fallen lord as he staggers, falling to his knees.
His hands claw at the floor, his body trembling.
“You are experimenting on children,” Maric says, his voice no longer just firm—it is f illed with disgust.
“Because you lack the power to handle real people.”
Blackwood’s breathing is ragged.
“Maybe you are not so far gone after all.”
The room is silent, save for Blackwood’s shallow gasps.
Maric kneels before him.
And then, he does something I do not expect.
He lowers his voice.
It is no longer the voice of a warrior issuing judgment—
It is the voice of a man speaking to another man.
“What would she think of you?”
Blackwood flinches.
Maric does not stop.
“Your wife, the woman you loved. What would she say if she saw you now?”
Blackwood’s hands tighten into fists.
“Would she be proud of what you’ve become?”
“Would she rejoice at what you’ve done?”
“Would she thank you for the suffering you’ve caused?”
Blackwood shakes his head violently, his whole body trembling.
“You don’t understand! I—”
56
“No.
“You don’t understand.”
Maric places a firm hand on Blackwood’s shoulder.
“She is gone.”
The words strike like a hammer.
“And no magic, no ritual, no stolen life will ever bring her back.”
Blackwood’s breath hitches.
The words strike like a hammer.
Blackwood grits his teeth, but the fury in his eyes falters.
And then, he speaks a truth more terrifying than anything else.
“But I know it’s possible,” Blackwood whispers, his voice hoarse. “Dark magic can bring back the dead.”
A cold chill runs through me.
Even Maric hesitates for a breath.
But then, his grip on Blackwood’s shoulder tightens.
“You may bring back her corpse.”
“But her spirit is long gone. And it is never coming back.”
Blackwood’s eyes widen slightly, his breath hitching.
Maric leans closer, voice low but unwavering.
“What would you bring back, Blackwood?”
“A shadow? A puppet bound to dark magic?”
“Would you truly call that your wife?”
Blackwood trembles, his whole body shaking now.
His gaze darts to the altar.
To the sigils on the floor.
To his own trembling hands.
And finally—to the truth.
For a long moment, he says nothing.
Then, finally—
He breaks.
His whole body crumples forward.
57
His thin fingers clutch at his face, his shoulders shaking.
Not with rage.
Not with madness.
But with grief.
A raw, aching, soul-crushing grief.
The sound he makes is not a cry of fury.
It is a whimper of a man who has lost everything and finally realizes it.
This is the moment. Not when a blade is drawn. Not when a spell is cast. But when a man makes a choice.
To fight or to surrender. To let go or to be consumed.
And Blackwood lets go.
I watch in stunned silence.
I have seen justice dealt with the sword. I have seen punishment delivered in battle.
But this—
This is something else.
I glance at Maric Thorne, at his calm, unwavering expression.
This was not just a battle.
This was a redemption.
I stand still, my eyes fixed on the motionless body of the fallen lord.
His once shaking hands have finally gone still. His shallow breath has faded.
And though I do not see wounds upon him, I know—
He is gone.
Slowly, I turn to Justicar Maric Thorne.
“What now?” I ask, my voice quieter than I expect.
Maric looks down at Blackwood’s lifeless form, his expression unreadable.
Then, finally, he speaks.
“There is nothing else to do.”
I furrow my brow. “But we didn’t—”
Maric exhales, standing tall.
58
“Without dark magic to sustain him, his body won’t last much longer. Once he realized he couldn’t bring his wife’s spirit back, he chose to go to her instead.”
A strange stillness settles over me.
So that was his final choice.
Not to fight. Not to run. Not to atone.
But simply to let go.
I glance once more at the broken man on the floor.
Despite all the darkness he embraced, despite all the horrors he nearly committed…
“Despite all, I hope the Light will take him,” I whisper.
Maric nods once.
“That is not for us to decide.”
“But there is still hope.”
We step out of the cursed house, leaving the weight of death and dark magic behind us.
The air outside is cold, but it no longer carries that unnatural chill.
The land itself feels… lighter.
Maric takes a long breath, then says,
“We will report back to Hearthglen.”
“The priests should come here to cleanse this house and this land.”
“It must be purified, so that no darkness lingers.”
His eyes sweep over the decayed fields, the dying trees, the withering house.
And with that, we turn our horses back toward the road.
The journey back to the farm is silent.
No words are needed.
There is nothing left to say.
Only the sound of our horses’ hooves on the dirt path, the quiet creak of our armor, the steady breathing of men who have done their duty.
Justice was served. Darkness was stopped. But the burden of it remains.
59
As we ride toward the sunrise, I feel the weight of this lesson pressing into my soul.
I do not know if Lord Blackwood found peace.
But I do know one thing.
I will never forget this day.
The farmstead comes into view, the familiar sight of our soldiers standing guard near the barn.
They straighten at our approach, eyes scanning us for any sign of trouble.
But there is none.
The threat is gone.
We have done our duty.
And yet, as we dismount, the woman rushes toward us, her child held close in her arms.
Her eyes shine with gratitude, not fear.
“Please, you must join us. My father and I have prepared a meal.”
I glance at Justicar Maric Thorne.
His expression softens, and he gives a small nod.
“We courteously accept.”
The old man watches us closely, his weathered face unreadable.
As we enter their small but warm home, the scent of freshly baked bread and roasted meat fills the air.
The woman hums softly, focused on setting the table, distracted by the moment.
But the old man?
His eyes never leave us.
I do not need the Light to tell me—this man has seen much in his life.
He noticed that the soldiers stayed while we were gone.
He knows that something happened.
And though he does not ask outright, his gaze searches our faces.
Justicar Maric Thorne meets his knowing stare and speaks plainly.
“It will be all right now. You will be safe.”
For a moment, the old man says nothing.
Then, finally—he nods.
“I see.”
60
Relief flickers in his aged eyes.
He doesn’t need the details. He only needs to know that the darkness is gone.
The woman hums a soft melody, setting plates before us, unaware of what nearly happened.
She smiles, urging us to eat.
She does not know. And I feel it is better if she never does.
The threat is gone. The baby is safe. The nightmare is over.
That is all that matters.
After the meal, we thank them for their kindness and make ready to leave.
The four prisoners are secured for transport, their fates no longer in our hands.
With the afternoon sun casting long shadows, we ride toward Andorhal, leading them in chains.
By nightfall, we reach the fortified city, its massive grain warehouses standing tall under the moonlight.
The prisoners are handed over to the authorities, and we find lodging at the local barracks.
The weight of the day’s events lingers in my mind as I remove my armor, setting it carefully aside.
I glance at Justicar Thorne, wondering if he too is lost in thought.
Will we ever speak of what happened?
I do not know.
But as I lie back on the simple cot, staring at the wooden ceiling above me, one thought stays with me.
Not all victories are won with a sword.
And with that, I close my eyes.
Tomorrow, duty continues.
Months have passed.
After a much-needed Honor’s Rest at Hearthglen, our patrol receives new orders.
We are to reinforce the roads south of Andorhal.
61
The orcs—prisoners from the Second War, held in internment camps—have been escaping in growing numbers.
And now, they are causing trouble.
As we ride south, my mind drifts to everything I have read about the orcs.
They are formidable warriors.
Fierce. Unyielding in battle.
Yet—unlike the trolls—i have found no records of them using dark magic or necromancy.
That alone is a relief.
I tighten my grip on the reins, exhaling slowly.
“They can’t be worse than the trolls,” I tell myself.
After all—they are just prisoners from the war.
But how long are we supposed to keep them in prison?
The war ended years ago.
And yet, we still hold them behind walls, trapped in a land that isn’t theirs.
If I were in their place… wouldn’t I try to escape, too?
I shake the thought away.
They lost the war. They surrendered. They should be grateful they were spared.
But the thought lingers like a shadow in the back of my mind.
Is it truly natural to expect them to remain in chains forever?
With these questions weighing on me, I ride in silence, my hand resting lightly on my sword hilt.
We march south, toward Andorhal.
Toward the escaped orcs.
Toward whatever is coming next.
It only takes a few days before we find them.
A trade caravan, stranded by the roadside. The merchants wave frantically, their voices filled with urgency.
“Orcs!” they cry. “They took everything!”
We halt our horses, scanning them for wounds or injuries.
“Are you hurt?” I ask.
62
“No,” one of them replies, still breathless. “But they stole our food, our grain—our livelihood!”
Justicar Maric Thorne dismounts, his expression firm.
“How many?” he asks.
The merchant hesitates. “Four or five. I think. I was scared—I just hid.”
Maric glances at me.
They have no horses. They are carrying heavy sacks of grain. They cannot have gone far.
I tighten my grip on the reins.
“We can catch them.”
And so, we ride.
It doesn’t take long to find their tracks—heavy footprints, a trail of spilled grain leading us deeper into the wilds.
And then, finally, we see them.
Five orcs.
They are large, broad-shouldered, powerful.
Yet, as soon as they spot us approaching, they do not run.
They simply stand.
Their faces are grim, but not hostile.
They carry no weapons.
They do not fight.
As we surround them, their leader steps forward, his yellow eyes locking onto Justicar Maric.
“Are you here to kill us?”
His voice is deep, rough, but calm.
Maric answers first, his voice even.
“Not if you surrender in peace.”
“You have no weapons. Do not turn this into a bloodbath.”
The orc studies us, then lets out a dry chuckle.
“You lack real men, so you bring boys to do a warrior’s job?”
The words sting for only a moment.
I meet his gaze.
“I am a paladin.”
63
The orc tilts his head, considering me.
“What about a duel, paladin? Warrior to warrior. Are you man enough to fight me without your magic?”
I do not answer immediately.
Instead, I study him—his stance, his expression, his intent.
This is not arrogance.
It is a warrior’s way of measuring another.
But I will not be baited.
I breathe in deeply, then speak.
“My Light is part of who I am. Fighting without it would be like you fighting me with one hand behind your back.”
I tilt my head.
“Would you do that?”
The orc narrows his eyes.
Then, to my surprise, he grins.
“What is your name, paladin?”
His voice no longer holds mockery—only curiosity.
I raise my chin and answer.
“I am Tune, son of Victor, and I am a paladin of the Silver Hand.”
The orc nods, a gesture of respect.
“I am Gorvak, son of Drash.”
“And if you promise to treat my friends fairly, we will surrender in peace.”
I look at Justicar Thorne, who gives me a slow nod.
I turn back to Gorvak and extend my hand.
“I give you my word, Gorvak, son of Drash.”
And so, they surrender.
We take them back to the camp.
As we ride, I glance at Gorvak and his kin.
I do not sense evil in them.
They did not kill, did not harm.
They were simply hungry. Desperate. Seeking freedom.
I cannot help but wonder—
64
“Will humans and orcs ever truly live in peace?”
For now, that answer remains uncertain.
But something tells me—this will not be my last encounter with the orcs.
Troubling News
Months have passed.
We are back in Hearthglen, our patrols through the Eastweald behind us for now.
The days have been uneventful, a welcome contrast to the battles and conflicts we have faced.
But peace does not last.
Justicar Maric Thorne approaches me, his expression grim.
I sense it before he even speaks.
Something is wrong.
“Tune,” he begins.
I stand straighter, waiting.
“I know your furlough is still a few months away…”
His voice is careful, measured.
I brace myself.
“But I received news—about your mother.”
My heart stops.
“She is sick.”
The words hit like a hammer.
“So I asked permission to anticipate your furlough, so you can go see her. Be with her.”
She’s sick? My mother is sick?
I swallow hard, trying to keep my voice steady.
“What’s wrong? What does she have?”
Justicar Thorne shakes his head.
“I don’t have details, Tune. I’m sorry.”
His eyes soften.
“But you can leave now. Go. Be with her.”
His hand rests briefly on my shoulder.
“Light be with you.”
65
I waste no time.
I gather supplies, my sword, my armor, my cloak.
Everything else can wait.
I need to go.
I need to see her.
It has been almost a year since I left Stratholme to begin my life as a paladin.
I have seen battle, hardship, death, and darkness.
But nothing—not trolls, not orcs, not fallen lords—feels as terrifying as this moment.
As I mount my horse and begin the long ride east, only one thought consumes me.
“Light, please… don’t take her from me before I can see her again.”
And so, I ride for Stratholme.
I ride for home.
The road has never felt this long.
The sun is low in the sky, casting a golden glow over the fields outside
Stratholme.
And then, finally—I see them.
The city gates.
A lump forms in my throat, but I spur my horse forward, wasting no time.
I have fought for Lordaeron. I have battled trolls, captured orcs, and faced the darkness
of men who lost themselves.
But this… this is different.
This is my mother.
I dismount before my home, barely noticing the familiar streets, the familiar faces.
All I see is the door before me.
I push it open, stepping inside, and the scent of herbs and broth fills the air.
A figure stands at the table, stirring a pot of soup.
Adele.
She turns, eyes widening.
Then, before I can speak—she rushes to me.
Her arms wrap around me, tight, desperate, trembling.
66
I feel her tears against my armor, her breath uneven.
“Tune, by the Light—you are here.”
I hold her close, pressing my forehead to hers.
“My mother—where is she?”
Adele pulls back, wiping her eyes.
“Come,” she whispers. “She’s resting.”
And so, I follow her.
I step into my mother’s chamber, and my heart nearly stops.
She lies beneath soft blankets, her skin pale, her frame frail.
But when her eyes open, they shine like they always have—warm, kind, full of
love.
She smiles.
“My son… what a blessing it is to see you.”
I kneel beside her, taking her hand.
“I came for you, Mother.”
She cups my cheek with trembling fingers.
“The priests have heard of your deeds. Your name carries honor. You make me so
proud, Tune. And your father, too. Light be with him.”
My chest tightens at the mention of my father, but I push through it.
“You raised me well, Mother. Please—tell me how I can take care of you.”
Her smile softens.
“Just be here at my side, my son.”
Her fingers tighten slightly around mine.
“Soon, I will be with your father.”
The words hit like a blade.
I shake my head. “Don’t say that, Mother. We have to do something.”
She closes her eyes for a moment, then exhales.
“No mother could ask for a better son, Tune.”
“But now you must be strong.”
“You need to accept that the Light will take me soon.”
Her voice does not tremble.
She has already accepted her fate.
67
“Please, my son—accept it, too.”
I look at her, my vision blurring, my heart clenching.
But I say nothing.
Because I know she is right.
I stay by her side, doing everything I can—preparing food, fetching water, helping
her sit up when she is too weak to move.
Adele is always there, comforting me, helping where she can.
Priests come, offering blessings and prayers.
Doctors visit, but their expressions tell me everything before they even speak.
There is nothing to be done.
And so, the days pass, and her breathing grows weaker.
Until, finally…
The day comes.
The room is quiet.
I hold her hand, my thumb gently brushing over her worn skin.
Adele sits on the other side of the bed, holding her other hand, whispering soft
prayers.
The candlelight flickers, casting soft shadows against the walls.
She inhales slowly.
Then, with what little strength she has left, she speaks.
“You are a good man, Tune.”
Her eyes meet mine, full of something greater than pride—love, warmth,
peace.
“My son. My paladin.”
A deep breath.
“Light take me home.”
Her hand goes still.
Her eyes close.
And she is gone.
The room is silent.
Not the silence of an empty house.
68
Not the silence of a battlefield after the fighting is done.
This silence is final.
I bow my head, squeezing her hand one last time.
Adele sniffs, wiping her face with trembling fingers.
But she doesn’t speak.
There is nothing left to say.
I gently place my mother’s hands over her chest, aligning them as if she were simply
resting.
And then, I close my eyes, whispering the only words I can find.
“Light take you, Mother.”
The following day, the priests of Stratholme perform the rites of passing.
She is laid to rest beside my father, where she belongs.
Friends, neighbors, and fellow priests and paladins come to offer condolences.
But I do not hear them.
I do not speak much.
I only watch the earth settle over her grave.
This is a pain I cannot fight.
This is a wound I cannot heal.
This is a battle I could never have won.
And yet, I must endure it.
Because that is what she asked of me.
A week passes, and I sit alone by the chapel, watching the candles flicker on the
altar.
Adele sits beside me, her hand warm in mine.
I have faced darkness, war, and cruelty.
But nothing has ever made me feel so… small.
“Will it ever stop hurting?” I ask quietly.
Adele rests her head against my shoulder.
“No,” she whispers. “But it will change.”
She takes my hand, holding it gently.
“And you won’t carry it alone.”
For the first time since that day…
I let myself cry.
69
I try to make the best of the time I have left.
My furlough.
Light forgive me, I still can’t think of the word without hearing Justicar Thorne’s
voice.
I divide my days between prayer and family.
Between seeking peace in the Light and seeking warmth in the company of Adele
and her kin.
But loss does not simply leave because we wish it to.
It lingers.
Like the last embers of a fire, slow to fade, refusing to be forgotten.
Stratholme is different now, though I know it is I who has changed.
Nearly a year has passed since I left. A year spent as a paladin, a soldier, a servant of
the Light.
But here? I am simply Tune. The boy who left and came back a man.
The streets are alive with the sounds of work and worship.
The ringing of anvils in the forges, where blacksmiths craft armor, tools, and
horsehoes.
The murmurs of priests in the chapels, offering blessings and wisdom to those who
seek them.
The laughter of children playing between the merchant stalls, running between the
carts filled with grain and salted fish.
Beyond the city gates, the lands of Tirisfal stretch far and wide.
Rolling green fields dotted with farmsteads and grazing sheep.
Windmills turning slowly, their wooden blades creaking with every gust of wind.
It is a beautiful land, a peaceful land.
A land worth fighting for.
But for now, I do not fight.
For now, I try to live.
Adele’s family takes me in, treating me as one of their own.
Her father, Harland, is a stern but kind man, a millwright who repairs the great
wooden mills outside the city.
Her mother, Martha, is warm-hearted and practical, keeping the home running with a
f
irm but gentle hand.
And then, there is Edric.
70
“Come now, paladin. You’ve fought trolls, orcs, and cursed lords. Surely, you can
handle an evening of good food and good ale?”
I try to smile.
And so, I let them pull me into their home.
Evenings are spent around the great hearth, where Adele’s mother serves hot stews,
roasted lamb, and thick slices of bread.
Harland tells stories of when he was young, before the war changed everything.
Martha hums old songs as she knits, keeping her hands busy.
And then there is Adele.
She does not say much.
She simply sits beside me, her fingers brushing against mine when no one is
watching.
And in those moments, I feel something warm.
Not happiness.
Not yet.
But something close.
A few days later, Adele insists I leave the house with her.
“Come with me,” she says. “It’s Harvest Week, and you won’t spend it
brooding.”
I had forgotten.
Every year, at the start of autumn, Stratholme holds the Harvest Festival.
A time when farmers bring their best crops to market, traders gather to barter, and
families feast in the city square, celebrating another season of good fortune.
Even the priests and knights put aside their duties to join the festivities.
I remember my mother taking me when I was small.
The scent of roasted apples and honeyed bread.
The warmth of the bonfires.
The sound of the lutes and fiddles playing lively songs.
This year, I do not go as a child.
This year, I go as a man who has lost, but not yet forgotten how to live.
Even in the joy of the festival, I still struggle.
When I see an old woman selling fresh-baked rolls, I think of my mother’s
kitchen.
71
When a child laughs, tugging at his father’s hand, I remember my father lifting me
onto his shoulders.
When a priest raises his hands in blessing, I think of her final words.
“My son. My paladin.”
But grief is a strange thing.
Some moments, it crushes me.
And other moments, it fades, just for a little while.
Like when Adele tugs me toward the dancers, her smile mischievous.
“You’ve trained your whole life to be a paladin, but can you handle a simple
dance?”
Or when I watch the sky at dusk, the bonfires crackling, feeling the warmth of
friends, family, and life continuing.
Even without her.
On my final evening before I must return to Hearthglen, I sit once more in the
chapel.
Adele beside me.
A single candle flickers on the altar.
“Do you feel ready?” she asks softly.
I watch the flame dance.
“No.”
I turn to her.
“But I will be.”
She smiles.
And for the first time since my mother died, I smile back.
Returning to Hearthglen feels different now.
The gates, the stone walls, the banners of the Silver Hand—all are the same.
Yet, to me, they are changed.
Because I have changed.
The weight of my mother’s passing still lingers, but I push forward.
As a paladin, as a son, as a man who must endure.
The first to greet me is Edric.
“There you are!”
He approaches with his usual confident stride, but there is something softer in his
expression.
72
He was not in Stratholme—he could not be there.
But he knows.
He grips my arm firmly, his voice quieter than usual.
“I heard about your mother, Tune.”
“I’m sorry.”
I nod, swallowing back the lump in my throat.
“Feels good to have an old friend here.”
He gives a small smile, then nudges my shoulder.
“Then come, brother. Let’s talk. We have much to share.”
That evening, Edric and I sit near the training grounds, watching the younger recruits
spar.
For the first time in a long while, we talk as friends, not as soldiers.
We speak of our first year as paladins.
Of the thieves we encountered, the trolls we battled, the orcs we captured.
Of the things we have learned—the things that changed us.
Edric leans back against a wooden post, exhaling.
“Do you ever think about it, Tune? About how much we’ve changed?”
I nod. “Every day.”
We were boys, dreaming of knighthood.
Now, we are men who have seen what that truly means.
A moment of silence passes.
Then Edric grins.
“At least we haven’t changed too much. I can still beat you in a sparring
match.”
I laugh for the first time in what feels like months.
“We’ll see about that, old friend.”
The next morning, I find Justicar Maric Thorne.
I stand before him, searching for the right words.
How do you thank someone for giving you the chance to say goodbye to your
mother?
I bow my head slightly, my voice steady but sincere.
“Sir… I have no words to express my gratitude.”
“If not for you, I would not have been there in my mother’s final days.”
The Justicar watches me for a moment.
Then, he places a hand on my shoulder.
73
“A paladin’s duty is to protect the innocent.”
“But we must never forget the people we fight for.”
He nods, satisfied.
“Now, are you ready to resume your duties?”
I straighten.
“I am, sir.”
“Good. Then let’s begin.”
Our first mission upon my return is an escort assignment.
A group of priests from the capital of Lordaeron, envoys of King Terenas himself.
Their destination is Andorhal, and from there, another patrol will escort them the
rest of the way back to Lordaeron.
Though they have their own guards, our presence has been requested as additional
protection.
When we meet them, I immediately understand why they would need more
protection.
They travel in elegant, golden robes, embroidered with silver threads depicting the
sigil of Lordaeron.
Each priest walks with quiet grace, their hands hidden within their sleeves, their
voices measured and calm.
They move with purpose, but also vulnerability.
Men of faith are rarely men of war.
Their guards—knights in polished steel—stand tall and disciplined, bearing the
emblem of the capital.
Their plate armor gleams, reflecting the sun.
Their shields are lined with blue and gold.
Their swords are well-crafted, but their eyes are watchful.
They are not here for war, but they are prepared for trouble.
One of them steps forward—a captain, by the look of him.
He nods to Justicar Thorne.
“We welcome your escort, Justicar.”
“We will see you safely to Andorhal,” Maric replies.
And so, we begin the journey.
The ride is uneventful, the road mostly quiet.
The priests are humble men, devoted to their faith.
74
Some pray as they travel, their voices a soft chant beneath the rustling trees.
Others speak to us, asking about our lives as paladins, our duties, our oaths, our
beliefs.
One of them, an older priest, speaks to me directly.
“You have the look of a man who has known grief, young paladin.”
I hesitate, then nod. “I lost my mother recently.”
The priest places a gentle hand on my arm.
“Then I will pray for her soul tonight.”
His words are simple, but sincere.
I bow my head.
“Thank you, Father.”
By nightfall, we reach Andorhal.
The great grain warehouses stand tall, their stone walls lined with torches.
We are greeted by another patrol—the next escort, ready to take the priests
onward.
Everything has gone smoothly.
No bandits. No orcs. No trouble.
For once, a mission has ended in peace.
And yet, I cannot shake the feeling that something waits on the horizon.
For now, though, I push the thought aside.
For now, I take comfort in a mission well done.
The next day, we resume our patrols through the roads of the Eastweald.
So far, no word of more troll raiding parties, and that alone is a relief.
The months pass as we continue our duties—riding through the wild lands, guarding
travelers, investigating thieves, and keeping the peace.
A paladin’s duty is never done.
One chill morning, we take a secluded road, leading to a string of isolated
farms.
We have heard rumors of thieves, and now we come to investigate.
The first group of farmers we meet are gaunt, tired men.
Their faces are sunken, their children pale and weak.
“We’ve been starving,” they tell us.
75
“Our rivals—the farms down the road—have been stealing our grain!”
I exchange glances with my comrades.
We have heard this story before.
So we ride to the rival farms, expecting to find well-fed thieves.
But we find something else.
They are just as thin, just as desperate, just as bitter.
“We’re not the thieves!” one man argues.
“They’ve been stealing our cattle, leaving us with nothing!”
And once again, the same complaint:
“The mayor of Dalson’s Hollow does nothing!”
With no clear answers, we ride to Dalson’s Hollow.
As we enter, something immediately feels wrong.
The streets are quiet, though eyes watch us from behind shutters.
The guards at the entrance are not in proper armor, but rather patched leathers,
with rusted weapons.
And when we demand to see the mayor, they step in our way.
“The mayor is busy,” one of them says, his hand on his sword.
Our Justicar, Maric Thorne, stares them down.
“Your people are starving,” he says.
“And you dare bar paladins of the Silver Hand from seeing their lord?”
The guards do not move.
Their eyes flicker between one another.
Something is not right.
Are they afraid of their lord? Or are they working for him?
Justicar Thorne does not wait to find out.
With one heavy step forward, he grabs the closest guard by his collar, yanking him
aside.
The man stumbles back, wide-eyed.
The rest, seeing this display of authority, do not resist.
And so, we enter the mayor’s manor.
This entire situation feels wrong.
76
From the moment we stepped into Dalson’s Hollow, the air has been thick with
unease.
And now, as we enter the manor’s hall, we see the truth laid before us.
A long wooden table, covered with roasted meats, fresh bread, ripe fruits, and
wheels of cheese.
Golden goblets of wine, untouched yet overflowing.
And at the head of it all—
A large man, his body twice the size of any of his starving people, sitting
comfortably as if he were a king in his court.
Food has not been missing here.
I glance at Justicar Maric Thorne.
His expression does not change.
But I see it in his eyes.
He already understands what is happening here.
Justicar Thorne steps forward, his voice steady, unshaken.
“Mayor Dalson, we demand an explanation.”
The large man sets down a turkey leg, his expression twisting in irritation.
“Who let you in?” he grumbles, wiping grease from his mouth.
“I told my guards to keep everyone out.”
Justicar Thorne’s gaze does not waver.
“We are paladins of the Silver Hand, and we work under the authority of King
Terenas Menethil.”
The name of the king makes the mayor’s eye twitch.
But Thorne does not stop.
“We came here investigating theft, searching for the criminals who let your people
starve.”
“And I believe we’ve found exactly who we were looking for.”
The mayor scoffs, pushing himself up from his chair.
“How dare you accuse me?” he spits.
“I am the lord of these lands! The people owe me their tithes! The food you see is
merely what they must pay in taxes.”
The words sting, but not because I believe him.
Because he believes himself.
I glance at the window, thinking of the starving farmers, the worn faces of men who
barely had the strength to stand.
This man feasts while they waste away.
77
Justicar Thorne walks calmly to the window, his arms crossed.
“Then tell me, Mayor Dalson—”
“If we search this town, will we not find the missing grain and cattle?”
The mayor’s jaw clenches.
For the first time, he says nothing.
Thorne does not wait for an answer.
He turns to our soldiers, his voice firm.
“Search every barn, every cellar. I want every storeroom in this town opened.”
The guards hesitate, then nod.
And as we step back into the town, the truth is revealed.
Behind locked barn doors, in hidden cellars beneath the manor, we find grains,
sacks of flour, barrels of dried meats—more than a town this size could possibly
need.
The villagers, drawn by the commotion, gather in the streets.
And when they see what has been hoarded—
The whispers begin.
Then anger.
My hands clench into fists as I take in the sight.
It was never the farmers stealing from each other.
It was never desperate men taking from their neighbors.
It was him.
He let his people starve.
He let them turn on one another, blaming their neighbors while he took everything for
himself.
I swallow back the sickness rising in my throat.
It is one thing to face an enemy in battle.
To raise your blade against trolls, orcs, and bandits.
But this—this is different.
This is betrayal.
Betrayal from our own.
Betrayal from a man meant to protect his people.
The people who trusted him.
The people who are now looking at him—their supposed lord—with hatred in their
eyes.
78
We drag Mayor Dalson outside, into the town square where the peasants have
gathered.
The whispers of confusion and anger swirl among them, their hollow faces filled
with both hope and fury.
Justicar Maric Thorne steps forward, his voice carrying across the square.
“This man has betrayed you.”
“He hoarded your food, let your families starve, and turned you against one
another while he grew fat on your suffering.”
“And now, in the name of King Terenas, he is under arrest for crimes against his
own people.”
The crowd stirs, some looking ready to tear him apart where he stands.
Dalson, still sweating, lifts his chin and bellows.
“Guards! Do your duty! Seize these men!”
But no one moves.
His own guards, the men who once stood at his side, do not reach for their
swords.
Instead, they step forward—not toward us, but toward the people.
One of them, a younger man with guilt in his eyes, bows his head.
“We were afraid.”
“We did what we were told. But we knew. And we said nothing.”
“Forgive us.”
Some peasants scowl, some mutter curses.
But others simply nod.
They understand fear. They have lived under it for too long.
Justicar Thorne turns to the peasants, his tone softer now.
“We must set things right.”
“Who among you is respected? Who will help restore balance to this town?”
A gray-haired man, his hands rough from years of labor, steps forward.
“I will,” he says.
Thorne nods.
“Distribute all the food evenly among the people.”
“Return what belongs to the farmers.”
The old man places a hand over his heart.
“By the Light, it will be done.”
79
Thorne then turns to our soldiers.
“You will escort the mayor to Andorhal.”
“Once there, inform the local governor. A representative will be sent to oversee this
town’s leadership.”
A decision is made.
Dalson, still pale and furious, is bound in chains and forced onto a horse.
He does not speak, only glares as he is taken away—his power stripped, his stolen
wealth worthless.
A fitting punishment.
With the mayor gone, the real work begins.
Justicar Thorne and I stay behind, ensuring order is restored.
For the next few days, I walk from house to house, offering aid where I can.
The Light can heal wounds.
But it cannot fill an empty stomach.
A cruel reality.
“It will be alright,” I tell them.
Some thank me, their voices filled with relief.
But others, their faces worn from suffering, do not smile.
One man shakes his head, bitter.
“Where were you before?”
“How many of our children starved while you rode your patrols elsewhere?”
“You paladins say you protect us, but you only come when it’s too late.”
His words sting.
And I have no answer.
He is not wrong.
Hope, once lost, is not easily restored.
I can only pray that one day, it will be.
Two days later, our soldiers return, escorting two men on horseback.
One is a representative of the local government—a tall, well-dressed official, his
cloak embroidered with the sigil of Andorhal.
The other, his assistant, is a younger man, carrying ledgers and parchment.
80
They look uncomfortable in the presence of so many hardened farmers and weary
peasants.
They have come to fix what was broken.
Or so they claim.
Justicar Maric Thorne steps forward, giving them a stern but respectful nod.
“This town was nearly destroyed by its own leader’s greed.”
“Families starved while Dalson hoarded enough grain to feed them all.”
“If Lordaeron’s rule still means anything, this place must be rebuilt. And it must
not happen again.”
The representative listens carefully, then exhales, placing a hand over his
chest.
“In the name of King Terenas, I assure you—things will be different from now
on.”
“The people will be heard. The grain will be fairly distributed. The land will
heal.”
I surely hope so.
The people nod but do not cheer.
Their faces hold cautious hope, but also deep scars.
Trust is not restored in a day.
With our duty fulfilled, we turn our horses westward and begin the ride back to
Hearthglen.
The road is long, but uneventful.
And yet, my mind is heavy.
This is not like hunting bandits or chasing escaped orcs.
Not like striking down trolls in the wilds.
This was worse.
This was our own betraying us.
And that cuts deeper than any blade.
Back in Hearthglen, we report to our superiors, detailing everything that
happened.
With our duty completed, we are granted a few days of Honor’s Rest.
And, as always—
I spend my free time training and studying.
Because while some see Honor’s Rest as a break, I see it as an opportunity to
grow.
To be stronger. Wiser. Faster.
81
To make sure that next time, we do not arrive too late.
The Light guides me.
But I must still walk the path myself.
Months pass, and the land grows restless once more.
News arrives from the dwarves of Aerie Peak—Trolls have been increasing their
patrols along the roads leading into the Hinterlands.
If they are preparing for something, we need to know.
And if they threaten travelers, we must stop them.
So we ride eastward, beyond the borders of Hearthglen, into lands where the
mountains grow steep, and the forests run deep.
The Hinterlands.
One evening, our scouts return, their expressions grim.
“Trolls nearby,” one reports.
“A small patrol, not a full raiding party.”
Justicar Maric Thorne does not hesitate.
“Show us.”
We march into the night, following the silent footsteps of our scouts.
The air is cold, the only sounds the rustling of the trees, the distant call of an
owl.
Then, up ahead—
Smoke.
A campfire, flickering between the trees.
Someone is there.
Must be the Trolls we’re hunting.
We dismount, leaving our horses and scouts behind.
We move on foot now—silent, deliberate.
Slowly, we creep forward through the undergrowth, getting our first clear view of the
enemy.
Trolls.
Seven of them.
Two shadow priests, their blue skin painted in dark runes, standing near the fire,
chanting forbidden spells.
The others watch over something.
No—someone.
82
Prisoners.
But not humans.
Orcs.
A male and female, bound in chains.
Their heads are bowed, but they are alive.
For now.
A sacrifice.
I glance at Justicar Thorne, who is already studying the scene.
He speaks lowly to our soldiers, his voice steady.
“We strike fast. Surround their camp. No one escapes.”
They nod.
We have done this before.
We are ready.
I grip my sword, feeling the familiar weight of steel in my hand.
The priests are focused on their dark ritual.
They will not see us until it is too late.
The time has come.
We move into position.
And when Justicar Thorne steps forward—so do we.
The Ambush – Precision and Power
The night is still, the air heavy with tension.
Justicar Maric Thorne raises his hammer, eyes locked on the shadow priests.
We strike first.
We strike fast.
We give them no chance to fight back.
With a blinding flash, the Light answers his call.
A bolt of divine judgment erupts from his hands, slamming into the first shadow
priest.
The Troll screams in agony, collapsing to the ground, writhing as the holy energy
sears through him.
But Thorne does not stop.
83
With a single, brutal swing, his hammer collides with the second priest’s skull.
CRACK.
The priest’s neck snaps instantly.
I follow Thorne’s example, summoning the Light into my palm.
Judgment of the Light!
My target stumbles as the divine energy burns into him, his body twisting in
pain.
But he does not fall.
He grits his sharp, yellowed teeth, his red eyes locking onto mine, and lunges
forward, twin axes flashing.
I meet him head-on, steel against steel.
His first swing is wild, his stance unbalanced from my Light’s power.
I use it against him.
I strike first. My blade slices through his wrist, severing his hand.
The Troll roars, stumbling back, blood spraying into the dirt.
I do not hesitate. My second swing cuts deep into his chest.
His eyes widen in shock.
And then—he falls.
It is done.
The rest of the Trolls fall in moments.
A flawless strike, executed with precision.
But then—a cry of pain.
I turn just in time to see Justicar Thorne drop to one knee, gripping his chest.
The first shadow priest, though dying, managed to utter one last curse.
“A gift… for the Lightbearer…”
The priest’s body goes limp, lifeless.
But Justicar Thorne’s pain does not fade.
I rush to his side, calling upon the Light.
Golden energy swirls around him… but it does nothing.
The curse remains.
Hearthglen is too far.
If we don’t act soon, he may not survive the journey.
Then, behind me—
84
“What shall we do with the orcs?”
I turn to the prisoners.
The female speaks first, her voice urgent.
“Please, spare my son!”
A soft sound, barely noticeable before—
A baby’s cry.
I look closer and see a tiny figure hidden beneath a tattered cloak.
A child.
An orc infant, barely old enough to sit upright.
The male orc is wounded, his breathing slow, his eyes filled with shame.
I recall what I have read of orc culture.
A wounded warrior is no warrior at all.
To fight is honor. To be unable to fight… is worse than death.
The female continues, desperation in her voice.
“My husband was injured before we were captured. I fought, but I could not
protect him and my son alone.”
“Please, paladin. Spare us.”
I look at Thorne, still writhing in pain.
I have no time to decide.
The Light is not enough.
The orc woman sees my hesitation and seizes her chance.
“Your paladin suffers because of a curse.”
“I can remove it.”
I narrow my eyes.
“How?”
She lifts her chin.
“I am a shaman. Through the power of the elements, I can cleanse the curse.”
I weigh my choices.
The soldiers around me shift uncomfortably.
“Tune, you can’t do this,” one says.
“They are orcs. They should be in the internment camps.”
I clench my jaw.
85
My Justicar’s life is more important than rules.
And prison is no place for a baby—orc or otherwise.
I inhale deeply, turning back to the shaman.
“Heal my Justicar, and I will let you go.”
The soldiers exchange uneasy glances.
I steel myself, my voice firm.
“It is done.”
For the first time in my life, I use a commanding tone.
And to my surprise, they listen.
The soldiers, though unhappy, do not argue further.
Justicar Thorne’s life is what matters now.
“Unchain them.”
The orc woman steps forward, rubbing her wrists where the chains once were.
She closes her eyes, raises her hands to the sky, and begins to chant.
Her voice is soft, yet powerful.
The air shifts.
And then—the first drop of rain falls.
Then another.
And another.
Within moments, a gentle rain pours down upon us, soaking into the earth, washing
over Justicar Thorne.
The moment the water touches his skin, his pained expression eases.
His breathing steadies.
His eyes flutter open.
He looks at the orc woman, then at me.
“She did as promised,” I say.
His gaze shifts to the soldiers.
“Do as he says. Release the male as well.”
And so, the orcs are freed.
The male orc, still weak, stands unsteadily.
I step forward.
“You are wounded. Do you need healing?”
86
He shakes his head.
“My wife healed me as much as she could.”
“Now, I need only time.”
His eyes flicker with something I do not expect.
Not hatred.
Not anger.
Gratitude.
“Maybe one day, I will regain my honor and fight for my family again.”
I exhale, choosing my words carefully.
“Even if you never fight again, there is honor in raising your son.”
The orc nods slowly.
“You speak with wisdom, paladin.”
“What are your names?”
The orc woman steps forward.
“I am Kargha.”
“This is my mate, Garthok.”
“And our son, Durkan.”
I nod in return.
“I am Tune, of the Silver Hand.”
“And you just saved the life of my Justicar, Maric Thorne.”
Garthok grips his wounded arm, standing tall despite his injuries.
“Tune, of the Silver Hand… we will not forget your name.”
Kargha bows her head.
“Nor shall we forget your mercy.”
With that, the orcs fade into the night, disappearing into the wilds.
I watch them go, knowing this will not be the last time our paths cross.
Honor was given.
Honor was repaid.
And for now, that is enough.
The night is still heavy around us as we make our way back to our horses.
The battle is over. The decision has been made.
The orc family is gone.
But my mind is not at ease.
87
Beside me, Justicar Maric Thorne walks in silence, his steps slower than usual, as if
he is still recovering.
Then, finally—he speaks.
“Thank you, Tune. I owe you my life.”
I look at him, shaking my head.
“Sir, I only did my duty.”
“I would have done the same for any of our soldiers.”
I pause, meeting his gaze.
“And you would have done the same for me.”
A small smile touches his lips, and he nods.
Then, his expression grows serious again.
“You have grown much in these last two years, Tune.”
“I sense you will become a great paladin.”
I feel the weight of his words.
This is Justicar Thorne. A man I have come to respect above all others.
And he just told me that he believes in me.
The words settle deep within me, filling me with pride, purpose… and
responsibility.
But even as warmth fills my heart, I cannot forget something.
His Judgment of the Light.
It was stronger than mine. More powerful, more precise.
Why?
What does he know that I do not?
I clench my fists slightly, determination burning within me.
I must study more.
I must train harder.
There is still so much for me to learn.
And so, as we reach our horses and begin the ride back to camp, I make myself a
promise.
One day, my Judgment will be just as strong.
One day, I will stand among the greatest of our order.
One day, I will be worthy of the Light that guides me.
For now, my journey continues.
Another year has passed.
88
Another year of duty, battle, and training.
Another year away from her.
But now, at last, my furlough has arrived.
Stratholme awaits. Adele awaits.
For once, my mind is not on the battlefield but on the road home, on the woman I love.
The moment I reach Stratholme’s gates, I waste no time.
I ride through the familiar streets, past bustling markets and ringing forges, past chapels where priests offer blessings to those who seek them.
But none of it matters—because she is all I seek.
And when I finally reach her home, when she steps outside—
The world stands still.
“Tune!”
She rushes toward me, and before I can even dismount, she is in my arms.
Her warmth, her scent, the way her hands clutch my cloak—it is everything I have missed.
I bury my face in her hair, holding her as if I will never let go.
“By the Light, I have missed you.”
“And I you,” she whispers.
Her eyes glisten, and I know—Adele loves me deeply.
And I love her.
The days that follow are filled with simple joys.
Mornings in the quiet warmth of home, where she hums softly as she prepares tea, where I sit beside her, simply grateful for her presence.
Prayers at the cathedral, kneeling together before the great altar, hands entwined as we whisper our hopes for the future.
Long walks beyond the city walls, where the fields stretch endlessly, golden under the autumn sun.
She laughs as the wind catches her hair, sending it dancing like firelight.
I smile, knowing I would trade every battle, every honor, just to see her like this.
One evening, as we sit beneath an old oak tree, I take her hand in mine.
89
“Adele, when I am promoted—when I have the rank to request a transfer back to Stratholme…”
I squeeze her fingers, looking into her deep, trusting eyes.
“Then we will be wed.”
Her breath catches.
For a moment, she says nothing.
Then, her smile blooms like the sunrise.
“I would wait a lifetime for you, Tune.”
I kiss her gently, sealing a promise that is unbreakable.
Yet, beneath all this happiness, something lingers.
A shadow. A whisper of unease.
Many in Stratholme are falling ill.
Coughing in the streets. Pale faces. Hollow eyes.
But when I ask, I am told—
“It happens every few decades.” “A passing illness. Nothing to fear.” “People always recover.”
I surely hope so.
Because even as I hold Adele’s hand in mine, even as I pray beside her, even as I dream of our future: Something does not feel right.
Happy days pass too fast.
One moment, I am holding Adele’s hand, walking beneath the golden fields of Tirisfal. The next, I am saddling my horse, preparing to leave her behind once more.
Duty calls. It always does.
But before I go, I will make sure to report what I have seen.
Too many people are sick. It may be nothing… but something tells me it isn’t.
I will speak to Justicar Thorne when I reach Hearthglen.
If there is danger in Stratholme, we must be prepared.
Saying farewell to Adele is never easy.
She stands in the doorway of her home, her hands folded, her eyes soft yet strong.
She does not beg me to stay.
90
She does not cry or protest.
She simply smiles, though I can see the sadness behind it.
“You have duties to uphold, Tune.” “And I will be here, waiting, always proud of the man you are becoming.”
I take her hands in mine, pressing one last kiss to her lips.
“When I return, it will be forever.”
“I know,” she whispers.
And with that, I mount my horse, gripping the reins.
But just before I ride, I hear a familiar voice.
“Leaving already, brother?”
I turn to see Edric, Adele’s brother—my oldest friend.
He is just arriving for his own furlough, his cloak dusted from the road, his sword at his side.
He grins, clasping my arm in greeting.
“We always seem to cross paths at the right time, don’t we?”
I laugh, shaking my head.
“A shame it’s only for a day.”
“Then we’d best make the most of it.”
For my final night in Stratholme, Edric and I share old stories—of our first battles as paladins, of the lessons we’ve learned, of the lives we’ve saved.
We drink at The Golden Hearth, an old tavern where we once dreamed of knighthood as boys.
“Do you remember when we swore we’d fight side by side forever?” Edric laughs.
“A foolish promise,” I smirk, “but an honest one.”
For now, he will stay in Stratholme—spending time with Adele, their parents, their home.
It is a comfort, knowing she will not be alone in my absence.
And as the night comes to a close, we raise our mugs one last time.
“To duty,” I say.
“And to coming home,” Edric adds.
The next morning, I ride out.
91
The sun rises over Stratholme. And for now, it is still home.
The sickness lingers, but the people live on.
Adele watches from the steps of her house, Edric beside her.
I raise a hand in farewell—and she does the same.
It is never easy to leave. But one day, I will not have to.
With that, I turn my horse toward Hearthglen.
Back to duty.
Back to the path the Light has laid before me.
I arrive at Hearthglen, expecting the usual routine—reporting in, resuming duty, and sharing news of my furlough.
But the moment I ride through the gates, I sense something is wrong.
The air is different. Men are moving with urgency. An army is assembling.
And at the center of it all—
Uther the Lightbringer.
Justicar Maric Thorne spots me first, his expression unreadable.
“Tune! I’m glad you made it back in time.”
“Sir, what is going on?” I ask, glancing at the gathered soldiers.
His answer is grim.
“There has been a summon.”
My brow furrows.
“A summon? By who?”
Thorne exhales.
“Prince Arthas himself.” “He has called Uther and the Silver Hand to the gates of Stratholme.”
My stomach tightens.
Stratholme.
Adele.
Edric.
“Why?” I ask quickly. “What did he say?”
“Only that it is urgent.”
92
That does not sit well with me.
“Sir, I was just there. The city was fine—”
I hesitate.
“Some people were sick, but I was told it was nothing serious.”
A flicker of concern crosses his face.
“Could it be another troll raid?” I offer, grasping for an answer.
Thorne shakes his head.
“We don’t know.” “But we will find out soon enough.”
“For now, get some rest. We ride in a few hours—and you’re coming with us.”
I obey, but sleep does not come.
I lie in my bunk, staring at the ceiling, my thoughts racing.
If something was wrong in Stratholme… why didn’t I see it? Why didn’t anyone?
And why does this summon feel… different?
I close my eyes and try to shake the feeling.
Tomorrow, we ride.
Tomorrow, we will know the truth.
A few hours later, Uther the Lightbringer and his large escort ride for Stratholme.
I take my place alongside Justicar Thorne, gripping the reins of my horse.
Whatever awaits us… I am not ready.
But I will face it.
Because I must.
We ride beneath the gray morning sky, a sea of banners and armor, the symbol of the Silver Hand gleaming on every chestplate and shield.
This is not a mere patrol.
This is an army.
Paladins, Justicars, senior knights—men and women who have fought against the Horde, against trolls, against forces of darkness.
They ride alongside priests in white and gold, their solemn expressions hiding their unease.
And even among us—elves.
93
Elf mages from Quel’Thalas, their shimmering robes and arcane staves marking them as allies not often seen on human battlefields.
This is a force meant for war.
But war in Stratholme?
It can’t be.
As we crest the final hill, Stratholme appears in the distance—my home, Adele’s home, Edric’s home.
And at its great iron gates, waiting for us—
Prince Arthas.
His own forces stand ready, smaller than ours, but just as disciplined.
And beside him—
Jaina Proudmoore.
I have never seen her in person, only heard the tales.
A prodigy of Dalaran. A powerful sorceress. The woman closest to the prince.
It makes sense that she is here.
But why are we here?
We halt, falling into formation near Arthas’s forces.
But even among our own, I hear the murmurs.
Soldiers whisper to one another, shifting restlessly in their saddles.
“Why so many of us?” “Are we fighting the trolls?” “Why is the prince himself here?”
I feel their unease.
Because I share it.
What is happening here? What is coming?
I don’t have an answer.
Not yet.
So for now, I grip the reins of my horse, stand tall, and wait.
Soon, we will know.
And I pray to the Light that it is not already too late.
As we take our positions, I notice something—
94
Jaina Proudmoore greets Uther like an old friend.
But there is confusion in her eyes.
She, like us, does not yet know why we are here.
Then, Arthas speaks.
His voice is strong, commanding.
“Stratholme has been infected.” “The people are already sick.” “We must act now, before it’s too late.”
The murmurs among our ranks grow louder.
Infected? Too late? What is he saying?
Uther frowns, his gaze shifting toward me.
“Paladin.”
His voice is calm but firm.
“I am aware that you were just in Stratholme recently. Is that correct?”
I stand tall, placing a hand over my chest.
“Yes, sir, that is correct.”
He nods.
“Then tell me—what have you seen?”
I take a steady breath.
“I can confirm that some people were falling ill, but the city’s doctors assured me it was nothing to worry about. That it would pass, as illnesses do.”
Uther listens carefully.
But Arthas does not.
He cuts in, his voice sharp, urgent.
“Then they lied to you!” “Stratholme has already been infected with the plague!” “We need to act now!”
His passion is undeniable.
But so is the unease that settles in my chest.
Uther, however, does not match Arthas’s urgency.
Instead, he turns back to me, his expression thoughtful.
95
“If this is as serious as Arthas claims, then the King must be informed immediately.”
I straighten.
“I will go, my lord.”
“My family is in the city.” “If there is any way I can help, I will do it.”
Uther nods approvingly.
“Very well, Paladin. Ride with the wind.”
Before I can turn to leave, Jaina steps forward.
She has been listening, and now, there is genuine concern on her face.
“Paladin, wait.”
I turn to her, and she raises a hand, murmuring an incantation.
A shimmering blue light begins to swirl before us, forming a rippling portal.
“I will open a portal for you—to the Wizard’s Sanctum in Lordaeron.” “If this is truly urgent, we must not waste time.”
I glance at Uther, seeking approval.
He gives a firm nod.
“Make sure the King understands what’s at stake.” “We will await your return with news.”
He turns away then, his focus shifting back to Arthas.
They will talk. And I will not be here to see what happens next.
Before I step through, I hesitate.
“My lord,” I ask Uther. “Should I carry something as proof of my mission?”
He considers for a brief moment, then removes his silver gauntlet, engraved with the symbol of the Silver Hand.
“Show this to King Terenas.” “It will be all the proof you need.”
I bow my head and take it, securing it to my belt.
“Now go, Paladin.”
I take one last look at my comrades, at Uther, at Arthas, at Jaina.
And then, I step through the portal.
The moment I step through the portal, I feel it.
The air is different.
96
There is an energy here, humming through the walls, pulsing in the very floor beneath me.
I stand in a circular chamber, grand and filled with arcane wonders.
Tall bookshelves line the walls, stacked with ancient tomes bound in deep blue and violet leather.
Floating candles hover near the ceiling, casting a soft ethereal glow.
A large crystalline orb sits on a pedestal, its swirling surface revealing faint glimpses of distant places.
The very walls are etched with arcane sigils, glowing faintly with residual magic.
This is the Wizard’s Sanctum, the heart of Lordaeron’s magical studies.
Before I can take in anything more, a voice interrupts.
“Who are you? How did you get here?”
I turn to see a robed mage, his hands already crackling with defensive magic.
I quickly raise my hands, palms open, showing no threat.
“I am a paladin of the Silver Hand.” “I bring an urgent message for the King.” “I was sent by Uther the Lightbringer and Lady Jaina Proudmoore.”
The mage hesitates at the mention of those names.
“Jaina?” he mutters, lowering his hands. “Very well… but you must go through the proper channels.”
“Take me to the captain of the guard,” I say.
He nods and gestures for me to follow.
The captain of the guard stands before me, a grizzled veteran clad in shining plate mail.
I waste no time, unfastening Uther’s silver gauntlet from my belt and placing it in his hands.
“Uther sent me. This is his word made steel.” “Prince Arthas has summoned the Silver Hand to Stratholme.” “He claims the city is infected.”
The captain’s expression hardens.
“Come with me.”
He leads me through the castle halls, past towering stained-glass windows depicting past kings and heroes of Lordaeron.
Then, we arrive at massive double doors, guarded by two elite knights.
One of them steps forward and opens them without a word.
I step inside.
97
And I kneel.
King Terenas Menethil II sits upon his throne of silver and blue, his gaze heavy, piercing, filled with wisdom and weariness.
He is not a young king, but he is not weak.
His crown rests lightly upon his brow, but there is weight behind his eyes.
The captain speaks first.
“My lord, this paladin arrives from Hearthglen, sent by Uther himself.”
“He bears urgent news of Prince Arthas and Stratholme.”
The King’s eyes narrow slightly.
Then, he turns to me.
“Paladin, what did my son say?”
I swallow, feeling the magnitude of this moment.
“My lord, he spoke of a plague.” “He claimed the city was already infected, and that we must act swiftly.”
The King leans forward slightly.
“And what did he have in mind?”
I hesitate.
“I do not know, my lord.” “He sounded urgent, but I was sent away before I could learn his true intentions.”
King Terenas’s expression darkens.
“And what does Uther request?”
I bow my head.
“Immediate action to protect the city, my lord.”
“If the prince is right, Stratholme is in danger.” “But if he is wrong, we risk a great mistake.”
The room is silent.
The King is deep in thought.
Then, after a long moment—
“Very well.”
“I will consult with my council and decide our next course of action.”
“You have done your duty, paladin.”
The captain of the guard escorts me out of the chamber.
98
We wait.
I don’t know how long—hours, maybe.
I pace through the great halls of Lordaeron, glancing up at the murals of past kings, at the great banners hanging from the walls.
This is the heart of the kingdom. And yet, I feel uneasy.
Finally, the captain returns.
“The King has decided.”
I stand at attention.
“Lordaeron’s army will ride to Stratholme.” “If needed, we will quarantine the city and protect its people.” “They will arrive in a few days.”
He steps closer.
“You must ride back now.” “Inform Uther and the others of the King’s decision.”
“A horse has been prepared for you.”
I nod.
“Thank you, sir.”
As I mount my new horse, the weight of my duty presses upon me.
I have spoken with the King. I have done what I was commanded. But what will I return to?
I press my heels into the horse’s sides and begin my ride back east.
Stratholme waits.
And something tells me—
I am already too late.
I ride hard.
Faster. Faster.
The wind whips against my face, but I do not slow.
I trust Uther. But I have a bad feeling about Arthas.
A terrible feeling.
Something is wrong. 99
Something is very, very wrong.
And my city—my home—is caught in the middle.
“Adele, I’m coming.”
I reach Andorhal as the sun begins to sink.
There is no time for rest.
I swap for a fresh horse, leaving my exhausted steed to recover.
I grab supplies—water, dried rations, anything to keep me moving.
I ask the traders: “Have you heard news from Stratholme?”
“No,” they say. “Just talk of sickness. But no one knows much.”
That is not enough.
That is not nearly enough.
So I ride.
Again.
No more stopping. No more slowing.
“Adele needs me.”
I lose track of time.
The world is a blur of dirt roads and dying trees, of wind rushing past me, of prayers whispered under my breath.
Then—
A camp.
A large army, stationed by the road.
Silver banners. The mark of the Silver Hand.
I pull my reins, my horse slowing to a trot.
Why are they here? They should be in Hearthglen, or moving toward Stratholme. Why aren’t they marching?
A knot tightens in my chest.
Something is wrong.
Very, very wrong.
I pull hard on the reins, my horse slowing as I reach the camp.
“Is Uther here?”
I call out to the nearest paladins, urgency thick in my voice.
100
“I come bearing news from the King!”
“Is Uther here?”
The soldiers exchange uneasy glances.
Then, a voice calls my name.
“Tune.”
I turn and see Justicar Thorne, his expression unreadable.
“Come,” he says. “I will take you to him.”
But something in his tone feels wrong.
I slow my steps.
“Sir… what is it?”
He does not answer.
The camp feels suffocating.
I pass dozens of paladins, knights, and foot soldiers—but no one meets my gaze.
Why is it so quiet? Why do they look so… lost?
“Justicar, what happened?”
Still, no answer.
He only leads me forward.
And then, we reach the largest tent in the camp.
The flap is drawn open.
Inside, Uther the Lightbringer stands among his senior paladins.
He sees me.
And I do not like what I see in his expression.
I step forward, placing a fist over my heart in salute.
“Sir, I have news from the King.”
Uther nods slowly.
I begin to speak quickly, explaining everything—
How I arrived in Lordaeron.
How King Terenas listened.
How the army would be assembled to protect the city.
This is good news. 101
Why does he not look relieved?
His expression never changes.
I feel a deep, twisting fear in my chest.
“Sir…?”
What are you not telling me?
Uther exhales slowly.
Then, he says the words that shatter my world.
“Son… it is too late.”
I blink.
“Sir, I don’t understand.”
“Too late for what?”
I look to Justicar Thorne, standing beside me.
His jaw tightens.
His hand rests on my shoulder.
But he does not speak.
Finally, Uther does.
“Arthas… he has done the unthinkable.” “He has purged Stratholme.”
I shake my head.
“What?”
The tent feels smaller.
My breathing is uneven.
“No, I—no, that can’t be right.”
Uther continues, his voice heavy.
“He gave the order to kill everyone inside.” “He claimed the people were already lost, that they would rise as undead.” “We refused.” “He disbanded the Silver Hand.”
“Then he locked the gates behind him.”
“And he burned the city.”
I take a step back.
Then another.
The world spins.
102
“No… no, that can’t be.”
“Adele is in there.” “Edric is in there.” “Their parents, my friends, my home—”
I look at them—Uther, Thorne, the senior paladins.
“And you just… left?”
Uther closes his eyes.
“We could not stop him.”
I stare at him, rage and disbelief twisting inside me.
“You should have tried!”
Uther’s eyes flash open.
For the first time, I see it.
The guilt. The sorrow. The helplessness.
“You think I do not ask myself that every moment?” “You think I do not regret leaving that city?”
His voice is raw, heavy.
“But the gates were locked behind him, Tune.” “He did not want us to interfere.” “And if we had forced our way through, we would have been forced to fight him.”
His next words crush me.
“By the time we could have broken through…” “There was nothing left.”
I cannot breathe.
My heart pounds against my ribs.
I hear Thorne speaking, his voice softer.
“Tune… I am so sorry.”
But I do not listen.
I step back.
Then I turn sharply.
And I run.
I reach my horse, mounting it in one swift motion.
“Tune!”
Thorne calls my name.
103
But I kick my heels into my horse’s sides and begin to ride.
No. No, I will not accept this. They are alive.
They have to be alive.
Behind me, I hear Uther’s final words.
“Leave him.” “He must see it for himself.”
But I am already gone.
Riding toward Stratholme.
Riding toward the ashes of my home.
I ride hard, the wind howling past me, but then—
Figures.
Moving along the dirt road.
Villagers.
Families, farmers, merchants—refugees.
I slow my horse, my chest tight with fear.
They’re fleeing the city. They saw it.
I pull up beside them, breathing heavily.
“You—you’re coming from Stratholme?”
“What happened?”
“Did anyone survive?”
Some do not meet my gaze.
Some lower their heads, as if speaking the truth will break them.
But a few—the brave, the broken—answer.
“We weren’t inside.” “We were in the camps outside the walls, the farms.” “We saw the flames. We saw…”
One of them stops, his throat tightening.
I lean forward, desperate.
“Did anyone make it out?”
A long, horrible silence.
104
Then—
“No one could.”
I kick my heels into my horse’s sides.
Faster.
No. That’s not true. Someone made it out. They had to.
Then—
Smoke.
A thin line in the sky, growing thicker as I ride closer.
Then, over the next hill—
I see it.
Stratholme.
Burning.
I freeze.
For a moment, my mind refuses to understand what I’m seeing.
The massive walls, the proud battlements, the streets I grew up on—
Engulfed in flame.
The entire city.
The rooftops collapse one by one, towers crumbling, smoke blackening the sky.
I urge my horse forward, reckless, frantic.
I reach the gates—but they are locked.
I throw myself from my horse, gripping the iron bars, pulling, shaking, screaming.
“ADELE!” “EDRIC!”
The heat is unbearable, but I do not care.
I run along the walls, searching, desperate—
There has to be another way in. There has to be.
But there is nothing.
No open gates.
105
No survivors.
Only fire.
“No, no, no!”
I find a smaller gate, one meant for city guards, and throw my weight against it.
I slam my fists against it, kick, push, pull.
I do not stop.
I do not stop.
I can still save them. I have to.
But the heat grows worse.
My arms tremble.
My vision blurs.
And then—
Darkness.
I collapse against the gate, my strength spent, my body drained.
The flames roar louder, the sky is black with ash.
My city.
My family.
Adele.
Gone.
I feel the world slipping away.
But before the darkness takes me completely, I whisper—
“By the Light… why?”
Then, there is nothing.
I do not know how long I was unconscious.
The last thing I remember is the heat, the gates that would not open, the screams I would never hear again.
Then—
A voice.
“Here, paladin. Have some water.”
I gasp awake, my throat dry, my body heavy.
106
A hand offers a waterskin, and I take it, gulping greedily.
Then, I see them.
Villagers. Refugees. Survivors—though not from Stratholme.
They stand in small, weary clusters, faces hollow, eyes filled with something I recognize all too well.
Fear.
Despair.
Loss.
I push myself upright, still dazed.
The city is still burning.
The air is thick with smoke and death.
“Where do you come from?” I ask them.
“A small town to the east,” one man says. “But we cannot stay here.”
A woman nods.
“Come. We move west.”
They look afraid.
I do not blame them.
But how can I leave?
Adele is still in there.
Edric. His family. Everyone I knew.
A man places a hand on my shoulder, gentle but firm.
“It looks like you tried your way in, paladin.” “Got family there?”
My voice is hoarse.
“My beloved.”
A flicker of understanding.
“I’m sorry, paladin. That must be hard.”
“But come west with us. You can’t stay here.”
I shake my head, stubborn.
“I have nowhere else to go.”
107
Nothing left. No home. No family.
What am I, if not hers?
But they do not relent.
“You can’t stay here.” “People are getting sick.” “The land itself is getting sick.”
I look around—truly look.
The air feels wrong.
A weight I cannot explain presses down on me.
Something is changing.
And not just in Stratholme.
The villagers look at me with pleading eyes.
“Come with us, paladin.” “We could use your protection.”
The words sting.
Protection? What protection did I offer Stratholme? What protection did I offer Adele?
But what else is there?
I look back one last time at the burning city.
And then—
I turn west.
I cannot save the dead. But perhaps, I can still save the living.
So I march with them.
The further we travel, the more I see.
Farms—empty.
Villages—abandoned.
Camps—deserted.
Not only the city has burned. Everything has been touched.
The people whisper among themselves.
“The land is cursed.”
108
“The sickness is spreading.”
“Lordaeron is doomed.”
I do not want to believe them.
But as we march, I cannot shake one thought from my mind.
“By the Light… what has happened to our lands?”
We march in silence.
Slowly.
Many are on foot, carrying what little they could salvage. A few have carts, weighed down with children, the elderly, the wounded.
The air is heavy—not just with smoke and sorrow, but something unseen, something worse.
But my mind is elsewhere.
The sick people I saw in Stratholme—the illness that the doctors dismissed—
Was that the plague Arthas warned us about?
Is that why these people are so afraid?
Are they fleeing the same sickness?
Was Arthas right all along?
No.
No, I cannot accept that.
If the people in the countryside survived…
If these refugees were untouched…
Then surely, some inside the city could have survived too.
Arthas did not have to kill everyone.
He is not just a paladin. He is our prince. Why did he not try to save someone?
I grip my reins tighter.
What madness drove his actions? Was his mind cursed? Only a twisted soul could do this to his own people.
And so, we march.
For days, through fields now empty of life.
Past farms that should be thriving, now abandoned.
109
All of Lordaeron is running. But where can they go?
Eventually, we reach Andorhal.
The town is overwhelmed with refugees.
Families huddled together, desperate for food and shelter.
Merchants guarding their remaining wares, eyes sharp with distrust.
Paladins and soldiers moving through the crowds, trying to keep order.
And among them—
Paladins of the Silver Hand.
Those who did not follow Uther to Lordaeron.
They stand in clusters, arguing, debating.
I listen.
I hear them.
Paladins. Arguing.
Some condemn Arthas, their voices heavy with disbelief.
Others defend him, speaking of sacrifice, necessity, duty.
“Arthas was right.” “No, he was a butcher!” “Uther abandoned Stratholme—what else were we supposed to do?” “We need to regroup. The Order must hold together.”
And that—
That is when I lose myself.
I turn, marching toward them, my fists clenched so tightly my knuckles burn.
One of them—a young knight, barely older than me—
“Arthas did what had to be done.” “We would all be undead now if he hadn’t acted!”
I do not think.
I do not hesitate.
I punch him.
Hard.
Bone cracks beneath my fist as he staggers back, blood pouring from his broken nose.
He falls.
110
And I roar, voice shaking with grief and fury.
“MY FIANCÉE WAS IN THAT CITY!” “DID SHE NOT DESERVE TO BE SAVED?”
Immediately, hands seize me.
Two paladins grab my arms, restraining me.
“Calm down!” one pleads.
“Calm?!”
I struggle against them.
“HOW CAN I BE CALM?” “MY ENTIRE WORLD IS GONE!” “TELL ME HOW!”
There is silence.
The gathered paladins look away.
No one has an answer.
I yank myself free.
I turn my back on them all.
I walk away, my steps unsteady, aimless.
I find a secluded corner, some forgotten space between a ruined wall and a stack of old crates.
I sit.
I lie down.
And I stare at the sky.
What now?
What am I supposed to do now?
And for the first time since I became a paladin—
I feel nothing.
Minutes turn to hours.
Hours turn to days.
And yet, nothing changes.
Refugees still come and go, aimless and broken.
Soldiers and paladins still argue, shouting over each other with no clear path forward.
I feel stuck in time.
111
As if the world moved on without me.
Then—the rumors.
They start as whispers, but they grow louder, darker, more urgent.
“Refugees from the east are sick.” “If you cough, they kill you on sight.” “They say the dead rise again.”
At first, I refuse to believe it.
But then, I see the fear in their eyes.
I hear firsthand accounts.
“They move.” “They attack.” “They are empty corpses—no soul, no mind, just death given form.”
The east is gone.
Stratholme. Gone.
Corin’s Crossing. Gone.
Darrowshire. Gone.
And the paladins? They butcher the sick before they turn.
I feel numb.
Is this what we are now? Executioners of the dying?
And then, another blow.
“Prince Arthas is assembling an expedition to Northrend.” “He says a demon is behind all of this.” “He wants revenge.”
I laugh, bitterly.
Revenge? He blames a demon for his own crimes?
Some paladins and soldiers choose to follow him.
“Good riddance.” “Let them go.” “We don’t need traitors.”
We don’t need butchers.
I turn my back on their decision.
Let them chase ghosts in the snow.
I have nothing left to follow.
112
One morning, they arrive.
An envoy of senior paladins, sent from Lordaeron, carrying orders from Uther.
And among them—
Justicar Thorne.
I do not rise to greet him.
I do not speak first.
He sees me, and for the first time, does not ask how I am.
Perhaps my expression says it all.
Instead, he speaks.
“What’s left of the Silver Hand is gathering at Hearthglen.” “We are to decide our next course.” “Uther has asked us to continue our duty—to protect these lands, to protect our people.”
He pauses.
Then, he asks the question I dread.
“Will you come with us?”
I look around me.
At the refugees, lost and broken.
At the soldiers, confused and divided.
At the paladins, torn between duty and doubt.
And at myself—a man who once believed in the Light, in justice, in hope.
Now, I feel none of those things.
I have spent days in this place, surrounded by whispers of the dead and the cries of the living.
Everywhere I turn, I hear the same stories.
“The plague spreads.” “The dead rise.” “The paladins execute the sick before they turn.”
I close my eyes.
And I see her.
Adele.
Her smile. Her kindness. Her faith in the Light.
Her burning city.
113
I open my eyes, and all I see is a dying world.
The Light did nothing. It allowed this to happen. It still allows this to happen.
If the Light cannot stop the plague, then what good is it?
If the Light still answers Arthas, then what does that mean for me?
A part of me wants to walk away from it all.
To shed my armor, abandon my oaths, disappear into the wilderness.
Would it not be easier to live in ignorance?
Would it not be simpler to give up?
To stop fighting a war that cannot be won?
But then, a voice.
Not the Light.
Not the Justicar.
Not the paladins.
Just myself.
“If I abandon my duties as a paladin…” “I am no better than Arthas.”
I grit my teeth, my hands clenching into fists.
Being a paladin is not a job.
It is not a title.
It is a way of life.
We do what we do because we believe it is right.
Even if the Light is powerless against this plague…
Even if the dead rise and the land turns to ash…
Even if Lordaeron is doomed…
There are still people who need protecting.
There are still children who need to be kept safe. Villages still standing, praying for salvation. Innocents who cannot fight for themselves.
Adele would want me to keep fighting. To keep protecting our people.
I take a deep breath.
114
I rise to my feet.
I turn to Justicar Thorne.
“We will do what we can, until the very end.”
He nods.
No words of comfort. No false promises.
Because we both know the truth.
The Silver Hand will not last forever.
The Light may not save us.
Lordaeron may already be lost.
But still, we fight.
Not because we think we will win.
But because it is the right thing to do.
And so—
I ride for Hearthglen.
Not for the Light.
Not for glory.
But for those who still have a chance to be saved.
For Adele.
For Lordaeron.
For the people who still need me.
And for them—
I will not fall.
Not yet.
The journey to Hearthglen is long and silent.
No one speaks.
No one dares to.
The land itself feels different.
The air is thick with something unnatural, something wrong.
And when we finally arrive at Hearthglen, the weight of the world is waiting for us.
The banners of the Silver Hand still fly, but they do not feel the same.
115
The courtyard is filled—paladins, knights, foot soldiers, scouts—all waiting.
Waiting for answers.
Waiting for a reason to keep going.
The senior paladins stand before us, grim-faced, weary, but unbroken.
One of them—a veteran, his armor dented from years of war—steps forward.
He raises his voice.
And the truth is spoken.
“Brothers. Sisters. Soldiers of Lordaeron.
There is no use hiding from the truth.
The plague is real. The dead do not stay dead. Scouts from the East bring the worst news—our fallen rise against us.
There is no cure. No salvation for those taken by the sickness. What we fight is not just a disease—it is a darkness that seeks to consume all we hold dear.
The crowd shifts—uneasy, silent.
But the paladin does not waver.
“To the east, there is nothing left. Stratholme is gone. Corin’s Crossing, Darrowshire—abandoned to the dead. Only Light’s Hope Chapel and Tyr’s Hand still resist, but for how long?”
A murmur runs through the crowd.
Everyone knows what this means.
Hearthglen is now the last true stronghold of the Silver Hand.
The paladin’s voice hardens.
“We will make our stand here.” “Hearthglen will not fall.” “We will fight. We will protect. We will be the last shield between the living and the damned.”
“But hear me now— We cannot lose Andorhal.”
The entire gathering stiffens.
116
“If Andorhal falls, Lordaeron starves. The farms are gone. The towns are gone. Andorhal is all that remains.”
“We will do what we can.” “We will hold the roads. We will escort every refugee, every family, every last survivor westward.” “If they reach safety, our purpose is fulfilled.”
“You will assemble in patrols. You will never ride alone. And when you need rest, when you need supplies, when you need strength—return here, to Hearthglen.”
“There will be no reinforcements. No relief. The king does not see it yet, but we do. No one is coming to save us.”
“We fight to the very end. And when that end comes, we will stand with the Light in our hearts.”
“Because we are Paladins of the Silver Hand.”
“And we do not yield.”
A moment of silence.
Then, the paladins and soldiers raise their weapons—a roar of defiance in the face of doom.
“Light be with you all.”
The question comes suddenly, cutting through the air like a blade.
“What is the King doing?”
Silence.
A long, heavy silence.
I see the senior paladins exchange glances.
They already know the truth.
But saying it aloud will make it real.
Finally, one of them speaks.
“A portion of the army—along with those who left us—have joined Arthas on his expedition to Northrend.”
The murmur begins.
“They still follow him?” “After what he did?” “Fools. They march toward a frozen grave.”
The paladin raises a hand, silencing them.
117
“The rest of the army remains behind, protecting the lands between Andorhal and Lordaeron.”
A pause.
A hesitation.
Then, the words we all knew were coming.
“On this side?”
“We are all that’s left.”
A weight settles over us.
A weight we will carry until the end.
No reinforcements. No fresh supplies. No relief.
The King will not save us. The army will not save us. The Light itself may not save us.
And so, the harsh truth is spoken.
“We are here because we chose to be.” “Because we believe there are still survivors who need us.” “The King may have abandoned us, but we will not abandon our people.”
A solemn nod from the gathered soldiers and paladins.
This is our duty.
And we will see it through.
The next few days are spent in discipline and focus.
•Sharpening our swords.
•Polishing our armor.
•Training until our muscles ache.
•Praying for strength—not for ourselves, but for those we protect.
We are divided into new patrols, just like before.
Not all of us will return.
When the time comes to assign groups, I step forward immediately.
“I request to remain with Justicar Thorne.”
He is the only leader I still trust.
I see him nod—a sign of approval.
And our corporal remains as well.
The rest?
118
Strangers.
I look at them, wondering who among us will still be standing when this war is over.
Then, the call comes.
“Time to march.”
I take one last breath, placing a hand over my heart.
“Light be with us.”
To whatever is out there.
Patrolling the roads feels different now.
Before, we searched for bandits, raiders, orcs, trolls.
Now?
The enemy we seek is our own people.
The sick.
And there is nothing we can do for them.
We pass travelers and refugees, guiding them toward Andorhal, to safety.
For a time, it is simple.
But then—
A group ahead.
Too many people, too slow.
And the moment we approach, I know.
They are not all well.
A woman steps forward, desperate, pleading.
“Please, help us.”
“The children are sick.” “We just need shelter.” “The Light will protect us.”
I close my eyes.
No, it won’t. It hasn’t. It never did.
I try casting the Light—a simple healing prayer.
Nothing changes.
The plague does not leave their bodies.
119
It never does.
And now, a decision must be made.
I hear my Justicar sigh, long and weary.
“We cannot let the plague reach Andorhal.”
It is not a debate.
It is a fact.
But the solution?
No one wants to be the one to say it aloud.
Finally, our corporal speaks.
“We separate them.”
The healthy may continue.
The sick must stay behind.
We will watch them.
If they recover, we let them pass.
If they die… we burn the bodies.
Before they can rise again.
The moment the words are spoken, the crying begins.
“No!” “Please, don’t separate us!” “We are a family!” “Don’t do this!”
A man clutches his wife’s hand, refusing to let go.
A mother holds her child, eyes filled with terror and fury.
We do not raise our weapons.
We do not shout orders.
But one by one, they are pulled apart.
Screaming.
Begging.
We do not answer.
We do not have the words.
Because what could we say?
That this is justice?
120
That this is mercy?
That this is the right thing to do?
I cannot lie to them.
Because I do not believe it myself.
We set up a camp nearby.
We leave rations, water, blankets.
We tell them, “If you recover, we will let you pass.”
We say it, because it is the only kindness we can offer.
But as we ride away, I glance back.
I see the healthy, walking toward a future.
And the sick, left behind.
And I know the truth.
They will not recover.
The plague does not leave its victims.
In a few days, they will be dead.
And we will have to return to burn their bodies.
This is what it means to protect what’s left of Lordaeron. Not through battle, not through heroism—but through sacrifice.
The worst kind.
The kind that kills the soul.
But still, we ride on.
Because we must.
Because there is nothing else left to do.
“Light be with you all,” I whisper under my breath.
And I wonder—
Does the Light even hear us anymore?
Months pass.
And with every passing day—
More sick. More bodies. More fire.
We burn so many that the sky itself grows darker, thicker with smoke.
121
The stench of death clings to everything.
It is in our armor, our clothes, our very skin.
At night, I dream of flames, of screaming, of the crackling of burning flesh.
We cannot fail. We cannot falter. But Light help me, how much more of this can we take?
And then, the news comes.
Patrols have encountered undead.
Not just rotting bodies left in fields.
Not just corpses burned before they could rise.
No—walking dead.
Abandoned towns, now crawling with them.
Farms where entire families have risen, mindless, hungry.
Some patrols never made it back.
Then, we see them.
Riders, coming fast from the east, panic in their eyes.
“A town ahead! Too many undead!” “We can’t fight them alone!”
The words send a chill down my spine.
The time has come. This was inevitable. We cannot stop every sick person, we cannot burn every body.
And now, the dead walk among us.
We gather.
We discuss.
Do we regroup and go fight? Do we cleanse the town? Kill those who are already dead?
But how do we even kill them?
There is no training for this.
We were taught to fight orcs, trolls, bandits. Not our own people, risen from their graves.
And so, a decision is made.
122
“We do not risk fighting them unless we have no choice.” “If there are no living souls left in that town, we leave it.”
Someone objects.
“We cannot leave an undead nest in our lands!”
But our Justicar silences them.
“We do not have enough men. We do not have the numbers to fight every corpse that rises.”
A new plan is formed.
We will quarantine the dead.
“We will post warnings. Signs on every road, on every wall, at every entrance.” “If no one goes near, the undead will have nothing to hunt.” “They will wander their dead streets, harming no one.”
Or so we hope.
Time will tell.
We ride to the edge of the town.
We do not enter.
From a safe distance, we see them.
Figures, stumbling through the streets.
Hollow eyes, empty hunger.
A town that once had life—now only decay.
One of the younger paladins clenches his fists.
“We should go in. We should end them.”
Our Justicar shakes his head.
“And how many will we lose? How many more of us will die fighting the dead?”
“This is not our battle. Not today.”
And so—
We place signs along every road, on every post, every abandoned house.
“Plague Town – Do Not Enter.” “The Dead Walk Here.” “Stay Away.”
We leave them to rot in their streets.
And we ride away.
Did we do the right thing? Or did we just surrender another piece of Lordaeron to death?
I suppose time will tell.
123
But deep down, I know—
Time has already given its answer.
It only gets worse.
More towns fall.
More villages are abandoned.
More corpses rise.
And we?
We cannot stop it.
We lack the numbers.
We lack the time.
Even burning the dead is no longer enough.
We can no longer keep up. We can no longer protect the lands east of Andorhal. Because there is no one left to protect.
So, we abandon it.
We fall back.
Andorhal is all that remains.
The few of us left now patrol only one road.
The road from Hearthglen to Andorhal.
Everything else?
Gone.
Uther returns to Hearthglen.
We gather, waiting for news, for orders, for hope.
But he has nothing.
No new strategy.
No reinforcements.
No miracle.
We re-supply.
We recover.
And we head back out again.
Because that is all we know how to do.
One day, as we ride toward Andorhal, we see them.
124
Undead.
On the road ahead.
We stop.
We stare.
No mind. No weapon. Just bodies that should not walk.
And yet, they do.
A decision is made.
“We need this road secure.” “We cannot just move around them.” “This time, we fight.”
We surround them.
They are more than us.
But they are slow.
Clumsy.
Mindless.
We hear the warning.
“Do not let them scratch you.”
The soldiers throw their spears first.
Some undead fall, impaled.
Others keep moving, spears jutting from their bodies.
I raise my hand.
“Be judged by the Light!”
A holy flash.
It slows them.
But no scream.
No pain.
No soul left to suffer.
How do we kill something that already died?
“Break their bones. Make them collapse. Cut off their heads if you have to.”
And so, we do.
125
Swords cut through rotten flesh. Shields smash against brittle limbs. Bones crack, spines snap, heads roll.
One by one, they fall apart.
Until nothing moves.
Until the road is silent again.
I stand over the broken corpses, breathing heavy.
It is done.
But how does it feel?
To kill those who were already dead?
I look at their ruined bodies, their hollow eyes staring at nothing.
Were they fathers? Were they sons? Did they beg for mercy when the plague took them? Did they cry for help, only to rise again as something else?
I do not know.
I will never know.
And so, I whisper a prayer.
“I just hope their souls found peace.”
And in the back of my mind, a thought I do not dare speak aloud.
“Is this what awaits all of us in the end?”
I grip my sword tighter.
We mount our horses.
We ride on.
Because there are more battles ahead.
Because there is still something left to fight for.
And because we do not know what else to do.
Months pass.
We keep losing men.
Every battle costs us lives we cannot afford to lose.
And now—we do not even return to Hearthglen.
The road is too dangerous.
We have one duty left.
126
Hold Andorhal.
One day, the scouts bring troubling news.
“Ships have been spotted to the west—Arthas has returned.”
Silence.
For a moment, I almost laugh.
Did he find his demon? The one inside himself?
Does he expect a hero’s welcome?
Will he stand upon the ruins of his kingdom and see the fruit of his labor?
And for a brief, foolish moment, I wonder—
Maybe the King will finally send reinforcements. Maybe this is the moment Lordaeron fights back.
But I do not feel hope.
Not anymore.
The next day, the news arrives.
A single rider.
Galloping full speed.
Covered in dust, barely breathing.
“He’s dead! He’s dead!”
Panic grips the town.
“Who?” “Who is dead?” “Arthas?”
Uther and the senior paladins pull the scout inside the town hall.
I rush in after them.
The room is packed.
I find a place near the back, straining to hear.
Then, the words that should not be possible.
“Arthas killed the King.” “King Terenas is dead.”
For a moment, no one breathes.
No one moves.
The words hang in the air, suffocating us.
127
“No.” “Impossible.” “This must be a mistake.”
But the scout does not waver.
“Arthas killed his own father.”
My mind refuses to accept it.
Why? Why would he do it?
Terenas stood by his side even after Stratholme.
Terenas defended him.
Terenas sent the army to Northrend for him.
Why would he murder the one man who never gave up on him?
What is he now?
Uther’s voice cuts through the room.
“The King’s Guard—what happened to them?” “Surely they stopped Arthas?”
The scout’s hands shake.
“No.” “They tried.” “But Arthas… his army…”
He swallows hard.
“He raises the dead.”
A chill runs through my spine.
“What do you mean?”
The scout’s voice is barely a whisper.
“Those that fall… he raises them.” “As undead. To fight for him.”
Gasps fill the hall.
A paladin falls to his knees, whispering prayers.
Others stare in horror.
And I—
I can only stand there, cold and numb.
128
Arthas, a paladin, raising the dead. How is that even possible? What has the world turned into?
The scout continues, his words shaking.
“Some civilians escaped.” “Jaina was there—she saved hundreds. She used her magic to take them with her.”
A murmur runs through the room.
Hundreds?
That means at least a few hundred Lordaeron citizens survived.
But it does not change the truth.
Uther stands rigid, his face like stone.
Then, finally—he speaks.
“Arthas is coming.” “And when he does, there will be nothing left of Andorhal.”
No one argues.
No one denies it.
Because we all know.
This war is no longer about saving Lordaeron.
Lordaeron is already gone.
Now, we fight only to slow the inevitable.
Now, we fight only so that more may escape.
Now, we fight knowing that we will not survive.
Our kingdom is gone.
The dream of Lordaeron, of a nation blessed by the Light, is over.
Now, there is only survival.
Over the next few days, they come.
Men, women, children.
The old, the weak, the wounded.
From Tirisfal, from the hills, from the western roads.
And they all come to Andorhal, looking for safety.
But we know the truth.
129
Andorhal will not last. The dead are coming. There is no saving this city.
And so, the decision is made.
Evacuation.
The only way out is south.
To Southshore.
And from there—to Stormwind. To anywhere but here.
But civilians travel slowly.
The elderly cannot march fast. The children will not survive without food. We cannot take them all at once.
We do not have enough paladins or soldiers to escort them all.
And so, we divide into groups.
The most vulnerable leave first.
They are escorted by soldiers and younger paladins.
I am among them.
It will take us days. But we have to do it.
We gather supplies.
We prepare for the march.
And then—we leave.
The road is slow.
Too slow.
The elderly falter, needing rest.
The children cry from hunger.
The injured lean on us, too weak to walk alone.
We help as we can.
And we thank the Light for no trouble on the road.
For now.
But as the days pass, our supplies run low.
The bread is gone.
The water is stretched thin.
The young ones grow weak, their steps faltering.
130
So, we hunt.
We track deer through the hills.
We set traps for small game.
We pray that it will be enough.
We are paladins, not hunters. But we will do whatever we must.
And finally—
After days of marching—
We see the sea.
We reach Southshore.
The moment we arrive, we go straight to the mayor.
We tell him everything.
“Andorhal is falling.” “More refugees will come.” “You must be ready.”
He nods grimly.
Southshore is small, but it is Lordaeron’s last haven.
They will do what they can.
As we prepare to return, something happens.
Some of the soldiers refuse to go back.
“We won’t make it if we return.” “The undead will be there waiting.” “This is our last chance to escape.”
I do not blame them.
They are scared.
So are we.
But fear is not an excuse. Not when there are still lives to save.
We paladins take our supplies, refill our water, and prepare to leave.
“Light protect us.” “And Light protect them.”
For what waits for us in Andorhal is not hope.
Only death.
As we ride back to Andorhal, we do not speak.
131
We do not need to.
We look at one another, and in each other’s eyes, we see the truth.
None of us expect to survive this war.
We are young.
Yet, we are already old in the ways that matter.
We have seen too much.
We have lost too much.
But still, we ride.
On any other day, we would die for our lands. For our people. Today is no different.
The enemy has changed. The mission has not.
Our journey back is faster.
There is no hesitation.
There is no delay.
When we arrive, the next group of civilians is already gathered.
They are waiting for us.
They have been waiting.
How much longer can we keep this up?
Before we leave again, we ask for one thing.
A few hours.
A few hours to rest.
To eat.
To breathe.
There is still enough grain.
There is still dried meat.
Even clean water.
But I feel it.
I know it.
This city will fall long before it ever runs out of food.
More soldiers join us this time.
132
To compensate for those who never returned.
To replace those who have given up.
To ensure we complete this duty.
Because there is still one last group of civilians that will be waiting for us.
And until they are safe, we cannot leave.
Our job is not done.
And so, we march again.
This time, the group moves faster.
Fewer elderly.
Fewer children.
But they are still civilians.
Still moving too slowly.
Still terrified of the world behind them.
We do not rush them.
Because this is their last chance.
Because we may be the last paladins they ever see.
And finally—we reach Southshore again.
And, just like before, it happens.
The soldiers refuse to return.
“There’s nothing left.”
“Andorhal is doomed.”
“What are we even going back for?”
And again—
I do not blame them.
Who would choose to return to death when they have a way out?
I simply nod.
“Light be with you all.”
I do not try to convince them.
I do not judge them.
Because part of me wishes I had the strength to stay, too.
But I don’t.
133
I made a promise.
And there is still one last group waiting for us.
This time, the road back feels different.
For the first time in weeks, there is talking.
Not prayers.
Not silence.
But questions.
“What happens after this?”
“Do we leave with the last refugees?”
“Will the senior paladins evacuate, too?”
“Why would they stay?”
And I realize something.
I don’t have an answer.
I look at the road ahead.
This will be the last time.
I feel it in my bones.
I do not say it aloud.
Because I am not the only one who knows.
Because every paladin marching beside me already understands.
And so, we return to Andorhal.
For the last time.
We reach Andorhal.
And I know—
This will be the last time.
The last refugees are gathered.
The last horses are loaded with supplies.
The last children cling to their parents, waiting for the journey ahead.
But something is wrong.
Because the senior paladins are not preparing to leave.
I need answers.
So I find him.
134
By the Light, Justicar Thorne still lives.
His armor is worn, dented.
His eyes are heavy, lined with exhaustion.
But he still stands.
He still fights.
I step forward.
“Sir, why are the paladins not ready to leave?”
He looks at me.
And for the first time, I see it in his expression. He already knows how this ends.
Finally, he speaks.
“We got reports from the west.”
His voice is steady, but hollow.
“All of Lordaeron is gone.” “Tirisfal, the farmlands, the cities… all of it.” “The plague and Arthas’ army have taken everything.” “And now, they march here.”
The words sink into my bones like ice.
It’s over. We have nothing left. No king, no home, no future.
“Then we must leave, sir.” “We must take the last civilians and go.”
He shakes his head.
“No, Tune.” “We cannot leave.”
“We are the only ones left who can stop them.”
I stare at him.
Stop them? How?
There are too many.
We have too few.
Does he truly believe we can hold this city? Or does he simply refuse to run?
“The last paladin force is here, Tune.” 135
“If we have a chance to stop Arthas, we cannot give up.”
“So, we stay too,” I say, my voice firm.
But Thorne shakes his head.
“No, Tune.” “You must take the last civilians to safety.”
I step forward, defiant.
“Then let the other paladins take them.” “I stay with you.”
He smiles.
A sad, tired smile.
“Tune, you have grown much since I met you.”
He places a hand on my shoulder.
“But please, follow my last order.” “Evacuate with them.”
I want to argue.
I want to fight.
But he stares at me, unshaken.
And I realize—
He is not asking.
He is telling.
This is his final command.
“Sir, I—”
I stop.
A voice.
A whisper.
Inside my head.
“Go, Tune.” “Protect them.” “Go.”
I freeze.
Who is this? Is this the Light?
Then, I hear another voice.
Not a whisper.
136
Not a vision.
But the other young paladins, calling out to me.
“Tune, come with us, please!”
I look back at them.
Their faces filled with desperation.
They do not want to die here.
They do not want me to die here.
I turn back to Justicar Thorne.
“Sir, please…”
His grip on my shoulder tightens.
“Go, Tune.”
And so—
I do.
I turn away.
And I walk toward the refugees.
Each step feels heavier.
Each step feels wrong.
But the decision is made.
I mount my horse.
And as we start our march, I do not look forward.
I look back.
At Andorhal, for the last time. At the Silver Hand, for the last time. At my brothers-in-arms, who I will never see again.
The march to Southshore is uneventful.
No undead on the road.
No threats from the shadows.
No battle to be fought.
We arrive without trouble.
I should feel relieved.
I should feel grateful.
But I do not.
137
I look at the faces around me.
The civilians, exhausted but safe.
The soldiers, finally breathing easy.
The young paladins, grateful to be alive.
Hope shines in their expressions.
But in my heart, there is only regret.
These people did not need me. There was no one to fight.
I should have stayed.
I should be with them.
With Justicar Thorne. With the Silver Hand. With those who chose to make their final stand.
I tell myself, “Rest will help.”
That a few hours of sleep will quiet my mind.
That in the morning, I will understand.
But when I wake up—
The regret is still there. Stronger than ever.
I rise before dawn.
I gather supplies.
I take a fresh horse.
And I leave.
Back to Andorhal. Back to the battle. Back to my brothers and sisters of the Silver Hand.
I do not know if I will make it in time.
I do not know if I will make it at all.
But I cannot run anymore.
I cannot leave them behind.
Light be with me.
And so, I ride.
Straight into the storm.
138
I do not stop.
I do not rest.
I must reach them in time. To help—or to die with them.
The Light is with me.
I will not abandon them.
And so—I ride.
When Andorhal comes into view, my heart stops.
Because I see them.
An army of the dead.
Their ranks stretch far beyond the city, endless and unnatural.
I slow my horse, guiding it carefully through the trees, moving closer—watching.
The undead surround Andorhal completely.
I see them all.
The shambling corpses – Once farmers, merchants, soldiers. Now, they march mindlessly, hollow eyes fixed forward. The skeletal warriors – Rusted armor clanking, empty sockets burning with a sickly blue glow. The monstrous abominations – Stitched flesh, fused together from many bodies, dragging massive cleavers behind them. The knights on deathly steeds – Their eyes flicker with something… different. A cruel intelligence. Can they still think? Can they still feel? **Or are they bound to him—forever?_
I keep low, moving to a small hill where I can see the battle.
And there—
I see them.
In the heart of Andorhal, a handful of paladins still fight.
They are outnumbered.
They are surrounded.
But they do not yield.
Their blades flash with holy light, striking down the dead.
Their armor is broken, their bodies exhausted.
Yet, they stand.
139
Justicar Thorne is among them.
I can see him, hammer swinging, shield raised.
A paladin until the end.
They cannot win. The dead are endless.
One by one, I watch them fall.
Until—
Only one man remains.
Uther stands alone.
Bloodied.
Breathing heavily.
But unbroken.
And then—Arthas steps forward.
I pray.
“Light be with you, Uther.”
They circle each other.
Arthas—his golden hair tarnished, his once-proud armor darkened with death.
Uther—the last true knight of Lordaeron, standing against his greatest failure.
Arthas strikes first.
His sword howls through the air, an unnatural chill following its blade.
Uther blocks with his hammer, the force sending tremors through the ground.
He counters, his hammer shining with Light, striking against the corrupted prince’s chestplate.
Arthas staggers.
For a moment—just a moment—it looks like Uther has the upper hand.
But then—
His sword moves too fast. Too fluid, too unnatural.
And in one swift motion—
Arthas drives the cursed blade into Uther’s chest.
Uther gasps.
His hammer slips from his grasp.
140
The Light around him flickers.
Arthas steps closer, twisting the sword.
“I dearly hope there’s a special place in hell waiting for you, Arthas.”
Arthas smirks.
“We may never know, Uther. I intend to live forever.”
He wrenches Frostmourne free.
Uther falls to his knees.
And in that moment—the Light erupts from him one last time.
A final burst of holy energy, so powerful that even the undead hesitate.
The last breath of a man who never lost his faith.
Then—
Uther the Lightbringer falls.
“Noooooo!”
The cry rips from my throat before I can stop it.
The last of the Silver Hand. The last hope for Lordaeron. Gone.
And my mistake is immediate.
The undead turn their heads toward me.
The mindless ones are slow.
But the knights?
They see me.
And they ride.
I run.
I stumble down the hill, reaching for my horse.
Move. Move. MOVE!
I leap into the saddle, dig my heels into its sides—
And we gallop.
But my horse is tired.
I pushed it too hard, too fast.
The undead do not tire.
141
They will run me down. They will cut me down.
And I do not know if I will escape.
I ride.
Faster. Faster. Move.
But they do not tire.
The death knights—if that is what they are—ride faster than anything I have ever seen.
They are not human.
They are not living.
And they are closing in.
I veer into the trees.
Maybe I can lose them in the woods.
Maybe I can hide.
But they do not slow down.
They know I am here. They know I am prey.
I hear them behind me.
Closer.
Closer.
Then—
Cold steel slams against my breastplate.
The impact sends me flying.
I hit the ground, hard.
Everything spins.
My lungs burn.
I try to cast Judgment of the Light—
Nothing.
Nothing happens.
The Light has forsaken me. Or I have forsaken it.
No matter.
Because this is the moment I die.
142
This is when they turn me into one of them.
Until—
A lightning strike—
Hitting them all at once.
But how?
It is not even raining.
The crack of thunder splits the sky, shaking the very earth.
And the knights fall.
For the first time, they hesitate.
And then—
The orcs come.
They burst from the trees.
Dozens. Maybe more.
They do not hesitate.
They do not stop to think.
They attack.
Boulders smash against undead helmets.
Axes carve through cursed armor.
Clubs and spears batter the knights down.
The undead fall.
And this time—
They do not rise again.
I am too weak to run.
So I lie there, breathing hard.
I did not die to the knights. Will I die to the orcs instead?
One of them approaches.
He is huge, towering over me.
He looks down, unimpressed.
And then—
“What shall we do with this tiny human?”
143
Before I can answer, I hear her.
A voice from the past.
“Nothing.”
I turn my head, struggling to rise.
And there she stands.
The female orc shaman Kargha.
The one who once saved Justicar Thorne. The one I spared.
And beside her—her mate Garthok.
He crosses his arms, speaking firmly.
“This is an honorable human.” “A paladin who once saved me and my family.” “You will not lay a hand on him.”
The large orc grunts.
“Honorable, huh?”
He studies me, unimpressed.
“I did not know humans had honor in them.”
He turns his gaze back to the others.
Waiting.
For someone to disagree.
No one does.
And I realize—
I live.
But for what purpose?
I do not know yet.
Strong hands help me stand.
The orcs surround me, studying me with curious eyes.
Some look at me with recognition.
Others with suspicion.
A few murmur, questioning.
144
“Why does this human deserve leniency?” “Why does Garthok vouch for him?” “Has he truly earned our trust?”
I try to find words—but none come.
I turn to Kargha and Garthok—the orc shaman and her warrior mate—who once owed me a life-debt.
“I… I have no words.” “By the Light, I did not expect to find you here again.” “But I am so thankful.” “I owe you my life.”
Garthok grins, crossing his arms.
“We orcs pay our debts, human.”
Kargha nods, her eyes steady.
“And we would never let an honorable warrior die at the hands of those… monstrosities.”
I pause.
“You know what happened?” “Why are you still here?” “Why did you not leave this land before?”
Garthok’s expression darkens.
“We wanted to.”
The orcs glance at each other.
Kargha speaks next.
“When we last met, we had planned to escape.” “But not all of our people were free.”
Garthok growls.
“There were still orcs trapped in the internment camps.” “Some of them were our kin. Some were too weak to flee on their own.” “We would not abandon them.”
“So we stayed.”
“We raided the camps at night, broke the chains of our brothers and sisters.” “One by one, we freed them. We gathered our warriors, our families, our old.”
“We thought we had time.”
“Then… the dead came.”
Kargha’s face darkens, her tusks twitching in frustration.
“The plague did not only take humans.” 145
“Many orcs died, and when they fell, they rose again—against us.”
A younger orc, barely more than a boy, mutters.
“I saw my uncle… My own uncle, taken by the sickness.” “I struck him down myself, but he… he stood back up.”
Garthok nods grimly.
“We lost too many.”
“The camps are empty now.”
“Not because we freed them all.”
“But because there is no one left to free.”
They look at me now.
Waiting.
Wanting to know my story.
I take a breath.
And I tell them.
I tell them about Stratholme. About the culling. About Arthas murdering his own people.
I tell them about Uther. How he stood against his fallen prince. How he died, betrayed by the very man he trained.
I tell them about Andorhal. The last stand of the Silver Hand. How they fought until the end.
And how I—
I hesitate.
How I was sent away. How I should have died with them.
They listen in silence.
Even the warriors, even the young orcs, even those who mistrust me.
Garthok crosses his arms.
“So, your kingdom is gone.”
I nod.
Kargha watches me carefully.
“And what of your faith, paladin?”
146
I look down at my hands.
I try to summon the Light.
Nothing happens.
It is gone. Or maybe I am.
I do not answer.
Because I do not know.
The orc warriors start gathering their weapons.
They look at me.
“We march soon, human.”
“We are heading to the coast.” “You should come, paladin.”
“There is nothing left for you here.”
I hesitate.
I look back the way I came.
Andorhal is gone. Uther is gone. The Silver Hand is gone.
Maybe they are right.
Maybe it is time to leave this land behind.
Maybe the Light no longer wants me.
Maybe the Light was never enough.
I take a deep breath—
And I march with them.
For the first time in my life, I walk a path not guided by the Light.
We move on foot.
The orcs do not complain.
They do not grumble.
Even the old, even the wounded.
They are used to this. They are used to war.
And though I have marched many roads—
This is the first time I march with them.
147
So, I watch.
How they move together, always aware. How they speak in short, firm words. How they never leave one behind.
Their warriors guard the flanks.
Their scouts move ahead, eyes sharp.
Even their children do not chatter idly—they watch, they listen, they learn.
They are always ready. Always prepared.
That night, we stop.
A fire is built, but small.
“We do not want to draw too much attention,” Kargha explains.
I sit near her, hesitant.
Then, I ask the question that has been growing in my mind.
“Tell me more about your people.”
She studies me for a moment.
Then, she nods.
“You have read about orcs in your books, haven’t you?”
“Yes.”
“And what did your books say?”
I hesitate.
“That you are strong. Fierce warriors. Conquerors.” “That you fight with honor, but are brutal in battle.” “That you are a people of war.”
Kargha chuckles.
“And what do your eyes tell you?”
I glance around the fire.
I see families sitting close, eating together.
I see warriors sharpening their weapons—not for conquest, but for survival.
I see a young orc child resting her head against her mother’s side, safe.
“You are more than war.”
Kargha smiles.
“Yes. We are.”
148
She begins to speak.
And I listen.
“Once, we had a home far from here.” “A world called Draenor.” “We were not always conquerors.” “We were clans, each with our own traditions, our own way of life.”
“Some were hunters. Some were craftsmen. Some were warriors, yes—but not all.” “We fought among ourselves, as all people do.” “But we also feasted together, honored our ancestors, told stories beneath the same sky.”
“Then, came the demons.”
She pauses.
The fire flickers.
“The Legion.”
Her voice grows heavier.
“They promised power.” “They whispered to our chieftains, offering strength beyond measure.” “Some resisted. But many… did not.”
She clenches her fist.
“They made us drink their cursed blood.” “They made us into something we were not.”
“And with that power… we became what your books say we are.” “Conquerors. Destroyers. Slaves to rage and bloodlust.”
“We waged war on your people.” “We tore through your lands.” “And when the demons were done with us, they cast us aside.”
Her eyes darken.
“And then your kind put us in chains.”
The orcs around us listen in silence.
None interrupt.
None deny it.
She looks at me.
149
“That is the truth of the orcs, paladin.” “Not monsters. Not savages.” “Just a people who lost their way—and now fight to find it again.”
And for the first time in my life, I see them as they truly are.
Not just warriors. Not just enemies. People.
People who have suffered, just as we have.
People trying to survive, just as I am.
I hesitate.
Then, I ask another question.
“Tell me about the shamans.”
Kargha raises a brow.
“Why do you ask?”
“Because I saw what you did.” “You healed Justicar Thorne when I could not.” “You called lightning from the sky when I thought I was dead.” “I need to understand.”
She nods.
And then, she begins.
“Shamans do not command magic as mages do.” “We do not wield holy power as your paladins do.”
“We listen.”
“The elements are not tools.” “They are not spells to be cast.” “They are spirits, ancient and wise.” “We ask for their strength, and if they deem us worthy—they answer.”
“Fire for destruction. Water for healing. Earth for endurance. Air for speed.”
“The same way your Light answers you, the elements answer us.”
She watches me closely.
“You see, paladin?” “Our paths are not so different.”
She tilts her head slightly.
“But now, I ask you—what is the Light?”
I hesitate.
“The Light is… strength. Hope. Righteousness.” 150
“It is what we paladins draw upon to heal, to fight, to protect.”
She watches me.
I can tell she hears the doubt in my voice.
And I know she is about to ask it before she even speaks.
“And do you still feel it?”
I feel my breath catch.
The fire crackles.
The other orcs are silent.
Watching.
Waiting.
I look down at my hands.
I try to summon the Light.
Nothing.
And finally—I answer honestly.
“I don’t know anymore.”
Kargha leans forward, voice calm.
“We all lose our way, Tune.” “You have suffered much. It is natural to doubt.” “But the Light has not forsaken you.”
“It is still inside you.”
“You do not need books or temples or kings to find it again.” “You need only to look within.”
Her words settle in my chest.
For the first time since Stratholme, since Andorhal… I feel something.
Not the Light.
Not yet.
But peace.
And that—is enough.
For now—we rest.
The night is cool, the stars bright.
The orcs gather around the fire, speaking in low, steady voices.
151
I sit among them, feeling the warmth of the flames but not quite belonging.
Yet, for the first time in a long time—
I do not feel alone.
But when morning comes—
We resume our journey.
We walk until the hills break—until the world opens.
And there, in the distance, nestled by the sea…
Southshore.
Familiar.
Unchanged.
And yet—
It feels like a different world.
When I was last here, I was still a paladin. Now, I do not know what I am.
Kargha notices my hesitation.
She speaks, her voice calm, steady.
“Is that your destiny, human?”
I watch the town.
The ships in the harbor.
The path forward.
And I do not know.
“I… I guess, for now, it should be.” “From that town, I can board a ship, sail far from here.”
“Far from this war. Far from this land.”
I turn to her.
“And what about you?”
She glances at the sea, distant but near.
“We will follow the coast.” “Find a pirate dock. Pay our way across the Great Sea.” “There are orcs beyond the ocean—already free.” “We will join them.”
Garthok grunts, crossing his arms.
152
“We do not belong in this land.” “We were never meant to be here.”
I nod slowly.
Neither was I.
I look between them.
These orcs—who were once my enemies.
Now, the closest thing to friends I have left.
And I wonder.
“Do you think, Kargha…” “That one day, humans and orcs can live in peace?”
She meets my gaze.
And for the first time, there is no divide between us.
No walls.
No war.
Just a question of hope.
She exhales.
“I hope so, paladin.”
“If there are more humans like you…” “Then there is hope.”
I smile faintly.
“We could learn so much from each other.”
She nods.
“Maybe one day, you humans will learn the secrets of the elements.”
I chuckle.
“And maybe one day, you orcs will learn the ways of the Light.”
She laughs, shaking her head.
“Now that would be a sight.”
For a moment—just a moment—
We are not orc and human.
We are simply two people.
Two souls who walked different paths, yet found the same truth.
The truth that there is always more to learn.
And always hope for something greater.
153
She places a hand on my shoulder.
“Light be with you, Tune.”
I place a hand over hers.
“And the elements be with you, Kargha.”
We step back.
We nod.
And without another word—
I turn toward Southshore.
And they turn to the coast.
Our paths divide.
But for the first time—I do not fear the road ahead.
At the edge of Southshore, I stop.
I turn my gaze northward.
Back to the lands I am leaving behind.
Hearthglen. Andorhal. Lordaeron. Stratholme. Adele.
Gone.
I think of the orcs. Of Kargha, of Garthok. Of what they taught me, what they showed me.
Once, I believed I knew them.
Now, I realize how little I knew of anything.
I hope they find their people. I hope they find peace. Something I have yet to find for myself.
But now, my road is my own.
And I do not know where it leads.
I walk through Southshore.
It is still crowded—refugees, soldiers, people who have not yet left.
They do not yet know what I know.
They still have hope.
Hope that someone will come.
154
Hope that there is still something to save.
Should I tell them? Should I tell them that Uther is dead? That the last of the Silver Hand fell at Andorhal? That no one is coming?
That Lordaeron is gone?
I open my mouth to speak.
And then—I stop.
Do I have the right to take their hope? Even if it is false?
I do not know.
And I do not wish to relive it.
So I say nothing.
I keep walking.
And I find a ship.
“Where is this ship bound?”
A sailor glances up.
“Stormwind.”
Stormwind.
A land far from here.
A land that has not yet fallen to the plague, the undead, the war.
A land where I might find purpose again.
I do not think.
I do not hesitate.
“I will board.”
The sailor nods.
And I step onto the ship.
I feel eyes on me.
People whisper.
They see the armor. They see the hammer. They see what I once was.
But there are no paladins left.
Not anymore.
155
Slowly, I remove my armor.
Piece by piece.
The breastplate first. The gauntlets next. The holy symbol last.
And I set them down.
This armor belongs to a paladin. And I am no longer one.
I find simple clothes.
A cloak.
Bandages.
Something that will make me just another traveler among the crowd.
Not a knight.
Not a warrior.
Not a reminder of what was lost.
I wrap the cloth around my hands.
And I sit among the others.
A nameless man.
A sailor looks at me, puzzled.
“Aren’t you a paladin?”
I do not answer.
I only stare at the horizon.
To the unknown.
To whatever comes next.
The sound of creaking wood and the salty scent of the ocean fill the air as the ship slows, guided into port by skilled dockhands. Stormwind’s harbor is bustling, a sea of ships flying banners from across Azeroth—Kul Tiras, Menethil, Theramore, and beyond. Merchants shout over one another, sailors haul crates filled with goods, and beggars linger near the piers, hoping for the generosity of travelers.
As I step off the ship onto the wooden planks of the harbor, the sheer scale of Stormwind looms before me. Massive white stone walls rise against the sky, bathed in the morning sun, their banners fluttering proudly in the wind. I expected something grand, but this… this is unlike anything I’ve ever seen.
156
For a moment, my chest tightens. Stratholme had walls too. It had markets, bustling streets, and proud banners. Now, it has nothing but silence and death. I close my eyes, forcing the memory away. This is not Lordaeron. This city still stands.
I walk through the gates, past the heavily armored guards, their tabards displaying the golden lion of Stormwind. Their faces are hardened, disciplined, yet they only glance at me briefly before returning to their watch. They do not know me. They do not know what I’ve seen. To them, I am just another refugee, another nameless face lost in the tide of history.
The streets of the Trade District are alive with movement—vendors selling everything from fresh-baked bread to enchanted trinkets, street performers playing tunes on lutes and flutes, mercenaries sharpening their blades before their next contract. The scents of roasted meat, baked pies, and freshly brewed ale mix with the damp smell of the canals. Everywhere I look, there is life.
I stop at a fountain, watching as children laugh and splash each other with water. A mother scolds her son for straying too far, grabbing him by the hand and pulling him close. For a brief moment, I imagine Adele here, holding our child. But I shake my head. No. I cannot afford to hope for things I do not know to be true.
My steps take me toward Stormwind Keep, the towering heart of the city. Its spires reach toward the heavens, a fortress of white stone and blue banners. Inside, the highest lords of Stormwind gather, yet I know the throne is empty.
King Varian Wrynn is missing. Some say he was taken. Some say he is dead. In his place, Lord Bolvar Fordragon rules as regent, watching over the boy-prince, Anduin Wrynn.
I do not enter. This is not my place. Not yet.
I find myself drawn to the Cathedral of Light, its great bell ringing in the distance. Its towering arches and golden glass windows remind me of Lordaeron’s great chapels. Once, the Silver Hand stood strong, its paladins an unshakable pillar of faith and justice. Now, we are few.
Inside, the air is thick with incense. Priests kneel in silent prayer, while a group of paladins stands in the hall, speaking in hushed tones. I watch them, trying to gauge their purpose. Are they still true to the Light, or are they simply warriors for hire now?
For the first time since setting foot in this city, I kneel and pray. I ask the Light for guidance, for strength, for purpose. But most of all, I ask for forgiveness.
I do not feel an answer. Perhaps the Light no longer hears me.
From the cathedral, I wander across the canals to the Mage Quarter, where the great tower of Stormwind’s wizards stands. The energy here is different—unnatural, buzzing in the air.
Robed figures move through the streets, muttering incantations under their breath. Arcane lights flicker above doorways, casting eerie glows against the cobblestone streets.
157
I pause outside the Tower of the Arcane, watching as a portal shimmers into existence. A mage steps through, vanishing into nothingness. Magic is not my path, but I respect its power.
The deeper I wander, the more I see the true face of Stormwind. Not just the grandeur of its keep or the purity of its cathedral, but the darkness festering beneath its shining walls.
In the Old Town, I pass by a group of men in tattered clothes, their eyes hollow, whispering among themselves. Defias? Criminals? Deserters? Stormwind is not without its shadows.
And then, The Stockades. A massive stone prison beneath the city, filled with cutthroats, thieves, and traitors. The guards stand at its entrance, their weapons always ready.
Even in a city of Light, darkness still thrives.
I smell the Dwarven District before I see it—the heavy scent of burning coal, molten metal, and sweat.
Inside the great forges, dwarves and humans work side by side, hammering steel into weapons and armor. Here, warriors come to repair their gear, purchase new blades, or drink beside roaring fires.
By the time the sun begins to set, I have seen all of Stormwind.
A city of faith and corruption, order and chaos, warriors and merchants, nobles and beggars. A city where people live—truly live—without the fear of war looming over them.
It is overwhelming. I feel like an outsider in a world that has moved on without me.
But perhaps, here, I can find purpose again. Perhaps, here, I can find peace.
The days pass in a blur. I wander the streets, watching, listening, trying to understand this city.
I traded my sword for some coin—a painful decision, but necessary. It was a fine weapon, well-worn but reliable, a part of my past. But a man cannot eat steel.
At least now, I can buy meals for a few days. A warm bowl of stew, a cup of ale, simple bread. Small comforts in a world that no longer feels familiar.
I spend my nights in taverns, where the heart of the city truly beats. In these dimly lit halls, with firelight flickering against stone walls and the scent of roasted meat in the air, people talk freely. They drink, they laugh, they whisper, they argue. And I listen.
“Did you hear? The dead walk the streets of Lordaeron!” A man in a merchant’s coat leans forward, eyes wide with excitement. “A whole army of them! People say Arthas himself commands them—his own soldiers, back from the grave!”
158
“Bah,” scoffs another, a bearded trader with ink-stained fingers. “They say a lot of things. I heard the paladins fled like cowards, left the people to die.”
I tighten my grip on my tankard. They have no idea.
A younger man, barely more than a boy, speaks up. “No, no, that’s not it! I heard Arthas was cursed! That sword he found in Northrend—it took his soul! He wasn’t in control!”
“A convenient excuse,” mutters an older knight, his armor battered. “A prince should be stronger than that.”
A woman in traveling robes shakes her head. “I met a refugee from Southshore. She said not everyone in Lordaeron died. Some are still out there—hiding, surviving. But the dead keep coming.”
But not all the talk is about Lordaeron. The people here have their own problems.
“The King is gone, and we’re left with nobles who care more about their coin purses than the people.” A burly blacksmith grumbles into his ale, shaking his head. “Bolvar’s a fine man, but he ain’t the King.”
“The Defias are getting bolder.” A guard leans forward, voice low. “Caravans disappearing. Farmsteads burned. VanCleef’s men are still out there, in those cursed woods.”
“Bandits?” The blacksmith snorts. “Try traitors. Half of them were builders of this city— Stormwind cast them aside, and now they’re striking back.”
“And where’s the army?” An older merchant slams his cup onto the table. “We’re sending soldiers to the Burning Steppes, fighting dragons in Blackrock Mountain, but we can’t keep our own roads safe? Ridiculous!”
“And what about the nobles?” The merchant sneers. “That Lady Prestor—she has her claws deep in Stormwind’s court. Don’t trust her one bit.”
I listen to it all. The speculation, the rumors, the half-truths.
They talk about Lordaeron like it was a distant storm—terrible, but far away, something to be gossiped about over drinks.
They have no idea. They didn’t see the streets choked with corpses. The homes f illed with silence. The city burning as the people screamed.
They don’t know what it’s like to see your own countrymen twisted into monsters, to watch friends and family die only to rise again.
But I do not blame them.
How could I?
159
This city still stands. Its people are alive, their children play in the streets, they wake up without fear.
They don’t understand what it’s like to lose everything.
For days, I wandered Stormwind, searching for purpose, searching for meaning. The past clings to me like a ghost, refusing to let me move forward.
But last night, the dream came.
A voice. A spirit. Calling me.
“Find me.”
I wake with the whisper still in my ears. I sit up in the dim light of my rented room, running a hand over my face.
I remember this vision. It was the first I ever had, in that cave, the night before I became a paladin.
But why now? Why, after all this time, does it return?
Is it the Light? Some lost soul? A trick of my own mind?
I have no answers. Only questions.
I lost everything. My home, my order, my future. But Stormwind still stands. It is a city full of life, of families, of people who wake without fear of death waiting outside their doors.
They deserve to be protected.
And I know how to fight. I was trained to protect, to serve. That is all I have ever known.
Maybe I can no longer call upon the Light, but a sword does not need faith to be sharp. A shield does not need prayers to protect.
A soldier.
That is what I can be. It is a purpose, a job, a way forward.
I take a deep breath. The decision is made.
The morning air is crisp as I make my way through the Trade District, the sun barely risen above the high walls of Stormwind. The streets are quieter than usual—merchants still setting up their stalls, city guards standing watch at the corners, citizens moving with the sluggish pace of dawn.
I know where I’m going. I asked around the night before, and the recruitment post is near the barracks, close to the Old Town district.
The barracks loom ahead, a fortress within the city, its stone walls marked with the golden lion of Stormwind. Even from a distance, I hear the clatter of armor, the bark of drill sergeants, the ring of steel on steel from the nearby training grounds.
This is it. My first step toward a new future.
I adjust my cloak, straighten my back, and step inside.
160
The room is simple but functional. A long wooden desk sits in the center, stacks of parchment and ink bottles scattered across its surface. A man in a blue Stormwind tabard sits behind it, a quill in his hand, studying a list of names.
Two other men wait in line ahead of me—young, eager, barely more than boys. One shifts nervously, the other tries to stand tall, as if puffing out his chest will make him look stronger.
A sergeant stands nearby, his armor polished but scarred, a man who has clearly seen battle. He watches each recruit with a calculating gaze, judging them before they even speak.
When it’s my turn, I step forward.
“Name?” the recruiter asks without looking up.
“Tune,” I say firmly.
He dips his quill in ink. “Family name?”
I pause. “…Victor’s son.”
The recruiter glances at me, arching an eyebrow but says nothing. “Previous experience?”
I hesitate. I could tell them I was a paladin of the Silver Hand. I could tell them I fought troll raiding parties, orcs, and even the undead.
But I don’t.
“None,” I say instead.
The recruiter looks at me fully now, eyes narrowing. “None? And yet, you carry yourself like a fighter.”
I say nothing.
After a long moment, he writes something down and gestures to the sergeant.
“Take him to the barracks. Get him geared up.”
And just like that, I become a soldier of Stormwind.
The barracks are a city within a city, a place of strict discipline, of iron-bound routine. As I step through the stone archway, I see dozens of soldiers moving about.
Some are training in the yard—sparring with wooden swords, lifting heavy sacks, running laps in full armor. Others are gathered near the mess hall, eating their morning meals.
The sergeant leads me inside. The air smells of sweat, leather, and damp stone. Rows of simple wooden bunks stretch along the walls, each with a small chest at the foot for personal belongings.
161
“This is where you’ll sleep,” the sergeant says. “You’re with the new recruits, over there.” He points toward a group of men, some still half-dressed in armor, chatting amongst themselves.
A voice calls out.
“Fresh blood?” A soldier grins, adjusting his belt. “Hope you know how to swing a sword, lad.”
I offer a small nod, unsure how to respond.
A bulkier man, already wearing his chainmail, looks me up and down. “Don’t look like a farmer,” he mutters. “Where you from?”
“Lordaeron,” I say, my voice neutral.
Silence.
A few glances are exchanged. Some of these men heard the stories. Some probably think I ran instead of fought.
“Well,” the first man speaks again, trying to break the tension, “if you survived that, you’ll be just fine here.”
Later, they bring me my armor. A set of chainmail, well-crafted but practical, with a blue surcoat bearing the golden lion of Stormwind.
I run my fingers over the symbol.
Once, I wore the mark of the Silver Hand. Once, I stood for Lordaeron. Now, I wear the crest of another kingdom, another cause.
I don’t know how to feel. Is this betrayal? Or is it simply moving forward?
I tighten the belt, adjusting the fit of the armor. It’s not as heavy as my old plate, but it will do.
A soldier passing by slaps me on the shoulder. “Looks good on you, lad. Get used to it. That’s your new life now.”
I nod. Yes. This is my life now.
The next weeks are brutal.
Every morning begins before dawn, with physical training—running, lifting, sparring. Weapons training comes next. Swords, shields, spears, learning how to fight in formation. Marching drills, discipline exercises, combat scenarios. Some struggle, some thrive. I keep my head down and do the work.
I already know how to fight, but I keep my skills quiet. I do not call on the Light. I do not speak of my past.
One day, a recruit asks the sergeant, “What kind of threats do we really deal with?”
The answer is sobering.
162
“Stormwind is not as safe as it looks. Bandits, Defias, orcs still hiding in the mountains, and lately… strange creatures in the deep forests.”**
Rumors spread among the soldiers:
“Defias thugs are getting bolder, attacking patrols outside Westfall.” “Blackrock orcs still lurk in the Redridge mountains.” “People go missing near Duskwood. The locals say it’s ghosts.”
But the most serious talk is about something different:
“The Burning Steppes. Something’s happening there. Some say the Blackrock orcs are rallying.”
I listen. I don’t speak.
But I wonder—how long before we are sent beyond these walls?
The next day, the barracks hum with the usual routine—men sharpening swords, polishing armor, laughing, and trading stories of past battles and future ambitions. The scent of sweat, steel, and burning torch oil lingers in the air.
Then, a voice booms from outside.
“Come! Who dares to face me?”
The room falls silent for a moment. Then, the shuffling of boots and the murmurs of curiosity begin.
“Someone’s asking for duels,” one soldier says, grinning.
Another shouts, “A warrior is looking for a fight!”
A warrior? I furrow my brow. What does that even mean?
I follow the others as they push outside into the drilling yard, a wide-open space of packed dirt and wooden training dummies, where recruits spar under the watchful eyes of sergeants.
In the center stands a man unlike any I’ve ever seen.
He is massive. Not as big as an orc, but close—a wall of muscle, veins like cables running down his arms, a chest broad as a warhorse. His stance is relaxed, confident, a predator waiting for prey.
But what stands out the most—he wears no armor. No shield, no heavy plating, just a leather harness across his chest and thick bracers on his forearms.
And in his hand? A wooden sword.
“Who among you has the courage?” he bellows, turning slowly to face the gathered soldiers. “Who will duel me?”
Laughter ripples through the crowd. Some men whisper among themselves, making wagers.
163
“I’ll take that bet!” calls one of the soldiers, stepping forward. A standard infantryman, clad in chainmail with a kite shield and training sword.
A good match. A soldier in full gear against a bare-chested warrior with only a wooden blade? The outcome should be obvious.
Except it isn’t.
The sergeant nods, giving the signal. “Begin!”
The soldier braces, shield up, waiting for the warrior to make his move.
But the warrior does not move.
For a moment, he stands completely still. And then—he explodes.
A blur of motion. A force of nature.
He charges forward with inhuman speed—one moment across the yard, the next crashing into the soldier like a boulder hurled by a catapult.
The impact is monstrous. The shield is torn away, the soldier lifted off his feet, hurled backward several meters through the air before landing in a heap.
Gasps ripple through the crowd. I have never seen such raw power in melee combat.
The soldier groans, struggling to stand. The warrior steps back, allowing him to recover.
“Again,” he says simply.
Another soldier steps forward, a more experienced fighter, confident after seeing the first bout.
“Try that again,” he taunts, gripping his sword tight.
The warrior grins. “Gladly.”
The moment the match begins, the warrior moves—not charging, but leaping into the air, an impossible distance, as if gravity itself means nothing.
He comes down with a crushing downward strike, forcing the soldier to stumble back.
Before he can react, the warrior’s movements flow like water—a spinning strike that sends the training sword flying from the soldier’s hands, landing several feet away.
A perfect disarm.
“Weaponless already?” the warrior chuckles. “I expected more.”
The watching soldiers burst into cheers and shouts. Bets are exchanged. Some laugh, others shake their heads in disbelief.
More try their luck. None succeed.
164
A spearman tries to hold him at range. The warrior ducks under the thrust and delivers an upward strike so hard the spearman stumbles and falls backward. A swordfighter tries to go for speed, but the warrior parries each strike effortlessly before slamming his shoulder into his opponent’s chest, sending him sprawling. Even two soldiers at once make no difference. The warrior moves between them like a storm, knocking one off balance with a well-placed kick before slamming the other with the flat of his blade.
Each duel ends the same way—a swift, brutal domination of his opponent.
These soldiers are trained men. But this warrior? He is something else entirely.
I step forward, my curiosity burning. “Who are you?” I ask. “You fight differently than any soldier I’ve seen.”
The warrior grins. “We are Warriors, lad.”
I blink. “That’s… not an answer.”
His laughter is deep, thunderous. “We are the first into battle and the last to leave. We f ight not with magic, nor faith—but with raw strength, skill, and willpower. We push our bodies beyond mortal limits. We train every muscle, every instinct. While others rely on spells and prayers, we are the weapon.”
I swallow. A force of nature, honed through nothing but sheer will.
“What’s your name?” I ask him.
He smirks. “Dain Ironfist.”
An appropriate name.
He claps me on the shoulder, and it nearly knocks me over. “Good to see a Lordaeron lad still standing. You ever want to learn real fighting, come find me at the training grounds.”
With that, he turns away, heading toward the barracks, laughing and joking with the men who watched him fight.
The soldiers around me are still talking, still shaking their heads in disbelief. Some are inspired. Some are irritated. Some—like me—are thinking.
A warrior, not of title, but of strength.
The world is larger than I ever imagined. Paladins, shamans, mages, priests, and now… warriors, who bend steel and flesh to their will.
For the first time in a long while, I feel something.
Not faith. Not anger.
Curiosity.
This world still has much to teach me.
But for now—it is time to march.
Eventually, the day comes.
165
The sergeant gathers a group of us in the training yard. “You’ve been here long enough. Time to see how well you march outside the walls.”
A squad of ten soldiers, led by an experienced captain. A routine patrol—down the main roads, into Elwynn Forest, checking for trouble.
I adjust my sword. A new blade. A new cause.
The city gates rise before us, and as they open, the world outside Stormwind awaits.
We march.
There is no turning back now.
The road out of Stormwind’s towering gates leads straight into the rolling, peaceful countryside of Elwynn Forest. And before anything else, we pass through Goldshire.
Goldshire is a village like many others in the kingdom—simple, but full of life.
The main road is lined with sturdy timber houses, their thatched roofs golden in the morning sun. Smoke drifts lazily from chimneys, the scent of freshly baked bread and burning oak filling the air.
A blacksmith hammers steel outside his forge, his apprentice working the bellows. The rhythmic clang of hammer on anvil rings out over the chatter of villagers and the occasional clucking of chickens.
Children run barefoot between the buildings, chasing each other with wooden swords, laughing without a care. A pair of hunters skin a fresh stag near the inn, while an old farmer loads a cart with sacks of flour for the journey to Stormwind.
At the Lion’s Pride Inn, the largest building in the village, travelers and locals alike gather—merchants on their way to Stormwind, farmers from the outlying homesteads, even a few adventurers clad in mismatched armor, looking for work or a strong drink before heading deeper into the wilds.
As we pass, some of the villagers nod politely, recognizing the Stormwind tabards we wear. Others barely glance our way—soldiers come and go through Goldshire often, and the village is used to seeing patrols march through its streets.
For them, life goes on as it always has. Peaceful. Simple.
Past Goldshire, the land opens up into rolling green fields, bordered by tall oak trees that stretch toward the sky.
The road is well-traveled, but the wilderness beyond is untouched, full of life.
The grass sways gently in the breeze, a sea of green stretching toward the horizon. Wildflowers bloom in bursts of color along the roadside—vibrant blues, reds, and yellows. The great oaks of Elwynn stand proud, their thick branches casting cool shadows over the dirt path.
166
The sound of birdsong fills the air—robins and sparrows, their cheerful tunes blending with the rustling leaves.
Somewhere in the distance, a woodpecker taps against a tree, and from beyond the hills, I hear the distant lowing of cattle from a farmstead.
I inhale deeply, the fresh scent of earth and leaves filling my lungs.
It feels strange—this land, so full of life, untouched by war.
It reminds me of home.
The farms, the open fields, the smell of fresh-cut hay in the morning. The way the light caught the wheat as it swayed in the wind, the sound of my father’s voice as he called the horses in at dusk.
Stratholme was a city, yes, but it was surrounded by farmland—small communities just like this one.
For a moment, I close my eyes, trying to hold onto the memory.
But home is gone.
I open my eyes and tighten my grip on the hilt of my sword. This is my home now. These are the lands I must protect.
As we march, we pass several small farmsteads.
Fields of golden wheat stand tall, swaying with the wind.
Cows and sheep graze lazily behind wooden fences, their shepherds leaning on staves, watching over them.
Farmhands move between rows of crops, harvesting vegetables, checking irrigation ditches, wiping sweat from their brows under the warm sun.
A farmer waves as we pass, his face weathered, but kind. The soldiers beside me nod in return.
Life here seems so normal. So untouched by the horrors I have seen.
But for how long?
Stormwind’s soldiers patrol these roads often, yet I hear the whispers in the barracks— bandits in Westfall, Defias attacks on caravans, even rumors of creatures lurking near the Duskwood border.
The people here don’t seem afraid. They still laugh, they still work, they still gather for meals at night.
I envy them.
But it is my duty to make sure they stay this way.
We march on.
As we pass by Goldshire, we come across a cart filled with grain, pulled by two horses and driven by two men. They appear to be coming from a nearby farm. Unlike other 167
travelers we encounter, they don’t naturally greet us. Our captain offers them a friendly greeting, but when they respond, something in their tone feels off. They avoid looking at us directly.
Something isn’t right.
“Sir,” I say quietly to my captain, “something is off about them.”
“What’s the matter, soldier?” he asks, glancing at me with curiosity.
Before I can explain, I slow my horse and turn back toward the cart, stepping in front of them. The two men exchange quick glances, their hands tightening on the reins.
“You two,” I say firmly, “where are you coming from?”
They look surprised by the question. “What? We—we just came from the farm over there,” one of them stammers, gesturing vaguely toward the fields.
“What’s the name of the farm?” I ask.
Again, they hesitate. “What? Why are you asking us this?”
The way they repeat the question instead of answering it tells me everything I need to know. I step closer, scanning their clothing. They aren’t dressed like common traders. Their tunics are slightly oversized, hanging in a way that could easily conceal small weapons or stolen goods.
“Dismount from the cart,” I command. “We need to inspect you.”
My captain raises an eyebrow but doesn’t intervene. He watches, waiting to see where I go with this. The rest of the patrol spreads out, subtly surrounding the cart and the two men.
The travelers shift uncomfortably. One grips the seat of the cart, knuckles white. The other glances around, as if calculating an escape route. But they don’t move.
“Now,” I say, my tone sharper.
Slowly, reluctantly, they climb down from the cart.
“What are you hiding?” I ask.
“Nothing,” one of them says, forcing a nervous chuckle.
I don’t believe him. “Search them,” I say, turning to my captain.
“You better be right about this, soldier,” the captain warns, but then nods. “Men, check them for weapons.”
At those words, the two men panic. In a flash, they reach under their tunics and pull out hidden daggers. Their weapons were strapped to their sides, tucked beneath layers of cloth, secured in concealed pouches.
One of them lunges at me. I expected this. Before he can strike, I step aside and drive my fist into his stomach. He gasps, doubling over, and crumples to his knees. The other thief turns to run, but the soldiers react instantly. A spear presses against his back before he can take a step. Another soldier seizes his arm, twisting the dagger from his grasp.
168
The first thief tries to push himself up, but I place my boot on his back, forcing him down. My captain approaches and pulls back the edge of the man’s tunic, revealing a red sash tied around his belt.
“Defias thieves,” the captain mutters.
The name is familiar, but I have never encountered them before. The Defias Brotherhood—rebels, bandits, whatever people call them—are said to be behind much of the trouble in Elwynn Forest. But this is the first time I’ve seen them up close.
The thief beneath my boot grins despite his position. “You don’t even know what you’re f ighting for, do you?” he sneers. “Puppets of the nobles, that’s all you are.”
I ignore his words, but they linger in my mind.
The soldiers bind their hands and move to inspect the cart. We need to know exactly what these two were planning.
With the two prisoners tied up, our corporal steps forward, arms crossed, his expression sharp. “Start talking,” he orders. “What’s the Defias planning? Where were you taking this cart? And what did you do to the people at the farm?”
The two men remain silent, their expressions hard.
The captain shakes his head. “No point, Corporal. The Defias don’t talk easy. We’ll find our answers at the farm.”
A plan is set. Two recruits stay behind to guard the prisoners while the rest of us ride toward the farm.
There’s no way to know what awaits us.
As we reach the farm, something is wrong.
Everything is quiet. Too quiet.
In any normal situation, a farmer would step outside to greet us, wary but respectful of an approaching patrol. But now, not a single soul appears.
A bad feeling creeps into my gut.
“Stay sharp,” the captain warns. The soldiers spread out, advancing carefully.
Then, near the barn—movement.
Suddenly, a group of ragged men burst from cover, wielding knives and small weapons.
Defias.
They rush us in a desperate attack, but they are untrained and poorly armed. This isn’t a battle—it’s an ambush fueled by desperation.
Swords flash, shields slam forward, and within moments, the Defias are overwhelmed and restrained.
169
Inside the barn, we find a terrified family—bound, gagged, shaken but alive. The mother is the first to react, tears streaming down her face as she clutches her husband’s arm.
Then her eyes widen in horror.
“My daughter! They have my daughter! Please, save her!”
We turn to the farmhouse just as the door swings open.
A lone Defias thug steps out, dragging a young girl in front of him.
She’s no older than eight or nine, trembling, her eyes red from crying. A knife glints at her throat.
“Stay back!” the man shouts, his grip tightening. “Or the girl dies!”
The mother screams in pure agony.
The soldiers hesitate, surrounding him slowly, but I see the danger.
If anyone moves too fast, he will cut her throat.
I try to read his face, his body language. Would he really kill a child? Or is he bluffing?
But his eyes are wild, his breathing erratic. This isn’t just a negotiation. This is panic. If we push him, he might act without thinking.
Think, Tune. Think.
I glance at the soldiers. They’re tense, waiting for an opening. The captain’s fingers twitch, hovering near his sword. The other soldiers look at one another, searching for the right moment to strike.
But there is no right moment.
The bandit yells again. “I’m going to leave, and you will do nothing! If you follow me, the girl dies. If you try anything, the girl dies!”
Then, he says the words that ignite something inside me.
“I’ll take her with me, for my safety.”
That’s it. That’s the breaking point.
The idea of this filth taking a child hostage, dragging her away from her family—into the hands of the Defias?
No. I won’t allow it.
I grit my teeth. Enough.
And then it happens.
A pulse of energy rises within me, raw and powerful.
An invisible force compels me to raise my left hand. I don’t think—I just act.
170
A blinding flash of holy light erupts from my palm, striking the bandit’s throat.
He screams, his grip loosens, and he staggers back, dropping the knife.
Before he can recover, the soldiers rush forward, grabbing him, restraining him. A few of them slam their fists into his stomach for good measure.
But I don’t watch.
I don’t move.
I stare at my hand.
I cast Judgment.
The Light—the same power I thought had abandoned me, the power I believed was lost—it answered me.
I feel my breath hitch. How?
I thought I was forsaken. I thought my faith was gone. But in this moment, when an innocent life was at stake, the Light answered my call.
Does this mean…?
Is the Light still with me?
The girl runs to her mother, crying, burying her face in her arms.
The mother collapses to her knees, holding her daughter tight, sobbing words of thanks.
The soldiers finish tying up the remaining Defias. The captain places a firm hand on my shoulder.
“Good work, soldier,” he says.
I nod, but my mind is elsewhere.
I look down at my hand once more, flexing my fingers.
The Light never left me.
I left it.
But now, maybe—just maybe—I can find my way back.
As the rest of the soldiers spread out to secure the area, making sure no more Defias lurk in the shadows, I take a deep breath. My pulse is still racing, my mind still replaying what just happened.
We gather the prisoners and prepare to return to the main road. The rescued family thanks us, the mother unable to stop crying as she clutches her daughter tightly. Seeing them safe should bring me relief, but my thoughts are elsewhere.
The Light. I used it again. But how? And why now, after all this time?
As we march back toward Stormwind, the captain turns in his saddle and looks at me.
171
“Soldier,” he calls out, loud enough for everyone to hear. “When we return to Stormwind, we should talk.”
I blink. “Sir?”
His expression gives nothing away. “We’ll talk when we get back.”
I nod, but inside, I can’t help but wonder. Did I do something wrong? Is he upset that I acted without orders? No, that can’t be it—he had no issue when I first suspected the Defias.
So, what does he want to ask me?
I also hear the whispers. The other soldiers, speaking in low voices, casting glances in my direction as they march. They’re talking about what I did. About the Light.
I don’t know what to tell them. I don’t even know how to explain it to myself.
So I keep quiet.
By nightfall, we reach Stormwind.
The prisoners are handed over to the guards at the Stockades, who take them without question. The Defias have become a growing problem, and this won’t be the last time they see men like these thrown behind bars.
From there, we return to the barracks. I expect to be dismissed for the night, but as I start toward the barracks door, the corporal steps in my path.
“Soldier,” he says, lowering his voice. “The captain asked you to wait here for him. He wishes to speak with you.”
I hesitate for a moment. “Very well,” I reply.
I step back, standing near the entrance as the others head inside.
Alone now, I watch the city around me. The streets are still busy, lanterns flickering, people laughing in taverns. The world moves on, unaware of what just happened.
I clench my fist. The Light answered me again. And now, it seems, I’ll have to answer for it.
I wait.
As the captain returns, I straighten my posture, expecting him to speak. But he is not alone. Beside him walks another man—one unlike any I’ve met before.
His presence commands respect before a single word is spoken. His armor, a magnificent set of polished silver plate, shines under the torchlight, etched with symbols of the Holy Light. A heavy cape, deep blue and trimmed with gold, flows behind him, marking him as a man of stature. His face is strong and weathered, framed by a short beard, his eyes sharp and piercing, yet not unkind. He walks with absolute confidence, his every step heavy with purpose.
The soldiers nearby fall silent. They know who he is.
172
“This is the soldier I told you about,” the captain says, gesturing toward me. “Soldier, meet Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker.”
Shadowbreaker. The name alone is enough to strike something deep inside me. I knew of him, of course. Back in Lordaeron, when I trained as a Paladin, his name was spoken in reverence. One of the last remaining Paladin Lords of Stormwind. A warrior of the Light, a mentor, a judge, and a protector.
I stand firm. “Sir.”
He regards me, his gaze seeming to weigh my very soul. This man sees through lies. Through doubt. Through weakness.
“Soldier, what is your name?” His voice is deep, commanding, but not cruel.
“I am Tune, son of Victor. Palad…” I stop. Forced habit. A title I no longer have the right to claim.
But Shadowbreaker does not miss it.
“Your captain told me of your deeds today,” he continues. “You have shown great experience in your patrol for a simple recruit. You remained calm under pressure, suspected deception where others did not, and prevented harm to innocent lives. And…” his gaze sharpens, “he told me you called upon the Holy Light to strike down an enemy.”
I swallow hard. “Sir… yes, sir.”
“You have the posture of a Paladin.” He folds his arms. “Tell me the truth, soldier. Were you a Paladin of the Silver Hand?”
I glance between them—Shadowbreaker, the captain. No point in hiding it now. This man can see straight through me.
“Yes, sir,” I reply.
The captain lets out a small breath, perhaps confirming his suspicions. Shadowbreaker, however, remains unreadable.
“Then why didn’t you say so before?” he asks. “Why take up a recruit’s mantle? Why serve as a mere foot soldier?”
I hesitate. How do I even begin to explain? How do I put into words what I saw—the Culling, the screams, the fire, the betrayal? How my faith was shattered, how I felt the Light abandon me when I needed it most?
I struggle for an answer, but I have none.
Shadowbreaker watches me carefully, then speaks again—this time, his voice carrying something deeper. Understanding.
“Son,” he says, “come with me. You shall walk a different path now… if you so choose.”
I stare at him. A different path?
173
“Whatever troubles you, whatever burdens you carry, we can help.” His voice is firm, but not forceful. “If your faith is still strong, you can overcome anything.”
My faith. Is it still strong?
I look down at my hands. Hands that once wielded a blessed hammer. That once healed the wounded, protected the innocent, and struck down evil in the name of the Light.
I thought that part of me was dead. But tonight, when the girl was in danger, the Light answered me. Not because I forced it. Not because I begged for it. But because I acted.
And it answered.
Shadowbreaker watches me, waiting. “So, what say you?” he asks. “Will you become a Paladin again? Will you live a life of service and purpose, as you did before? In a new land, but with the same Light guiding you?”
I take a breath. Should I follow this path again?
I lift my head, standing straight.
“Sir, thank you, sir.” My voice is steady. “It will be an honor.”
A small, satisfied nod from Shadowbreaker. “Then follow me, Tune, son of Victor.”
I step forward. Into the unknown. Into what comes next.
It does not take me long to realize where Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker is leading me. Our path winds through the grand avenues of Stormwind, past market stalls and the watchful gaze of armored sentinels. Then, rising before us in solemn majesty, stands the Cathedral of Light—a beacon of faith and sanctuary in this great city.
The cathedral is an imposing structure, its white stone walls gleaming in the midday sun. Towering stained-glass windows depict scenes of divine miracles, their intricate designs casting colored light upon the cobbled streets. Lofty spires reach skyward, as if grasping for the heavens themselves, while solemn statues of venerated paladins stand guard at the grand entrance. The sound of hymns, distant yet resolute, drifts through the air like an ethereal whisper of the Light’s ever-watchful presence.
As we step inside, the cool air carries the scent of incense and aged parchment. The vast hall is illuminated by chandeliers, their flickering candlelight dancing across the polished marble floors. Rows of wooden pews stretch toward the high altar, where a great golden sunburst gleams—a symbol of the Light’s eternal guidance. Priests in flowing white robes tend to their duties, murmuring prayers in reverent tones.
Lord Grayson turns to me, his gaze steady yet kind.
“Son, I see doubt in your eyes. It is clear that something dire has befallen you in Lordaeron. Tell me, what happened?”
I hesitate at first. I know he means to help me, but to relive it all—to stir the ghosts of my past—is painful beyond words. Yet if I am to reclaim my path as a paladin, I must have 174
the strength to face the darkness that lingers within me. The Light demands truth, and I cannot cower from it.
I take a slow breath and decide. I will speak. I will lay bare my soul.
So I tell him.
I speak of my first days as a young knight of Lordaeron, patrolling the roads, dealing with petty thieves, savage trolls, and the ever-looming threat of necromancers. I recount my encounters with the orcs—how, despite everything I had been taught, I found honor among them. I tell him of the growing unease in our kingdom, of the whispers of plague, and the first horrors we witnessed in the northern villages.
Then, my voice falters, for I must speak of Stratholme.
I tell him of Arthas Menethil and the culling. Of my beloved Adele, whose smile once outshone the dawn. Of the plague that consumed our lands, twisting the innocent into mindless horrors. I speak of the Silver Hand’s last stand in Andorhal, how we fought against the tide of death itself. I tell him how I witnessed Uther Lightbringer, the greatest of us, standing alone against his former pupil—and how he fell.
And then, with my heart laid bare, I speak of my own fall.
How I lost my connection to the Light. How, in my darkest hour, it was not my brethren, but orcs who saved me. How, in the depths of despair, I wandered—faithless, broken— until I found my way to Stormwind.
And how, at long last, the Light answered me once more.
Lord Grayson places a firm hand on my shoulder, his voice steady yet warm.
“Come, son. Let me introduce you to your brothers and sisters in the Light.”
He leads me through the grand halls of the cathedral, where the air hums with quiet reverence. Candles flicker within golden sconces, casting long shadows upon the stone walls. The scent of parchment, wax, and incense lingers in the air, a familiar fragrance that stirs distant memories of my training in Lordaeron.
We come upon a gathering of knights in gleaming armor, their tabards adorned with the sacred symbol of the Silver Hand. Some kneel in silent prayer, while others engage in quiet discussion, their voices carrying the weight of wisdom and duty. Lord Grayson gestures toward them.
“This is High Paladin Maxwell Tyrosus,” he says, motioning to a battle-worn knight whose eyes, though aged, still burn with righteous fire. “A veteran of many wars and a stalwart defender of the Light.”
Tyrosus inclines his head. “A new aspirant, I see. May the Light guide your path, lad. And may your faith never waver as mine once did.” His words carry a somber note, but his expression is resolute.
Beside him stands Lady Aelyssa Dawnshield, a paladin of noble lineage, her golden hair braided neatly over one shoulder. She regards me with a discerning gaze. “Strength alone does not make a paladin,” she says. “Discipline, faith, and wisdom—these shall be your true weapons.”
175
Nearby, a group of priests in flowing white robes tend to the wounded, their hands aglow with the gentle warmth of healing magic. Lord Grayson beckons me toward them.
“This is Archbishop Benedictus, a guiding voice in the Church of the Holy Light.” The archbishop nods, his expression unreadable. His voice is smooth, practiced. “To wield the Light is to serve, young one. Always remember this.”
I bow my head in respect, feeling the weight of their presence, their expectations. Yet, for the first time in a long while, I do not feel unworthy.
Lord Grayson leads me deeper into the cathedral’s halls, through an arched doorway that opens into a courtyard bathed in the golden glow of lanterns. Here, young aspirants train beneath the watchful eyes of their mentors. Wooden dummies, battered and scarred, stand in neat rows as recruits practice their strikes with heavy training swords. Others kneel before instructors, reciting passages from sacred tomes, their voices echoing with fervent devotion.
Grayson gestures toward them. “These are your fellow apprentices. You will train with them, study with them, and in time, forge bonds that will make you stronger.”
A young man with short brown hair, no older than twenty, offers a friendly nod. “Name’s Roland. You new?”
I nod. “Aye. Just arrived.”
A red-haired woman beside him, her armor polished despite its modest make, smirks. “Then you best be ready for bruises, friend. The training here is not for the faint of heart.”
I chuckle, a sound that feels foreign yet welcome. “I would expect nothing less.”
As the evening sun sinks beneath the city walls, Lord Grayson dismisses me for the night. A chamber has been prepared—a modest room within the cathedral’s dormitory, its wooden cot and simple furnishings a far cry from the grand halls outside. Yet, as I lay down, exhaustion washing over me, I find solace in its simplicity.
Tonight I sleep without the weight of sorrow pressing upon my chest.
Tonight I have hope.
The days pass in quiet study, turning into weeks of reflection and learning. Once more, I immerse myself in the sacred teachings of the Light. Though I was trained in Lordaeron, this time, my devotion is different—not the unshaken faith of my youth, but a renewed search for purpose. The Light does not answer those who merely demand its favor; it requires understanding, patience, and unwavering will.
The other apprentices do not know of my past, nor do I make it known. To them, I am but another initiate, eager to learn. They treat me as an equal, sparring with me in the yard, sharing lessons in the halls. Their enthusiasm is infectious, but I know my battle is not with sword and shield—it is with my faith. Without it, my strength means nothing.
176
Beyond my studies of the Light, I delve into the history and lands of the kingdom I now call home. Stormwind is the last great human stronghold in the south, its white stone walls standing defiant against time and war. Though it fell to the Horde in the First War, it was rebuilt through the labor and sacrifice of its people.
The kingdom stretches far beyond the towering spires of the city. To the east lies Elwynn Forest, a land of golden fields, deep woods, and winding rivers. Its heart is the town of Goldshire, where travelers gather at the Lion’s Pride Inn, and the banners of Stormwind hang in quiet defiance of the wilds beyond.
To the south, the lush farmlands of Westfall were once the breadbasket of the kingdom. Now, they are barren and lawless, plagued by the remnants of a shattered people—the Defias Brotherhood. These former stonemasons and laborers, betrayed by their king, now turn their anger against the very nation they once served. They prowl the highways as brigands, their red bandanas a symbol of their wrath.
Beyond Westfall, the swamps of Duskwood stand shrouded in an unnatural gloom. The dead walk its roads, and whispers of dark sorcery cling to the air. The people of Darkshire live in constant fear, seeking shelter behind their worn palisades, their torches barely keeping the shadows at bay.
To the north, the Redridge Mountains form a natural barrier between Stormwind and the untamed lands beyond. The town of Lakeshire stands as a bulwark against the darkness that looms in the peaks—Blackrock Orcs, remnants of the old Horde, who still cling to war and conquest. From their stronghold in Blackrock Mountain, they watch, waiting for the day they may strike again.
Further still, the Burning Steppes stretch toward the accursed Blackrock Spire, a place of unholy fires and dragonspawn, where the Black Dragonflight weaves its sinister plots.
Stormwind does not stand alone. In my studies, I learn of the great Alliance of Lordaeron, once fractured, now reforged. Its members are bound by shared cause, though not without struggle.
Ironforge, home of the dwarves, lies deep in the Khaz Modan mountains. There, the Bronzebeard Clan rules from their halls of stone and steel. Dwarves are unmatched in craftsmanship and endurance, their loyalty to the Alliance unwavering.
Gnomeregan, the fallen city of the gnomes, remains a poisoned ruin, its people now seeking refuge in Ironforge. Though small in stature, gnomes possess minds as sharp as their blades, their technology a boon to their allies.
The night elves of Darnassus, ancient and enigmatic, watch over the wilds of Kalimdor. Their warriors, the Sentinels, move like shadows, and their druids command nature itself.
Yet, for every ally, there are foes who seek to see this kingdom fall.
The Defias Brotherhood—born of betrayal, they strike from the shadows, preying upon merchants and soldiers alike. Their leader, the elusive Edwin VanCleef, seeks vengeance upon the throne that cast him aside.
177
The Blackrock Orcs—descendants of the old Horde, these brutal warriors hold fast to the ways of conquest. From their fortresses in Redridge and Blackrock Mountain, they raid and pillage, ever testing Stormwind’s defenses.
The Gurubashi Trolls of Zul’Gurub—once a mighty empire, now a fractured but deadly force. Deep in the jungles of Stranglethorn Vale, they whisper to dark gods, seeking the power to reclaim their former glory.
The undead horrors of Duskwood, their origins unknown, rise from the cursed soil. Shadows move in the dark, and even the bravest knights dare not linger there after sundown.
Stormwind stands strong, but war is never far.
As weeks turn to months, I come to understand the kingdom I now serve—not just through maps and tomes, but through the stories of its people, through the hardships they endure. My past may have been forged in Lordaeron, but my future is here.
And the Light, though distant, is not gone.
When training and sparring with my fellow apprentices, I hold myself back. I do not wish to stand apart, nor to flaunt the experience I have gained through hardship and war. My strikes are measured, my defenses careful but restrained. I let them believe I am learning, as they are.
Yet, the trainers are no fools. In time, they begin to notice.
One morning, as the sun casts golden light through the cathedral’s stained-glass windows, Katherine the Pure approaches me. She is a seasoned paladin, a mentor to many who walk the path of the Light. Her presence alone commands respect, yet her gaze is neither stern nor accusing—only knowing.
“Paladin,” she says, her voice steady. “Come with me.”
I do not question her. I follow.
She leads me to a quiet chamber within the cathedral, a place where the echoes of war seem distant. The air is still, filled with the faint scent of parchment, wax, and incense. Tomes of sacred knowledge rest upon wooden shelves, their pages filled with prayers, histories, and divine teachings. A great sunburst sigil, symbol of the Light, is carved into the stone floor.
Katherine turns to face me, her expression calm but firm.
“You have skill in battle,” she says, “but there is more to the path of a paladin than steel and fury. You hold back your strength—yet I wonder, do you hold back your faith as well?”
I hesitate, unsure of how to answer.
She does not wait. Instead, she begins to teach.
Katherine speaks of a deeper connection to the Light, one that does not manifest through the swing of a hammer or the force of a shield, but through devotion, prayer, and the will to mend rather than destroy.
178
“There are those among us,” she says, “who do not stand in the front lines to strike the enemy, but remain behind, their duty no less great. They are the guardians of their brothers and sisters, wielding the Light as a shield not for themselves, but for others.”
I listen intently as she speaks of healing—not just as a skill, but as a calling.
“The Light flows through us,” she continues, “not as a mere tool, but as a living force. A paladin who walks the path of the healer does not simply command the Light; he surrenders to it, becomes a vessel for its will. The deeper the connection, the greater the blessings.”
She extends her hand, and I watch in awe as a radiant glow surrounds her fingers. The light is warm, steady, comforting. It lingers upon her palm, as if alive. Then, with a single whispered prayer, the glow spreads outward, suffusing the entire chamber in golden radiance. It does not burn, nor does it blind. Instead, it soothes, like the first light of dawn after a long night.
“You see,” she says, her voice soft. “Strength is not only measured in battle. The Light’s greatest power lies in its ability to restore, to shield, to bless. A warrior may fell ten foes with his blade, but a single healer may turn the tide of an entire battle.”
For hours, she trains me—not in combat, but in the art of channeling the Light for healing and protection. She speaks of meditation, of stilling the mind, of opening one’s soul to the divine. A paladin does not call upon the Light as a mage calls upon fire or frost; rather, he becomes an instrument through which the Light flows.
She teaches me the Blessings—gifts of the Light that bolster allies, strengthening their resolve, hastening their strikes, or shielding them from harm. She shows me how to invoke Divine Protection, surrounding myself or another in a barrier of holy energy that deflects the enemy’s blows.
Most of all, she pushes me. She forces me to dig deeper, to reach for the Light in ways I never have before.
“You hesitate,” she says, watching as I struggle to maintain the warmth of the Light in my hands. “You hold back—not just in battle, but in faith.”
I grit my teeth and try again, focusing my will. The glow wavers, flickers, then fades. Frustration builds within me.
She places a hand upon my shoulder.
“You are still fighting it,” she says. “The Light does not come through force. It comes through belief. You must trust it, surrender to it.”
I close my eyes. Breathe. Let go.
And then, at last, I feel it.
The Light is not distant. It is not something to be seized, nor something that was ever truly lost. It was there all along, waiting.
Warmth spreads through my hands once more, steady this time. A golden glow radiates from my fingers, pure and unwavering.
Katherine nods in approval.
179
“Good,” she says. “Now again.”
The training is exhausting, but unlike the strain of battle, this fatigue does not weigh upon my body—it weighs upon my soul. It is a different kind of discipline, one that demands more than strength or skill. It requires faith, not in oneself, but in something greater.
As the days pass, I begin to understand. The path of a paladin is not merely one of war. The Light is not merely a weapon.
It is a force of hope, of healing, of protection.
It is something I am only now beginning to reclaim.
The days pass in relentless practice as I train in the ways of healing and blessing, refining what I have learned from Katherine the Pure. This new understanding of the Light, of its power not only to protect but to restore, is unlike anything I had embraced before. It is a discipline of patience, of control, of faith unshaken.
But the Light is not merely a force of healing. It is also a weapon.
One morning, as I finish my morning prayers, Brother Wilhelm approaches me. He is a veteran of the Order, clad in armor marked by years of battle, a man of few words but great presence. His gaze is sharp, his stance unwavering.
“Paladin,” he says, his voice steady. “Come with me.”
I follow without question. Another lesson, I assume. Another refinement of the Light’s grace.
Instead, he leads me not to the prayer halls, nor to the meditation chambers, but to the training grounds, where wooden dummies stand in neat rows, their surfaces battered and scarred from countless strikes. The clang of steel rings in the air as initiates spar with heavy training swords. The scent of sweat, leather, and oiled metal lingers like a battle long past.
Wilhelm turns to me, his expression unreadable.
“You have learned to wield the Light as a healer,” he says. “Now, you will learn to wield it as a weapon.”
He steps forward, drawing his sword, the steel gleaming beneath the morning sun. He does not raise it yet, but holds it with reverence, as if it is an extension of himself.
“Many think of us as mere warriors,” he says. “They see our armor, our weapons, and they assume we are no different from knights or mercenaries. But they are wrong.”
He turns to face me fully.
“A paladin’s blade is not merely steel. It is an instrument of divine wrath, guided by faith, tempered by justice.”
With a swift motion, he raises his sword, his free hand glowing with a golden light. He does not strike the dummy with mere strength—he channels the Light into his blade, and 180
when it lands, the very air trembles with righteous force. The wooden target splinters, as if the strike carried the weight of judgment itself.
I watch in awe.
“This,” Wilhelm says, “is retribution.”
He gestures for me to step forward, handing me a training sword. It is heavy, its grip f irm beneath my gauntleted hands.
“Strike,” he commands.
I raise the blade and swing. It lands with a dull thud against the wood. A warrior’s strike—nothing more.
He shakes his head.
“No. You are fighting as a soldier, not as a paladin. Your strength alone is meaningless. The Light is your true weapon. Feel it. Let it guide your hand.”
I tighten my grip, closing my eyes. I remember Katherine’s lessons, how the Light must be embraced, not forced. I steady my breath, reach beyond the flesh, beyond the steel, and call upon the Light—not for healing, but for judgment.
Warmth spreads through my arms, surging into my hands. When I swing again, a golden radiance engulfs my weapon, and when it strikes, the wood shudders under the force. The impact sends a ripple of divine energy outward.
Wilhelm nods approvingly.
“Better. Now again.”
For hours, I train beneath Wilhelm’s watchful eye. He teaches me that the path of a Retribution Paladin is one of balance. Unlike the warrior, who relies on brute force, or the mage, who wields raw magic, a paladin’s strength comes from harmony between might and divinity.
He instructs me in the Judgments—how to invoke the Light’s decree upon an enemy, weakening them before I even land a blow.
He teaches me of Seal magic, how to imbue my blade with the power of righteousness, striking harder and faster with each swing.
And he shows me the true purpose of Divine Storm, where the Light itself becomes an extension of my strike, radiating outward in a holy tempest that smites all who stand before me.
“You are not merely a swordsman,” he tells me. “You are a crusader, a harbinger of the Light’s will. Your hammer does not strike for glory, nor for vengeance—it strikes for justice.”
The training is grueling, yet exhilarating. For the first time since I arrived in Stormwind, I feel something awaken within me—a fire I thought long extinguished.
I am no mere apprentice. No lost soldier searching for a cause.
I am a paladin.
181
And the Light has called me to war.
With time, I can no longer hold back. If I am to truly learn, to embrace the path they set before me, then I must give myself fully to the training. I no longer suppress my instincts, no longer measure my strikes to seem equal among the apprentices. Instead, I push myself forward, wielding the Light as I was always meant to.
The others notice. They do not shy away, nor do they resent me for it. Instead, they seem eager to train by my side, to test themselves against me. Perhaps they see a challenge in me, or perhaps they sense something greater—a warrior shaped by experience, yet still searching for purpose.
Several days pass, and then, one morning, Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker himself approaches me.
“Tune, come with me.”
Another lesson.
But this time, the Highlord of the Order will be my teacher.
I follow him to the training grounds, where the scent of sweat and steel hangs heavy in the morning air. The sun casts long shadows across the courtyard, glinting off polished armor and sharpened blades. The distant sounds of sparring echo around us—blades clashing, shields ringing, voices calling out orders.
Lord Grayson is not clad in the heavy ceremonial armor he wears in the cathedral. Instead, he is equipped for war—a solid kite shield strapped to his left arm, a short sword in his right. His movements are measured, steady, the stance of a warrior who has stood on countless battlefields.
I glance down at my own weapon—a standard longsword, the same I have used for weeks in training. He notices.
“This is not a lesson in striking, Tune,” he says. “This is a lesson in standing f irm.”
I furrow my brow. “Defensive techniques?”
“Not just defense,” he corrects. “Protection.”
He gestures toward the training dummies, their wooden surfaces scarred from countless blows.
“You have learned to call upon the Light for healing, and you have learned to wield it in righteous fury. But what of those who stand beside you? What of those who cannot protect themselves?”
I say nothing, listening.
“A paladin is not merely a warrior,” he continues. “We are a shield against the darkness, the bulwark that stands between our brothers-in-arms and the horrors that would tear them apart. It is not enough to strike hard. You must also know how to endure.”
He steps forward, raising his shield.
182
“Hit me.”
I hesitate.
He narrows his eyes. “Strike.”
I swing my sword, and in an instant, he shifts his stance. His shield meets my blade with unshakable force, turning my strike aside as if it were nothing. The impact rattles through my arms, sending a sharp jolt through my grip.
“Again,” he commands.
I attack once more, this time with more power—but again, the shield turns my strike aside. He barely moves, barely flinches. It is as though my sword has met a wall of stone.
“This is the power of a paladin who walks the path of protection,” he says. “A warrior f ights for himself. A protector fights for others.”
I take a breath, steadying myself. “How do I learn this?”
He nods. “By understanding that your duty is not to attack, but to absorb.”
For hours, he teaches me.
He shows me how to anchor myself, how to plant my feet so that even the strongest blow will not send me staggering.
He teaches me shield discipline, how to deflect an enemy’s attack not by brute force, but by precise angles and positioning. A warrior blocks an attack. A paladin redirects it.
Most importantly, he shows me how to call upon the Light’s protective power.
“You are not merely standing against the enemy,” he explains. “You are becoming a fortress for your allies.”
He raises his free hand, and a golden radiance surrounds him—a divine shield, shimmering with sacred energy. The very air hums with its power.
“This is what separates us from ordinary warriors,” he says. “The Light is not just within our strikes—it is within our defenses, within our very presence.”
He speaks of Righteous Fury, the will to draw the enemy’s attention, to ensure that they strike at you instead of those who are weaker.
He speaks of Blessing of Protection, the power to shield an ally from harm, making them untouchable even as battle rages around them.
And finally, he speaks of the ultimate defense, a power few ever master—Divine Shield, the unbreakable barrier that no force, no magic, no blade can shatter.
“A warrior seeks to survive,” he says. “A paladin ensures that others do.”
183
By the time training ends, my arms ache from holding my shield, my body sore from enduring blow after blow. And yet, something within me feels stronger—not in the way of raw power, but in resolve.
This is not about pride. Not about proving oneself in battle.
This is about endurance. About standing where others would fall.
For the first time, I understand.
The path of the paladin is not just to strike with the Light. It is not just to heal with the Light.
It is also to stand with the Light.
And when the darkness comes, when the enemy bears down upon those too weak to defend themselves…
I will be their shield.
Days turn to weeks, and I dedicate myself fully to my training. I rise with the dawn, the golden rays filtering through the cathedral’s high windows, illuminating the sacred halls where I kneel in silent prayer. I train until my body aches, pushing beyond exhaustion, refining my connection to the Light with every strike, every blessing, every moment of quiet devotion.
The lessons of my mentors—Katherine the Pure, Brother Wilhelm, and Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker—resonate within me. I have learned to heal with compassion, to strike with divine judgment, and to stand unshaken as a shield for others. Yet, I know that true mastery is a lifetime’s pursuit.
Then, one fateful morning, I am summoned.
Acolytes approach me in the halls, their expressions solemn yet filled with quiet reverence. No explanations, no questions—only a single command.
“Come.”
I follow them, my heart pounding in my chest, the echoes of my armored footsteps ringing through the stone corridors of the cathedral.
They lead me to a chamber I have never entered before. The great doors open with a deep groan, revealing a gathering of Stormwind’s most revered paladins.
The Seniors of the Order stand in a circle, their golden armor gleaming under the glow of the many candles that line the room. Their faces are solemn, unreadable. Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker stands in the center, his presence unwavering, like a mountain carved from faith itself. The very air hums with power, as if the Light itself watches over this moment.
I swallow hard. I had imagined this day, but never like this.
“Tune, come forward.”
Lord Grayson’s voice is steady, commanding, yet warm.
184
I step forward, my hands clasped before me, my heart hammering against my ribs. The weight of dozens of eyes upon me is nearly suffocating, but I stand firm.
“We believe you are more than ready to become a strong paladin,” Lord Grayson continues. “You have shown dedication, devotion, restraint. The Light is strong with you, and you have proven yourself not only as a warrior, but as a servant of the Light. Everything you have endured here—together with the hardships you faced in Lordaeron—has led us to trust that you are ready for your first promotion.”
I lower my gaze for a moment, feeling the burden of my past weigh upon me. Lordaeron. The memories rush back—Adele, the fall of Stratholme, the betrayal, the horrors. I close my eyes for a heartbeat and steady myself. This moment is not about the past. It is about what I must become.
Lord Grayson’s gaze sharpens.
“Now, we ask you—which path will you follow? Will you be a healer, a bringer of divine retribution, or a protector?”
I hesitate.
The room is silent. Dozens of Stormwind’s finest warriors wait for my answer.
I lift my head. My voice, though steady, carries the weight of my decision.
“Sir, I will follow all paths,” I say. “I will change my stance depending on who my enemy is, and what my allies need from me.”
A long silence follows.
I cannot read their faces. Have I spoken out of turn? Have I overstepped?
Lord Grayson’s gaze does not waver. He considers my words carefully, his hands clasped before him.
Then, after what feels like an eternity, he nods.
“To master all the paths before you,” he says, “requires immense training and dedication—not only now, but permanently. For your entire life.”
His words are not a warning, nor a rebuke. They are a truth, one I must carry forever.
I bow my head. “I understand, sir,” I reply. “And I am ready for constant training and devotion.”
A small smile touches the corner of his lips. He lifts his hands, and at once, the assembled paladins raise their weapons in salute.
“Very well,” Lord Grayson declares. “So be it.”
I drop to one knee.
“Now,” he intones, “kneel as an apprentice, and you shall be blessed… and rise as a paladin of Stormwind.”
The room grows silent.
Then, I feel it.
185
A warmth, unlike anything I have ever known. It begins as a whisper of heat upon my skin, growing stronger with each breath, until it floods through me like golden fire. The Light is not just around me—it is within me, filling the spaces where doubt once lingered.
The voices of the senior paladins rise in solemn prayer, their words ancient and powerful, weaving through the chamber like a sacred hymn.
Lord Grayson places his hand upon my shoulder.
“By the will of the Holy Light, and the grace of the Order of the Silver Hand, we name you Paladin of Stormwind.”
The glow intensifies, and for a moment, I see everything clearly. The burdens I carry, the path ahead, the duty I now bear—it is no longer heavy.
It is purpose.
“Rise.”
I open my eyes.
I am not the same as I was before.
I stand. My armor feels lighter. My hands feel stronger. And my heart, once fractured by grief and loss, now burns with clarity.
Lord Grayson steps back and nods. The paladins lower their weapons. Some look at me with pride, others with measured expectation. I am no longer an apprentice, but my journey has only just begun.
As I step back, I whisper a prayer—not for myself, but for those I will protect, heal, and f ight beside.
I am a paladin now.
And the Light is with me.
As I stand among my fellow apprentices, now brothers and sisters in the Light, they gather around, offering their congratulations. Their smiles are genuine, their voices filled with pride. For the first time since i got to Stormwind, I feel a true sense of belonging—a sense that I am not alone in this world.
Through the crowd, Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker approaches, his expression calm yet resolute. When the others see him, they step aside, allowing him to stand before me.
“Tune, get some rest tonight,” he says. “Tomorrow, you begin a new life of service.”
A new life. The words weigh heavily on me, not as a burden, but as a calling finally answered.
Grayson folds his arms. “Now, tell me. Where would you like to serve?”
186
I hesitate for only a moment, considering my answer. Would a paladin be given a choice? Or would they be sent where the Order deems them most needed?
But then, I realize the truth—service is not about orders. It is about devotion. A paladin’s duty is not to blindly follow, but to serve where they are needed most.
I take a breath and meet his gaze. “Sir, if it is permitted, I would like to begin my service with the military.”
His eyes narrow slightly, not in disapproval, but in quiet contemplation.
“I have experience with patrols and garrisons from my time in Lordaeron,” I continue. “I believe I could be of service, not only by protecting the people of our lands, but also by bolstering the morale of our soldiers. They fight without the blessings of the Light at their side—I could offer them guidance, protection, and faith.”
Grayson listens, his expression unreadable.
“And beyond that,” I add, “a slow start would allow me to better know the land, its people, and the state of our kingdom. Before I can lead, I must first understand those I serve.”
A long silence stretches between us. Around us, the other paladins watch, waiting for the Highlord’s judgment.
Then, at last, he nods.
“Very well, paladin.” His voice carries the weight of finality. “That can be arranged. Tomorrow, you will be transferred to the army and serve as liaison between the Order and the King’s forces.”
A surge of purpose fills my chest.
I bow deeply. “Thank you, my lord. I will not fail you.”
“You serve not me, but the Light,” he corrects. Then, with a small but knowing smile, he adds, “Rest well, Paladin Tune. Tomorrow, your journey truly begins.”
That night, I dream again.
The same vision—a spirit, calling to me.
“Find me. Find me.”
The words are urgent, distant, yet I recognize no face, no form. Only a presence— something beyond my reach, beyond my understanding. It is unsettling, not in the way of nightmares, but in the way of questions without answers.
Who could be calling to me?
Everyone I knew in Lordaeron is dead.
When morning comes, I shake off the lingering unease and focus on my duty. Today marks the beginning of my new life.
187
The barracks stand within the Old Town district, a fortified stone structure, well worn by years of duty and discipline. The scent of oiled steel, sweat, and damp wood lingers in the air. As I step inside, the murmur of conversation dies down—all eyes turn toward me.
The expectation in their gazes is clear.
Some see me as a symbol of faith, others as an outsider in a soldier’s world. A few seem indifferent, but most regard me with curious anticipation.
Paladins and soldiers have always fought alongside one another, yet there has always been a division. Knights of the Light, noble and revered. Soldiers, simple men f ighting without divine favor.
I intend to bridge that divide.
At the far end of the hall, standing before a map-strewn table, is the man I have been sent to report to—Commander Harren Blake.
He is a veteran soldier, his steel-gray hair cropped short, his armor battle-worn but well-maintained. His gaze is sharp, assessing me before I even have a chance to salute.
“Paladin Tune, I presume?”
I nod, standing at attention. “Sir.”
“I was informed by Lord Shadowbreaker of your request to serve with the army,” he says, his voice measured but not unkind. “Good to see that some paladins still see soldiers as equals.”
He gestures toward a chair, but I remain standing.
“After everything he told me about you, I’ve decided to grant you the rank of Corporal,” he continues. “You’ll command a small patrol of four men and, at times, join larger patrols under my officers.”
I nod in understanding. It is a fair rank—one that carries responsibility but not unwarranted authority.
He folds his arms, studying me. “This won’t be the same as riding under the banners of the Silver Hand. We don’t fight for honor or grand ideals—we fight to keep Stormwind safe.”
“Understood, sir,” I say.
“Good. Settle in. I’ll introduce you to your men shortly.”
With that, he turns back to his maps, already expecting me to begin my new life without hesitation.
I take a breath, glancing around at the gathered soldiers. Some still watch me, waiting to see what kind of paladin I truly am.
This is my first test.
And I will not fail.
188
The midday sun sits high above Stormwind as Commander Harren Blake leads me into the barracks’ courtyard. The sounds of training fill the air—swords clashing, shields ringing, soldiers barking orders. The scent of oiled leather, sweat, and the faint trace of damp stone lingers.
Beyond the training yard, four soldiers stand in formation, awaiting my arrival. Their stances are rigid, disciplined—but their eyes study me carefully. Some with curiosity, some with caution.
Harren Blake stops before them, his arms crossed.
“Paladin Tune, meet your patrol. These men will serve under your command. You’ll fight together, bleed together, and if you do your job right, you’ll keep each other alive.” He turns to them, his voice firm. “This is your new corporal. You listen to him as you would to me. Understood?”
A chorus of “Yes, sir!” follows.
Blake steps back, nodding toward me. “They’re yours now, Paladin. Get to know them.”
I turn to face them fully, taking them in—not just their armor, but who they are.
Siric Dunwald – Foot Soldier
A stocky, broad-shouldered man, his chainmail fitted snugly over a padded gambeson. His short, dark hair is kept cropped, and a faint scar runs from his jaw to his temple. His stance is strong, disciplined—a career soldier, judging by the way he keeps his weight balanced at all times.
He offers a sharp salute, his expression unreadable.
“Corporal. Siric Dunwald, infantry. I’ve served six years in the Stormwind guard, three in the army.” His voice is steady, professional. “I fight where I’m needed, and I follow orders. That simple.”
A pragmatist. No nonsense, no arrogance—just a man who knows his duty. Reliable.
Galen Harth – Foot Soldier
Beside Dunwald stands a leaner man, his armor newer, his stance looser—but there’s an easy confidence in the way he carries himself. Light brown hair, sharp green eyes, and a smirk that suggests he finds something amusing at all times.
“Galen Harth, infantry. Two years in service.” He gives a lazier salute than Dunwald, though not out of disrespect. More like habit. “If you need someone to break a shield wall, or carry the heavy packs, I’m your man. Just don’t ask me to pray before battle—never had much luck with that.”
A jokester, but not undisciplined. Likely the type to crack a remark before a fight, but would never abandon his duty. Good morale-keeper.
Roland Vale – Archer
189
Standing slightly apart from the others is a tall, wiry man, dressed in a sturdy leather cuirass rather than chainmail. A bow rests across his back, and his fingers absentmindedly drum against the fletching of an arrow at his belt. His dark hair is tied back, and his sharp blue eyes assess me with careful scrutiny—not distrust, but a hunter’s patience.
“Roland Vale, archer. Five years with the King’s Rangers.” His voice is calm, even, carrying the practiced control of a man used to waiting in silence for hours before taking a shot. “I don’t waste arrows, and I don’t speak unless there’s something worth saying. If you need a man watching your flank, I’m the one to call.”
A measured, patient soldier. Likely the most tactical of the group—one who watches, assesses, and only speaks when necessary. Disciplined, intelligent.
Lilian “Lark” Thorne – Scout
The last member of the group is a woman, her light armor tailored for movement, unlike the bulkier sets worn by the foot soldiers. Her short auburn hair barely brushes her shoulders, and her gray eyes flick between me and Blake, reading the room like a seasoned observer. She stands with one foot slightly back, weight on her heels—a stance that suggests she’s ready to move at a moment’s notice.
“Lilian Thorne. They call me Lark. Scout.” Her voice is calm, measured, but there’s a hint of something wry underneath it, as if she’s holding back an inside joke.
Blake interjects. “Lark’s one of our best scouts. She can track a deer through a rainstorm and vanish faster than a Defias rogue when things go south.”
Lark gives a half-smirk. “I prefer not getting stabbed, sir. If that’s a skill, I’ll take it.”
A sharp mind, quick reflexes, and a survivalist’s instinct. Likely the fastest thinker of the group, and the most practical when things turn dire.
I take a breath, looking at each of them. Four soldiers, four different styles of warriors. A hardened veteran, a sharp-witted fighter, a tactical archer, and a cunning scout. Each one brings something valuable to this patrol.
But they’re still watching me. Judging. Measuring if I am worthy of leading them.
I nod. “It’s an honor to serve with you all.”
Dunwald keeps his neutral stare, while Galen’s smirk tugs a little wider. “Let’s hope you still feel that way after a few weeks in the field, Corporal.”
Roland simply nods in approval, while Lark crosses her arms, still assessing me.
Commander Blake watches the exchange with mild amusement, then claps his hands once.
“Enough standing around. You’ll have your first patrol soon. Get your gear in order, and be ready.”
The soldiers disperse, and as I watch them go, I feel the weight of my new command settle on my shoulders.
190
This is not the battlefield of Lordaeron. This is not the Silver Hand’s war.
This is Stormwind’s army, and these are my soldiers.
And I intend to keep them alive.
The first week passes in steady, uneventful duty. No grand battles, no desperate last stands—only discipline, routine, and vigilance.
My patrol’s tasks are simple, but necessary. We walk the streets of Stormwind, keeping an eye out for troublemakers, drunkards, and petty thieves. Most of the city guards regard us with mild amusement, perhaps wondering why a paladin and a squad of soldiers are patrolling streets that rarely see serious crime.
Siric Dunwald, ever the disciplined soldier, takes the job seriously. “Trouble can come anywhere, sir. Even in Stormwind.”
Galen Harth rolls his eyes. “Yes, because the greatest threat to the kingdom is a pickpocket in Old Town.”
Lark, our scout, simply shrugs. “Wouldn’t underestimate that. More crime than people think in the shadows.”
From time to time, we assist merchants with unloading goods, help settle disputes between traders, or break up the occasional drunken brawl near the Pig and Whistle Tavern. But nothing that tests us—nothing that makes me feel like I am truly serving the Light.
On other days, we ride out of the city, following the King’s Road toward Goldshire and Northshire Abbey.
The journey to Goldshire is peaceful. The town is small, resting at the heart of Elwynn Forest, where the golden light filters through the canopy of towering oaks. Children play near the Lion’s Pride Inn, and traders move along the roads, their wagons creaking beneath the weight of supplies. We stop to check in with the local guards, but they report nothing unusual—just the occasional wolf attack on livestock or rumors of Defias bandits skirting the edges of the forest.
Northshire Abbey, however, feels different.
Riding toward the towering white walls, I cannot help but feel a strange sense of peace. This place, a bastion of the Light, reminds me of my early training in Lordaeron. The monks and clerics move about their duties with quiet devotion, offering prayers and tending to the injured. We spend some time speaking with Brother Paxton, the head librarian, who shares tales of the kingdom’s struggles and the recent rise of cultists in the darker corners of the land.
Despite the simplicity of our patrols, I take this time to observe my men, to understand them. I see how Dunwald holds himself like a man who has lost friends in war, how Galen jokes to hide his frustrations, how Roland’s sharp eyes never stop scanning the treetops, and how Lark moves like a shadow, always wary, always watching.
They are not just soldiers to me anymore. They are my unit. My responsibility.
Then, after a week of this quiet duty, a summons arrives.
191
A messenger from the Cathedral of Light finds me as I return from patrol. His expression is urgent.
“Corporal Tune, you are summoned to the cathedral. Immediately.”
I make my way through Stormwind’s bustling streets, passing the market stalls, traders, and the towering statues of past kings. The great white stone of the Cathedral looms ahead, its presence unwavering. Inside, the air is thick with burning incense and the soft murmur of prayers.
At the altar, Duthorian Rall stands, a senior paladin of the Order. Beside him is Gazin Tenorm, a battle-hardened instructor known for his no-nonsense demeanor. Their expressions are serious.
“Paladin Tune,” Duthorian begins. “You have proven yourself as a warrior and protector. But a paladin’s duty is not only to fight—it is to restore. To bring back those who have fallen before their time.”
I straighten. “Sir?”
Gazin folds his arms. “There is a fallen knight. We have tried to save him, but the Light does not answer us.” He watches me carefully. “You will go to him. But before you do, you must retrieve a sacred relic—the Symbol of Life. It is needed to guide the soul back.”
“Where is it?”
“The eastern logging camp in Elwynn Forest. You will find the relic among the wounded, where the Light has not yet faded.”
I nod without hesitation. “I will retrieve it.”
Riding through the forests of Elwynn, I guide my horse toward the east, where the scent of fresh pine lingers in the crisp air. The sound of axes striking wood and the distant calls of workers fill the air as I approach the logging camp.
It is a place of hard labor, where lumberjacks fell trees for Stormwind’s ever hungry forges and builders. But something is wrong.
As I dismount, I see a group of workers kneeling around a wounded man—a fellow logger, barely conscious, his breath ragged.
“You’re the paladin they sent?” One of them, a burly man with thick arms, asks.
I nod. “What happened?”
“Wolf attack. He fought them off, but he’s not going to last. The healers couldn’t help him.”
I kneel beside the dying man. His eyes are distant, his skin pale. His soul is drifting. And there, lying beside him, is the Symbol of Life—an ancient relic inscribed with the markings of the Light.
192
“It’s been here for ages,” another worker mutters. “Some say the monks left it behind long ago. No one knows how it works.”
I reach out, touching the relic.
The moment my fingers brush against it, a warmth floods my palm, traveling up my arm like a fire that does not burn. The Light’s presence is strong here.
The dying man shudders. His eyes flicker open, just for a moment.
“Help me…” he whispers.
This is my test.
Closing my eyes, I focus—not on power, not on force, but on faith.
“Light, if ever I was worthy, if ever I was meant to wield your grace… let me prove it now.”
A soft golden glow radiates from my hands. It spreads over the man’s chest, warming his skin, filling the air with a sense of peace, of healing, of renewal.
Then, suddenly—he breathes. Deeply. Fully.
The color returns to his cheeks. His wound closes, the deathly pallor vanishes. The loggers step back, murmuring in shock.
“By the Light…”
I take a steady breath, lifting the Symbol of Life in my hands.
“Thank you, Paladin.” The wounded man, now whole, clasps my hand. His grip is strong.
I nod. “Your life is not yet meant to end.”
With the relic secured, I ride for Stormwind.
Returning to the city, I make my way back to Stephanie Turner in the Trade District. She leads me to a small home, where the fallen knight lies still upon a cot. His breath is shallow, his skin pale, just as the logger had been.
I place the Symbol of Life upon his chest.
This time, I do not hesitate.
The Light flows through me, warm and absolute. The room is bathed in gold, and the knight’s body trembles as the warmth surrounds him.
A long silence. Waiting. Holding.
Then—a sharp inhale. A gasp for air.
His eyes open wide, his chest rising as if awoken from a deep slumber. His hands clutch the cot, staring at me in disbelief.
“I… I was gone.”
Stephanie covers her mouth, tears brimming in her eyes.
193
I let out a slow breath, my hands still trembling from the effort. But within me, I feel no exhaustion. No weakness. Only a deep, profound peace.
“Welcome back, Knight of Stormwind,” I say.
Back at the Cathedral, I kneel before Duthorian Rall and Gazin Tenorm. They study me, not with pride, but with understanding.
“You have learned what few grasp,” Duthorian says. “That the Light is not about power, but about faith. You are now blessed with Redemption—the ability to return life to those taken too soon.”
Gazin’s gaze sharpens. “But understand this, Tune—there will come times when the Light does not answer. When some souls are meant to move on.”
I bow my head. “I understand.”
Duthorian places a hand on my shoulder. “Then rise, Paladin. You have taken your next step.”
I stand, feeling the weight of my new gift—not as a burden, but as a sacred duty.
One I will never take for granted.
A few days later, our patrol is sent westward, our orders clear—we are to reinforce the Stormwind military contingent in Westfall.
We march.
The road is long, cutting through the rolling golden fields of Elwynn, the tall trees of the forest giving way to the vast, open plains of Westfall. The land here is worn and tired, abandoned by the crown, its once-thriving farms now dry and cracked, the wind carrying the scent of dust and neglect.
As we pass crumbling farmhouses, we see signs of hardship everywhere— scarecrows leaning like fallen sentinels, abandoned plows rusting under the sun, crows circling overhead like watchers of a kingdom lost.
Yet despite its desolation, Westfall is not empty.
We spot Defias patrols in the distance, red bandanas flashing in the wind as they move between ruined buildings. They do not approach—our numbers are too strong— but they watch, and they vanish before we can track them.
They know we are coming.
Our march takes us to Sentinel Hill, the last true bastion of Stormwind’s authority in Westfall. The tall wooden watchtower rises above the settlement, overlooking the barren f ields and distant coast.
Upon arrival, we are greeted by Commander Harren Blake, standing near a makeshift war table, maps and reports spread before him. He is not alone. Several other officers, sergeants, and knights are gathered, their faces grim. Soldiers move in disciplined rows, sharpening swords, checking armor, and preparing for something big.
Blake looks up as we approach.
“Paladin Tune. Patrol Unit Seven. Good, you’re here.”
194
I salute. “Sir. What is the situation?”
He gestures to the map. “The Defias presence in Moonbrook has grown bolder. More patrols, more fortifications. VanCleef’s forces are preparing for something big inside the Deadmines.”
I frown. “Then we strike now?”
Blake nods. “A strike team is being assembled as we speak to go into the mines and cut the head off the snake. But before they can go in, we must clear Moonbrook and secure the tunnels. If we don’t, the Defias could reinforce VanCleef or cut off the strike team’s retreat.”
He looks over the gathered troops. “We have the numbers. The plan is simple— surround the village, sweep through, eliminate any resistance, and secure the mine entrance. I hope this mission will go as planned.”
As dusk settles over the Westfall plains, the Stormwind forces move out.
The army marches in tight formation, a sea of blue tabards and polished steel, our presence undeniable. We move swiftly but cautiously, led by mounted knights and experienced officers, each squad with its assigned position.
The village of Moonbrook looms ahead, its once-proud buildings now crumbling under the weight of years and war. Flickering torches burn in the windows of houses now occupied by Defias forces. Shadows move in the streets, figures darting behind ruined structures as they prepare for what is coming.
The silence before battle is the loudest thing I have ever heard.
Then—the order is given.
“Advance!”
The first arrows fly, cutting through the air like whispers of death. Defias sentries drop before they can even call for alarm.
Then, the charge begins.
Stormwind footmen rush forward, their shields locked, swords drawn, boots thundering over cracked cobblestones. The Defias defenders scramble, caught off guard as our forces flood into the village.
The battle is fast and brutal.
Infantrymen clash in the streets, the ringing of steel filling the air.
Archers take up positions, firing into enemy ranks.
The Defias fight hard, but without time to organize, they are forced back, house by house, alley by alley.
I remain behind the front lines, where the wounded are brought.
My role is not to fight, not today.
195
A soldier stumbles back, an arrow buried in his side. I rush forward, pressing a hand against the wound, channeling the Light through my fingertips. A golden glow surrounds him, the pain in his face easing as flesh and muscle knit back together.
“Back in the fight, soldier,” I say.
Another collapses, a Defias dagger lodged in his shoulder. I call upon the Light again, stabilizing him before he bleeds out.
Each wound I mend, each soldier I save, is a life that would have been lost without the Light’s grace.
And yet, even as the battle rages, I know there is a line I must hold.
Behind me, beyond the village, lies the entrance to the Deadmines. No soldier is to pass it—not until the strike team arrives.
Two Defias fighters attempt to flee toward the mine. I step forward, shield raised, barring their path.
“You will not escape,” I say.
They hesitate, then lunge.
I deflect the first strike with my shield, stepping into the second attacker’s space, slamming the hilt of my sword into his gut. He crumples, gasping. The second swings wildly—I duck, bring my gauntleted fist across his jaw, sending him sprawling into the dirt.
Behind me, more soldiers form a perimeter around the mine entrance. We hold the line.
By nightfall, the battle for Moonbrook is over.
And then, I saw it.
A Defias fighter, no older than twenty, lay on the ground, his sword knocked from his hand. His breath came in ragged gasps, his arms raised in surrender. A Stormwind soldier stood over him, blade raised, fury burning in his eyes.
The Defias did not beg.
He knew what fate awaited him.
The soldier’s hands trembled, his teeth clenched in pure rage.
“You bastards… you killed my wife!” the soldier spat, his voice raw with grief. “You burned our home! And now, now you think you get to walk away?”
He raised his sword higher—preparing to drive it down.
“Hold!”
My voice cut through the chaos, loud and firm.
196
The soldier hesitated, but only for a moment. His fury did not fade, and he turned his glare toward me, his entire body trembling with rage. “Stay out of this, Paladin!” he growled. “They don’t deserve mercy!”
I stepped forward, putting myself between him and the wounded Defias.
“Stand down, soldier. That’s an order.”
“They killed my wife! My family!” His hands tightened around his sword’s hilt, and for a brief moment, I feared he would turn it on me. “You can’t ask me to let him live!”
I took a breath, keeping my voice firm but steady.
“I understand your rage. I do. You lost something that can never be replaced.” I let my words settle before continuing, “But if you kill him now, it’s not justice. It’s murder.”
His chest heaved with heavy breaths, his grief warring with his need for vengeance. I could see the struggle in his eyes—the battle between his duty and his pain.
“We are better than them,” I continued, my voice low but commanding. “If we become murderers, then we are no different from the Defias. We are soldiers of Stormwind. We do not execute the unarmed.”
The other soldiers nearby had gathered, watching in silence.
Some had their hands on their weapons, waiting to see how this would end. Others looked relieved, as if they, too, had felt the weight of the rage, the grief, the temptation to seek revenge—but had not wanted to cross that line.
Slowly, the soldier’s grip on his sword loosened. His hands shook, and his chest rose and fell with unsteady breaths. Finally, with a choked curse, he lowered his blade.
He turned away, refusing to look at the Defias, his shoulders shaking.
I nodded to the nearby men. “Take the prisoner to Commander Blake. Stormwind will decide his fate. Not us.”
Two soldiers moved forward, grabbing the wounded Defias and dragging him toward the secured part of the village.
The tension broke, and the soldiers around me slowly returned to their duties.
But as they walked away, I saw it in their faces—relief.
Relief that one of their own had not become something lesser.
Relief that, even in war, we could still choose to be just.
As the soldier who had nearly taken the man’s life turned to leave, I placed a hand on his shoulder. He flinched, but I did not let go.
“Your grief is real. Your pain is real. But do not let it take you from the man you were before all of this.”
He did not respond. But as he walked away, his steps were heavier with sorrow, but lighter with guilt.
And I knew that, tonight, we had won more than just a battle.
197
We had held the line—not just against the Defias, but against the darkness in ourselves.
The last remnants of the Defias forces have either fled into the hills or lie in shackles, awaiting judgment. The once-occupied village is now under Stormwind’s control, and the weary soldiers stand among the bodies and broken weapons, catching their breath after the hard-fought skirmish.
I remain near the entrance to the Deadmines, my role not yet finished. No one enters. No one leaves. That was the order. And so I hold the line, my armor stained with dust, my hands still tingling from the countless wounds I’ve mended with the Light.
Then, in the dim torchlight, they arrive.
A group of five, moving through the ruined streets of Moonbrook with purpose, confidence, and the kind of silent authority that commands respect. These are not ordinary soldiers.
These are heroes.
They are not clad in the standard issue armor of Stormwind’s army, nor do they march in formation like trained footmen. Their presence alone is enough to part the soldiers around them, who step aside instinctively, eyes watching in quiet admiration.
I watch too. Every detail. Every movement.
At the front walks a warrior, a man built like a fortress of steel, his armor thick and battle-worn, his massive shield strapped firmly to his arm. His sword, broad and polished, rests against his hip, but even at rest, he moves like a man who has spent his life on the frontlines. He does not hesitate, does not falter—he leads.
Beside him, moving with quiet calm and calculation, is a mage, his flowing blue robes adorned with arcane sigils. His eyes shimmer faintly in the low light, the kind of glow one only sees in those who have wielded magic powerful enough to reshape the battlefield itself. His staff, resting lightly in his hand, hums with contained energy, as if waiting to be unleashed.
Trailing slightly behind, but not out of place, is a figure clad in dark leathers, his hood drawn just low enough to cast shadows over his face. His movements are effortless, silent, the kind of practiced grace I have only ever seen in Stormwind’s most elite spies. He is SI:7. He does not wear the insignia, but he doesn’t need to—his every step betrays what he is.
To the right, a dwarf paladin, clad in shining plate, strides forward with the confidence of a veteran, his massive warhammer resting against his shoulder. His beard is thick and braided, his expression set in a stern but knowing smirk. Unlike the other paladins I’ve trained under, he does not carry himself as a priest would, nor does he seem like a soldier. He is something else entirely—an old warfighter, unshaken by whatever awaits him in the depths of the mine.
198
And finally, walking with quiet dignity and unwavering composure, is a priest. His robes are simple, his staff bearing the holy symbol of the Light, but there is nothing fragile about him. Though unarmored, he does not walk like a man who fears battle. His presence alone is a reminder of why even the bravest warriors seek the Light’s guidance.
They do not hesitate. They do not speak.
They have done this before.
As they approach, Commander Harren Blake steps forward to greet them. Even he— a man who has spent decades in service to Stormwind—treats them with the respect reserved for legends.
“You’re expected,” he says simply, offering a nod toward the mine entrance.
The warrior returns the nod, his expression unreadable beneath his heavy helm. The mage studies the battlefield with quiet calculation, while the dwarf adjusts his hammer’s grip, rolling his shoulders as if preparing for the fight ahead. The hooded man says nothing, merely scanning the mine entrance with the wary eyes of a hunter preparing to strike.
I do not move, but I watch. Every stance. Every measured step.
They walk with purpose, but without fear. This is not just another mission to them—this is what they do.
And for the first time in my life, I truly understand what it means to be a hero.
One day, I will walk among them.
One day, I will not just watch from the sidelines—I will step into the depths, into the darkness, and stand beside warriors like these.
But not tonight.
Tonight, I hold the line.
There is nothing left but to wait.
The fires of battle in Moonbrook had faded, and the streets—once filled with the clash of steel and the cries of the wounded—were now eerily quiet. Stormwind’s banners hung over the village, marking our victory, but the job was not yet finished.
The real battle was still happening beneath our feet, deep within the mines.
And so we waited.
The soldiers spoke in hushed tones, some resting against broken walls, others standing guard at the mine entrance, their weapons still drawn—just in case.
But there was nothing more to do.
Nothing left but to hope the strike force succeeded, just as we had.
Hours passed, the anticipation heavier than our armor.
Then, finally—the sound of boots on stone.
199
I turned toward the Deadmines entrance, my heart tightening in my chest as the first f igure emerged from the darkness.
The warrior led the way, his armor streaked with dust and blood, his shield dented but still firm in his grip. Behind him, the mage walked with measured steps, his robes stained with soot, but his face calm as ever.
The priest followed, offering a silent nod to the gathered soldiers, while the dwarf paladin leaned on his massive hammer, wiping sweat from his brow.
And behind them all, walking like a shadow, came the hooded figure from SI:7, his daggers clean, his expression unreadable.
But what struck me most were their eyes—the look of those who had faced death, and emerged victorious.
They didn’t need to speak.
Then, a voice rose over the crowd—Commander Harren Blake.
“The Defias leader is dead!”
A wave of cheers erupted, shaking the night air. Soldiers raised their weapons, celebrating a victory that had been years in the making.
Edwin VanCleef was dead. The Brotherhood’s reign of terror in Westfall was broken.
The officers stepped forward, clasping hands with the strike team, offering words of respect, of admiration. These were not just fighters—they were heroes.
I watched from a distance, my hands resting on the hilt of my blade.
A part of me wished I had been down there, that I had witnessed it firsthand—the f ight, the clash of steel in the darkness, the final moments of VanCleef’s rebellion.
One day.
One day, I will stand among them.
But tonight, I watched. I observed their every movement—their stances, their discipline, their silent understanding of each other.
Tonight, I learned.
And I held onto hope that one day, I would be more than just a witness.
The next few days are calmer.
There is no fighting, no ambushes, no hurried orders in the dead of night. Only the quiet hum of a garrison at rest, soldiers tending to their gear, and the occasional chatter of men relieved to be alive.
200
The morale of the troops is high—Moonbrook has been secured, the Deadmines operation was a success, and for the first time in years, Westfall belongs to Stormwind once again.
The fires of war had burned hot, but now, for the first time in a long while, we had earned some peace.
One week after the Battle of Moonbrook, we returned to Stormwind.
Westfall had been secured, the Defias Brotherhood shattered, and with the region stabilizing under Stormwind’s control, our unit was no longer needed there. The army withdrew, leaving behind garrison forces to maintain order.
Back in the city, the streets were alive with movement, filled with the clanking of armor, the shouting of merchants, and the ever-present echo of Stormwind’s heart beating within its great stone walls.
For the first time in weeks, I felt at ease.
But that peace did not last long.
A summons arrived early in the morning.
A summons arrived early in the morning.
The messenger, a young recruit barely out of training, handed me a sealed letter bearing the mark of Stormwind’s military command.
“Corporal Tune, you are to report to the Hall of Arms immediately.”
I took the letter, breaking the seal. The words inside were formal, direct.
I was being called before Commander Harren Blake and other ranking officers for an official debriefing regarding the Battle of Moonbrook.
I wasn’t sure what to expect.
Had I done something wrong? No. That didn’t make sense. But command rarely summoned soldiers without reason.
I fastened my armor, adjusted my tabard, and made my way to Old Town.
The Hall of Arms, a fortress-like building within Stormwind’s military district, was alive with activity. Officers moved with purpose, recruits sparred in the courtyards, and the air was thick with the scent of oil, steel, and parchment.
Inside, I was directed to a private meeting room, where several officers had gathered.
At the center stood Commander Harren Blake, his hands folded behind his back. To his left, a few captains from the Westfall campaign. To his right, a pair of high rank paladins — their presence was unusual but not unwelcome.
Several soldiers, men who had fought at Moonbrook, stood near the back. Their faces were calm, unreadable.
I stepped forward and saluted.
“Corporal Tune, reporting as ordered.”
201
Blake returned the nod. His expression was unreadable, but there was no anger in his voice—only measured authority.
“We are here to recognize service beyond expectation,” Blake began, his voice steady.
“During the Battle of Moonbrook, you made a choice. When others ran toward battle, you remained with the wounded, ensuring that our soldiers lived to see another fight. That decision saved lives.”
He let the words settle before continuing.
“But more than that, you upheld the discipline and honor of Stormwind’s army. When one of our own nearly broke under the weight of vengeance, you stood firm. You reminded him, and all who witnessed it, that we are not butchers.”
A brief silence passed over the room. The officers exchanged glances—silent approval.
Blake turned back to me.
“For your actions, you are hereby officially commended by the Stormwind Military. Your record will reflect this, and your name has been noted for future leadership considerations.”
One of the officers handed Blake a document, which he extended toward me.
“This is a formal commendation for discipline and service in the field. It marks you as a soldier of sound judgment—one the army can rely on.”
I stepped forward and accepted the parchment.
The seal of Stormwind was pressed into the lower corner, marking it as an official military record.
I gave a firm nod. “Thank you, sir.”
Blake returned the nod. “Well earned, Corporal. Dismissed.”
As I stepped out into the morning light, I looked down at the commendation in my hands.
It was not a medal or a promotion—but it was something just as important.
It meant my superiors had noticed me. That my actions, my choices, were not ignored.
It meant I was on the right path.
This was only the beginning.
The past few weeks had been a whirlwind of battle and duty.
202
The Battle of Moonbrook, the commendation ceremony, and my integration into Stormwind’s army had left little time for reflection. My days had been filled with training, patrols, and military briefings—the usual tasks of a soldier.
But the memory of Duskwood’s growing darkness loomed over me. Rumors whispered through the barracks—tales of undead rising in the night, worgen stalking the roads, and terrified villagers abandoning their homes.
I expected my next orders to come from Commander Harren Blake or another officer. Perhaps a deployment to Redridge, or even a mission escorting supplies to Westfall’s garrisons.
Instead, a messenger in the blue-and-gold livery of the Church of the Light found me in the barracks early that morning.
He stood stiffly, a young acolyte barely older than a fresh recruit. His face was set with nervous determination as he cleared his throat and extended a sealed parchment.
“Corporal Tune, you are summoned to the Cathedral of Light.”
I took the parchment, breaking the wax seal and scanning the message.
Paladin Tune, your presence is requested at the Cathedral of Light immediately. Come prepared. — Brother Kristoff
No further details. No explanation.
I nodded to the acolyte. “Tell them I’m on my way.”
Stormwind’s Cathedral District was a stark contrast to the barracks and training yards where I had spent most of my time.
The Cathedral of Light was not just a place of worship—it was a symbol of faith, strength, and unity in a kingdom that had endured wars, invasions, and betrayals.
Its massive marble walls and towering spires loomed over the city, a reminder that even in times of war, Stormwind stood firm.
As I approached the wide stone steps, I passed civilians kneeling in quiet prayer, off duty guards lighting candles for fallen comrades, and robed clerics reciting holy verses.
Many turned to look at me—some in respect, others with curiosity. A paladin being summoned to the Cathedral was no small matter.
The grand wooden doors stood open, allowing the warm glow of hundreds of f lickering candles to spill into the morning light. Golden sunlight streamed through stained-glass windows, casting shifting patterns on the stone floor as I stepped inside.
Inside, I saw Duthorian Rall standing near the altar, conversing with a few senior paladins. His expression was stern, as always.
But it was Brother Kristoff who turned toward me first.
203
The elderly cleric stood beside a table stacked with scrolls, ink bottles, and aged tomes. His spectacles rested low on his nose, and he peered over them with the calm patience of a scholar.
“Ah, Corporal Tune,” he greeted, his voice warm but firm. “I appreciate your prompt arrival.”
I stepped forward and saluted. “I was told you had need of me, Brother Kristoff.”
“Indeed.” He gestured to the table, tapping a worn leather-bound tome with one f inger. “I have been preparing new writings on the virtues of fortitude—a quality essential to any who wield the Light.”
I nodded. “I understand. What do you require of me?”
Kristoff folded his hands behind his back. “The wisdom of others.”
He motioned toward a parchment filled with notes and references.
“There is a book on Fortitude that I require to complete my work. It is kept in the Royal Library of Stormwind, under the care of Milton Sheaf, the head librarian. I need you to retrieve it for me.”
A simple errand.
I hesitated for only a moment. After everything I had been through—fighting in Moonbrook, witnessing the horrors of war, seeing men at their worst—this seemed almost… mundane.
Kristoff noticed my expression.
“Does this task seem unimportant to you, Paladin?”
I straightened. “No, Brother. I only expected something more… pressing.”
His gaze sharpened, but there was no malice in it—only the patience of a man who had guided countless young knights before me.
“Fortitude is not just strength in battle,” he said. “It is endurance. The ability to withstand hardship, doubt, and even the mundane trials that test our patience. If a soldier cannot humble himself for even the smallest of tasks, how can he expect to be strong in greater trials?”
The words settled over me, and I felt a small weight of understanding settle in my chest.
This was not about retrieving a book.
It was about discipline. Obedience. Humility.
I bowed my head slightly. “I will retrieve the book, Brother Kristoff.”
He smiled. “Good. Seek out Milton Sheaf in the Royal Library—he will know where to f ind it. And take care—sometimes, the greatest wisdom is found in the simplest of places.”
With that, he returned to his work, leaving me to my thoughts.
204
I turned, my boots echoing softly against the stone floor as I made my way out of the Cathedral of Light.
My path had taken me through battles, bloodshed, and moral trials. But now, it led me to a library.
And perhaps, there was something to be learned there as well.
The streets of Stormwind were alive with their usual rhythm—merchants calling out their wares, blacksmiths hammering steel, guards patrolling the busy avenues. The echoes of everyday life surrounded me, but my mind lingered on Brother Kristoff’s words.
“Fortitude is not just strength in battle. It is endurance, patience, and the will to withstand all trials.”
At first, this task had seemed small, even insignificant. But the more I thought about it, the more I realized this was a lesson in discipline.
And so, I embraced it.
My steps took me through the Mage Quarter, past robed scholars debating the arcane, and into Stormwind Keep, where the Royal Library stood within its high stone walls.
It was a different kind of battlefield—one where knowledge was the weapon, and patience was the shield.
The Royal Library was nestled deep within Stormwind Keep, its entrance marked by tall banners bearing the lion of Stormwind. As I stepped inside, the scent of aged parchment and candle wax filled the air.
Rows upon rows of towering bookshelves lined the stone walls, their surfaces covered in ancient tomes, royal decrees, and historical accounts of wars long past. The glow of enchanted lanterns flickered gently, illuminating scribes and scholars hunched over scrolls, their quills scratching softly against parchment.
It was a place of wisdom and history, where kings, generals, and knights had once studied before taking to the battlefield.
I spotted Milton Sheaf, the head librarian, standing near one of the shelves, adjusting a stack of books with careful precision.
He was a thin man with round spectacles, his robes simple yet well-kept. Unlike the hardened warriors I was used to dealing with, he carried himself with the quiet confidence of a man who knew the power of knowledge.
As I approached, he turned, peering at me over the rim of his glasses.
“Ah, a Paladin!” he said, his voice warm but tinged with curiosity. “Not many of your kind visit the library. What can I do for you?”
I nodded in greeting. “I am here on behalf of Brother Kristoff. He seeks a book on Fortitude.”
205
Milton’s eyes lit up with recognition. “Ah, yes! An excellent choice. A fine read for any knight of the Light.”
He adjusted his spectacles and turned toward one of the many bookshelves. “Come with me. It should be… yes, here.”
His fingers brushed over rows of aged tomes, finally settling on a leather-bound volume, its golden lettering faded from years of use. He pulled it from the shelf and handed it to me.
“Here we are—’Fortitude: The Strength to Endure.’ A collection of teachings from some of Azeroth’s greatest warriors and scholars.”
I accepted the book, its weight heavier than expected.
Perhaps it was not the physical burden, but the lesson within its pages that held true weight.
Milton smiled knowingly. “The Light is not only in the sword, Paladin, but in wisdom as well. Many knights spend their lives chasing glory, yet true strength is found in the endurance to hold firm in the darkest of times.”
I nodded. “Thank you, Master Sheaf. I will take this to Brother Kristoff.”
But as I turned to leave, Milton spoke again.
“Before you go, Paladin—may I offer a suggestion?”
I paused. “Of course.”
Milton tapped the edge of the bookshelf thoughtfully.
“Knowledge is like a blade—it must be tempered and tested. If you truly wish to understand fortitude, seek out those who have lived by it.”
I frowned slightly. “What do you mean?”
Milton gestured toward a parchment on his desk.
“There is a man at Northshire Abbey, a scholar of the Light named Brother Paxton. He has spent his life teaching young knights about the endurance of faith and the trials of perseverance. If you wish to truly grasp the meaning of Fortitude, he is the one you should speak to.”
A detour.
I hesitated for only a moment. This was supposed to be a simple book retrieval. But hadn’t Brother Kristoff said this was more than just a task?
Perhaps this was part of the lesson.
I nodded. “Very well. I will seek him out.”
Milton smiled. “A wise choice, Paladin. May the Light guide you on your path.”
I stepped out of the Royal Library, the weight of the book resting against my chest.
206
At first, this mission had felt insignificant. But now, it was turning into something more.
Fortitude was not just about carrying a heavy sword or wearing thick armor.
It was about endurance. It was about patience. It was about the will to seek wisdom, even when it was easier to march into battle.
And so, instead of returning straight to the Cathedral, I turned my horse toward Northshire Abbey.
A new lesson awaited.
The ride to Northshire Abbey was a short one, the path winding through the rolling green hills of Elwynn Forest. The road was quiet, save for the occasional traveler or patrol of Stormwind guards.
The book on Fortitude rested in my saddlebag, its presence a constant reminder that my trials were far from over.
Perhaps Brother Paxton would have something more to teach me.
The stone walls of Northshire Abbey rose in the distance, standing as pristine and unshaken as I remembered. The chapel’s stained-glass windows glowed softly in the midday sun, and the ringing of a training bell echoed through the valley.
Recruits were sparring in the courtyard, their wooden swords clashing in measured strikes. An elderly instructor barked orders, correcting their footwork and stances.
I watched for a moment, a small, knowing smile forming on my lips.
I dismounted and entered the Abbey’s main hall. The air inside was cool and calm, the scent of old parchment and candle wax thick in the air.
At the far end of the hall, standing before a lectern covered in scrolls, was Brother Paxton.
He was a bald, kind-eyed man, his face lined with years of patience and wisdom. Unlike the battle-hardened paladins I had served with, he wore simple robes, his hands stained with ink rather than blood.
As I approached, he looked up, studying me with a quiet curiosity.
“Tell me, what brings you back to where your journey began?”
I bowed respectfully. “Brother Paxton, I come on behalf of Brother Kristoff of Stormwind. He seeks wisdom on Fortitude, and I was told you might offer guidance.”
Paxton nodded thoughtfully.
“Fortitude…” He folded his hands behind his back and gestured for me to follow. “Come, walk with me.”
207
We moved through the Abbey, passing rows of bookshelves and young clerics transcribing old tomes. Paxton’s pace was slow but steady, his voice calm and measured.
“Many believe Fortitude is merely the ability to endure pain or hardship,” he said. “A warrior who stands against impossible odds, an anvil that withstands every strike of the hammer.”
He paused beside a wooden training dummy, running his fingers over its scarred surface.
“But true Fortitude… is more than that.” He turned to face me.
“A blade may break. A shield may shatter. Even the strongest warrior will one day fall. Fortitude is not the absence of weakness—it is the will to rise again, even when all else has failed.”
His words settled over me like a heavy truth.
I thought of Moonbrook. The fallen soldiers. The weight of my choices.
I had never faltered in battle—but I had felt the doubt, the exhaustion, the quiet voice that asked if it was worth it.
Paxton studied my face and nodded knowingly.
“You have endured trials already, haven’t you?”
I hesitated before answering. “I have.”
“Then you understand what I mean.” He gestured toward the book I carried. “That is why Brother Kristoff sent you. Not just to retrieve knowledge—but to understand it.”
Paxton smiled slightly. “Now, if you truly wish to help Brother Kristoff, you will need more than just words.”
He led me to a small writing desk, where a blank scroll and quill sat waiting.
“Take this. You will need ink and parchment of the finest quality to ensure that his writings endure.”
I frowned. “Ink and parchment?”
Paxton nodded. “It is a small thing, yes, but Fortitude is built on patience and diligence—not just in battle, but in duty. Seek out Foreman Oslow in Lakeshire. He has the proper materials.”
Another task.
Another test.
I sighed, then nodded with understanding. “Very well. I will go to Redridge.”
Paxton placed a hand on my shoulder, his grip strong despite his years.
“Remember this, Paladin—the greatest battles are not always fought with steel.”
As I rode from Northshire Abbey, my mind turned over his words.
208
I had come for a book—but I was leaving with a lesson.
Fortitude was not just endurance in battle. It was the quiet resolve to keep going, to hold the line, even when no one was watching.
Now, my path led me to Lakeshire.
And, perhaps, to another piece of the lesson I had yet to fully understand.
The road eastward from Elwynn Forest to Redridge Mountains was peaceful at first. Birds flitted between the trees, and the scent of damp earth filled the morning air.
But as I passed through the stone bridge into Redridge, the scenery shifted.
Elwynn’s rolling green fields gave way to rugged hills and dry, cracked roads. The towering Redridge Mountains loomed overhead, their red-hued cliffs casting long shadows across the land.
Lakeshire sat at the edge of the great lake, a town on the frontline of survival.
Unlike the wealth and security of Stormwind, Redridge had no grand walls, no standing army—only soldiers and villagers holding the line against the constant threat of gnolls and Blackrock orcs.
This was a different kind of battle.
One fought with endurance, resilience, and fortitude.
Lakeshire’s wooden bridge creaked under my horse’s hooves as I entered the town.
I found Foreman Oslow near the barricades, speaking with a few militiamen. He was a grizzled, no-nonsense man, his leather gloves coated in dust and ink. His job was not just to manage construction—it was to ensure Lakeshire didn’t collapse under its own hardships.
When he saw me approach, he raised a thick eyebrow.
“Another soldier from Stormwind?” He crossed his arms. “What’s this about?”
I dismounted, offering a respectful nod. “Brother Paxton of Northshire sent me. He requires ink and parchment for Brother Kristoff’s writings.”
Oslow exhaled, rubbing the back of his neck. “You paladins and your books… Always searching for something beyond steel and war. Guess that’s not a bad thing.”
He gestured toward a nearby crate filled with supplies.
“I’ve got fine ink and parchment, but if you want it to last, you’ll need something more durable to bind it. And for that…” He jabbed a thumb toward the rugged cliffs to the north.
“You’ll need Rethban Ore. Best damn binding plates you’ll find.”
I frowned slightly. “Rethban Ore?”
209
Oslow nodded. “Aye. Sturdier than most. The only problem is…” He gave a knowing smirk. “You’ll have to dig it up yourself.”
I straightened. “So I need a mining pick.”
He chuckled. “That’s right. Unless you want to claw it out with your bare hands, which I wouldn’t recommend.”
He turned and rummaged through a pile of old tools, pulling out a small, well-worn pickaxe.
“Here. Ain’t much, but it’ll do the job. Keep it on you—it’ll serve you well if you ever need to dig again.”
I took the pickaxe, testing its weight in my hand. It was simple but sturdy, easy enough to strap onto my horse’s saddle for future use.
“Thanks,” I said.
“Don’t mention it,” Oslow replied, his tone turning more serious. “The Rethban Caverns are crawling with gnolls. You’ll have to cut through them if you want that ore. Stay sharp, Paladin.”
I secured the pickaxe onto my horse and gave a firm nod.
“Then I’ll get to work.”
As I left Lakeshire, my new pickaxe secured at my side, I couldn’t help but feel that this task was more than just another errand.
A paladin was expected to carry a sword, a shield, and faith.
But now, I carried a mining pick as well.
A small, humble tool. Yet one that symbolized hard work, patience, and persistence.
Perhaps that was the lesson Brother Paxton had meant for me to learn all along.
And now, it was time to earn my reward.
The trail leading north from Lakeshire was uneven, winding through rocky hills and patches of dry grass. The road was little more than a dust-covered path, carved by the boots of militiamen, traders, and desperate settlers who clung to the hope that Redridge might still thrive.
As I rode, I saw signs of past battles—burned wagons, shattered barricades, broken spears left abandoned in the dirt.
Redridge had always been a land of constant struggle.
For generations, Stormwind had tried to reclaim it. The people here fought every day—not just against gnolls and orcs, but against the very land itself.
I had fought battles. I had seen war. But true fortitude was not just about taking up a sword—it was about carrying on, even when the battle never truly ends.
210
The entrance to the Rethban Caverns came into view ahead, carved into the side of a jagged hill. A few makeshift gnoll totems stood outside, their painted symbols crude and menacing.
This place belonged to the gnolls now.
But I was here to take something back.
I dismounted, securing my horse at a safe distance. The air near the entrance was thick with the smell of damp earth and the faint, musky scent of gnolls.
The mouth of the cavern was wide and dark, the flickering glow of torches barely illuminating the path ahead.
I unfastened the small pickaxe from my saddle, gripping its handle firmly. It was a simple tool, far from the weight of a warhammer, yet it had its own purpose.
With a deep breath, I stepped inside.
The inside of the caverns was larger than I expected, with natural rock formations towering overhead. The walls were scarred with old mining marks, remnants of a time before the gnolls took over.
I moved carefully, keeping my steps light. The sound of gravel crunching beneath my boots echoed off the stone walls.
It wasn’t long before I heard them.
Gnolls.
Their guttural growls and yipping laughter echoed through the tunnels. I could see their crude mining operation—several gnolls hacking away at the cavern walls with rusted picks, while others patrolled the area.
I tightened my grip on my sword. If I wanted the ore, I would have to take it.
A lone gnoll scout spotted me first.
It let out a snarling bark, raising a crude axe. Before it could raise the alarm, I surged forward, my blade cutting through its defenses with practiced ease.
The noise drew more gnolls.
Within moments, I found myself surrounded.
I stood my ground, deflecting a rusted cleaver with my shield before driving my sword through a gnoll brute’s thick hide. Another lunged at me from the side, its jagged teeth snapping inches from my arm.
I bashed it away with my shield, following up with a quick strike to the throat.
They fought with ferocity, but not skill.
And one by one, they fell.
The cavern fell silent once more, save for the dripping of water from stalactites above.
211
I exhaled, wiping my blade clean before turning to the reason I had come.
Near the back of the cavern, untouched by gnoll hands, was a vein of deep-red ore, shimmering faintly under the torchlight.
This was Rethban Ore.
A few weeks ago, I might have seen this as just another errand. But now, after everything I had learned…
This was another kind of battle.
I unfastened my pickaxe, gripping it tightly. Unlike my sword, it was not a weapon of war—but of effort, patience, and persistence.
With a steady breath, I raised the pick and struck the rock.
The first hit sent vibrations through my arm, the force rattling my fingers. This was not the effortless swing of a sword—it required a different kind of strength.
I struck again. And again.
The rock chipped away, bit by bit, until at last, the ore loosened. I gathered several chunks, securing them in my pack.
The work was not glorious, nor fast.
But that was the lesson, wasn’t it?
With the ore secured, I made my way back toward the entrance.
The air outside felt lighter, the sky above a brilliant shade of gold as the sun began to set over the mountains.
As I fastened my pickaxe to my saddle once more, I glanced at the red-stained ore in my hands.
This was more than just metal.
This was proof of effort. Of work. Of patience.
I had fought enemies, yes. But I had also endured, labored, and persevered through something different than war.
And that—Brother Paxton’s lesson—was starting to make sense.
I mounted my horse, turning toward Lakeshire once more.
The final step awaited me back in Stormwind.
The journey from Lakeshire back to Stormwind was quiet.
The Redridge Mountains faded into the distance, replaced by the rolling green fields of Elwynn Forest. The air smelled of fresh grass and river water, a sharp contrast to the dusty roads and dry air of Redridge.
The weight of the Rethban Ore in my pack was nothing compared to the lesson I carried with me.
Fortitude.
212
Not just in war, but in the patience to work, to endure, to build.
I had seen the people of Redridge fight a different kind of battle—not just with swords, but with persistence. With resilience.
And in their struggle, I had learned something valuable.
The true strength of a Paladin was not just in battle, but in the willingness to stand f irm, even when no one was watching.
By the time I rode through the streets of Stormwind, the sun was beginning to set. The golden light bathed the city’s stone walls, casting long shadows across the streets.
The Cathedral District was quiet, save for the murmur of evening prayers drifting from inside the great halls.
I dismounted, making my way up the marble steps of the Cathedral of Light.
Inside, Brother Kristoff was exactly where I had left him—seated at his desk, surrounded by scrolls, ink bottles, and parchment.
As I approached, he looked up, a pleased smile forming behind his spectacles.
“Ah, Paladin Tune. You have returned.” His eyes drifted to the satchel at my side. “And you have brought what I asked for?”
I nodded and placed the book, ink, and Rethban Ore on the table.
Kristoff carefully ran his fingers over the leather-bound tome, inspecting its condition. Then he examined the ink and parchment before finally lifting a chunk of the ore, its deep red color glinting in the candlelight.
“Sturdy,” he mused. “More than fitting for a book meant to last generations.”
I stood silently as he took his time inspecting everything.
Finally, he set the ore down and looked at me.
“You traveled far for this. Tell me, Paladin—what have you learned?”
I took a slow breath, thinking back on everything.
The journey. The patience. The effort.
“Fortitude is more than just strength in battle,” I said at last. “It is the will to endure—not just pain, but hardship. To keep working, even when there is no glory in it. To stand firm, even when no one sees.”
Kristoff studied me for a long moment before nodding.
“A lesson well learned.”
He gestured to the book on Fortitude, now resting beside the ink and ore.
213
“This book will last for years—perhaps centuries. But the true lesson of Fortitude does not live in ink or metal. It lives in those who choose to uphold it.”
His gaze softened slightly. “I hope you will carry this lesson with you, Paladin. It may serve you more than any blade or shield.”
I nodded. “I will.”
Kristoff smiled. “Good.”
As I turned to leave, Kristoff reached beneath his desk, retrieving something wrapped in simple cloth.
“Before you go, one last thing.” He unwrapped the package, revealing a pair of sturdy, well-crafted boots.
They were made of reinforced leather, lined with chain metal plating around the ankles and shins—light enough for movement, but sturdy enough for protection.
“A Paladin walks many roads,” Kristoff said. “And if you are to endure, you will need something to carry you forward.”
I accepted the boots with a grateful nod.
“Thank you, Brother Kristoff.”
He simply smiled. “Go with the Light, Paladin Tune. And may your steps never falter.”
As I stepped out of the Cathedral of Light, the streets of Stormwind stretched before me.
The road ahead was uncertain, filled with challenges yet to come.
But as I fastened my new boots, feeling their firm grip beneath my feet, I knew one thing for certain.
I was ready to face whatever lay ahead.
Because fortitude was not just something I had learned.
It was something I now carried with me.
Always.
The weeks after my journey for Brother Kristoff were calmer, quieter—a rare stretch of time where my duties involved training, study, and simple service rather than facing war f irsthand.
Stormwind remained as busy as ever—blacksmiths hammering steel, merchants shouting prices, and patrols marching through the cobbled streets. But for me, things had slowed down.
Instead of the front lines, I spent my days:
Training new recruits in the barracks.
Reading scriptures in the Cathedral.
Sparring with fellow paladins in the training yards.
214
Walking the city streets, observing the people I had sworn to protect.
It was not a time of inaction, but rather a time of reflection.
The lessons of Fortitude still weighed on my mind.
I found myself speaking more with Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker during those weeks.
One day, after a morning training session, he approached me near the Cathedral courtyard.
“You’ve been keeping busy,” he noted, arms crossed over his heavy plate armor. “But I sense you are… waiting.”
I nodded. “A soldier always waits for his next order, my Lord.”
Grayson studied me for a long moment before speaking.
“And what have you learned in this time of waiting?”
I hesitated before answering.
“That battle is not the only way to serve. That a Paladin’s duty is more than just war.”
Grayson nodded approvingly. “Good. Many only find purpose when steel clashes with steel. They forget that the Light is not just for war—it is for those we protect.”
His gaze shifted toward the bustling city streets. “Stormwind stands not because of soldiers alone, but because of those who endure hardship daily. The farmers, the smiths, the builders. That is true Fortitude.”
I looked toward the people as well.
The merchant teaching his apprentice. The guard helping a lost child. The healer tending to an elderly woman’s wound.
They were not warriors.
But they endured.
Grayson clapped a heavy hand on my shoulder. “You will remember this lesson when the time comes.”
With that, he walked away, leaving me with my thoughts.
As the weeks passed, I felt stronger, steadier, more prepared than ever before.
The training, the study, the rest—it had sharpened my mind as much as my sword.
But I knew it would not last forever.
Stormwind was safe, but the world beyond its walls was not.
215
And then, one evening, as I sat in quiet meditation within the Cathedral, the call came.
A messenger arrived, bearing sealed orders from the Stormwind Army.
I broke the seal and read the words within.
Orders to travel to Duskwood.
The quiet weeks were over.
My next trial awaited.
And this time, it would be far darker than anything I had faced before.
The road from Elwynn Forest into Duskwood felt like crossing into another world.
The air grew colder, the sunlight faded, and the once-vibrant trees of Elwynn twisted into dark, gnarled things that loomed overhead like silent sentinels. A thick mist clung to the ground, swirling around the hooves of our horses as we rode deeper into the gloom.
I had heard the rumors—Duskwood was cursed, haunted, a land where the dead did not stay buried. But seeing it with my own eyes was something else entirely.
“Light preserve us,” one of my men muttered under his breath, gripping his sword tighter.
Ahead, Darkshire came into view—a small, isolated town surrounded by rickety wooden fences and watchtowers manned by tired, overworked soldiers. The streets were nearly empty, save for a few haggard civilians moving quickly between buildings, heads down, eyes wary.
This was not a place of peace.
This was a town under siege—not by an army, but by fear.
As we rode through town, soldiers of the Night Watch eyed us with suspicion. They were outnumbered, exhausted, and on edge, their hands never straying far from their weapons.
I dismounted in front of the Darkshire Town Hall, my men following suit. Inside, the room was dimly lit, the scent of old parchment and oil lanterns hanging in the air.
At the far end of the hall stood Commander Althea Ebonlocke.
She was a woman of sharp features and sharper eyes, clad in the black and red armor of the Night Watch. Her posture was rigid, her expression severe, the look of a commander who had fought too many battles with too few soldiers.
She studied me as I approached, her gaze flicking over my armor before settling on my face.
“Another Stormwind reinforcement?” she asked, voice cool.
I removed my helmet and saluted. “Paladin Tune, reporting as ordered. My men and I are here to support the Night Watch.”
216
She exhaled slowly, crossing her arms. “You picked a fine time to arrive, Paladin. We’re losing ground. The undead are growing bolder by the day, and we barely have the numbers to hold Darkshire.”
I glanced at the map laid out on the table beside her. Several locations had been marked in red ink—undead sightings, attacks, patrol routes that had gone missing.
“Where do you need us?” I asked.
She tapped a spot on the map—a place called The Rotting Orchard, just southeast of Darkshire.
“A group of skeletal warriors and mages have taken over the old farmland. They attack anyone who strays too close. I sent men to clear them out, but… none returned.”
I met her gaze. “Then we’ll finish the job.”
Her lips pressed into a thin line. “Good. But be warned—this isn’t Westfall or Elwynn. You’ll be facing things that don’t feel pain, don’t fear death, and don’t stop coming. If you’re not ready for that, you and your men will join them.”
I nodded grimly. “We’ll handle it.”
She gave a curt nod. “Then get moving. And Paladin—don’t get killed. We can’t afford to lose anyone else.”
My men and I left Darkshire at dusk, heading southeast.
As we moved, the land around us grew worse—fields that should have been lush were now barren and lifeless, the once-thriving apple trees twisted and rotting, their blackened limbs stretching toward the sky like grasping hands.
We soon saw movement ahead.
Figures lurched between the trees—skeletons clad in rusted armor, their hollow eyes glowing with eerie blue light. Among them, I spotted robed figures—undead spellcasters, whispering incantations in a language I did not recognize.
“Form up,” I ordered, raising my shield. “Stay close. We hold the line here.”
My men obeyed, weapons drawn, shields locked together.
This would be our first test in Duskwood.
I took a deep breath, focusing my will.
No one dies today.
Then I stepped forward, raising my shield.
“Advance!”
The battle for the Rotting Orchard had begun.
The first wave of undead moved toward us—shambling skeletons, clad in tattered armor and wielding rusted weapons.
217
They lacked strength, agility, or speed—their movements were jerky and unnatural, like puppets controlled by unseen hands.
And yet, despite their weakness, I saw fear in my men’s eyes.
These were not bandits or orcs or Defias thugs. These were the dead. Things that should not be standing. Things that should not be fighting.
I stepped forward, raising my shield. “Stay together! No harm will come to you while I stand!”
Their grips tightened on their weapons. Some swallowed their fear. Others still hesitated.
I needed to ground them in something familiar—something simple.
I let out a breath, then spoke firmly: “Break their bones.”
It was something I had said before—back in Lordaeron, when we fought the undead there.
Simple. Direct. A reminder that these were not men—they were brittle, fragile things.
My words took hold.
With renewed resolve, they struck, shattered, and crushed their enemies into dust.
The last skeleton collapsed under a mace strike, its skull crushed into the dirt.
For a moment, all was still.
Then—a sound.
A slow, deliberate clank.
We turned, and there—emerging from the shadows of the orchard—came something different.
A towering figure, clad in blackened steel, its armor bearing the sigil of a long forgotten regiment. A greatsword rested on its shoulder, its blade drenched in unnatural darkness.
This was no mere wandering skeleton.
This was a fallen knight.
My men faltered.
This was no longer mindless bones and tattered armor.
This was what remained of a warrior.
It lowered its sword, pointing it toward us in a slow, deliberate challenge.
The air grew colder.
This fight would not be as easy.
I raised my shield.
218
“Hold formation!” I commanded, stepping forward. “Let it come to me first!”
The knight moved fast—faster than any undead should.
Its blade came down, a strike meant to cleave me in half. I raised my shield at the last moment—the impact sent a shock through my arm, but I held firm.
Judgment of the Light.
A golden burst of divine energy struck the knight’s armor, weakening its cursed strength.
It let out a hollow growl, staggering slightly.
“Now! Hit it!” I shouted.
My men struck—swords, axes, and maces clashed against its cursed armor.
But it would not fall easily.
It lunged at Galen Harth, aiming for his throat—I intercepted, ramming my shield into its side. It stumbled, but recovered unnaturally fast.
This was not a battle of strength alone.
This was a battle of endurance.
And I would endure longer than it.
Step by step, we wore it down.
Strike. Block. Counter. Step forward.
The knight weakened, its movements becoming less precise, more sluggish.
Then, Siric Dunwald delivered the final blow—his sword sank between the plates of its armor, piercing the dark essence within.
The knight let out a deep, rattling exhale… then collapsed, its cursed life finally extinguished.
The coldness lifted.
The orchard was silent once more.
I exhaled, shaking the tension from my arm. My shield bore a fresh dent, but I was still standing.
We spent the next few minutes scouting the area, ensuring no other undead remained.
The orchard was clear.
The mission was complete.
219
The ride back to Darkshire was silent, but not tense. My men rode closer together now, steadier than before. The fear they had shown at the Rotting Orchard had lessened—not gone, but controlled.
Even Siric Dunwald, who had seemed the most shaken at the start, rode with his shoulders set firm.
Commander Althea Ebonlocke was waiting for us as we dismounted.
“Good work,” she said, skipping pleasantries. “But we’re not done.”
She gestured toward the map on the table.
“The undead are growing more aggressive, and they’re moving in from multiple points,” she said. “Our biggest concern right now is the Tranquil Gardens Cemetery.”
Roland Vale, our archer, scoffed. “Not very tranquil, is it?”
Althea ignored him.
“We’ve had reports of ghouls and skeletal fiends emerging from the graves, attacking anyone near the southern road. If they push further, they’ll threaten supply wagons coming from Westfall.”
I studied the map.
A cemetery meant confined spaces—nowhere to maneuver, nothing but gravestones, mausoleums, and open earth.
It would be dangerous.
I nodded. “We’ll clear it.”
Althea met my gaze. “Be careful, Paladin. The dead are restless, and something is making them rise.”
We moved south toward the cemetery, the moon now high overhead, casting an eerie silver glow across the land. The air grew colder as we neared, the stench of rot thick in our throats.
Lilian “Lark” Thorne, our scout, motioned for us to stop.
“Tracks,” she murmured, crouching near the dirt path.
Siric and Galen, our foot soldiers, stepped closer.
“Undead don’t leave footprints,” Galen pointed out.
Lark shot him a flat look. “These aren’t undead tracks.” She rose, dusting off her hands. “Someone’s been here. Recently.”
My grip tightened on my sword.
This wasn’t just a nest of mindless undead.
Someone was controlling them.
220
I nodded toward the cemetery gate. “We move in carefully. Shields up. Lark, stay in the shadows and scout ahead.”
She smirked. “I always do.”
Then she was gone, melting into the darkness like she belonged to it.
We entered the cemetery cautiously, our boots crunching on dead leaves and loose gravel. The gravestones around us were old, some broken, others shifted as if something had crawled out from beneath.
Then, the ground stirred.
The first ghoul erupted from the dirt, claws flashing toward Siric. He barely raised his shield in time before a second one lunged at Galen.
“Contact!” I shouted, raising my shield just as a skeletal warrior emerged from behind a mausoleum.
The battle began in chaos.
Siric and Galen fought side by side, their swords clashing against bone and rotting f lesh. Roland fired arrows from the perimeter, his shots slamming into skulls with deadly precision.
I took point, my shield raised, taking the brunt of the attacks.
The undead were faster, stronger than those at the orchard. These were ghouls, creatures that moved with unnatural agility, claws scraping at our armor, teeth snapping at exposed skin.
One of them lunged—I bashed it with my shield, sending it sprawling.
“Focus your strikes!” I called to my men. “Destroy the joints, don’t let them get back up!”
We held our ground.
But something was wrong.
For every undead we cut down, more kept coming.
Then I heard it—a voice, low and whispering, carrying dark words on the wind.
Necromancy.
From the shadows of a crumbling mausoleum, a cloaked figure stepped forward.
He was tall and gaunt, his robes black and crimson, embroidered with dark symbols. His hands were raised, wreathed in pale green energy, his eyes hollow pits of shadow.
He was controlling the undead.
Roland loosed an arrow at him—it stopped midair, disintegrating before it could reach its target.
The necromancer let out a dry chuckle.
221
“You should not have come here, Paladin.”
I stepped forward, raising my sword. “Release your hold on these souls.”
His smile widened.
“I think not.”
He thrust his hands forward—and the ground exploded.
More undead erupted from the graves, ghouls and skeletal horrors, clawing their way toward us with renewed ferocity.
“Hold the line!” I commanded, bracing my shield as they swarmed us again.
This was no longer a fight of attrition.
We could not simply cut down the undead and win.
We had to kill the necromancer.
“Roland!” I shouted. “Keep his hands busy!”
The archer nodded, loosing arrow after arrow, forcing the necromancer to weave his magic defensively.
“Lark!” I bellowed next. “Flank him!”
I didn’t need to see her to know she was already moving.
But the necromancer wasn’t a fool.
As Lark tried to move through the shadows, he snarled and raised a hand.
A ghostly hand erupted from the earth, grabbing her leg, pulling her down. She cursed, struggling.
That was my opening.
I charged.
The necromancer turned just as I slammed into him, my shield glowing with holy energy. He reeled back, hissing as Light burned through his robes.
I followed up with Judgement of the Light, striking him with a divine force that sent him crashing against a gravestone.
He gasped, clutching his chest. His magic flickered.
The undead slowed.
“Now!” I roared.
Siric and Galen moved in, cutting down the remaining undead, while Roland f inished off the wounded ghouls.
The necromancer tried to mutter a final incantation, but I stepped forward, sword raised.
His eyes went wide.
222
“Wait—”
The Light found him before my blade did.
His body convulsed as divine energy consumed him, burning away his unnatural existence.
Then, with one last whisper, he crumbled into dust.
The cemetery was silent once more.
Lark pulled herself free from the ghostly hand, brushing dirt off her gear. “Next time, I pick the target.”
Roland smirked, retrieving one of his arrows. “Next time, don’t get caught.”
Siric and Galen exhaled, shoulders slumping.
I took a slow breath.
The Light still lingered in the air, purging the last traces of darkness from the battlefield.
I turned to my men.
“Duskwood won’t fall today.”
And we rode back to Darkshire to take our next orders.
The ride back to Darkshire was quiet.
Not the fearful silence of men too shaken to speak, but the calm that follows battle.
We had won.
But as we rode, my thoughts drifted.
Undead. Here, in Duskwood.
Before arriving, I had thought the horrors of Lordearon—the Scourge, the Plague— were distant. But Duskwood had its own nightmares, and though this was not the same evil that consumed my homeland, it was still undeath. Still wrong.
I looked at Siric and Galen, still gripping their swords tight, at Roland and Lark, their faces set in grim focus.
They had never known what it was like in Lordaeron. They had never seen entire villages turned overnight. Never watched friends rise with hollow eyes and twisted forms.
And I was grateful for that.
This? This was different. There was no plague here. No creeping disease that turned the living into mindless servants of death.
It was necromancy. Corrupt, unnatural magic—but controlled.
It could be fought. Stopped.
223
And for that, I was relieved.
But I had to wonder… who was behind all of this?
As we entered Darkshire, Althea Ebonlocke was already waiting for us at the Town Hall.
“You made it back.” Her eyes flicked across my men, noting the scrapes and bruises but no missing faces.
“We took down the necromancer at Tranquil Gardens,” I reported. “The dead there won’t be rising again.”
She exhaled, nodding. “Good. One less problem.”
But her expression didn’t relax.
“There’s one last place you need to go,” she said, motioning to the map.
Raven Hill Cemetery.
Unlike the smaller graveyards we had cleared before, Raven Hill was a true necropolis.
It was once a settlement of farmers and lumber workers. Now, it was nothing but death.
“The undead there aren’t just rising,” Althea said. “They’re gathering.”
My brow furrowed. “For what purpose?”
She shook her head. “I don’t know. But if they’re preparing for something, I don’t want to wait and find out what.”
She met my gaze.
“This is the last mission, Paladin. If you clear Raven Hill, Darkshire might have a chance at holding this land.”
I nodded. “We’ll handle it.”
The ride westward was tense.
The deeper we went, the less the land felt alive.
At first, there were signs of old farms, broken fences, abandoned homes. But then, even those disappeared.
The trees became bare, their branches twisted like skeletal fingers. The air was thick with rot, and the ground felt wrong beneath our horses’ hooves.
Then, at last, we saw it.
Raven Hill.
The town itself was a ruin, long abandoned. The graveyard stretched behind it, endless rows of crumbling tombstones and mausoleums leading into the fog.
Roland muttered, “This place feels cursed.”
224
I didn’t disagree.
But we had a job to do.
I dismounted. “On foot from here. Shields up.”
We advanced.
At first, nothing moved.
Then, the ground shifted.
One by one, graves burst open.
Skeletons, ghouls, and long-dead horrors clawed their way free. Some wore shreds of armor, remnants of soldiers who had fallen long ago. Others were bare-boned wretches, twisted by years of decay.
They did not charge mindlessly.
They stood. Watching. Waiting.
Then, all at once, they attacked.
“Hold!” I roared, shield raised.
The first wave crashed against us, but we were ready.
Siric and Galen fought with renewed focus, hacking down undead that lunged at them.
Roland moved constantly, loosing arrows, picking off threats before they reached us.
Lark was a shadow in the fog, striking weak points, finishing off anything that staggered.
I took the heaviest blows, letting the undead focus on me, keeping my men from being overwhelmed.
But more kept coming.
Then I saw it—a crypt at the far end of the cemetery, glowing faintly with dark energy.
I knew.
That was the source.
“That crypt!” I shouted, pointing toward the glowing mausoleum. “They’re being raised from there!”
We cut a path through, fighting step by step toward the entrance.
The magic inside was thick and suffocating, the walls lined with runes that pulsed with unnatural life.
A single altar stood in the center, covered in bloodstained bones.
225
I could feel it—darkness feeding the undead, binding them to this place.
“No more.”
I raised my hand, channeling the Light.
Holy energy surged through me, a golden wave burning through the crypt.
The runes cracked.
The bones crumbled.
Outside, the undead screeched and convulsed, their bodies losing form, collapsing into lifeless heaps.
The spell was broken.
The dead fell silent.
The road back from Raven Hill was eerily silent.
Not the silence of a peaceful night, but the kind that spoke of something waiting, something wrong.
The air was too still.
Even the usual sounds of nocturnal life—owls, insects, the wind shifting the trees—were absent.
Lilian “Lark” Thorne, our scout, slowed her horse. “I don’t like this,” she muttered.
Neither did I.
The hairs on the back of my neck stood on end, the unmistakable feeling of a dark presence looming ahead.
Then we saw them—the gates of Darkshire, the dim lantern light flickering in the mist… and the panicked figures running toward us.
Civilians. Screaming.
Behind them, the guttural roar of something massive.
Then it stepped into view.
A monstrosity of sewn-together flesh and rot, stitched from countless corpses, towering over the streets of Darkshire like a nightmare given form.
Stitches.
The Night Watch stood in formation, their weapons drawn, their faces pale.
But their swords would not stop this.
Stitches was too big, too strong, too resilient—a thing not kept alive by muscle or blood, but by dark necromantic power.
A soldier rushed forward, blade raised.
Stitches swung its massive, rotting limb.
226
The man was torn from his feet, crashing into a wagon with a sickening crack.
“Get back!” Althea Ebonlocke roared, dragging another soldier away as the beast lumbered toward the town.
It was going to tear through Darkshire.
I clenched my jaw.
Not while I stood.
“With me!” I shouted to my men. Siric, Galen, Roland, and Lark all took defensive positions at my flanks.
But I knew.
This battle was mine.
I stepped forward, shield raised, Light surging through me.
The monster’s hollow, stitched-together eyes focused on me.
It let out a low, gurgling growl.
I slammed my shield with my sword. “Come, abomination! Face the Light!”
It charged.
Stitches moved like a force of nature, its massive fists slamming down toward me.
I raised my shield, bracing my entire body.
The impact sent a shockwave through my arms, but I stood firm, refusing to fall.
Judgment of the Light!
A golden burst of divine energy struck its rotting flesh, searing through the necrotic bonds that held it together.
Stitches bellowed, staggering back, its undead flesh smoldering from the Light’s touch.
It was hurt—but not down.
I had to end this.
It lunged again, its giant hand swiping toward Roland and Lark.
“Move!” I commanded, throwing myself between them and the beast.
I took the full brunt of the blow, my shield bending inward as the force sent me skidding back through the dirt.
Pain shot through my ribs—but I was still standing.
I looked up, blood in my mouth, vision blurred.
And then—
227
The Light surged within me.
I felt it like a burning fire in my veins.
It was time.
I planted my feet, lifting my sword high.
“By the Light,” I whispered. “Let this horror end.”
A radiant glow erupted from my blade, its brightness blinding in the darkened streets.
Stitches roared, raising its arms to strike once more—
I drove my sword down.
A torrent of holy energy burst forth, crashing into the beast like a divine storm.
Its flesh burned, its stitches snapped, and the necrotic magic holding it together unraveled.
With one final, pained howl, the abomination collapsed, its massive form slamming into the ground.
And then—silence.
True silence.
The battle was over.
Smoke rose from the remains of Stitches, its foul body dissolving under the Light’s purifying touch.
The Night Watch soldiers stared in awe, still gripping their weapons, stunned by the sight.
A few citizens wept—whether from fear, exhaustion, or relief, I could not tell.
Althea Ebonlocke stepped forward, studying the corpse. Then she looked at me.
“You just did what a dozen of my best soldiers couldn’t,” she said. “Darkshire stands because of you.”
I exhaled, lowering my sword.
Darkshire was safe.
For now.
The battle was over.
The smoking remains of Stitches lay in the dirt, its grotesque form burned away by the Light’s touch. The stench of rot still clung to the air, but the streets were quiet now—no more screams, no more horror.
228
For the first time since I had arrived in Duskwood, the people of Darkshire stood without fear.
The Night Watch soldiers lowered their weapons, breathing heavily. Some slumped against walls, exhaustion setting in now that the fight was done. Others simply stared at the ruined corpse of the abomination that had nearly destroyed them.
Then—slowly, one by one—the people of Darkshire gathered.
First the soldiers, then the civilians. Shopkeepers, blacksmiths, innkeepers, farmers—men, women, and even children who had lived in fear for so long.
They had seen so much death. So much loss.
But tonight, they had seen a victory.
A woman from the crowd stepped forward, a young seamstress, still trembling from the night’s terror.
“You saved us, Paladin,” she said, her voice unsteady but strong.
I had no words.
I had done what I must.
But in this town—this place where hope had been nothing but a memory—what we had done tonight was more than just a battle.
It was a reminder that they could still stand.
Commander Althea Ebonlocke stepped beside me, addressing the gathered town.
“This man—” she motioned to me, “—and his soldiers stood against a monster that would have torn us apart.”
She turned to my men—Siric Dunwald, Galen Harth, Roland Vale, and Lilian ‘Lark’ Thorne.
“And they fought beside him, proving that courage is not just in numbers, but in the will to fight, even when the odds are against you.”
She looked at me then, her usual steel-hard expression softening just slightly.
“Stormwind will hear of your deeds, Paladin.” Her voice was steady, carrying across the gathered crowd. “We owe you everything.”
The Night Watch raised their weapons in salute.
And then, one by one, the people of Darkshire followed.
An elderly man stepped forward, his hands worn with years of labor. A blacksmith, judging by the soot-stained apron.
He carried five hand-crafted leather baldric straps, reinforced with dark steel.
“These are for you,” he said, voice rough but kind. “For you and your men. It ain’t much, but we made them ourselves—a warrior should carry his blade with pride.”
229
I accepted the gift with a grateful nod, fastening it across my chest. It was sturdy, simple, but strong.
Just like the people of Darkshire.
Siric, Galen, Roland, and Lark all did the same, murmuring quiet thanks.
It was not gold or treasure.
It was something better.
A gift from the hands of those we had fought for.
Something earned.
Something that mattered.
With the rising sun, we mounted our horses once more.
The town of Darkshire stood behind us, not as a place of despair, but of survival.
The Night Watch saluted as we passed.
And as we crossed the threshold of Duskwood, leaving the dark forests behind, I knew this would not be the last battle I fought against the undead.
But for now, our duty here was done.
Stormwind awaited.
And with it, our next call to service.
It had been a week since we returned from Duskwood.
A week of rest, training, and quiet reflection.
I had spent much of it at the Cathedral, resuming my studies under Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker, honing both my faith and my sword. My men had taken to their own routines—Siric and Galen returned to drills with the infantry, Roland continued honing his marksmanship, and Lark… well, I never truly knew where she went when off-duty. But she always returned when called.
Then, one morning, a messenger clad in Stormwind colors arrived at the barracks.
“Paladin Tune, you are summoned to Stormwind Keep.”
There was no explanation.
Only orders.
But I had an idea of what this meant.
The Keep’s great hall was filled when I arrived.
230
Rows of knights, paladins, and high-ranking officers stood in formation, their armor polished, their banners raised. The blue and gold of Stormwind draped every pillar, the light from stained glass windows casting shifting colors across the marble f loor.
At the head of the hall, near the King’s throne, stood Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker.
Beside him, a group of Stormwind commanders and high-ranking paladins of the Silver Hand.
This was no ordinary gathering.
This was an honor bestowment.
And at the center of it all, standing tall with her usual commanding presence, was Commander Althea Ebonlocke.
She had come from Darkshire herself.
I stepped forward, my boots echoing against the stone.
And then, Lord Grayson spoke.
“Paladin Tune,” his voice carried through the hall, strong and clear.
“You were sent to Duskwood to serve as a soldier, but you returned as a protector, a leader, and a beacon of hope to those who had lost all.”
His gaze was steady, filled with something I had rarely seen from him.
Pride.
“You did not seek glory, nor did you stand alone,” he continued. “You led your men with courage and honor, placing yourself in harm’s way so others would not fall.”
His voice deepened, filled with solemn weight.
“Because of you, the Night Watch still stands. Because of you, Darkshire still stands. And today, Stormwind recognizes your deeds.”
He motioned to one of the officers, who stepped forward holding a small velvet case.
The lid was lifted, revealing a polished silver medal, engraved with the lion crest of Stormwind.
A Medal of Valor.
I felt the weight of every battle, every moment of struggle in Duskwood.
This was not why I had fought.
But I would accept it, not for myself, but for those who had stood beside me.
Lord Grayson took the medal and fastened it to my chest.
“You make us proud, Paladin.”
I bowed my head. “I serve the Light. And I serve Stormwind.”
231
Althea Ebonlocke stepped forward next, her piercing eyes sweeping over my soldiers.
“These men,” she said, motioning to Siric, Galen, Roland, and Lark, “stood beside their commander in the darkest of battles. When fear could have ruled them, they held the line. When death came for Darkshire, they fought as one.”
She turned to them.
“You have my respect,” she said. “And the gratitude of every man, woman, and child in Duskwood.”
A scribe stepped forward, carrying four scrolls, each bound with a red wax seal.
Commendations.
Each of them received theirs in turn, their faces unreadable, but I knew them well enough to see the weight of the moment in their eyes.
“Well earned,” I told them.
Roland smirked. “I was hoping for a chest of gold, but this works too.”
Lark elbowed him in the ribs.
Lord Grayson turned back to me.
“Medals and commendations will not be what define you, Paladin,” he said. “It will be your choices. Your devotion. Your willingness to rise again, no matter how many times the world tries to break you.”
He placed a firm hand on my shoulder.
“Do not stop here.”
I nodded. “I won’t.”
Then, the gathering raised their hands in salute.
And as I looked across the hall, I knew…
This was only the beginning.
As the Medal Ceremony concluded and the gathered soldiers and paladins began to disperse, I turned to leave.
But before I could step away, a voice called my name.
“Paladin Tune.”
I stood before Duthorian Rall, the soft glow of the Cathedral’s stained glass windows casting golden light across the marble floors.
In his hands, he held a book—its cover embossed with the symbol of the Silver Hand.
He extended it to me.
232
“The Tome of Valor, Paladin Tune,” he said, his voice calm but firm. “Study it well.”
I took the book carefully, running my fingers over its worn cover.
“It has been proven that the Light is with you,” Rall continued. “But as times grow more dangerous, it becomes important to know what strength lies beneath the f lesh.”
He stepped closer, his piercing gaze steady, unwavering.
“When demons, dragons, or any other evil set foot in your lands, your mettle will be tested.”
His voice lowered, becoming almost solemn.
“Will you be strong enough?”
The question lingered in the air, heavy with meaning.
I swallowed, gripping the tome tightly.
This was not a test of steel or magic.
This was a test of who I was.
Rall turned, pacing slowly, his hands clasped behind his back.
“Bravery, regardless of the situation, is as much a part of paladinhood as the Light, your armor, and your weapon.”
His voice echoed through the great hall.
“Protecting the weak, and not losing faith—these are lessons you must master while you study in the Cathedral of Light.”
I nodded slowly, absorbing his words.
I had seen war. I had fought for my life. I had battled dragons and stood beside heroes.
But this lesson was different.
This was not about victory in battle.
It was about why we fight at all.
I spent the next few hours studying the tome, reflecting on its words.
When I returned, Rall was waiting.
He studied me for a moment, then gave a small nod of approval.
“Good, Paladin.”
He placed a hand on my shoulder.
233
“Your lack of hesitation is a sure sign that you are prepared and eager to test yourself. So be it.”
His expression grew grim.
“At the very end of Westfall’s Longshore, a small house overlooks the ocean. There, a couple lives—the Stilwells.”
I listened closely, recognizing the name.
Jordan Stilwell. The smith who reforged my weapon.
“Jordan is an incredible smith,” Rall continued, “but he’s gone to Ironforge to meet with the dwarves for a while.”
His eyes narrowed.
“This has left Daphne, his wife, alone and unprotected.”
A chill ran down my spine.
“Reports suggest that the Defias have all but taken over the area.”
His voice lowered, firm with warning.
“Daphne may need protection from these villains.”
He met my gaze.
“Go there.”
I nodded without hesitation.
I had seen the damage the Defias could do in Moonbrook.
I had seen the corruption they spread, the innocent people they terrorized.
If there was even a chance that Daphne was in danger—
I would not allow history to repeat itself.
“I will leave at once, my Lord.”
Rall gave a single nod of approval.
“Then go, Paladin. And let the Light guide you.”
The ride to Westfall was quiet.
Too quiet.
I had expected to see signs of recovery after our victory in Moonbrook, but instead, I found abandoned farms, broken fences, and lingering shadows.
The Defias, it seemed, were not gone.
By the time I reached the Stilwell home, the sun was setting over the ocean, casting long shadows over the wooden house that stood alone against the rolling waves.
234
And there—standing on the porch, a musket in hand and a wary look in her eyes— was Daphne Stilwell.
She saw me approach, and a flicker of recognition crossed her face.
“A Paladin?” she asked, lowering her weapon slightly.
I dismounted, offering a short nod.
“Duthorian Rall sent me. He believes you may be in danger.”
She sighed, rubbing the bridge of her nose.
“He’s not wrong.”
She stepped forward, eyes scanning the darkening horizon.
“The Defias are still out there. They’ve been coming in waves—testing my defenses, stealing what they can, hoping to drive me out.”
Her grip tightened around the musket.
“I drove off a few, but they’ll send more.”
She turned back toward the house.
“I’ve got myself a gun inside. I’ll grab it and be ready to help you out, but for the most part… you’re on your own.”
Her voice was calm, but there was a steel in her words.
She wasn’t afraid to fight for her home.
I nodded.
“Then we make our stand here.”
She opened her mouth to respond—
Then froze.
The sound of footsteps.
Rustling in the tall grass.
Daphne’s eyes snapped to the darkness beyond the fence.
Her fingers tightened around the musket.
“Did you hear that?” she whispered.
The shadows moved.
And then—
“They’re coming.”
A dozen figures emerged from the night, masked and armed with daggers, clubs, and rusted swords.
235
One of them, a taller man clad in red leather, sneered as he stepped forward.
“You should’ve left when you had the chance, Stilwell.”
Daphne’s answer was a gunshot.
The crack of her musket split the air, and one of the Defias fell back with a cry.
Then—chaos.
The rest charged.
I stepped forward, shield raised, hammer in hand.
The first swung a dagger for my throat.
I parried with my shield, twisting my wrist to send his blade clattering to the dirt.
Before he could recover, I brought my hammer down onto his shoulder, feeling bone crack under the weight of righteous fury.
Another rushed in from the side, dagger flashing.
A quick sidestep, and I caught him with my shield, sending him sprawling.
Daphne fired again, dropping another, but more were coming from the fields.
I couldn’t let them overwhelm us.
I planted my feet, channeling the Light into the earth beneath me.
A golden wave of energy pulsed outward—Consecration.
The Defias hesitated as the divine glow burned their skin, slowing their movements.
“Enough of this!” their leader growled.
He lunged—faster than the others—his sword arcing for my chest.
I raised my shield, but his strike was too strong, forcing me back a step.
A second blow came immediately, his blade slicing across my armor.
Pain flared, but I gritted my teeth and stood my ground.
“You’ll have to do better than that, thief.”
I lashed out with my hammer, but he dodged, dancing back—
Straight into Daphne’s sights.
Boom.
The musket fired.
His body jerked, and he collapsed to the ground.
The rest of the Defias hesitated.
And that was their mistake.
236
I surged forward, calling upon the Light, my weapon glowing with divine energy.
“Judgment!”
The hammer collided with the next thief, sending him crashing to the ground.
Daphne reloaded, taking down another.
The remaining Defias, seeing their leader dead and their ambush foiled, turned and f led.
A few musket shots followed them into the night, but soon, only silence remained.
I took a deep breath, lowering my shield.
Daphne stood beside me, gun still smoking, eyes scanning the field.
After a moment, she exhaled.
“Well… that was something.”
I nodded.
“They won’t be back tonight.”
She turned to me, crossing her arms.
“You handled yourself well, Paladin. I can see why the Cathedral sent you.”
She paused, then gave a small, grateful nod.
“Thank you.”
I returned the nod.
“It is my duty.”
The coastal breeze carried the scent of salt and damp earth as I stood with Daphne Stilwell outside her small home, the battle still fresh in my mind.
The bodies of the fallen Defias had already been dragged away, but their presence lingered—a reminder that evil never truly vanishes, only waits for another opportunity.
Daphne turned to me, exhaustion clear on her face, but gratitude shining in her eyes.
“Please, return to Duthorian and let him know that I’m safe—for now, at least,” she said, wiping a strand of loose hair from her face.
She smiled softly.
“I have you and the Church to thank for that.”
She looked toward the horizon, where the sea met the sky.
“He’ll send word to Ironforge to let my Jordan know that he has nothing to fear.”
237
Her voice wavered slightly, her fingers tightening around the hem of her tunic.
“Oh, how I miss my husband. I can’t wait till he returns.”
I nodded, understanding her pain.
War and duty had separated many, leaving behind those who waited, those who hoped.
“He will return, Lady Stilwell,” I said firmly. “And when he does, he will find you safe.”
With that, I mounted my horse and turned back toward Stormwind.
My duty was done.
But something told me my lesson was not yet over.
The great bells of Stormwind Cathedral tolled softly as I entered its sacred halls once more.
The air was thick with incense, the golden glow of candlelight reflecting off the marble pillars and towering stained glass windows.
At the center of it all stood Duthorian Rall.
He turned as I approached, his expression unreadable.
For a long moment, he studied me in silence—as if weighing what he saw before him.
Then, finally, he spoke.
“It has been proven that the Light is with you, Paladin Tune,” he said, his voice steady, unwavering.
“But as times grow more dangerous, it becomes important to know what strength lies beneath the flesh.”
He stepped closer.
“When demons, dragons, or any other evil set foot in your lands, your mettle will be tested.”
His eyes locked onto mine.
“Will you be strong enough?”
I held his gaze, the weight of the question pressing down on me.
I had fought many battles. I had held the line in Moonbrook. I had stood against Onyxia’s forces. I had protected the weak, as I did for Daphne Stilwell.
But true strength was not measured in victories.
It was measured in persistence, in conviction, in unwavering faith.
Duthorian nodded, as if seeing the understanding dawn within me.
238
“Bravery, regardless of the situation, is as much a part of paladinhood as the Light, your armor, and your weapon.”
He placed a hand on my shoulder.
“Protecting the weak, and not losing faith—these are the lessons you must master while you study in the Cathedral of Light.”
I bowed my head.
“I will not fail, my Lord.”
Duthorian stepped back, reaching behind a stone altar.
When he turned back to me, he held a shield.
Not just any shield.
A shield worthy of a knight.
“And so, Paladin,” he said, his voice carrying through the Cathedral, “this is the Bastion of Stormwind.”
I took it carefully, my fingers tracing the engraved lion emblem at its center.
Its surface was polished steel, strong and unyielding.
Golden trim ran along its edges, glistening under the candlelight.
Its weight was perfect—not cumbersome, but sturdy enough to withstand the heaviest of blows.
Across its center, the sigil of Stormwind’s royal crest, a lion, symbolizing both courage and duty.
It was a shield worthy of those who defend the realm.
Worthy of a Paladin.
I clenched my fist around its handle, feeling its weight not just in my grip, but in my heart.
I had wielded weapons meant to destroy.
Now, I carried something meant to protect.
I looked back at Duthorian.
“This is an honor, my Lord.”
He nodded.
“Then carry it with pride.”
But then, his expression shifted.
“And there is more, Paladin.”
He gestured for me to follow.
239
Through the great halls of the Cathedral, past rows of monks and acolytes deep in prayer.
We entered a small chamber, its walls lined with old tomes and relics of past crusades.
Duthorian turned to face me.
“A Paladin’s duty does not end with steel and spell.”
He placed his hand over my chest.
“You have learned to fight. You have learned to protect. But there is another skill every Paladin must master—the ability to sense evil before it strikes.”
He stepped back, closing his eyes.
“The undead do not always reveal themselves. Sometimes, they lurk in the shadows, hidden among the living, waiting. You must learn to feel their presence, even when your eyes cannot see them.”
He raised his hands, summoning the Light into the room.
A golden warmth spread through the chamber, pulsing like a heartbeat.
“Close your eyes, Tune.”
I obeyed.
“Now… listen. Not with your ears. Not with your mind. But with your soul.”
At first, I felt nothing.
Only the warmth of the Cathedral, the distant murmur of voices in prayer.
Then—a cold presence.
Like a shadow pressing against my skin, just beyond reach.
It was faint, but it was there.
Lurking.
Waiting.
I opened my eyes, startled.
Duthorian nodded approvingly.
“Good. You feel it now.”
He lowered his hands, letting the Light fade.
“This is your next lesson, Paladin. To be vigilant. To sense the darkness before it strikes.”
His voice became grave.
240
“Because one day, you may be surrounded by enemies without knowing it. And if you cannot sense them in time… you will fall.”
I clenched my fists, breathing deeply.
This was no longer just training.
This was a warning.
And one I would not forget.
As I stepped out of the chamber, the weight of my new shield on my back and the lessons of the Light in my heart, I knew this was not the end of my training.
I felt there was more, I looked at Duthorian Rall, his expression composed yet f irm.
“While your men will enjoy some well-earned free time, I have another mission for you.”
I nodded, standing at attention. “What is required of me?”
“There is a weapon, a relic of the Silver Hand, one that once served our Order with great purpose. It must be reforged, and to do so, you must seek out Jordan Stilwell in Ironforge.”
A relic of the Silver Hand.
A weapon to be restored.
I could not ignore the significance.
“I will leave immediately,” I said.
Duthorian nodded approvingly. “Take the Deeprun Tram. It will get you there quickly.”
The Dwarven District of Stormwind was always alive with activity.
The air smelled of burning coal and hot iron, the sound of hammers striking anvils echoing through the streets.
At the far end of the district, hidden beneath a stone archway, lay the entrance to the Deeprun Tram.
A gnome in oil-streaked overalls waved passengers through, his mechanical goggles f lickering with tiny runes of power. The faint hum of arcane machinery vibrated through the tunnel walls.
The platform was lined with travelers—Stormwind merchants hauling goods to Ironforge, armored dwarves returning home, human knights speaking in hushed tones about their duties.
Then, with a low mechanical whir, the tram arrived.
A massive steel-and-brass train, built in true gnomish fashion—efficient, fast, and f illed with unnecessary spinning gears and blinking lights.
The doors hissed open.
241
I stepped inside.
The seats were filled, but I found an empty space near a group of dwarves, humans, and gnomes.
As the tram lurched forward, beginning its journey through the underground tunnel, I listened to the hum of conversation around me.
A bearded dwarf in chainmail, his axe resting against the seat, caught my glance.
“Ye look like a man with a story, lad,” he said, eyes twinkling. “Stormwind sending ye to Ironforge for business, or pleasure?”
“Business,” I replied. “Paladin business.”
That got his attention.
“Aye, a holy warrior!” He thumped his chest proudly. “Name’s Thrain Rockbeard. Used to be in the Mountaineers, back when my knees weren’t made o’ stone.”
He nudged the gnome beside him, a small man in bright blue robes, his eyes wide with curiosity.
“And this here’s Tinker Fizwizzle—he’s been talkin’ my ear off about some new contraption o’ his.”
The gnome perked up instantly. “Oh! Yes! A pleasure, Paladin! You know, I’ve always wanted to study paladin magic—see, Light-based energy interacts with physical armor in fascinating ways! If we could just harness that power into a—”
Thrain rolled his eyes. “Lad, don’t get ‘im started. He’ll talk yer ears off.”
I chuckled. “I’m familiar with the gnomish gift for innovation.”
Fizwizzle grinned. “And you, Sir Paladin? Where are you headed?”
“Ironforge,” I said, glancing toward the tunnel ahead. “I have to meet a man named Jordan Stilwell. A blacksmith.”
A human traveler across from us, clad in a worn but well-maintained breastplate, looked up.
“Stilwell?” he asked. “I’ve heard that name. He used to forge weapons for the Silver Hand, didn’t he?”
I nodded. “That’s what I’ve been told.”
The human exhaled, shaking his head. “A fine craftsman. A shame what happened to his work.”
I frowned slightly. “What do you mean?”
The man hesitated, then sighed. “You’ll see soon enough, Paladin. Not all relics of war survive their battles unscathed.”
A moment of silence followed.
242
The tram sped through a glass tunnel, revealing a breathtaking view of the ocean depths.
Massive sharks and strange glowing fish swam past, their forms illuminated by distant shafts of light filtering down from the surface.
Even Thrain Rockbeard, a battle-hardened dwarf, paused to admire the view.
“Ain’t that somethin’,” he muttered.
I took a breath, watching the great creatures glide through the deep.
It was a rare moment of stillness.
A moment to appreciate that there was still beauty in this world, even after all I had seen.
Then—a mechanical chime rang out.
Ironforge was near.
The tram slowed, the hum of its arcane engines shifting to a steady pulse.
The doors hissed open, revealing the Ironforge station—massive, reinforced stone tunnels lit by fiery braziers and intricate dwarven runes.
The air was thick with heat and the scent of burning coal, a stark contrast to the crisp Stormwind air.
As I stepped off the tram, Thrain gave me a solid clap on the back.
“Good luck with Stilwell, lad. If ye ever find yerself needin’ a drink, find me at the Stonefire Tavern. First round’s on me!”
Fizwizzle grinned, adjusting his oversized goggles. “And if you ever need something explosive to handle your enemies, just let me know!”
I smiled. “I’ll keep that in mind.”
Then, with purpose in my step, I made my way toward the Great Forge.
Jordan Stilwell awaited.
And my next trial was about to begin.
Ironforge.
The massive stone halls stretched endlessly, lit by roaring braziers and lined with intricate dwarven carvings. The rhythmic clang of hammers on steel echoed from every direction, as blacksmiths worked their forges, merchants bartered over fine-crafted arms, and armored warriors moved through the city.
At the very heart of it all was the Great Forge, a massive pit of churning molten metal, illuminating the entire chamber in a flickering orange glow.
It was here that I would find Jordan Stilwell.
243
I walked with purpose, passing dwarven craftsmen and traders, following the directions Duthorian Rall had given me.
Then I saw him.
Jordan Stilwell was exactly where I had been told he would be—near a workbench covered in blueprints, weapon molds, and stacks of steel ingots.
He was a broad-shouldered man, weathered from years of smithing, his arms lined with the marks of a craftsman who had spent his life shaping metal. His beard was trimmed short, streaked with silver, and his deep-set eyes carried a quiet wisdom.
He glanced up as I approached, his gaze measuring me instantly.
“Let me guess,” he said, his voice a low, steady rumble. “Stormwind sent you?”
I placed a fist over my chest in salute. “Paladin Tune. You must be Jordan Stilwell.”
He nodded, setting down a heavy hammer. “Aye, that’d be me. And you’re the one I was told to expect.”
He gestured for me to step closer, motioning toward a large, partially covered weapon frame on the workbench.
“Duthorian Rall sent word ahead. You’re here for the Test of Righteousness.”
I nodded. “Yes. He said you would guide me.”
Jordan pulled back the cloth covering the workbench, revealing the shattered remains of an ancient weapon.
It had once been a two-handed warhammer, its head engraved with symbols of the Light, but now it lay cracked and broken, its handle missing, the holy engravings dulled with age.
I frowned. “What happened to it?”
Jordan exhaled. “Time. War. Neglect.”
He turned to me, crossing his arms.
“Some weapons survive battles unscathed. Others do not. This one has seen many wars… and was left to rot when its last wielder fell.”
I stared at the broken relic, feeling a weight settle in my chest.
“This was once a Paladin’s weapon?” I asked.
Jordan nodded. “Aye. And if you’re to prove yourself worthy, you’re going to restore it.”
244
Jordan unrolled a blueprint of the hammer, its lines worn with age but still precise. He ran a hand over the parchment, nodding to himself before looking up at me.
“This weapon was once wielded by a paladin who stood against darkness. But to restore it, you’ll need to gather the materials that gave it strength. These are not common metals or woods. Each piece carries significance, forged and blessed for the righteous.”
He tapped the first missing component on the blueprint.
“Whitestone Oak Lumber.”
“This is no ordinary wood. It comes from ancient oaks, strong enough to withstand both war and the passage of time. The last known stock of it was taken by goblins holed up in the Deadmines. You’ll need to reclaim it from them.”
Jordan shifted his finger to the next piece.
“Jordan’s Ore Shipment.”
“My last shipment of specially refined ore never made it to me. It was last reported in Loch Modan, where it was meant to be delivered to Baylor Stonehand in Thelsamar. He’s a trustworthy dwarf, and if you speak to him, he may still have word of its whereabouts.”
His hand moved again, this time over the empty space where the hammer’s head should be.
“Jordan’s Smithing Hammer.”
“This one’s personal. My hammer, the very tool that once forged weapons for the Silver Hand, was stolen. It now lies in Shadowfang Keep, in the hands of the cursed worgen who infest its halls. If I’m to forge this weapon again, you’ll need to bring it back to me.”
Finally, Jordan pointed to the last crucial piece.
“Purified Kor Gem.”
“This gem holds divine energy, a necessary element to bind all these materials together in the reforging. The only place it can be found is Blackfathom Deeps, an old ruined temple now infested with dark forces. You’ll have to recover it from the depths.”
Jordan leaned back, crossing his arms. His expression was steady, but there was something else in his eyes—a test, not just of my strength, but of my dedication to the path I walked.
“This will not be easy, Paladin. These materials are scattered across lands filled with dangers—bandits, monsters, and things worse than both. If you take this path, you will prove not just your skill but your righteousness.”
I met his gaze without hesitation.
“I will see it done.”
245
A slow grin spread across Jordan’s face.
“Then you’d best be moving. You’ve got work to do.”
Jordan gestured toward the Ironforge stables, where a line of sturdy rams stood saddled and waiting. Unlike the warhorses of Stormwind, these creatures were shorter but powerful, bred for the rough terrain of the mountains.
“You’ll need to travel far, and a horse won’t do you much good in these lands. Take one of these rams. They’ll carry you where you need to go.”
The stable master, a stout dwarf with arms thick as tree trunks, eyed me with amusement.
“Ever ridden a ram before, lad?”
I hesitated. “Once. Briefly.”
The dwarf chuckled, fitting a saddle onto a dark brown ram with curved horns. “Aye, well, ye best learn quick. These beasts don’t slow for those who can’t hold on.”
I took the reins, feeling the power of the creature beneath me as I swung into the saddle. The ram snorted, stamping its hooves, already eager to move.
Jordan nodded in approval. “Good. Now get going. First stop, Loch Modan. Baylor Stonehand’s waiting.”
As I rode through the massive stone gates of Ironforge, leaving the Great Forge behind, the first thing that struck me was the cold.
Ironforge had been hot, alive with fire and metal, but as I descended into the wilds of Dun Morogh, the warmth faded. A biting mountain wind swept through the pass, carrying the scent of pine and freshly fallen snow.
The road beneath me was a carved stone path, well-worn by dwarven travelers. It wound through thick evergreen forests, their branches weighed down with frost, the trees standing like ancient sentinels watching my passage.
I had fought in Westfall’s dry fields, marched through Duskwood’s cursed woods, and patrolled the cobblestone streets of Stormwind—but this was something else.
Everything here was untamed, yet enduring.
It felt like a land that had stood unchanged for centuries, cared for by the dwarves who shaped the mountains with their hands and axes.
A world of stone, snow, and steel.
The ram beneath me moved steadily, unbothered by the harsh terrain. Unlike a horse, it did not hesitate on uneven ground or shy away from sudden shifts in the wind. It simply pressed forward, determined, unshaken.
I adjusted in the saddle, gripping the reins as the road dipped into a narrow mountain pass.
246
Ahead, the Southern Gate Pass loomed—two colossal stone towers flanking an ancient dwarven-built tunnel.
It was my path into Loch Modan.
The tunnel walls were lined with glowing blue runes, their soft radiance illuminating the stone carvings of dwarves locked in eternal battle with troggs and giants. The engravings told the story of dwarven resilience, of a people who had stood against the odds and carved their homes from the heart of the mountains.
As I passed through the final archway, the landscape before me shifted completely.
Dun Morogh’s frost and ice faded into the rolling golden-brown hills of Loch Modan.
The massive lake stretched far into the distance, its surface shimmering under the fading sunlight. Towering rock formations, worn smooth by time, rose from the land like ancient monuments.
A deep sense of quiet filled the air. Not the unnatural silence of Duskwood, but the peaceful, untouched stillness of a land free from war… for now.
I pulled the ram to a slow trot, taking in the unfamiliar sights.
To my right, a dwarven caravan rumbled along the road, stout traders with wagons f illed with barrels of ale and crates of iron ingots. One of them, a burly dwarf with a thick auburn beard, gave me a nod as he passed.
To my left, a pair of dwarven riflemen patrolled the ridge, their keen eyes scanning the valleys below for signs of trogg activity.
The road was safe, but Loch Modan had its dangers.
I kept my sword at my side, my hand never too far from the hilt.
As the sun dipped lower, the golden hues of the loch darkened to deep blue, the towering peaks casting long shadows across the land.
The temperature dropped, but not like in Dun Morogh. Here, the cold was crisp, fresh—less biting, but still ever-present.
Dwarves had set up small camps along the road, their campfires flickering, filling the night air with the smell of burning pinewood and roasted meat.
I passed a group of dwarven hunters, their ram-drawn cart filled with the day’s game. They barely spared me a glance, too focused on the road ahead.
Loch Modan was not an easy land, but it was strong, enduring—just like the people who called it home.
And though this was my first time here, I already understood why the dwarves fought so fiercely to protect it.
By the time I reached Thelsamar, the stars were already out, scattered across the night sky.
247
The small dwarven town sat nestled between the loch and the cliffs, its sturdy stone homes built to withstand time itself. Smoke rose from chimneys, the streets lit with lanterns, casting a warm glow over the worn cobblestone roads.
The tavern stood at the town’s heart, a welcoming sight after a long ride. Its sign bore the name “Stoutlager Inn,” and the sounds of dwarven laughter and music spilled into the streets.
I dismounted, handing the ram’s reins to a nearby stablehand. The young dwarf gave me a quick nod.
“Long ride, eh?” he said, tying the ram’s lead to a post.
I exhaled, rolling my shoulders. “Longer than I expected.”
The stablehand chuckled. “Ye’ll be wantin’ a drink, then. The ale here’s better than anything ye’ll find in Stormwind.”
I smiled faintly. “Maybe tomorrow. Tonight, I just need a place to rest.”
He motioned toward the inn’s entrance. “Then ye came to the right place.”
I pushed open the heavy wooden door, stepping inside.
The warmth of crackling fireplaces and the scent of freshly baked bread and roast meat greeted me instantly.
A few dwarves sat at long tables, sharing meals and ale, their voices deep and boisterous. A bard played a low tune on a stringed instrument, and behind the bar, the innkeeper—a stocky woman with graying hair and an apron stained with ale foam— gave me a knowing glance.
“Ye look like a man who’s been on the road for hours,” she said.
I nodded. “I need a room for the night.”
She slid a heavy iron key across the counter. “Upstairs, third door on the right. Beds are sturdy, and the blankets ain’t half bad either.”
I took the key, inclining my head. “Thank you.”
She smirked. “No need to thank me till ye see if the mattress suits ye.”
I climbed the wooden stairs, the creak of the floorboards beneath my boots familiar and grounding.
Reaching my room, I pushed open the door and removed my cloak. The bed was small but solid, the blankets thick, the stone walls cool but not unwelcome.
I sat on the edge of the bed, exhaling as I loosened the straps of my armor.
The journey had been long.
Tomorrow, I would find Baylor Stonehand.
Tomorrow, the Test of Righteousness would begin.
But for now…
I allowed myself a moment of peace.
248
And for the first time in days, I slept.
The morning air in Thelsamar was crisp, carrying the scent of burning wood and fresh mountain air. As I stepped outside the inn, the town was already stirring—dwarves tending to forges, sharpening axes, and preparing for another day of work.
I wasted no time. Baylor Stonehand was my destination.
His forge was near the edge of town, the sound of hammer on metal echoing even before I reached him. The dwarven blacksmith stood by an anvil covered in soot and iron shavings, his hands thick and calloused from years of work.
As I approached, he looked up, studying me for only a moment before speaking.
“Ye must be the one Jordan Stilwell sent.” His voice was gruff but steady.
I nodded. “Paladin Tune, here for the ore shipment.”
Baylor wiped his hands on his apron, glancing at a crate nearby. “Aye, Jordan sent word about ye. Problem is, his ore ain’t here.”
He motioned toward the road leading out of Thelsamar.
“His last shipment was left in a cache just outside town, tucked away for safekeeping. I’ll be needin’ ye to fetch it. Not a long trip, but mind yerself—sometimes the local troggs get too curious.”
I nodded, fastening my cloak. “Consider it done.”
The location wasn’t far, just a short ride outside of Thelsamar, near a rocky outcrop along the road. Baylor’s cache was marked by a simple wooden crate, left in the shadow of a boulder where it was hidden from sight.
Dismounting, I scanned the area. The road was quiet. No sign of troggs or gnolls.
I lifted the crate, feeling the weight of the ore inside. The metal was dense, pure, and heavy enough that I had to adjust my stance before securing it against my saddle.
With the shipment in hand, I turned back toward Thelsamar.
Baylor was waiting when I returned, arms crossed as I set the crate down beside his forge.
“Good work,” he grunted, prying open the crate and inspecting the ore inside. He ran a practiced hand over the chunks of raw metal, his brow furrowing in focus.
“Aye, this’ll do,” he said. “Not bad quality, but it needs refin’in before Jordan can use it.”
He grabbed his smithing tools and got to work.
The forge roared to life, sending waves of heat into the cool morning air as he set the ore to smelt, breaking away impurities, tempering it to perfection. Sparks flew as his hammer struck the anvil, the rhythm of the work steady and deliberate.
After some time, he set down his tools, satisfied with his work.
249
“That’s done. Take this back to Jordan. He’ll know what to do with it.”
He handed me a refined ingot of the purified ore, still warm from the forge.
I secured it carefully.
“Thank you,” I said.
Baylor simply nodded. “Ye carry yerself well, Paladin. Make sure Jordan puts this to good use.”
With the refined ore securely packed, I climbed into the saddle of my ram, but I did not turn back toward Ironforge. My task was far from complete. Jordan had given me four trials, and only one was finished.
The next would take me to the far north, across sea and land, to a place shrouded in darkness and old curses.
Shadowfang Keep.
There, I would retrieve Jordan’s Smithing Hammer, the tool needed to restore the paladin weapon.
To reach it, I would need to travel to the Wetlands, board a ship at Menethil Harbor, and sail north to Southshore. From there, I would ride west into Silverpine Forest, where the haunted ruins of Shadowfang Keep awaited.
It would be a long road, but I had no time to waste.
I urged my mount forward, heading toward the Wetlands.
The road from Thelsamar led me further north, passing the great stone dam of Loch Modan. The mighty dwarven structure, once a symbol of their engineering, had been partially damaged in the past, but the remaining walls still held strong, towering over the loch below.
Beyond the dam, the path became rougher, the landscape shifting from rocky highlands to dense forest as I entered the Wetlands.
The air grew thicker, damp with the scent of rain and earth. Unlike the crisp mountain air of Loch Modan, the Wetlands carried a heavy mist, clinging to the land like an eternal shroud.
I rode cautiously. This land was notorious for danger—marsh-dwelling crocolisks, wandering murlocs, and the ever-present threat of raiding Dragonmaw orcs.
I passed a dwarven patrol from Menethil Harbor, their armor slick from the humidity. One of them gave me a nod as I rode past.
Not many traveled this road alone.
By nightfall, I reached Menethil Harbor, the stronghold of the dwarves in the Wetlands. The docks stretched over the water, lit by the glow of lanterns swinging from 250
wooden posts. The sound of waves crashing against the stone walls of the fortress mixed with the calls of sailors preparing for departure.
This was the last safe haven before the journey into the northern lands.
I approached a harbormaster, a weathered dwarf with a salt-crusted beard, who was directing the loading of crates onto a large ship.
I dismounted, stepping onto the wooden dock. “I need passage to Southshore.”
The dwarf squinted up at me, then jerked a thumb toward one of the waiting vessels. “Ye be wantin’ the Wavecutter. She leaves with the tide. Captain won’t wait if yer late.”
I nodded in thanks, leading my ram toward the stables near the dock. It would remain here until I returned.
With my pack secured and my sword at my side, I boarded the ship that would take me north.
The next step of my journey awaited.
The ship cut through the dark waters, its sails full as it rode the tide northward. The smell of salt and seafoam filled the air, mixing with the creak of wood and the murmur of sailors going about their work.
For most of the voyage, I stood near the railing, watching the endless expanse of ocean stretching toward the horizon. The sky above was clear, the stars sharp against the dark blue canvas of night.
This journey was different from the one that had brought me here before.
Back then, I had been a broken man, fleeing the horrors of Lordaeron, the culling, the fall of my home.
Now, I returned not as a refugee, but as a paladin of Stormwind, carrying out my duty.
But the memories did not fade so easily.
As the ship docked in Southshore, I stepped onto the familiar wooden planks of the pier. The town had not changed.
The air was clean, carrying the scent of salt and damp earth. The buildings were sturdy, their thatched roofs built to withstand the coastal winds. Fishing nets hung from wooden posts, and barrels of supplies were being rolled off other ships nearby.
The sounds of life filled the air—dock workers calling out orders, merchants haggling over fish and trade goods, the distant laughter of townsfolk in the inn.
It was so normal.
So different from the chaos and death that had consumed Lordaeron.
I stood for a moment, looking toward the northern road, the path I had once taken to escape the horrors behind me.
251
I had arrived here long ago, a weary and lost soldier, fleeing the darkness that consumed my home.
Now, I was returning of my own will, stronger than before.
I exhaled, forcing the memories aside. There was work to do.
I made my way toward the town barracks, where the local militia operated under the banner of Stormwind.
The captain of the guard, a broad-shouldered man in chainmail with a heavy Stormwind tabard, was speaking with his men when he noticed me approach. His weathered face studied me with curiosity as I stepped forward.
“Paladin,” he said, nodding in greeting. “Something we can do for you?”
I placed a fist over my chest in respect. “I am paladin Tune, on a mission from Stormwind. I need a horse to travel west.”
The captain raised an eyebrow. “West? There’s not much out there but the old ruins and the wilds of Silverpine. What business takes you into those lands?”
“Shadowfang Keep,” I said plainly.
The soldiers nearby shifted uncomfortably at the name.
The captain studied me for a long moment before nodding. “If you’re willingly heading into that cursed place, then I won’t stop you.” He gestured toward the stables at the edge of town. “We have spare mounts. Tell the stable master I sent you, and he’ll set you up.”
“Thank you, Captain,” I said.
“Light be with you, Paladin,” he replied. “You’ll need it in those parts.”
The horse beneath me moved smoothly, its hooves steady against the dirt road as I left Southshore behind.
The western road was quiet, following the coastline, where the waves crashed against the rocky cliffs. The air smelled of sea spray and damp wood, the calls of gulls echoing above.
As I gazed out at the ocean stretching into the distance, another memory surfaced.
The Orcs who had saved my life.
I had been half-dead, lying in the snow after barely escaping Lordaeron, my connection to the Light severed, my purpose shattered.
And it had been them—warriors of the Horde, the very people we had fought for years—who had given me a second chance.
They could have left me to die.
But they didn’t.
252
Instead, they had shown me honor, given me shelter, let me heal. They had respected me, despite our differences.
I still wondered what had become of them.
The last I had heard, many of the orcs had sailed across the sea, to a land called Kalimdor.
Had they found a new home there?
Had they finally found peace?
I could only hope so.
Because if they had, then maybe—just maybe—there was hope for a world beyond endless war.
I turned my gaze back to the road ahead.
The land was changing now, the golden grass of Hillsbrad fading into the darkened woods of Silverpine.
The next trial awaited.
And I would face it.
The air grew colder as I rode deeper into Silverpine Forest. The once golden fields of Hillsbrad were long behind me, replaced by the twisting blackened trees and rolling mist of a land cursed by dark magic.
Shadowfang Keep loomed ahead, a broken fortress of jagged stone towers and rotting battlements. The walls were ancient, but something still lurked within. The stench of undeath and lingering corruption filled the air, pressing against my senses like a heavy fog.
I dismounted and led my horse to the treeline, tying the reins against an old twisted branch. A direct approach would be foolish. I needed to find an entrance, scout the area f irst.
But then—a flicker of light in the distance.
A small campfire burned near the ruins, hidden just beyond the tree line. Horses stood tethered to a post, their breath visible in the cold air. Someone was here.
I moved closer, stepping carefully over the damp earth, scanning the campsite for signs of who these people might be. Were they other adventurers? Soldiers? Bandits?
I didn’t have to wonder long.
A rustling in the undergrowth. The snap of a twig.
And then—movement.
I turned just as figures emerged from the shadows, forming a loose circle around me.
253
There were five of them, rough-looking men clad in a mix of chainmail and worn leather, their weapons drawn but not yet raised. Their expressions were smug, predatory, the kind of men who had seen too many battles and trusted no one.
The tallest of them, a broad-shouldered brute with a scar down his cheek, gave me a lopsided grin.
“Well, well, what do we got here?” His voice was thick with amusement, but there was a clear edge to it.
A wiry man with a crossbow slung across his back chuckled. “Looks like a lost little paladin wandered into the wrong part of the woods.”
Another mercenary, a younger one with a chipped sword, took a step closer. “Think he’s got any coin on him?”
The first one, the leader, tilted his head. “That depends. What brings a holy knight all the way out here? Hunting ghosts?”
I kept my stance relaxed, but my hands were near my weapon. I was outnumbered, but not outmatched.
“I have no quarrel with you,” I said evenly. “Step aside.”
They exchanged amused glances, enjoying the game.
“We could step aside,” the crossbowman mused, rubbing his chin. “But the thing is, we don’t like surprises. And you? You’re a surprise.”
The scarred leader grinned wider, taking a slow step toward me.
“Maybe you make it worth our while, and we let you go.”
Before I could react, another voice cut through the conversation, sharp and commanding.
“Stand down.”
The mercenaries instantly stiffened, their cocky expressions vanishing in an instant.
From the darkness of the treeline, a figure emerged—a man clad in dark leather, a hood pulled low over his face. His movements were silent, precise, calculated. Even without seeing his eyes, I knew.
I had seen others like him before.
A rogue.
But not just any rogue.
SI:7.
He strode forward, his presence alone enough to make the mercenaries take a step back. He wasn’t the type to be questioned.
The leader hesitated, then took a breath. “Didn’t know we had company.”
“You don’t,” the rogue said, voice calm but firm. “He’s not your concern.”
254
The mercenaries exchanged uncertain glances but didn’t argue.
The rogue turned to me, his gaze unreadable beneath his hood.
“What are you doing here, Paladin?”
I met his stare, keeping my voice steady. “I’m on a mission from Stormwind.”
He studied me for a moment before responding. “I have my own mission.”
I glanced at the mercenaries. “And you work with them?”
“They help me complete my mission,” he replied simply. “I let them take the spoils of war. Win-win.”
I frowned slightly. A rogue of SI:7 working with mercenaries? Unusual, but not unheard of. SI:7 worked in shadows, gathering intelligence, eliminating threats. If he was here, it meant Shadowfang Keep held something of value to Stormwind.
“And what is it you’re after?” I asked.
He didn’t answer immediately. Instead, he tilted his head slightly. “I won’t get in your way, and you won’t get in mine. That work for you?”
I considered my options.
I didn’t trust mercenaries.
But I knew enough about SI:7 to understand that if this rogue wanted me dead, I wouldn’t have seen him coming.
If he was here, there was something deeper at play.
And in the end, I had my own mission.
I nodded. “Very well.”
The rogue turned to the mercenaries, giving a simple command.
“Move out.”
With that, the uneasy alliance was formed.
And together, we entered Shadowfang Keep.
We entered Shadowfang Keep, the air thick with the scent of old rot, damp stone, and the lingering stench of beasts and death. The once-proud fortress was now nothing more than a ruined husk, its halls crawling with feral worgen, restless spirits, and things long forgotten.
The mercenaries moved with confidence, almost too eager for the fight. Their leader, the scarred brute, grinned as he swung his axe into the first snarling worgen that leaped from the shadows, sending blood spraying against the stone walls.
The others followed, cutting through the resistance with brutal efficiency.
I watched them work.
They fought for gold, for thrill, for the sheer love of battle.
255
I fought for duty, for a greater purpose.
I kept my sword in its sheath. This was not my battle.
The rogue of SI:7 moved ahead, silent as death, leading them deeper into the keep. He did not fight unless he had to. He had a mission, and I had no doubt that somewhere inside these walls, a man or a group of men would not live to see another sunrise.
That was not my concern.
They had their deal.
And I had mine.
By the time we reached the stables, the floor was slick with blood, the last few worgen bodies twitching where they had fallen.
The mercenaries were laughing, some wiping their blades, others looting what they could from corpses and ruined crates.
“Not bad for a night’s work,” one of them muttered, kicking over a barrel to see if anything valuable was inside.
I remained near the entrance, my gaze scanning the area. The sooner I had what I came for, the sooner I could leave.
Then, one of the men called out.
“Hey, Paladin—this the hammer you came for?”
I turned and saw him standing by an old wooden weapon rack, lifting a heavy smithing hammer, its once-polished steel head now dull with age.
Jordan’s Smithing Hammer.
I stepped forward and took it from his grip. The weight was solid, its craftsmanship still strong despite years of neglect.
This was the tool that would help reforge the weapon.
And I realized something else.
Without these mercenaries, I would not have reached it alone.
I had expected to fight my way through the keep, but instead, they had cleared the path, allowed me to fulfill my mission without lifting my sword.
They had fought not for honor, not for the Light, but simply because they wanted to.
And yet, without them, I might have failed.
The rogue was already preparing to move deeper into the keep. The mercenaries, their pockets filled with loot, looked satisfied.
It was time to part ways.
“As promised,” I said, gripping the hammer, “I won’t stand in your way.”
256
The scarred leader chuckled. “That’s what I like to hear.”
The rogue gave me a single nod before disappearing into the shadows. Whatever his mission was, it was not my place to ask.
I turned to leave, but paused.
I looked over the mercenaries once more. They were killers, sellswords, men who lived and died by the coin.
But tonight, they had been part of something greater, even if they didn’t know it.
I raised a hand, channeling a small pulse of holy light, letting its warmth spread through the air.
“Thank you,” I said. “And may the Light be with you.”
Some scoffed, others smirked, but none of them stopped me.
And with that, I walked away, hammer in hand, leaving them to their own adventures.
The night was still heavy over Silverpine, but the storm had passed.
As I rode east, leaving the cursed keep behind, the weight of the Smithing Hammer felt heavier than it should have.
Not because of its metal or craftsmanship, but because of what it represented.
It was a reminder that not all victories come from righteousness alone.
Sometimes, even the Light needed a shadow to clear the way.
By the time I saw the distant lights of Southshore, I knew.
Another trial was complete.
And the next was waiting.
The familiar warmth of the Southshore inn was a welcome change from the cold ruins of Shadowfang Keep. The scent of roasted meat, fresh bread, and sea salt filled the air, and the muffled chatter of sailors and travelers created a comforting backdrop to my thoughts.
I secured my pack and hammer in my rented room, removing my armor piece by piece. The weight of the day—of the journey, the battles, the uneasy alliances—pressed down on me.
This was the first true pause I had taken since beginning my trials.
I sat on the edge of the bed, running a hand over the hammer I had retrieved. The cold steel was worn but still strong. Just like Jordan’s weapon, I had been tested and reforged, shaped by fire and purpose.
Tomorrow, I would cross the sea.
For the first time in my life, I would leave the Eastern Kingdoms behind.
257
I had only heard stories of Kalimdor—the distant, ancient lands of the Night Elves, the wilds untamed by human hands, the new Horde that had settled beyond the ocean.
A place unknown to me.
And yet, my duty called me there.
I allowed myself one last deep breath before lying back against the sturdy mattress.
Sleep came quickly.
At dawn, I made my way to the Southshore docks, where ships bound for distant shores were being prepared for departure.
A few sailors cast curious glances my way. Paladins rarely traveled alone into unknown lands.
I found the harbormaster, a weathered man with a salt-crusted beard, overseeing the loading of supplies.
“I need passage to Auberdine,” I said.
The harbormaster grunted, glancing at me with a wary eye. “That’s a long way, Paladin. Not many of your kind travel west.”
I nodded. “There’s a first for everything.”
He scratched his chin before pointing toward a sleek vessel, its hull painted with the emblem of the Alliance.
“The Windchaser leaves within the hour. Captain’s a good man. But Kalimdor’s a different world, lad. Hope you know what you’re walking into.”
I did not. Not really.
But I would soon.
The ship set sail as the sun climbed higher, its golden rays turning the waves into endless rolling hills of light.
The Eastern Kingdoms slowly faded from view, their familiar coasts slipping beneath the horizon.
I leaned against the railing, watching the vast ocean stretch out before me. The wind was steady, crisp with the scent of open water.
For the first time in my life, I was truly leaving home.
I found a quiet spot on the deck, removed my gauntlets, and placed my hands together in quiet meditation.
I did not know what awaited me on the other side of the world.
But I would face it as I always had—with faith, steel, and the Light to guide me.
258
The journey across the Great Sea was calm, the ship sailing smoothly beneath the open sky, endless and vast.
For over a week, I spent my time in quiet reflection, training with my blade on the empty deck during the early hours of dawn, and meditating beneath the stars at night.
The sailors were friendly enough, though most kept to their duties. Some spoke of Kalimdor as a land of mystery, of ancient forests and strange creatures, of Night Elves who lived for thousands of years.
I listened, but I kept my thoughts to myself.
I was not traveling for wonder or curiosity.
I was traveling for purpose.
And then, one night, it happened again.
Darkness. A world between sleep and wakefulness.
And then—a voice.
“Find me… Find me…”
The words echoed, distant yet clear, like a whisper carried by the wind.
I turned, but there was nothing.
Only the void stretching endlessly.
“Who are you?” I called out, but there was no answer. Only the same plea.
“Find me…”
I reached forward, but before I could grasp anything—
I gasped, sitting up abruptly, my breath heavy, my heart pounding.
“Who are you?!” I shouted, the words tearing from my throat as if I had spoken them both in dream and in waking.
But there was no answer.
Only the sound of waves lapping against the ship’s hull.
And the presence of someone beside me.
I turned to see a Night Elf woman standing near my bunk, her expression calm, her long violet hair flowing down her shoulders.
She wore white robes, adorned with silver embroidery, marking her as a priestess of Elune. The soft glow of moonlight from the porthole behind her gave her an almost ethereal presence.
“Did you have a bad dream, Paladin?” she asked, her voice gentle, like the wind through leaves.
I hesitated, the echoes of the vision still lingering in my mind. But something about her presence felt… safe.
So I told her.
259
I spoke of the dream, of the spirit that called to me, the voice that had followed me since Lordaeron, always saying the same words.
“Find me.”
I exhaled, shaking my head. “But I have no idea who it is.”
She studied me for a moment before offering a small, knowing smile.
“Then follow the Light, Paladin. It will take you to whoever you need to find, when you are ready.”
Her words were simple, but they held a weight that settled deep within me.
The silence stretched between us for a few moments before she spoke again.
“Now, may I ask—what brings you to these lands?”
I ran a hand through my hair, still unsettled but grounding myself in the present. “I am looking for a place called Blackfathom Deeps. There is a precious gem hidden within, something I must retrieve.”
At the mention of Blackfathom, her expression darkened slightly, her fingers tensing over the silver trim of her robes.
“That is a dangerous place, Paladin,” she said. “It was once a temple of Elune, but it has been long since corrupted. Dark forces have taken root there. If you must go, be certain you are prepared.”
I nodded. “I will be.”
She placed a hand over her heart and bowed her head slightly. “Then when you reach Auberdine, speak with Thundris Windweaver. He may guide you to where you need to go.”
“Thank you,” I said, inclining my head in respect.
She smiled faintly. “Now rest, Paladin. We reach Auberdine in the morning.”
As she turned and vanished into the shadows of the ship’s cabin, I let out a slow breath and lay back down.
The dream still lingered. The voice still echoed.
“Find me.”
But for now, I would do as she said.
I would rest.
And in the morning, I would set foot on Kalimdor for the first time.
The first thing I noticed as I stepped onto Auberdine’s docks was the smell of the sea—different from Southshore, heavier with the scent of salt and damp wood, mixed with something else, something ancient.
The second was the silence.
260
Not an eerie silence, like Duskwood or the ruins of Lordaeron, but a natural stillness, like a land untouched by time. The soft rustling of leaves, the distant crash of waves against the cliffs, the occasional call of an owl in the towering trees beyond.
The buildings were crafted from living wood, their designs flowing like they had grown naturally rather than been built. The Night Elves had shaped this town, not conquered it.
Few turned to look as I walked through the settlement. The elves moved with grace, their steps soundless, their glowing silver eyes watchful but not unkind.
I did not come as an intruder, but as a traveler.
And my destination was clear.
The elder Night Elf stood near the edge of a raised platform overlooking the sea. His robes shimmered faintly in the morning light, and his hair, long and silver, flowed past his shoulders.
Even before I spoke, he turned, sensing my approach.
“Greetings, Paladin,” he said, his voice calm but rich with wisdom. “What can I do for one who follows a holy path?”
I placed my fist over my chest in respectful greeting. “I am sent by Jordan Stilwell, a blacksmith of Ironforge. I seek a Kor Gem, one of purity, for a sacred task.”
At the mention of Stilwell’s name, Thundris tilted his head slightly, his expression one of recognition.
“Ah, yes… Stilwell. The blacksmith… from long ago. I remember him well, though I have not heard his name in some time.”
For a moment, he seemed lost in memory, gazing out over the waves before turning his eyes back to me.
“He never struck me as an impudent man,” he continued, “so I can only assume his desire for a Kor Gem is noble.”
I nodded. “It is.”
Thundris studied me for a moment, then gestured toward the vast forest beyond Auberdine.
“If you truly wish for one of the gems, then you must head northwest, deep into Ashenvale. There, within ancient ruins, you will find Blackfathom Deeps.”
I listened carefully, memorizing the path.
“The Naga who now dwell within still use the gems, though for purposes far from noble.” His silver eyes darkened slightly. “The ruins were once a temple to Elune, long before they were defiled. If you go, Paladin, know that you tread upon sacred ground, now lost to corruption.”
“I understand,” I said.
261
His expression softened, but only slightly. “Do not go alone, Paladin. The depths are treacherous, and even the Light may not reach where you must tread.”
I squared my shoulders. “But I am alone. This is a Paladin’s test. The Light shall guide me.”
Thundris exhaled softly, not in disapproval, but in understanding.
“Then may Elune watch over you,” he said.
Before setting off, I went to the local stables, expecting to find the mounts I had grown familiar with—perhaps a sturdy horse, or even rams like those of Ironforge.
Instead, I stopped short, staring in quiet disbelief.
There were no horses or rams in the enclosure.
Instead, sleek, muscular creatures with long tails and powerful claws padded silently through the shaded pens. Their striped fur shifted like flowing shadows, and their eyes gleamed with intelligence.
Tigers.
The Night Elves rode tigers.
One of the stablekeepers, a young elf with braided dark hair, noticed my expression and smirked slightly.
“Not what you were expecting, human?”
I shook my head. “No… not at all.”
I had fought alongside dwarves, trained with soldiers, even faced monsters beyond counting. But the idea of riding into battle atop a tiger had never once crossed my mind.
This land… was nothing like the Eastern Kingdoms.
And I was only just beginning to understand that.
As I rode south from Auberdine, the towering trees of Darkshore gave way to something even more immense—the ancient woods of Ashenvale.
The air was different here, thick with the scent of damp earth, wildflowers, and something else—something old, almost sacred.
The trees stretched high into the sky, their purple-hued canopies casting shifting shadows across the path. The trunks were massive, their bark etched with the passage of centuries, untouched by war or decay.
This was not like the forests of Elwynn or Duskwood.
There was no sense of civilization, no orderly roads or human farmlands.
This was nature in its truest form—wild, untouched, eternal.
I rode in silence, my senses open to this new land.
262
The wind whispered through the leaves, carrying the distant sounds of unseen creatures. Now and then, I caught glimpses of graceful white stags moving through the trees, their antlers glinting in the fading sunlight.
A small group of Sentinels passed along the road ahead, moving like shadows between the trees, their silver eyes glowing softly in the dimming light. They did not stop me, though they watched as I passed.
There was no hostility in their gaze—only curiosity.
I was an outsider here. A traveler in a land where time moved differently.
And for the first time in a long while, I felt small.
The sun had dipped behind the treetops when I saw the glowing lanterns of Orendil’s Retreat in the distance.
The small outpost was tucked into the woods, its wooden structures blending seamlessly with nature.
A few Sentinels patrolled the perimeter, their bows in hand, but they did not raise alarm as I approached.
A Night Elf woman, clad in flowing robes, stood near the entrance. Her long silver hair cascaded down her back, and her violet skin shimmered faintly under the moonlight.
She inclined her head as I dismounted.
“Welcome, traveler. You ride with purpose.”
“I seek shelter for the night,” I said.
She studied me for a moment, then nodded toward a raised wooden platform where a few simple sleeping spaces had been arranged.
“You may rest here. The woods are peaceful tonight.”
I thanked her and settled in.
As I lay back, staring up at the night sky through the woven branches overhead, I listened to the soft rustling of the wind, the distant calls of owls, the rhythmic heartbeat of the forest.
I had crossed the sea. I had stepped into a land untouched by the scars of Lordaeron or the streets of Stormwind.
And though my journey was far from over, I allowed myself a moment of stillness.
At first light, I rose and prepared to depart.
A Sentinel scout stood nearby, adjusting the straps of her bow.
“You are leaving early,” she noted.
“I have a long journey ahead,” I replied.
263
She tilted her head slightly, then gestured toward the western road, winding deeper into the forest.
“Follow the path west until the trees thin. Beyond that, you will find the ruins of Blackfathom Deeps.”
Her gaze darkened slightly. “Be wary, Paladin. That place is not what it once was.”
“I will be,” I assured her.
With that, I mounted up, gave one last nod of thanks, and set off.
The sun filtered through the purple canopy, casting dappled golden light onto the path ahead. The forest watched in silence as I rode toward my next trial.
The road west had been quiet. The towering trees of Ashenvale slowly gave way to the rugged coastline of Zoram’gar Strand, where the scent of salt and damp stone filled the air.
I reined in my mount at the edge of a cliffside path, overlooking the ruins below.
Blackfathom Deeps.
What had once been a sacred temple to Elune was now nothing more than a sunken ruin, its broken pillars jutting from the dark waters like the ribs of a long-dead beast.
The entrance lay below, half-submerged in the sea, the tide forever pulling at its broken walls.
This was no holy place anymore.
Something lurked in its depths, something old, something corrupted.
I descended the worn stone steps leading to the temple entrance, scanning the area carefully. Signs of past battles were everywhere—broken weapons, scorch marks on the stones, rusted arrowheads buried in the sand.
I was not the first to come here.
And I would not be the last.
Then, I heard a voice.
“Hold, human. Where are you heading?”
Three Night Elves stood near the entrance, partially hidden by the shadows of the ruined archways.
The first was a male warrior, clad in heavy armor, his shield resting against the crumbling stone wall. His long dark hair was tied back, and his silver eyes studied me with suspicion.
Beside him stood two women—one in flowing white robes, a priestess of Elune, and the other in earth-toned robes adorned with twisting branches and leaves.
264
I hesitated, glancing at the second woman. Her robes were unlike any I had seen before—not those of a mage, nor a cleric. They seemed almost… alive, blending with the natural world around her. She must be a druid.
The warrior stepped forward, his posture firm.
“You must be either very brave or very suicidal to come here alone, Paladin,” he said, crossing his arms over his chest.
“I must go into Blackfathom Deeps,” I replied. “I am on a mission.”
The priestess tilted her head. “A mission? And what does a Paladin of Stormwind seek in a place like this?”
I exhaled, keeping my tone steady. “I seek a Kor Gem—a relic of purity. It is needed to restore a sacred weapon.”
At my words, the three Night Elves exchanged glances.
Then, after a moment, the warrior spoke.
“We are entering the Deeps as well,” he said at last. “You can follow us… at least until you find what you came for.”
I nodded in thanks. I did not come seeking allies, but I would not turn away their help.
And so, I followed them into the darkness.
We moved carefully through the ruins, stepping over fallen stone columns and broken moonwell platforms. The path led us downward, deeper into the temple’s remains.
Then, the ground ended.
A vast pool of black water stretched before us, the only way forward submerged beneath the surface.
The warrior glanced back at me. “No turning back now, Paladin.”
Without hesitation, he stepped forward and leapt into the water.
The priestess followed.
Then the druid.
I took a breath and jumped after them.
The cold rushed over me, and for a moment, all was silent beneath the surface. Then, I pushed forward, swimming toward the far end of the cavern.
We surfaced on the other side, where crumbling stairways led deeper into the tunnels.
The druid placed a hand on the stone wall, closing her eyes as if sensing something unseen. Then she whispered.
“Careful, Paladin.”
She opened her eyes, glancing at me.
265
“This place is infested with Naga.”
I clenched my fist, my grip tightening around the hilt of my blade.
“Naga…” I murmured. “I have heard tales, but I have never faced one.”
The warrior smirked. “Then you will learn quickly.”
And so, we pressed on, deeper into Blackfathom Deeps, where the horrors of the past awaited us in the dark.
The tunnels of Blackfathom Deeps stretched before us, damp stone walls lined with ancient carvings—remnants of a past long forgotten. Water dripped from the ceiling, creating ripples in the shallow pools beneath our feet.
Then, from the shadows, movement.
Sleek scaled bodies, serpentine tails sliding across the wet stone, glowing reptilian eyes watching us from the dark.
The Naga.
I had heard tales of them, stories of their cruelty, their hatred for all land dwellers, their mastery of dark magic.
But this was the first time I had seen them.
And before I could even draw my blade—my three companions were already moving.
The Night Elf warrior was the first to charge.
With a roar, he closed the distance between us and the Naga, his shield raised like a battering ram.
The first Naga barely had time to react before the warrior slammed into it with such force that the creature was thrown backward, crashing against the stone wall.
Before it could recover, his sword was already in motion, delivering a precise, brutal strike that cut across its chest.
He didn’t hesitate. Didn’t slow down.
He moved like a force of nature, relentless and unstoppable.
The druid lifted her hands, and suddenly, the ground beneath the Naga trembled.
Roots burst from the stone floor, twisting and writhing, wrapping themselves around the legs of the advancing creatures, trapping them in place.
With a swift motion, she extended her arm, and the air shifted—a shimmering swarm of emerald energy took form, flowing through the battlefield like living wind.
Where the energy touched the warrior, his wounds mended, his strength renewed.
266
Where it touched the Naga, they recoiled, their movements sluggish, as if their very life force was being sapped away.
This was no arcane magic, no priestly blessing.
It was something different.
Something primal.
The priestess stood tall, her white robes flowing as she raised both hands toward the sky.
A pulse of radiant energy burst outward, filling the cavern with a silver glow.
I expected the light to be like my own—a force of healing, of restoration.
But the moment it touched the Naga, they cried out in pain, their scaled skin burning as if set aflame.
It was Elune’s light.
Not just a blessing, but a weapon.
She moved gracefully, but with purpose, channeling divine magic with perfect precision, each spell seamlessly flowing into the next.
I had fought beside Stormwind’s soldiers, marched with Lordaeron’s knights, and trained under the finest paladins.
But this?
This was something else.
The coordination, the speed, the deadly precision—they fought like warriors of legend.
Like the heroes I had once watched marching into the Deadmines, moving with unwavering purpose.
These weren’t ordinary fighters.
These were Night Elf champions.
And I watched them closely.
I studied every movement, every strike, every spell, hoping to learn.
To be better.
To be worthy.
As the last Naga fell, the cavern fell silent once more.
The warrior wiped his blade against his bracer, barely winded.
The druid let out a slow breath, her magic still humming in the air.
The priestess turned to me, her silver eyes calm.
“Welcome to Blackfathom Deeps, Paladin.”
267
The tunnels of Blackfathom Deeps twisted like a labyrinth, endless and dark. The air was thick with the scent of salt, damp stone, and something older—something untouched by time.
Then, we found it.
A small cave, carved within the walls of the tunnel, partially hidden behind a collapsed archway. The faint glow of moonlight seeped in from cracks above, casting pale silver light against the stone.
Inside, a lone altar stood against the far wall.
And on it, resting upon an intricately carved pedestal, was a gem unlike any I had ever seen.
The Kor Gem.
Its surface shimmered with an ethereal glow, a faint pulse of pure, untouched energy radiating from within.
I stepped closer, drawn to it, but before I could reach out, the druid spoke.
“Paladin, I think this is what you came for.”
I turned to face her.
Her silver eyes studied me, calm yet knowing.
I looked back at the gem, then carefully lifted it from its resting place. The moment my f ingers closed around it, a warmth spread through my hand—a sensation unlike anything I had felt before.
This was no ordinary gemstone.
This was a relic of purity.
I closed my fist around it and nodded.
“Yes, it sure looks like it. Thank you.”
The warrior exhaled, glancing toward the tunnels ahead. “Then your task here is done. Ours is not.”
The priestess met my gaze. “You should go now, Paladin. Complete your task, as we have ours to complete as well.”
I hesitated for a moment, looking at them—the warriors of Elune, moving with a purpose I could not yet fully understand.
“May Elune’s light guide your path,” she said.
I placed a fist over my chest in respect. “And may the Light watch over you.”
And with that, we parted ways.
They turned and disappeared into the depths, vanishing into the darkness as though they had become one with it.
And I climbed back toward the surface, leaving the ruined temple behind.
268
By the time I reached my mount, the skies over Ashenvale were shifting from deep indigo to the first traces of dawn.
I took a slow breath, letting the cool air fill my lungs.
Then, I looked down at the Kor Gem in my hand.
Another trial complete.
Another step forward.
I closed my eyes for a moment.
“Thank you, Light,” I whispered.
“For once more guiding my steps.”
And with that, I climbed into the saddle and turned my mount east, beginning the long journey back.
The road back to Auberdine was long but peaceful.
With each passing mile, I felt the weight of the Kor Gem in my pack, its presence a quiet reminder of the power I now carried.
By the time I reached the wooden bridges of Auberdine, the sun hung low in the sky, casting the town in hues of deep violet and soft gold.
I made my way directly to Thundris Windweaver, who stood where I had first met him, gazing out over the sea.
He turned as I approached, his silver eyes falling to the pack at my side before I even spoke.
“You have returned, Paladin. And I sense that you bring with you the gem you sought.”
I unfastened my pack, pulling out the Kor Gem, and the moment it touched the open air, a faint pulse of arcane energy shimmered across its surface.
Thundris studied it for a long moment, then exhaled softly.
“This is indeed the gem Stilwell desires,” he said, his voice calm but measured. “But before I can allow you to bring it to him, it must be purified of corruption.”
I frowned slightly. “Corruption?”
He nodded, folding his hands behind his back.
“The naga wenches imbue the gems with power, that much is true, but of their own, evil kind. It is tainted by their dark magics.”
I tightened my grip on the gem. It felt warm in my palm, pulsing with energy, but I could not sense anything truly vile within it.
“Will this interfere with Stilwell’s work?” I asked.
269
Thundris glanced toward the moon rising above the treetops, then back at me.
“No. The corruption is there, but the power remains intact. It should work well for whatever ritual he wishes it to be part of.”
His gaze hardened slightly.
“I hope you know what you’re doing, Paladin. This is no simple item you possess.”
I met his stare and nodded. “I understand.”
After a long moment, Thundris sighed, his expression softening.
“Then go. Take your rest. You have earned it.”
With the Kor Gem safely secured, I made my way to the docks, searching for the next ship bound for Stormwind.
A dockworker, busy securing the lines of a merchant vessel, barely spared me a glance before grunting, “Stormwind? No ships leave ‘til tomorrow, Paladin.”
I exhaled. Not ideal, but expected.
At least I had one more night to rest before my journey home.
I glanced back at the town, at the soft glow of the lanterns, the quiet murmur of Night Elves speaking in their melodic tongue, the distant sound of waves lapping against the wooden piers.
This land was still so foreign to me.
And yet, for the first time since stepping onto Kalimdor’s shores… I felt at peace.
With the gem secured and my duty fulfilled, I turned toward the inn, ready to sleep beneath the watchful gaze of the moon once more.
Tomorrow, I would sail for Stormwind.
Weeks had passed since I left Kalimdor, and now I was back in familiar territory. The rolling plains of Westfall, the scent of dry earth and the distant cries of gulls from the coastline—it was all the same as I remembered.
But I had changed.
There was no time to waste.
With the Kor Gem secured in my pack, I secured a fresh horse from the Stormwind stables and rode hard toward Moonbrook.
I knew what awaited me.
Or so I thought.
The last time I had seen Moonbrook, it had been a battlefield. The SW army had driven out the Defias, their leader slain deep within the Deadmines.
Now?
Now it was empty.
270
The streets were silent, the buildings charred from past fires, doors and windows hanging open, left to rot.
The Defias had not returned… at least, not yet.
I dismounted, my boots kicking up small clouds of dust as I walked through the deserted town. Not even scavengers remained.
My path was clear.
I made my way toward the gaping maw of the Deadmines.
The mines were quiet, the tunnels dark and abandoned.
The once-busy paths, where Defias soldiers once stood on guard, now lay in eerie silence. Rusted weapons and broken crates lay scattered on the ground, reminders of the battle that had taken place here.
I moved cautiously, the flickering glow of old torches barely casting enough light to guide my way.
Everything seemed… lifeless.
Had I come all this way for nothing?
I pressed forward, deeper into the twisting tunnels, past the crumbling mine carts and collapsed bridges.
Then—a sound.
A faint clanking of metal.
Muffled voices, sharp and chattering.
I followed the noise, moving carefully through the corridors until I reached a half-open wooden door.
Peering inside, I saw them.
Not humans.
Not Defias.
Goblins.
They were small, barely reaching my waist, with green skin, sharp features, and large pointed ears. They moved quickly, gathering scraps of metal, tinkering with strange devices.
One of them, dressed in greasy overalls, adjusted a wrench as he barked orders at the others.
What were they doing here?
The Deadmines were supposed to be abandoned.
But something told me that was no longer the case.
And I was about to find out why.
271
The moment I stepped into the room, the goblins froze, their wide yellow eyes locking onto me.
Then, their leader—a scrawny goblin with greasy overalls and a pair of cracked goggles—snapped his fingers.
“Get ‘im!”
The goblins rushed toward me, tools raised like weapons—a wrench, a rusted dagger, even a jagged piece of metal.
But I didn’t even lift my blade.
Instead, I channeled the Light, letting it flow through me, and a golden radiance enveloped my weapon as I activated a simple holy seal.
The effect was immediate.
The goblins skidded to a halt, eyes widening as the holy energy crackled along the blade’s edge.
The leader took a step back, hands raised. “Whoa, whoa, hold on now! A Paladin, hein? We didn’t know! No need to get all shiny and righteous on us!”
The others scrambled backward, dropping whatever makeshift weapons they held.
I lowered my sword slightly but kept my stance firm. “What are you goblins doing here?”
The leader adjusted his goggles and grumbled. “Just scavenging! Since your army laid waste to this place, there’s plenty of stuff left behind. And good wood? That sells for coin.”
I scanned the room—piles of planks, shattered furniture, and stacks of cut logs.
“I’m not here to fight you,” I said evenly. “I’m looking for something—Whitestone Oak Lumber. Once I have it, I’ll be on my way.”
The moment I mentioned the lumber, the leader’s ears perked up, and he rubbed his hands together.
“Ohhh, Whitestone Oak Lumber, yeah, yeah, we got some of that. But see, Paladin—good lumber? That’s worth somethin’.”
I narrowed my eyes. “Like sparing your lives?”
The goblin froze. His companions glanced at each other nervously.
“Uh… y’know, when you put it that way…” He scratched the back of his head. “Fine, f ine! Take it and leave us be.”
I gave him a warning look before stepping forward and grabbing a bundle of the lumber, carefully secured with thick rope.
With my prize in hand, I turned back toward the tunnel.
272
The goblins kept their distance, watching warily as I walked away.
Only when I was at the exit did the leader mutter, “Hmph. Stupid paladin. No sense of business.”
I smirked to myself but said nothing.
My task was complete.
And now, only one final piece remained.
The journey had been long.
Weeks of travel across two continents, from the depths of Blackfathom Deeps to the abandoned tunnels of the Deadmines.
I had ridden through forests untouched by time, crossed an entire ocean, faced dangers both expected and unknown.
And now, finally, I had returned.
Ironforge.
The familiar heat of the forges, the ringing of hammers on anvils, the scent of coal and metal thick in the air.
I made my way to Jordan Stilwell, my pack heavy with the treasures I had gathered.
He stood at his forge, arms crossed, eyes scanning over me the moment I stepped into his workshop.
For a moment, he just looked at me. Then he smirked.
“Well, I’ll be damned. You actually did it.”
He let out a low chuckle, shaking his head.
“For a while there, I wasn’t sure I’d ever see you again, much less see you return alive. But here you are.”
He stepped forward, taking the Whitestone Oak Lumber, the Kor Gem, the refined ore and his father’s hammer, and running his hands over each item with a craftsman’s appreciation.
“This is wonderful. You’ve gotten everything.”
He turned the hammer over in his hands, exhaling slowly.
“It feels good to have my father’s hammer again… and a Kor Gem, by the Light, I never thought I’d see one of these myself.”
He smiled slightly, looking down at the materials.
“I should have no problem forging you a grand weapon with these.” He glanced up at me, raising an eyebrow. “I’ve actually had the plans for doing this for some time, I just 273
never had the opportunity to gather the goods. But now… thanks to you… that changes.”
“How long will you need?” I asked.
Jordan grunted, already reaching for his tools.
“As long as it takes. Art can’t be rushed.”
He gestured toward the door.
“Go to the inn, drink, rest. I’ll call for you when it’s done.”
I nodded.
My task was complete.
All I had left now… was to wait.
For the first time in what felt like an eternity, I let myself relax.
I found a seat in the inn, ordered a strong dwarven ale, and let the warmth of the drink dull the tension in my muscles.
I had spent weeks on the road.
Now, for a few hours, I could be still.
Eventually, fatigue overtook me.
I didn’t even make it to my room. I fell asleep right there at the table, the sounds of Ironforge’s busy halls fading into a distant hum.
I don’t know how long I slept, but eventually, a dwarven hand shook my shoulder.
“Paladin. Stilwell’s calling for ya.”
I blinked, shaking off the last traces of sleep, and made my way back to the forge.
And there, resting upon Jordan’s anvil, was the weapon.
It was a massive, two-handed mace, its steel surface polished to perfection, its head imbued with the raw, pure glow of the Kor Gem.
An impressive creation.
A weapon truly worthy of a Paladin of the Light.
I stepped forward, running my hand along the hilt, feeling the craftsmanship, the power infused into every inch of the weapon.
Jordan folded his arms, watching me with a satisfied grin.
“There she is. A hammer worthy of the best paladin hands.”
I exhaled slowly.
“I only hope I am worthy of such a weapon.”
Jordan gave a small chuckle.
274
“You already proved that, lad.”
I lifted the hammer, feeling its weight, its balance, its strength.
This was more than a weapon.
It was a symbol.
Of my journey. Of my trials. Of my oath.
And now, my path continued.
Stronger than ever.
The streets of Stormwind were as I had left them—bustling with merchants, the clanking of armored patrols, and the distant ringing of hammers from the smiths.
But as I rode through the city, past the Dwarven District and up toward the towering Cathedral of Light, I felt different.
I had left this place as a Paladin on a trial, uncertain of what lay ahead.
Now, I returned having walked across continents, battled in forsaken ruins, and wielded faith through trial and hardship.
And in my hands, I carried proof of it.
The weapon that had been forged through my journey, a grand two-handed mace, imbued with the power of the Kor Gem, its weight a testament to the strength I had earned.
I reach the Cathedral steps and entered the grand hall.
The warm glow of candlelight flickered across the marble floors, the air filled with the soft murmur of prayers.
At the far end, standing near the altar, was Duthorian Rall.
And the moment he saw me, he smiled.
I approached him and presented the weapon, holding it before me with reverence.
He looked it over, nodding in approval before meeting my gaze.
“I knew you had it in you, son.”
His voice carried pride, not just as a mentor, but as someone who had placed his trust in me.
The sound of footsteps echoed through the Cathedral as other Paladins gathered around, their silver and gold armor reflecting the warm candlelight.
Some studied the weapon in awe, while others clapped me on the back, their voices f illed with excitement.
“By the Light, that is a magnificent hammer!” one murmured.
275
“You really went to Blackfathom Deeps? And the Deadmines?” another asked, eyes wide.
“A journey across two continents for a single weapon… I’ve never heard of such dedication.”
Duthorian Rall placed a firm hand on my shoulder.
“You have made us all proud.”
I lowered my head slightly, humbled by their words.
“I only did what was asked of me.”
Rall smiled. “And that, my son, is why you are worthy of the path you walk.”
After some time in the Cathedral, speaking with my fellow Paladins and reflecting on my journey, I knew my next step.
As much as I was a Paladin of the Light, I was also a soldier of Stormwind.
I left the Cathedral with my hammer secured at my back and made my way to the military barracks, reporting back to duty.
But this time, I was different.
I was armed with a weapon forged through faith, tested through trials, and blessed by the Light itself.
And whatever came next—I was ready.
Peace never lasts long.
The very next day, orders arrived.
The army was assembling, preparing for an operation that would take us far from Stormwind, to a battle already set in motion.
I gathered with the others as the orders were read aloud. The commanding officer’s voice was firm and unwavering—this was not just another patrol or a minor skirmish.
This was something far greater.
“Tomorrow, we march for Theramore. From there, we will make our way into Dustwallow Marsh to clear the path to Onyxia’s Lair.”
The name alone sent murmurs through the gathered soldiers.
Onyxia.
The name of a dragon—a being of immense power, a nightmare spoken of in tales of f ire and ruin. But it was more than that.
While I had been away on my trials, Stormwind had uncovered a terrible deception.
For years, Stormwind had been manipulated from within.
276
The noblewoman Lady Katrana Prestor, an advisor to the throne, had used her influence to divide the kingdom, weaken its forces, and keep Stormwind’s armies scattered.
But now, the truth was known.
Katrana Prestor was no noblewoman.
She was Onyxia, the Broodmother of the Black Dragonflight, a being of deceit and destruction who had been shaping Stormwind’s fate for her own dark purposes.
When her identity was revealed, she fled the city, retreating to her lair deep within Dustwallow Marsh.
Now, Stormwind’s forces were gathering.
Not just to hunt a dragon.
But to reclaim the kingdom’s honor.
“Everyone get a good night’s sleep,” the officer continued. “Because once we leave, we won’t be seeing our beds for days.”
Whispers spread through the ranks. A march to Theramore. A campaign in the marsh. A battle against a dragon.
Theramore.
A city I had not seen in so many years.
Jaina Proudmoore ruled there now, one of the most powerful mages of our time. She had been in Lordaeron when the plague began, had seen what became of Arthas.
I hadn’t spoken to her since she opened a portal for me from Stratholme to Lordaeron capital.
Was she well? Would she remember me?
Perhaps, if fate allowed, I would have a chance to greet her.
For now, there was work to be done.
That night, I gathered my men.
We trained for a short while, testing our reflexes, our discipline, our focus. A final test before we marched.
But eventually, the weight of the day settled upon us, and we retired to rest.
Tomorrow, we would ride into battle.
Tomorrow, we would march for Theramore.
And from there—war would begin.
The next morning, the Stormwind docks were filled with soldiers preparing to set sail.
This force was even larger than the one that had marched on Moonbrook.
277
Rows upon rows of armored infantry stood at attention, their banners catching the morning wind. Siege engineers loaded supplies onto the ships, while officers shouted last-minute orders.
There was no mistaking it—this was a true military campaign.
I scanned the ranks.
Unlike the previous mission, where I had been the only servant of the Light among common soldiers, this time, a few priests stood among us. Clad in robes of white and gold, their hands already clutching their prayer books, they would tend to the wounded, just as I would.
It was good to know I was not alone in that duty.
But this would not be a battle of healing alone.
We were marching against a dragon.
And dragons did not fall easily.
We boarded the warships, the massive vessels creaking as their sails caught the morning wind.
The journey ahead would take several days, crossing the open waters of the Great Sea before reaching Theramore’s docks.
The soldiers were restless.
The deception of Onyxia—her manipulation of Stormwind’s very throne—had wounded the kingdom’s pride.
There was bitterness in their voices, rage in their hearts.
“She made fools of us all,” one man muttered. “And now, we take back our honor.”
“Revenge,” another corrected. “That’s what this is. We’re not marching for honor. We’re marching for payback.”
I remained silent, listening to them, feeling the weight of their anger.
They were not wrong to feel betrayed.
But revenge alone was dangerous.
I only hoped everything would go as smoothly as they expected.
But war rarely did.
On our final night at sea, the ship rocked gently against the dark waters. The air was thick with tension, though no words were spoken.
Most of the men were asleep, trying to steal what little rest they could before the battle ahead.
But as soon as my eyes closed…
The dream returned.
278
The same whispered voice, distant yet familiar.
“Find me… Find me…”
I stood in darkness, reaching forward, but the figure remained unseen.
“Who are you?!” I called out, but the dream faded before an answer could come.
I awoke with a start, gripping the edges of my blanket.
A cold sweat ran down my back.
How long would this torment last?
How long before I finally found this… person, this spirit—whoever it was?
I exhaled, rubbing my temples.
But before I could dwell on it further, I heard voices above deck.
Theramore was in sight.
The fortress city of Theramore loomed in the distance, its white stone walls standing firm against the sea winds.
As we docked, we were greeted by Theramore’s captain of the guard, a hardened officer in polished armor.
His voice was firm but respectful.
“Welcome to Theramore, soldiers of Stormwind. Lady Proudmoore has granted you full access to our resources while you prepare for your march. Make use of them wisely.”
The men disembarked, but as I stepped onto the pier, something caught my eye.
At the top of Theramore’s tallest tower, standing by the window, was a lone f igure.
Jaina Proudmoore.
She did not come down to greet us.
She simply watched from above, her blue and white robes catching the breeze, her expression unreadable.
But there was no time to dwell on it.
Our march awaited.
We gathered our equipment, exited the city gates, and began preparations for war.
Our march was slow and deliberate.
The road through Dustwallow Marsh was uneven, damp, and treacherous, the very land itself seeming to resist our passage.
279
Thick mists clung to the ground, curling around the trees like creeping fingers. The air was heavy, filled with the scent of rotting vegetation, stagnant water, and distant decay.
Towering gnarled trees, their roots half-submerged in the swamp, loomed over us. Some were wrapped in thick vines, while others stood lifeless—blackened husks of wood that had long since succumbed to disease.
Strange creatures moved in the distance—the occasional shadow of a swamp beast slipping into the water, the glow of distant reptilian eyes watching us from the undergrowth.
The soldiers remained tense, weapons gripped tightly. This land was hostile, not just because of Onyxia’s influence, but because it was a place where nature itself had turned cruel.
Still, we pressed on.
Despite the dangers, Stormwind’s presence was strong here.
Along the road, we found two defensive outposts—hastily built fortifications set up by advance forces from Theramore and Stormwind.
The first was a wooden palisade, guarded by Theramore’s soldiers, providing a resting point for scouts and a storage area for supplies. The banner of Jaina Proudmoore flew above it, marking the Alliance’s foothold in the region.
The second was a fortified watchtower, where Stormwind knights and Dwarven riflemen were stationed, watching for enemy movements. They reported that Onyxia’s minions had been active, but they had not attacked in force—yet.
We moved forward without delay.
And soon, we reached the battlefield.
At last, we arrived at her lair.
A massive cavern, its entrance carved into the base of a jagged rock formation, hidden away in the depths of the marsh. Steam and smoke curled from within, the scent of ash and sulfur thick in the air.
The ground trembled as shadows moved from within.
Then, with a thunderous roar, her children came.
Lesser black dragons, their scales glistening like polished obsidian, emerged from the cavern, their serpentine eyes filled with burning hatred.
They were not as large as their mother, but they were still mighty beasts, their wings stirring the air like hurricanes as they took flight.
With them came dragonkin, powerful humanoid draconic creatures wielding weapons forged in fire.
And just like that, the battle began.
“Hold the line! Shields up!”
280
The front ranks of Stormwind’s army braced themselves, their shields locking together as the black dragons descended upon them.
The first wave struck hard—claws tearing through armor, fiery breath scorching the battlefield.
Spearmen drove their weapons forward, piercing the dragons’ thick hides, while archers and riflemen fired from behind.
The clash of steel and the roars of beasts filled the air, the sky above us thick with smoke and embers.
I stood at the backlines, my hands glowing with holy light, my voice steady as I channeled healing magic into the wounded.
Beside me, the priests of Stormwind did the same, whispering prayers, their spells mending broken bones and burnt flesh.
A soldier collapsed in front of me, his leg shredded by draconic claws.
I raised my hand over his wound, and golden radiance flowed into him, sealing his f lesh, restoring his strength.
He gasped, gripping his sword once more.
“Back to your feet, soldier! The fight isn’t over!”
He nodded, stumbling to rise before charging back into the fray.
This was our duty.
We did not stand in the front lines.
We ensured that those who did did not fall.
The battle raged for what felt like an eternity.
But one by one, the lesser dragons fell, their bodies crashing into the marshy ground, sending waves of mud and water spraying into the air.
The last of **Onyxia’s minions let out a final, guttural snarl before a knight drove his blade through its chest, ending it once and for all.
Then, silence.
Only the sound of our soldiers breathing, the groans of the wounded, the crackling of dying flames.
And the lair stood before us, its darkness waiting.
The officers barked orders.
“Form up! Hold this position! The strike team will be arriving shortly!”
We spent the next hour securing the area, pushing the corpses aside, tending to the wounded, reinforcing our defensive lines.
281
I wiped the sweat from my brow, my hands aching from constant healing.
And then, from the horizon, they came.
Not a handful.
Dozens.
They moved in small groups, battle-tested warriors and seasoned spellcasters, their weapons and armor glinting beneath the overcast sky.
They were not like us.
These were champions of the Alliance, the ones called upon to face threats beyond the reach of armies.
I watched as they approached—one by one, in diverse shapes, sizes, and disciplines.
Warriors, their plate armor scratched and dented from countless battles, great swords and shields strapped to their backs.
Priests, draped in robes of white and gold, their prayers silent but ever present.
Mages, their hands flickering with arcane energy, their staffs humming with unseen power.
Dwarves, some wielding massive hammers, others carrying long-barreled rifles, their beards swaying as they marched.
Gnomes, their armor crafted with precision, some whispering to mechanical contraptions at their belts.
Night Elves, their movements graceful and silent, their druids wrapped in robes adorned with living vines, their connection to nature as evident as the air they breathed.
This was no ordinary army.
This was a force meant to slay a dragon.
And among them… I saw her.
Walking at the center of a group of Paladins, her golden-trimmed armor polished and radiant, was Katherine the Pure.
My heart stirred with pride and admiration.
She had been one of my greatest teachers in Stormwind, the one who had taught me how to wield the Light not just as a weapon, but as a source of healing and strength.
When her eyes met mine, she smiled.
“Paladin Tune, good eyes see you.”
I stepped forward, placing a fist over my chest in a respectful bow.
“Lady Katherine.”
282
She studied me for a moment, then her gaze dropped to my weapon—the massive two-handed mace, newly reforged after my long trials.
A small smirk crossed her lips.
“I heard about your trial, Paladin Tune.” She nodded approvingly. “And I’m impressed—how someone so young was able to complete all the tasks required to reforge that weapon.”
I lowered my head slightly.
“Thank you, my Lady. It was an honor.”
But then, to my surprise, she stepped closer, tilting her head as if studying me more carefully.
Then, she spoke.
“You know what, Tune… why don’t you come inside with us?”
I blinked, uncertain if I had heard correctly.
“My Lady?”
Her smirk widened slightly.
“You are still young, but I have a feeling you can handle yourself.”
I felt my chest tighten.
The chance to fight alongside these warriors, to witness a battle of this scale f irsthand?
It was unthinkable.
“Come on,” she said with a chuckle. “I’ll clear things with your commander.”
I barely had time to process what was happening before she strode toward the officers, exchanging a few words.
A few moments later, she returned, nodding toward the entrance of the lair.
“Well, Paladin? Are you coming?”
I took a deep breath.
Then I stepped forward, falling into formation with the greatest warriors of the Alliance.
The cavern yawned before us, its depths pulsing with the heat of dragonfire and the scent of brimstone.
We moved as one, entering the lair.
And as we crossed the threshold into darkness, I knew one thing for certain.
This was an honor unlike any other.
To be among the best.
283
To fight alongside heroes.
And to face the fury of a dragon.
The air grew hot and thick with the scent of sulfur as we made our way deeper into Onyxia’s lair.
The rough stone walls were charred black, the very earth marked by the heat of her presence. Pools of molten rock bubbled in cracks along the cavern floor, casting eerie, f lickering red-orange light against the figures ahead of me.
We moved as one, a force of paladins, warriors, spellcasters, and hunters, each step bringing us closer to the greatest battle of this campaign.
And yet, as we advanced, I found myself more focused on the warriors around me than the enemy ahead.
The first enemies came quickly—Onyxia’s dragonkin guards, massive reptilian warriors wielding jagged weapons.
Their roars echoed through the cavern, their scaled bodies thick with blackened armor, but it did not matter.
They were slaughtered in seconds.
The warriors charged first, cutting through them like they were nothing.
The mages unleashed storms of fire and ice, freezing limbs mid-motion before shattering them.
The hunters and their beasts tore into the enemy, arrows piercing scales, feral creatures lunging and ripping at throats.
I didn’t even lift a hand.
By the time I raised my weapon, the fight was already over.
These were no ordinary fighters.
These were the greatest warriors and spellcasters of the Alliance.
And I was among them.
With each step forward, I studied them, fascinated by the sheer diversity of skills, races, and battle styles.
Dwarven Paladins, clad in golden armor, their warhammers crashing down with righteous fury. Dwarven Hunters, their beasts at their sides—massive bears and wolves, their bond unbreakable. Gnomish Mages, hurling spells with precision, while others unleashed small mechanical constructs, whirring and sparking, firing tiny bolts of energy. Night Elf Druids, walking with eerie grace—until one of them suddenly transformed.
One moment, he was a robed figure.
284
The next, he was a feral beast, claws extended, eyes glowing with primal fury.
A being of nature’s wrath, swift and unrelenting.
Then there were the humans—the ones I knew best.
Warriors, charging ahead before the battle even began, fearless and unshakable.
Mages and Priests, moving with purpose, their hands weaving powerful spells of destruction and healing alike.
Paladins, standing firm, their weapons glowing with the Light, their very presence a shield to those around them.
I even spotted a SI7: Rogue.
And among them, a shadow.
A figure that made my breath catch in my throat.
At first, I thought he was a mage, his robes flowing, his posture commanding.
But then, I saw the thing at his side.
A small creature, barely reaching his waist, with twisted horns and glowing red eyes.
A demon.
My instincts screamed at me—this was no servant of the Light.
And yet…
When he raised his hand, dark energy crackled from his fingertips, coiling like a living shadow before launching toward an enemy.
The dragonkin shrieked as the magic struck, its life force drained, its body collapsing into itself as the warlock moved forward with confidence.
He commanded the darkness, but it did not seem to consume him.
Could someone truly wield dark magic and not be lost to it?
I had always believed shadow was a path of destruction, of corruption.
And yet, this warlock fought for the Alliance.
I would have to learn more—one day.
But that lesson would have to wait.
Because ahead of us…
The true battle awaited.
We reached the main chamber, a vast, hollowed-out cavern with rivers of lava cutting through the stone.
285
And there, resting at the far end, surrounded by gold, bone, and the remains of the foolish who had come before…
Was her.
Onyxia.
Her massive form stretched across the cavern, her black scales shimmering in the dim light, her piercing yellow eyes watching us with cold amusement.
A beast of legend.
A force of destruction.
A queen of deceit and fire.
Her claws flexed, her wings shifted, the air itself trembling with her presence.
This will be a battle like no other.
The moment the order was given, the warriors charged.
Steel clashed against blackened scales, swords and axes tearing into Onyxia’s massive form as she let out a deafening roar of fury.
From the backlines, the mages unleashed their magic, bolts of fire and frost striking her hide, while hunters loosed a relentless barrage of arrows, their beasts lunging at her legs to slow her movements.
At first, the battle seemed steady, controlled.
I focused on the warriors at the front, channeling healing spells, reinforcing their defenses with holy blessings.
They were taking an incredible amount of punishment—swiping claws, bone crushing tail slams, bursts of fire.
But I could not let them fall.
Then, with a mighty beat of her wings, Onyxia lifted off the ground, sending a shockwave through the cavern.
The warriors cursed, forced to fall back as she soared above us.
Arrows and arcane missiles followed her into the air, but her scales were thick—too thick to fall from simple ranged attacks.
Then, from the sides of the chamber, the real threat emerged.
Small black whelps, freshly hatched from their eggs, poured into the battlefield, their tiny wings flapping as they rushed toward the spellcasters.
The mages, priests, and druids had no shields, no heavy armor to protect them.
They would be torn apart.
I stepped forward, gripping my hammer tightly.
Then, I channeled the Light into the ground beneath me.
286
A golden glow erupted from the stone, spreading outward—Consecration.
The whelps shrieked in pain, their movements slowed by the divine energy.
The warriors saw the opening—and they rushed back to assist.
The floor trembled beneath their charge, their weapons crashing down upon the creatures with devastating force.
The black whelps fell helplessly, crushed beneath the Alliance’s might.
But the battle was not over.
From behind us, two dragonkin appeared, massive and armored, charging straight for the priests.
They knew who to target.
The priests had no defense, no shields, no weapons to hold the front. If they fell, we would all fall.
I moved without hesitation.
Lifting my hammer high, I called upon the Light, bringing down a righteous strike upon the first dragonkin.
A surge of holy energy burst forth, the creature staggering back as its chest was seared with retribution.
But the second dragonkin was too far.
And it was getting too close to a priest.
I reached out, calling forth a divine shield of protection.
The priest gasped as a barrier of golden light enveloped him, stopping the dragonkin’s attack mid-strike.
For a moment, he looked at me, realization dawning.
I had just saved his life.
Then, the warriors arrived, cutting the last dragonkin down within seconds.
And finally—Onyxia descended.
With another mighty roar, she crashed down onto the cavern floor, sending cracks through the stone.
This time, she fought with pure rage.
Her claws carved through warriors, her tail swept entire groups off their feet.
Then, she breathed in deep.
The air thickened with heat.
And then—flames.
287
Waves of fire erupted across the chamber, rolling through the battlefield in massive surges.
“Move!” the commanders shouted.
I moved swiftly, dodging the fire as it rushed toward us.
The warriors had no choice but to keep fighting, their armor blackened by the heat, their swords unyielding.
If they fell, we were doomed.
I did not stop.
I kept my hammer raised, channeling healing light into them, restoring their strength as fast as the dragon could burn them.
Then, the worst happened.
Onyxia turned toward the rear, toward the mages and archers.
“MOVE!”
The warning came too late.
A dwarven hunter, slower than the others, was caught in the blast.
Fire engulfed him, sending him tumbling backward, his bow clattering to the ground.
For a second, I thought he was dead.
But before I could react, a golden glow erupted around him.
The priests and paladins were already on him, channeling the Light into his body.
Even a druid stepped forward, summoning nature’s power to mend his burns.
Slowly, his breathing steadied.
The dwarf coughed, looking up at those who had saved him.
He would not forget this moment.
None of us would.
I lost track of time.
The battle felt like hours, days, years.
But eventually, the final blow was struck.
Onyxia let out a piercing, guttural roar, her massive form shuddering as she staggered.
Then, with one last breath—she fell.
Her massive body collapsed, shaking the very earth beneath us.
And then—silence.
288
Only the sound of our breathing, the drip of molten rock, and the lingering heat in the air.
It was over.
She was dead.
Onyxia, Broodmother of the Black Dragonflight, manipulator of Stormwind, deceiver of kings…
Had fallen.
For a long moment, no one spoke.
We stood among the wreckage, the blood, the heat, staring at the massive corpse before us.
Some warriors dropped to their knees, exhausted.
Others raised their weapons in silent triumph.
And I…
I simply stood there, hammer in hand, feeling the weight of what had just happened.
I had fought alongside the greatest champions of the Alliance.
I had seen the Light shine in its purest form.
And now…
It was done.
The battle was over.
But the weight of it still lingered.
The cavern was quiet now, the only sounds the crackling embers of lingering fire and the slow, heavy breathing of exhausted warriors.
Some still clutched their weapons, others fell to their knees, and a few tended to the wounded—those who had fought at the front, who had borne the brunt of Onyxia’s fury.
I moved through the battlefield, channeling the Light into those in need. Burned f lesh, broken bones, torn wounds—all mended under the warmth of divine magic.
It was over.
A major enemy of the Alliance had been defeated.
An impressive victory, one that would be told in Stormwind’s halls for years to come.
I exhaled slowly, finally allowing myself to feel the weight of what we had just accomplished.
And then—I saw her.
289
Standing before me, her golden-trimmed armor stained with battle, yet still shining with the radiance of the Light, was Katherine the Pure.
Her eyes met mine, steady and full of pride.
Then, she did something I did not expect.
She raised her fist to her chest and bowed.
A gesture of respect.
For a moment, I didn’t understand.
She was one of the greatest Paladins of Stormwind.
She was my superior, my teacher.
It should be me bowing to her.
And so, after a brief hesitation, I did.
But even as I did, I wondered—why had she bowed first?
Before I could dwell on it, a figure appeared at my side, silent as a shadow.
I hadn’t even seen him approach.
A rogue, clad in dark leather, the unmistakable presence of SI:7.
He smirked.
“Look at that. The new guy survived.” His voice was amused but not unkind. “Nice one, kid.”
And just as suddenly as he appeared, he was gone.
Then, another approached.
The priest I had saved during the battle, the one I had shielded with Blessing of Protection.
He placed a hand on my shoulder, nodding.
“Thank you, young one.” His voice was warm, sincere. “I see you have been well trained.”
And then, one more.
The warlock.
I kept my face neutral, trying not to let my unease show.
He walked past, his dark robes flowing, his imp skittering at his side.
As he passed, he paused just briefly.
“Well done, Paladin.”
290
And then, he was gone, disappearing into the procession of heroes moving toward the exit.
Slowly, the strike force began to move.
The wounded were supported by their allies, weapons were secured, and the reality of victory began to settle in.
The battle was done.
Now, it was time to return.
I took one last glance at Onyxia’s fallen form, the once-mighty dragon reduced to nothing but a lifeless corpse.
Then, I turned.
And I walked with the others, side by side with heroes.
The moment we stepped outside the cavern, the army was waiting.
Lined up in formation, their armor gleaming under the afternoon sun, they stood at attention.
Then, as one, they raised their weapons and saluted.
A roar of cheers followed, voices echoing across the marshlands.
This was their victory, too.
They had held the line, fought off Onyxia’s minions, endured the heat of battle while the strike force fought inside.
And now, we stood together as victors.
I took a deep breath, the weight of the moment settling in.
But even as I prepared to rejoin my unit, a familiar voice called to me.
“Come, Paladin. We move to Theramore. Lady Proudmoore awaits us.”
I turned to see Katherine the Pure, already mounted, her golden armor catching the light, her presence as commanding as ever.
I hesitated.
“But… the army… my duty is with them.”
She smiled slightly.
“They will remain here for now, to ensure there are no dragons left.” She nodded toward the gathered soldiers. “Your army duties for today are over. Today, you come with us.”
For a moment, I hesitated.
Then I looked around.
At the soldiers still standing at the ready, their job not yet finished.
At the strike force, already mounting up, preparing to ride.
291
At Katherine, watching me expectantly.
This was not a request.
It was an order.
And so, I nodded.
“As you command, my Lady.”
I climbed onto my horse.
And together, we rode for Theramore.
As we approached Theramore’s gates, the sounds of the city grew louder.
The people had gathered, waiting for our arrival.
Then, as we entered the city, the cheers erupted.
Men and women lined the streets, their voices ringing with celebration.
Banners of blue and gold hung from the walls, the colors of Theramore and the Alliance.
Soldiers stood at attention, saluting as we passed.
This was not just a victory.
This was a moment that would be remembered.
And at the heart of it all, standing at the center of the gathering, was Lady Jaina Proudmoore.
Her white and blue robes billowed gently in the breeze, her expression calm yet warm.
She was waiting for us.
And for the first time since the battle ended, I truly felt the weight of what we had just accomplished.
Lady Jaina Proudmoore stepped forward, greeting the strike force with a warm smile, her presence calm yet commanding.
She already knew many of them, warriors and mages who had fought alongside her before.
She embraced some like old friends, exchanging quiet words of respect, gratitude, and relief.
I stood at the edge of the group, watching from a distance.
This was not my place.
I was just a soldier, a paladin of Stormwind, one among many.
Or so I thought.
292
She continued down the line, offering a handshake here, a soft word there.
Then, she reached me.
And stopped.
Her expression shifted, her soft smile fading into something else—something uncertain.
Her eyes studied me, flickering with recognition.
Then, I saw it.
A memory—something distant, something painful—resurfacing in her gaze.
“Paladin…” she whispered.
Her voice trembled.
Then, a single tear fell from her eye.
“You… I remember you.”
My chest tightened.
She remembered.
After all these years
The moment Arthas arrived at Stratholme.
“My Lady,” I said softly, swallowing the lump in my throat. “I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to bring back old memories.”
Jaina shook her head, wiping a tear away.
“Not your fault, Paladin.”
She exhaled shakily.
“But… I am glad. Glad to see you made it out alive. And even more so, to see how far you’ve come.”
For a moment, we simply stood there, lost in our thoughts.
Neither of us needed to say it.
We both remembered that fateful day.
And for a brief, fragile moment, we let ourselves feel it.
“My Lady,” I said, finally breaking the silence. “I am also glad to see you well, after all that has transpired.”
Then, I bowed in deep respect.
And that was when everything changed.
The moment I lowered my head, it struck.
A blinding white light consumed my vision.
293
My knees buckled beneath me.
My surroundings faded, swallowed by pure radiance.
And then—the voice.
“Find me… Find me…”
But this time, it was stronger than ever.
Not a whisper, not a distant call, but a command.
The Light overwhelmed me, surging through my mind, my very soul.
I couldn’t breathe.
I couldn’t think.
Only the words remained.
“Find me!”
Pain shot through my head. My body gave out.
I collapsed to my knees, my hands gripping the ground.
Somewhere in the distance, I heard Jaina’s voice.
“Paladin? Are you alright?”
But I couldn’t answer.
The light was too strong.
The voice was too powerful.
And then—darkness.
I passed out.
I woke to the sound of soft voices and the scent of herbal poultices.
Blinking, my vision slowly adjusted, the flickering glow of enchanted lanterns casting warm light across the wooden walls.
I was in an infirmary.
At my side stood a priest, his golden-trimmed robes marking him as one of Theramore’s healers. Beside him, a druid, her robes adorned with woven vines, hands resting gently over my arm, as if still scanning for wounds.
And then, further back—Jaina Proudmoore.
She was seated in a simple chair, her gaze calm but watchful.
And at her side, a gnome I did not recognize.
294
A young apprentice, by the looks of it, her bright magenta hair tied up in twin tails, her eyes full of curiosity.
“He is alright,” the druid said finally, pulling her hands away. “No curses on him, no traces of dark magic. His body is well.”
She looked to Jaina. “Whatever happened, it wasn’t an attack.”
The priest folded his arms, studying me.
“Paladin, what happened to you?”
I tried to sit up, but a dull ache pulsed at the base of my skull.
“You collapsed so suddenly,” the priest continued. “And while you were unconscious, you kept repeating the same words—‘Who are you?’”
His eyes narrowed slightly, his voice lowering.
“Tell me, young one. What troubles you?”
I looked at them—the priest, the druid, Jaina herself.
Even the gnome apprentice watched me with quiet curiosity.
So many important figures, people I should be honored to even be in the same room with.
The least I could do was be honest.
I exhaled slowly.
And then, I told them.
The visions. The dreams. The voice that called to me, growing stronger and stronger.
The priest listened intently, his expression thoughtful.
Then, he stroked his beard.
“Hmm… it seems like the Light wants you to find someone.”
He paused, then tilted his head slightly.
“Did you lose anyone, Paladin?”
I met his gaze, but I didn’t know where to start.
Before I could even find the words, Jaina spoke.
Her voice was soft, yet heavy with understanding.
“This Paladin survived the plague in Stratholme… and the fall of Lordaeron.”
She looked at the priest, then back at me.
“It’s fair to say he lost too many.”
I swallowed hard.
295
She was right.
There were too many names. Too many faces I would never see again.
But the priest wasn’t finished.
“Did you have loved ones in Stratholme?” he asked gently. “Before Arthas marched in?”
My breath caught.
A name rose from the depths of my mind, unbidden, yet clear as day.
A name I had not spoken aloud in years.
“Adele,” I whispered.
Silence fell over the room.
I swallowed, my throat tight.
“My fiancée, Adele.” My voice barely held steady. “She was there when it happened.”
I looked down at my hands.
“I couldn’t save her.”
Silence lingered in the room.
The weight of my words, of Adele’s name, still hung heavy in the air.
Then, a small voice broke the quiet.
“Adele?”
I turned, blinking in surprise.
It was the gnome.
Jaina’s apprentice, the one who had been quietly watching me this whole time.
She tilted her head, her bright magenta pigtails bouncing slightly.
“That’s a pretty name,” she mused. Then, her expression brightened.
“Wait… don’t we have someone with that name here?”
My breath caught in my chest.
“My Adele was from Stratholme,” I replied, forcing my voice to remain steady. “She wouldn’t be here in Theramore.”
The gnome frowned, undeterred.
“No, no, I think we do!” she insisted. “I think our Adele came with Lady Jaina from Lordaeron!”
She looked up at her mentor excitedly.
296
“When Arthas killed his father, didn’t you bring a lot of refugees here? Hundreds of them?”
Jaina’s expression shifted, as if recalling something long buried.
“Yes, I did,” she admitted softly. “Many came to Theramore seeking refuge… some from Lordaeron, some from towns beyond.”
She turned her gaze back to me, studying me carefully.
“What did your Adele look like, Paladin?”
My heart pounded in my chest.
Too fast.
Too hard.
They were trying to give me hope.
But hope was dangerous.
I had accepted her death long ago.
Had forced myself to believe that she was lost, like so many others.
This couldn’t be her.
Could it?
And yet, my lips parted.
And I spoke.
I described her.
“She had golden hair,” I said, my voice quieter now, but steady. “Soft and light, like sunlight woven into strands.”
I could see her in my mind, as vividly as if she stood before me.
“Her smile was kind, always full of warmth. She had a way of making you feel safe, even when everything else was falling apart.”
I swallowed hard.
“And her eyes…”
I exhaled, remembering them.
“Deep green, like the forests after a summer rain.”
I clenched my fists.
“She wasn’t just beautiful. She was good.”
I closed my eyes for a moment, holding the memory close.
297
“She would always put others before herself. She helped the sick, the poor, even when she had nothing to give. That was who she was.”
And then, I looked at Jaina.
“That was my Adele.”
And I waited.
I waited for reality to crash down, for them to tell me that it was a coincidence, that it wasn’t her.
Because it couldn’t be.
Could it?
“Uh oh.”
The small voice cut through the silence like a blade.
I turned sharply toward the gnome—Jaina’s apprentice.
She and Jaina exchanged looks.
A look of realization. A look of something unspoken.
My chest tightened.
“What?” I demanded, my voice sharper than I intended. “What is it?”
The gnome glanced back at Jaina, eyes wide with excitement, almost disbelief.
“The priest always says the Light works in mysterious ways, right?” she said, voice quick and eager. “Do you think that—?”
Jaina cut her off.
“Go find her, Kinndy.”
My pulse roared in my ears.
“Find who?” I asked, my breath catching. “Lady Jaina, find who?!”
Jaina hesitated, choosing her words carefully.
“Paladin…” she started, then exhaled. “It’s just… your description. It really does sound like the Adele we have here.”
Her eyes met mine, filled with something I couldn’t quite name.
“So we will find her for you.”
Then, more softly:
“Maybe that’s who the Light wants you to find.”
The words had barely left her lips before I was already moving.
I shoved away the blanket, standing so fast my legs nearly gave out.
“Where is she?” I shouted, rushing toward the exit.
298
A voice called after me—Jaina? The priest? I didn’t know. I didn’t care.
“Adele?! Adele?!”
I tore through the stone halls of Theramore, my heart hammering louder than my boots against the floor.
I heard Kinndy’s voice somewhere behind me.
“She works in the gardens! She usually brings flowers to our alchemist!”
The gardens.
I ran.
The streets blurred past me.
People turned their heads, startled by the sight of a fully armored Paladin tearing through the city like a madman.
I didn’t care.
I couldn’t wait.
If there was even a small chance that my Adele was alive…
I had to see for myself.
And then—I saw her.
Standing in the gardens, near a stone archway covered in vines.
Next to Kinndy Sparkshine.
A woman in a simple white dress, her arms full of fresh-cut flowers.
She turned at the sound of my approach.
And my world stopped.
Golden hair, woven into a loose braid that cascaded over her shoulder.
Emerald green eyes—deep, endless, just as I remembered.
Her lips parted in shock, flowers slipping from her grasp.
It couldn’t be real.
This had to be a dream.
A cruel trick of my mind.
But then—her voice.
Soft. Trembling.
“Tune?”
I broke.
299
Tears poured down my face as I ran to her, my heart shattering with every step.
I didn’t stop.
I couldn’t.
I wrapped my arms around her, holding her as if letting go would make her vanish.
She sobbed into my chest, her fingers clutching my armor, as if she too couldn’t believe this was real.
Her voice, shaking with disbelief and joy.
“My beloved… you live.”
I buried my face into her hair, my voice cracking.
“Adele… my Adele.”
And I knew—
The Light had never abandoned me.
Because here she was.
Alive.
I held her.
And I never wanted to let go.
She trembled in my arms, her body warm, her breaths unsteady, but she was here. She was real.
I felt her heartbeat against my chest, her fingers clutching the fabric of my tunic, as if she feared I might vanish, just as I had feared she was lost forever.
I ran my hands through her golden hair, the same softness I remembered, the scent of f lowers clinging to it.
Her body shook with quiet sobs, but neither of us spoke—not yet.
There were no words for this moment.
Only the overwhelming flood of emotions crashing down on us, drowning us in years of sorrow, of longing, of impossible hope now realized.
I pressed my forehead against hers, my tears falling onto her cheeks as she cried into my shoulder.
“I found you, my beloved,” I whispered, voice trembling, barely able to believe the words.
She nodded, smiling through her tears.
“And I found you.”
For a moment, the world faded away.
There was no war, no past, no future.
300
Only us.
Together.
But then, slowly, reality crept back in.
I pulled back just enough to look into her eyes, my fingers brushing against her cheek as I tried to understand what was happening.
“But… how?” I asked, my voice still raw with emotion.
I shook my head, struggling to make sense of it all.
“Adele, how are you here?”
I searched her face, looking for answers.
“I thought you were in Stratholme when it happened. How is this possible?”
She reached up, placing a hand on my cheek, her smile soft but knowing.
“My beloved, there will be time for that,” she whispered.
Then, she hesitated.
Her fingers trembled slightly as she grasped my hand, holding it tightly.
“But first, there is something you need to know.”
A chill ran down my spine.
Something in her voice, in her eyes, told me this was more than just a simple story.
I frowned.
“Something?” I repeated.
She took a deep breath.
“Or…” she said softly.
Then, she held my hand even tighter.
“Someone.”
I blinked.
“Who?”
She gave no answer.
Instead, she gently pulled me forward.
“Come,” she said. “Come with me.”
And I followed.
301
She led me through Theramore’s streets, away from the gardens, past simple homes made of stone and wood.
The air was calm, the city’s earlier celebrations still echoing faintly in the distance.
Then, she stopped in front of a small house, no different from the others around it.
I glanced at her, uncertain.
“Adele… what is this?”
But before she could answer, the door opened.
An elderly woman stepped outside, her face lined with age, her sharp eyes studying me with a knowing gaze.
I frowned.
“Who is this woman?” I asked.
I looked to Adele, searching for answers.
But she shook her head.
“Not here,” she said softly.
Then, she took my hand again.
“Inside.”
I hesitated for only a moment.
Then, I followed her in.
The moment I stepped inside, my breath caught in my throat.
At the center of the small room was a wooden cradle, rocking gently.
Inside—
A baby.
Tiny. Wrapped in soft cloth, his small hands curling as he stirred from sleep.
My body froze.
My mind went blank.
I couldn’t breathe.
Adele moved forward, reaching into the cradle.
With the gentlest care, she lifted the infant into her arms.
Then, she turned to me.
And without hesitation, she placed him in mine.
“Tune,” she whispered, voice thick with emotion.
302
“This is Marcus.”
I felt the weight of him against my chest, small, fragile, warm.
A child.
A living, breathing child.
A baby.
And then—
Her next words shattered my world.
“Marcus, son of Tune.”
“Your son.”
I stared down at the baby in my arms, my vision blurring with tears.
I could barely hold onto reality, my thoughts spiraling into chaos.
Adele was alive.
And now… a son?
My son?
This wasn’t possible.
This wasn’t real.
But he was real.
I could feel his tiny breaths, see his little fingers moving, hear the softest, sleepiest sigh escape his lips.
He was mine.
A part of me.
A part of us.
I clutched him tightly, my arms shaking, overwhelmed by an emotion too powerful to contain.
“Adele…” I whispered, my voice barely holding.
I looked at her, lost, overwhelmed.
“How—?”
But she only smiled, tears still falling down her cheeks.
“We have so much to talk about, my love.”
I nodded slowly, holding our son close, feeling his warmth, his life.
And then, I let go.
I let the tears fall.
303
For everything I lost.
For everything I thought was gone.
For everything I never knew I had.
I had Adele.
I had Marcus.
I had a family.
And for the first time in so long…
I was whole again.
I felt her shift in my arms, and then, slowly, she knelt before me.
I blinked, confused, my emotions still a storm raging within me.
“Adele?” I whispered, barely able to find my voice.
But then, I saw her looking past me.
I turned my head—and there, standing just outside the small home, were Lady Jaina Proudmoore and her apprentice, Kinndy Sparkshine.
Jaina’s hands were clasped together, and in her eyes—more tears.
Tears of relief.
Tears of understanding.
Tears of joy.
She met my gaze, her voice gentle yet firm.
“See, Paladin?” she said, her lips curling into the faintest, bittersweet smile.
“You found who you were meant to find.”
I turned fully toward her, still holding Marcus close, my body trembling.
“My Lady…” My voice cracked under the weight of my emotions.
I swallowed hard, struggling to breathe through the tears that threatened to consume me.
“You saved them,” I whispered.
“You saved my beloved, my family… I owe you everything.”
Jaina shook her head gently.
“No, Paladin,” she said softly. “You have lost too much already.”
304
Her eyes softened, and for the first time, I saw not just the leader of Theramore, not just the powerful sorceress, but the kindhearted woman who had once tried to stop the fall of Lordaeron.
“You owe me nothing.”
I opened my mouth, but no words came.
What could I even say?
What words could ever repay this mercy, this gift?
Instead, I lowered my head, pressing my lips to Marcus’s small forehead, trying to steady my breathing.
But then—I raised my gaze once more.
“Whatever you need, My Lady,” I said, my voice stronger this time.
“I am yours to command.”
Jaina’s expression shifted, amusement flickering in her tired eyes.
She let out a soft chuckle before shaking her head.
“For now, stay here, Paladin.”
She glanced toward Adele, then back to me.
“I will have a word with Katherine, and I will grant you a well-deserved Honor’s Rest.”
She smiled.
“Stay with your family, for as long as you like.”
My breath caught again, my entire body feeling light and heavy at the same time.
I had fought so many battles.
Faced so much death.
And now—for the first time in years—
I was being given something else.
Time.
A moment to breathe.
A moment to live.
I bowed my head deeply.
“Thank you, My Lady.”
At my side, Adele echoed my words.
“Thank you, My Lady.”
Then, from beside Jaina, a small voice spoke.
305
“Oh my,” Kinndy Sparkshine whispered, wiping her own teary eyes.
She clasped her hands together, her bright magenta pigtails bouncing as she practically bounced in place.
“A real family brought together.”
She sighed dreamily.
“How beautiful, isn’t it?”
Jaina let out a soft laugh, shaking her head.
“Yes, Kinndy, it truly is.”
I let out a shaky breath, looking at Adele, at Marcus.
And in that moment—
I felt at peace.
The next few days, I feel as though I am living a dream. Lady Jaina, in her wisdom and kindness, has granted me leave from duty, and to me, that is worth more than any treasure in Azeroth. For the first time in what feels like an eternity, I am with my beloved Adele and our son, Marcus. I am truly blessed by the Light.
Yet even amidst this joy, a shadow lingers in my heart. The past remains a wound left unhealed, and questions long buried must be answered. One evening, as the sea breeze whispers through the open window, I turn to Adele—her beauty undimmed by the years apart, her eyes holding both sorrow and love.
“Adele,” I begin, my voice softer than I intended. “Tell me, my beloved, tell me everything. I thought you lost when Arthas purged Stratholme. I returned, I tried to find a way inside, but the city was sealed. How did you survive?”
She exhales a slow breath, gathering herself before she speaks. “I was not within the city when it happened,” she says. “I was at my cousin’s farm beyond the northern fields. We saw the soldiers march upon Stratholme with Arthas at their head. Then came the Silver Hand, riding beside him, their banners proud and unbroken. We did not know what to think or what fate had in store for those within.
“But then,” she hesitates, a flicker of pain crossing her features, “the Silver Hand turned and left, abandoning the city to whatever judgment Arthas had decided. He and his men pressed forward into Stratholme’s gates, and we stood helpless at the edge of the f ields, watching and waiting.
“Then we heard them—the screams of the people, the clash of steel, the cries of battle. And then the fires began. The city burned, and we knew—whatever had befallen Stratholme, it was no salvation.”
I listened carefully, my heart heavy with every word, but I did not interrupt. I let her continue.
306
“Watching the city burn, we feared for our lives. Everyone outside the walls began f leeing—farmers, traders, refugees from the outer villages. The roads filled with those who had escaped, but many among us were already sick. The plague had spread beyond the city, and there was no cure. We could do nothing for them. One by one, they fell, too weak to continue, and we were forced to leave them behind.
“For days, we marched, first to Andorhal, seeking shelter. But the sickness followed, and the land itself felt cursed. Some among us chose to press on, continuing to Lordaeron’s capital, hoping the crown could protect us. And there, for a time, I felt safe. I was already expecting our son. I did not know what had become of you, but I prayed to the Light that you had survived, that somehow, you would find your way back to me.
“But then, months later, Arthas returned. He came not as the prince we once knew, but as something else—something monstrous. He killed the king, his own father, and in a single night, Lordaeron fell. The city that had been our last refuge became a place of horror.”
She paused, swallowing hard before continuing.
“Lady Jaina was in the capital that day. She had come to welcome Arthas home, but when it all happened, she acted swiftly. She gathered as many as she could, evacuating hundreds, fleeing south before the darkness could claim us all. I was fortunate to be among them. She brought us here, to Theramore, and in time, this place became my home.
“Tune… I thought you dead, too. The few reports that reached us were dire. They spoke of our kingdom’s fall, of Uther slain, of the Silver Hand shattered. We feared the worst.
“But now… here you are.”
“What about you, my beloved? How did you survive? Tell me everything.”
And so I did.
I told her how I had been there, standing beside Uther, Jaina, and Arthas when the fateful moment came. I told her how I had watched in disbelief as Arthas, once our noble prince, ordered the destruction of Stratholme. When Uther and the Silver Hand refused to carry out his command, and Jaina turned away in sorrow, it was she who gave me my task.
“Go,” she had said, her voice heavy with urgency. “Return to Lordaeron. Warn the king.”
With a wave of her hand, she opened a portal, and in an instant, I was standing within the halls of our capital. I delivered Jaina’s warning, but it was already too late. The city was far away, and by the time I returned to the Silver Hand’s encampment, the worst had come to pass.
They told me what Arthas had done. That the prince had gone through with his terrible judgment, that Stratholme was lost. I refused to believe it—I could not. I had not yet seen it with my own eyes, had not yet found you.
So I rode without rest, pushing my horse to its very limits. I would not stop, not until I reached the city gates.
But they were locked.
307
Every entrance was barred, sealed as if Stratholme itself had become a tomb. Beyond the walls, I could see the glow of raging fires, could hear the screams of the innocent, the clash of steel against steel, the cries of those who had once called the city their home. And yet, I could do nothing.
Nothing at all.
Eventually, I returned to the Silver Hand. The months that followed were spent between Hearthglen and Andorhal, doing what little we could to hold back the darkness. We protected the refugees, guarded the roads they traveled, and struck down the horrors that sought to claim them. But it was not enough. No matter how hard we fought, the plague spread, relentless and unforgiving.
Then came the news.
Arthas had returned to Lordaeron—not as a prince, but as a murderer. He had slain his own father, the beloved King Terenas, and with his death, our kingdom was truly lost. When word reached us, we knew the time had come. We began evacuating the last of the civilians from Andorhal, leading them south to the safety of Southshore.
But the Silver Hand did not flee.
Uther and the senior paladins remained behind, determined to hold Andorhal against the coming storm. They believed that even in the face of despair, they could stand as a beacon of hope. But hope was no match for what Arthas had become.
I was there when it happened. I watched as Arthas arrived at the head of his undead host. I saw Uther raise his hammer, not in anger, but in sorrow, standing as the last shield between the Light and the darkness. And I saw Arthas strike him down.
There was nothing left for me after that.
With the Silver Hand shattered, I returned to Southshore, my faith broken, my purpose uncertain. In time, I found my way to Stormwind, where I took up arms once more, joining the army and continuing my training as a paladin.
And in the end, every path, every battle, every choice I made led me here.
To you.
The room was quiet save for the distant crash of waves against Theramore’s walls. A gentle breeze drifted through the open window, carrying the scent of salt and the faint warmth of the evening sun. The past weighed heavy upon them, yet in this moment, there was no sorrow—only gratitude.
Tune reached for Adele’s hands, his gauntlets set aside, his touch warm and steady. She placed her fingers over his, lacing them together as they knelt upon the wooden floor. Their foreheads touched, the space between them filled with whispered breaths and the silent understanding of souls who had endured loss yet found their way back to each other.
Together, they closed their eyes.
308
“Blessed Light,” Tune murmured, his voice steady yet reverent, “we thank You, for in Your grace, we are reunited. Through war and shadow, through fire and grief, You have guided our steps, and though we strayed, You never abandoned us.”
Adele exhaled softly, pressing her forehead against his, her voice a whisper carried by devotion. “We have lost so much, yet tonight, we kneel not in sorrow, but in gratitude. Thank You for bringing my beloved back to me. Thank You for protecting our son. Let Your radiance shine upon us, that we may walk forward, not in fear of the past, but in hope for what is to come.”
A warm glow settled between them, unseen yet felt—the Light’s presence, quiet but certain, a gentle reassurance that their prayers had been heard.
For a long moment, they remained like that, heads bowed together, their hands clasped as if neither wished to let go. They had walked through darkness, through loss, through war itself, but now, here in this fleeting moment of peace, they had found something no battle could take from them.
They had found each other again.
A few more days passed, and I knew it was time to start thinking about the road ahead.
“I could stay here,” I told her, the words heavy with possibility.
But Adele shook her head, a knowing smile touching her lips. “No, Tune,” she said gently. “I know you. I know your heart. You do not want to stop your training as a paladin, nor would you ever abandon your duties in the army. And I love you for it.”
“Then come with me,” I said, holding her hands in mine. “You and Marcus—come with me to Stormwind.”
Her smile grew, the light of it shining through the weight of all we had endured. To stand by my side, to watch me grow as a paladin, had always been her dream. And now, it could become reality.
“Stormwind is a great city,” I told her. “You would love it. You could work in the gardens there.”
She nodded thoughtfully. “I had been trying to learn from the alchemist here in Theramore,” she admitted.
“We have alchemists in Stormwind too,” I reassured her. “I’m sure we can find you a place among them. We will make this work. Everything will be alright.”
And with that, the plan was set.
By the time I had to return to Stormwind, there was one last thing I had to do. I made my way to Lady Jaina’s tower, seeking the woman who had done more for me than I could ever repay. She had saved Adele and Marcus—my beloved, my son—gifts beyond measure.
I bowed low before her. “My lady, I thank you. For everything. I owe you a debt I can never repay.”
309
She smiled, though there was the shadow of sadness in her eyes. “Be well, Paladin,” she said. “And know that you have a friend here, should you ever need one.”
From behind her, her gnome apprentice Kinndy Sparkshine piped up, her voice full of mischief and warmth. “Oh, Paladin, we’re going to miss you! Your love was so beautiful to see!”
I chuckled, shaking my head as I bent down to bid her farewell as well.
And with that, we boarded the next ship to Stormwind, the sea carrying us toward a new beginning.
As soon as I set foot on the stone docks of Stormwind Harbor, a messenger approached, his tabard bearing the royal lion.
“Paladin Tune, you are summoned to the barracks at once.”
I frowned. “What now?” I muttered to myself. Had I stayed in Theramore too long? Had I done something wrong?
Adele glanced at me, concern flickering in her eyes. “What is it?”
“I don’t know,” I admitted. “But don’t worry. It will be alright.”
Together, we made our way through the bustling streets, the familiar sounds of the city rising around us—merchants calling out their wares, blacksmiths hammering steel, the chatter of soldiers and townsfolk alike. Yet, despite the warmth of homecoming, a weight pressed upon my chest. Summoned so soon after my return? This was not a simple debriefing.
At the barracks, I was told to wait outside the commander’s office. The moments stretched, my thoughts racing with possibilities. Then, the doors opened.
“Paladin Tune,” the squire called. “You may enter.”
I stepped inside and was met with the sight of several officers standing in solemn formation. Among them, figures clad in radiant armor—paladins of the Order. My gaze moved across the room, and there, standing with quiet grace, was Katherine the Pure.
I straightened instinctively. Katherine was a paladin of unwavering faith, a beacon of what it meant to serve the Light. If she was here, this was no mere formality.
The commander, a stern-faced veteran with a scar running down his cheek, stepped forward. “Paladin Tune,” he began, his voice firm yet carrying an undertone of respect. “You have returned to Stormwind not merely as a soldier, but as a warrior who has faced one of Azeroth’s greatest threats and emerged victorious.”
He looked around the room, then continued. “The battle against Onyxia was no small feat. The beast had woven her deception deep into the heart of our kingdom, and it took the strength of our greatest heroes to bring her down. Among them, you stood—not as a mere soldier, but as a true paladin of the Light. You fought with valor, wielding both blade and faith in equal measure. You healed the wounded, shielded your allies, and struck against the enemy with righteous fury.”
310
One of the officers, a seasoned knight, nodded. “Many of us here have heard the accounts of your deeds. Those who stood beside you speak not only of your skill in battle, but of your courage, your unwavering duty, and your ability to stand strong in the face of darkness.”
I felt my breath catch. I had fought for my comrades, for the Alliance, for the Light—but never for recognition. And yet, here I stood, surrounded by those who had walked this path before me, offering their silent approval.
Katherine the Pure stepped forward now, her piercing gaze meeting mine. “The Light shines upon those who walk its path with an honest heart, Paladin Tune. You have proven yourself time and again—not only through your blade, but through your faith, your selflessness, and your devotion to those in need.”
She turned to the commander, giving him a single nod.
He reached for something upon the table—a sergeant’s insignia, wrought in polished silver. Holding it before me, he spoke once more.
“For your valor, your dedication, and your service to the kingdom, it is my honor to grant you the rank of Sergeant of the Stormwind Army.”
A rush of emotions surged through me—pride, humility, disbelief. I had never sought rank or title, only to do what was right. Yet here, in this moment, I realized that my path was no longer just my own. I carried the weight of those who had fallen, the hopes of those who still fought, and the duty of the Light itself.
I dropped to one knee, bowing my head as the insignia was placed upon my tabard.
Katherine the Pure stepped closer, resting a hand upon my shoulder. “You earned this, Paladin.”
I lifted my gaze, meeting hers, and nodded. “I will not fail you. I will not fail the Light.”
The room stirred with murmurs of approval, and as I rose to my feet, I felt not the weight of duty upon me, but the strength of purpose.
As I stepped out of the room, the weight of what had just happened still settling upon me, I turned to Adele. She stood there waiting, Marcus resting in her arms, his tiny fingers curled around the fabric of her dress. She took one look at me, at the light in my eyes, and her expression softened with curiosity.
“What happened?” she asked.
I exhaled, as if saying the words aloud would make them real. “I… I just got promoted. Sergeant. For the fight against Onyxia.”
Adele’s eyes widened, shimmering with emotion. “By the Light,” she whispered in awe, shifting Marcus in her arms as she tried to embrace me. I held her close, my hand resting gently over hers, feeling the warmth of our son between us.
For a long moment, we simply stood there, heads bowed together as we had done in prayer days before.
311
“Blessed Light,” Adele murmured, her voice soft with reverence. “You have guided our steps, through loss and war, through despair and hope. And now, You have given us more than we could have ever asked for.”
I nodded, closing my eyes. “We are together. We are safe. And we are home.”
We lingered in that quiet moment, offering silent thanks, before stepping out into the streets of Stormwind, leaving the barracks behind.
The familiar sights and sounds of the Old Town greeted us—the scent of fresh bread from a nearby bakery, the clang of a blacksmith’s hammer against steel, the murmur of merchants and soldiers sharing stories of battles won and lost. But today, I was not just another soldier passing through. Today, I had a purpose beyond duty.
I glanced at Adele, then at Marcus, and made my decision.
“Right now,” I said, “we find ourselves a home.”
We wandered through the narrow streets, asking here and there for a free apartment, but none seemed available. Just as we were beginning to wonder where to go next, a gruff voice called out.
“A paladin? One of Stormwind’s heroes, looking for a home? Go no further.”
A man, perhaps in his late fifties, with a thick beard and a knowing smile, beckoned us toward him. “Come, come with me,” he said, waving us along as he led us through a sturdy wooden door and up a flight of creaking stairs.
At the top, he stopped and pushed open another door. “Please, look around,” he said, stepping aside. “It’s not much, but it’s warm and dry. And it can be yours. Fit for a young sergeant and his family. What say you?”
We stepped inside.
The apartment was modest but welcoming. The walls were made of smooth stone, sturdy enough to endure the years. A small hearth sat in the corner, with a simple iron pot hanging above it, waiting to bring warmth to a home-cooked meal. A wooden table with two chairs stood near a single window, where the soft glow of the evening sun spilled onto the worn floorboards.
To the side, a bed large enough for two was tucked against the far wall, with a sturdy chest at its foot for belongings. Beside it, a smaller cot had been placed near the hearth— just the right size for Marcus. A bookshelf, half-filled with old tomes, leaned slightly against the wall, its shelves worn but strong.
The scent of aged wood and faint traces of candle wax lingered in the air, and through the window, I could hear the distant hum of Stormwind’s bustling streets. It was simple. It was small.
It was perfect.
I turned to Adele, watching as her fingers brushed over the wooden table, as she glanced at the cot meant for Marcus. She met my gaze, and in her eyes, I saw her answer before she even spoke.
“This is home,” she whispered.
312
I turned back to the man, standing expectantly in the doorway.
“What say you, Sergeant?” he asked again, grinning.
I let out a breath I hadn’t realized I was holding.
“We’ll take it.”
As the door closed behind the kind old man who had offered us the apartment, I let out a slow breath, taking it all in. The small wooden table where we would share meals, the hearth where a warm fire would keep us safe from the cold, the cot where Marcus would rest his tiny head… This was no grand castle, no knight’s estate, but it was ours.
Adele stood by the window, her fingers tracing the worn wooden frame, her eyes lost in thought. The sunlight filtering through cast a golden glow upon her face, and in that moment, I saw something — peace.
I walked over and stood beside her, gazing out at the city below. Stormwind’s rooftops stretched into the horizon, chimneys puffing gentle trails of smoke, the sounds of a city alive drifting up from the streets. This place, this home, was a new beginning.
“We made it,” I murmured.
Adele turned to me, her hand slipping into mine. “Yes,” she whispered. “We did.”
The past had nearly broken us—fire, war, loss. Yet here we stood, together, with our son in our arms and a future ahead of us. By the Light, we were blessed.
Determined to take the next step in our new life, I led Adele toward the Mage Quarter. The Light had given us this chance, and I would not waste it. She had followed me across the world, through exile and war, and now it was my turn to help her find her place.
The alchemist’s shop stood tucked away near the grand spire of the Mage Tower, its wooden sign swinging gently in the breeze. The scent of dried herbs and strange potions f illed the air, the glow of arcane crystals casting eerie reflections upon the walls. As we stepped inside, Adele’s eyes lit up with curiosity, moving over the rows of flasks and books, eager to take it all in.
And then I saw him.
Standing near the back of the shop, inspecting a vial of dark liquid, was the warlock from the battle against Onyxia. A cold shiver ran down my spine.
His presence alone unsettled me—the aura of shadow that clung to him, the way he seemed to exist in the space between light and darkness. Yet, for all my unease, he appeared… normal. No sinister whispers, no vile incantations. Just a man, calmly conducting business in an alchemist’s shop.
He looked up and met my gaze. A smirk tugged at his lips.
“Paladin.” His voice was smooth, measured, almost amused. “Good to see you. What brings you here?”
313
I hesitated, still trying to grasp how someone who wielded dark magic could speak so casually, as though we were old acquaintances. My instincts told me to be wary, yet this man had fought beside me against Onyxia—had stood his ground when the world burned around us.
Before I could answer, I caught sight of Adele, already moving through the shop, her hands brushing over the dried herbs, her gaze filled with wonder.
That was all the reminder I needed.
“My fiancée,” I said at last, turning back to him. “She would like to become an alchemist’s apprentice. Would there be a place for her here?”
The warlock raised a brow, intrigued. “An apprentice, you say? Does she have any experience?”
“Not yet,” I admitted. “She mainly gathered herbs and plants before. She’s eager to learn.”
The warlock chuckled, folding his arms. “We can always use someone to help with that.” He turned toward the counter, where a female night elf was carefully measuring out ingredients. “What say you, Lilyssia Nightbreeze?”
The night elf glanced up, her violet eyes studying Adele briefly before nodding. “She can start tomorrow.”
“Excellent,” the warlock said. He turned back to me, and his smirk deepened. “It’s set then.”
But then, before I could turn to leave, his expression grew more deliberate. He stepped closer, lowering his voice slightly.
“Paladin,” he said, “when you bring your fiancée here tomorrow, why don’t you meet me at the Basement of the Slaughtered Lamb? I was told you are eager to learn.” His eyes glimmered with something unreadable. “Be there. You might learn a few things. And ask for Sarod.”
I felt the unease return, but I held my ground. The Slaughtered Lamb. A known gathering place for warlocks, nestled in the depths of Stormwind’s Old Town. It was the last place anyone would expect to find a paladin.
Yet… curiosity stirred within me. This man had fought against darkness before. Could he truly be trusted? And more importantly—what could he possibly have to teach me?
I exhaled slowly. “Will do.”
His grin widened slightly. “Good.”
With Adele’s future as an alchemist secured, we stepped back into the bustling streets. The city stretched before us, alive and vibrant, and I decided—tonight was not for battle, nor for warlocks and shadowy meetings.
Tonight was for her.
Taking Adele’s hand, I led her through the winding streets of Stormwind, showing her every corner of this grand city. We walked past the towering Cathedral of Light, its bells 314
ringing in the evening air. We crossed the Trade District, where merchants still haggled beneath lantern-lit stalls. We paused by the canals, where the water reflected the golden glow of the setting sun.
“This city,” I told her, watching as she took it all in, “is ours now. Our home.”
She smiled, gripping my hand tighter. “And together, we will make a life here.”
I looked at her, at Marcus sleeping peacefully in her arms, and knew—with every fiber of my being—that she was right.
The next morning, as promised, I took Adele to the alchemist’s shop. The streets of Stormwind were already alive with activity, merchants calling out their wares, guards marching in formation, and the scent of fresh bread drifting from the bakeries. Yet, despite the bustling city, my thoughts lingered on what awaited me at the Slaughtered Lamb.
As I turned to leave, Lilyssia Nightbreeze, the night elf from yesterday, called out.
“Paladin, a word, please.”
I stopped and faced her. “Yes?”
She glanced at Adele, then back at me, her voice measured but intrigued. “Your f iancée will be assisting me in gathering plants and herbs from nearby. But you, in your travels to distant lands, may come across rarer herbs—ones not found so easily. If you learn how to handle them properly and bring them to me in good condition, I would pay you handsomely for your efforts.”
I considered her words. Rare herbs? During my time in the army, I had ridden through plaguelands, jungles, and mountains, but never paid much attention to the plants that grew there. Yet, if I could be of help to Adele’s new craft while earning coin along the way, it seemed a worthwhile pursuit.
Lilyssia continued, a small smirk on her lips. “Your fiancée can teach you how to handle precious things like plants and herbs. If you’re willing to learn.”
I glanced at Adele, who was already smiling at the idea.
“Sure,” I said with a nod. “I’ll keep an eye out.”
Adele squeezed my hand. “You won’t regret it,” she said softly.
With that settled, I took my leave, making my way toward the Slaughtered Lamb. The thought of meeting that warlock, Sarod, still unsettled me, but if there was one thing I had learned from battle, it was this—to understand your enemy, you must be willing to stand in the shadows.
As I descended into the Basement of the Slaughtered Lamb, a chill ran down my spine. The air in this place was thick—heavy with dark magic and a palpable tension. The walls seemed to absorb sound, leaving an eerie stillness that pressed against my ears. The flickering light of a few dim torches cast long shadows across the room, and in the far corner, a heavy iron door stood slightly ajar, revealing a darker hallway leading deeper into the establishment.
315
The smell of sulfur and something metallic lingered in the air, intermingling with the faint scent of old parchment and burning incense. There were low murmurings in the room—other warlocks, gathered in small circles, each discussing their own arcane matters or inspecting the arcane sigils they had recently drawn. Their eyes, though seemingly focused on their work, flickered toward me now and then, their gazes cold and calculating.
In the center of the room, the warlocks’ summoned demons—imposing figures of shadow, flame, and fel energy—stood guard or circled around their masters. The Felguard—a towering demon with red eyes and jagged horns—loomed by one of the dark alcoves. A Imp fluttered about, its small, mischievous form darting between patrons, its glowing eyes always looking for trouble. A faint crackle of arcane energy crackled in the air as the warlocks murmured incantations. The energy in the room was oppressive, filled with fire, brimstone, and the feeling that danger was always just a breath away.
This was not a place of light, of peace, or of healing. This was a place of power, where the very fabric of reality was manipulated and twisted. And I felt it with every step, the weight of it pressing down on me, reminding me of the dangers that came with dealing in such dark forces.
Then, across the room, I saw him—Sarod. His black robe shimmered with an ethereal quality, the runes embroidered along its hem glowing faintly as if charged by the energy of the room itself. His face was calm, but his eyes—dark and penetrating—tracked my every movement.
“Paladin, welcome.” His voice was smooth, but with an underlying edge.
I stepped forward, cautious but resolute. His presence, like the other warlocks, unsettled me, but my desire to understand the true nature of this power—and perhaps how to combat it—drove me to continue.
“You asked me here. What do you want me to learn?”
Sarod regarded me silently for a moment before speaking again.
“Well, paladin,” he began, his tone somewhat amused, “When we first met, I noticed your face. You were confused. And I bet it’s because you have the idea that those who handle dark magic eventually fall victim to it. Am I right?”
I didn’t hesitate. “I see it happen far too often.”
Sarod nodded, his lips curling into a wry smile. “I understand your hesitation. But let me tell you something—we are not necromancers. We don’t raise the dead, nor do we call upon the spirits of the fallen. What we do is different.”
I raised an eyebrow, still skeptical. “Different? In what way?”
He began to pace slowly, as if weighing his words. “Let me explain the warlock—the true nature of our craft. You see, paladin, our magic is a force of control. We bend the very elements of fire, shadow, and chaos to our will. We draw power from the Nether, from realms beyond our own. And our demons—the creatures you see—are not mindless monsters. They are bound servants, summoned from their planes and controlled by the warlock’s will.”
316
He paused, turning to face me fully. “We do not simply call upon darkness. We command it.”
I narrowed my eyes, unsure if I could believe him, but the warlock continued, sensing my uncertainty.
“Our spells come from three main schools of magic: destruction, affliction, and demonology. Destruction spells are the most common—fireballs, shadow bolts, and chaotic energies that devastate our enemies. Affliction, on the other hand, focuses on weakening and tormenting our foes, often through curses or diseases. We drain their life, corrode their spirit.” He made a slight gesture with his hands, and for a brief moment, I felt the air grow colder.
“And then there is Demonology,” he continued, his voice growing darker. “This is where most of the power lies. It is the art of summoning and binding demons to our will. We can summon Imps, Felguards, Voidwalkers, and even the terrifying Succubus, each with its own unique powers, each serving its master in different ways.”
I remembered the Felguard from earlier. A chilling creature, built for battle and towering over most men. It was clear that warlocks could harness immense strength through their connection to the demonic.
“We do not simply summon these creatures for power,” Sarod continued. “We bind them. We control them, bending their wills through a blood pact, an agreement that keeps them from turning on us. They are tools, just as our spells are.”
I stared at him, trying to digest his words. “So, you control these demons?”
Sarod’s lips curled into a smile. “Yes, and through them, we can do far more than a mere warrior could dream. We control the battlefield, we wield the elements, and we strike fear into our enemies’ hearts. But it takes great discipline and mastery to do so. One wrong move, and the demon could turn on you. But when you command them well… there are no limits.”
A strange feeling settled in my chest. It was not fear alone, but a mixture of awe and unease. The power they wielded was terrifying, yet I had to admit, there was a certain strength in their resolve.
“Paladin,” Sarod said, breaking my thoughts. “I can teach you how to handle these forces if you truly wish to learn. It will not be easy. But I see potential in you.”
Before I could respond, he continued, “You are not the first paladin to seek knowledge of the dark arts. I have seen many of your kind—those who wish to understand before they judge. If you want to learn, come back to me. The path is not for everyone.”
He looked at me, his gaze intense. “But you, Paladin… you might be different.”
I stood there in the dimly lit basement, surrounded by the crackling power of the warlocks and their demons, contemplating what Sarod had said. This wasn’t just about understanding their magic—it was about confronting a part of the world that I had always rejected.
317
Sarod had given me an invitation into a world I never thought I’d consider. It was dangerous, yes. But perhaps it was the only way to truly understand what I was up against.
“I will be sure to return,” I said, my voice steady despite the weight of my decision. “And learn as much as I can—even if only to understand how to fight it. In case, one day, I have to face a warlock who is not as… friendly as you.”
Sarod chuckled, his smirk never fading. “A wise choice, Paladin. Knowledge is a weapon just as much as your sword. I will be here when you are ready.”
I gave him a final nod before turning away, my boots echoing against the stone steps as I ascended from the darkness of the Slaughtered Lamb back into the light of Stormwind’s streets. The morning air felt crisp against my skin, a stark contrast to the heavy, arcane presence I had left behind. The sky was clear, and the city was alive with the sound of merchants, smiths, and the ever-present clang of armor from passing soldiers.
But I had no time to dwell on what I had just learned.
I was a sergeant now.
Stormwind had granted me new purpose, new rank, new duty. Whatever awaited me next, I would face it as I always had—head held high, sword in hand, and the Light guiding my path.
It was time to report for duty.
The next few months passed in a blur of duty and peace. As a sergeant, my responsibilities grew, and with them, so did the number of men under my command. We patrolled the lands surrounding Stormwind—Elwynn Forest, Westfall, Duskwood, and the Redridge Mountains, ensuring the safety of travelers, farmers, and villages.
Though dangers still lurked in the shadows—bandits, gnolls, restless undead in Duskwood—nothing felt beyond our reach. We were the sword and shield of Stormwind, and the Light guided our every step.
Within the city, celebrations filled the streets. Word had spread of the defeat of Ragnaros, the Fire Lord, deep within the molten core of Blackrock Mountain. Not long after, Nefarian, the Black Dragon, was slain within his fortress, bringing an end to his twisted experiments and his reign of terror. Bards sang of these victories, and banners of the Alliance hung proudly from every tower.
Life was perfect, and we made the most of it.
Adele thrived in her work as an apprentice alchemist, and Marcus was growing stronger with each passing day. Every evening, I would return home, my armor worn from patrol, but my heart full. We shared quiet meals, laughter, and the peace we had fought so hard to earn.
For the first time in years, I allowed myself to believe in happiness.
But peace, as I had learned, never lasts forever.
318
Recently, troubling reports began to circulate—troll activity to the south. I hadn’t thought much of the jungle trolls in years, but I never forgot what their kind had done to my people in Lordaeron. Now, it seemed they were gathering in strength once more. Word spread quickly through the barracks—a joint force was being prepared to raid Zul’Gurub, much like the battle against Onyxia.
Before I could even find out if I would be part of the operation, fate took an unexpected turn.
At the entrance of the Cathedral of Light, I found myself face to face with an unfamiliar figure—an armored woman standing with the grace and confidence of one who had seen war but not been broken by it. Her tabard bore the emblem of a silver hand wreathed in gold—a symbol I recognized immediately, though altered from what it once was.
“Sergeant, can we have a word?” she asked, her tone formal but respectful.
I stopped, studying her for a moment. “Sure. About what?”
“I am Officer Pureheart,” she said. “I serve with the Argent Dawn—a resistance force f ighting against the undead in Lordaeron.”
Lordaeron. The name struck me harder than I expected. It had been a long time since I had last received proper news of my homeland—what little I had heard was grim. My heart pounded as I listened.
“We are recruiting agents,” she continued, “from all backgrounds—paladins, warriors, spellcasters. From both the Alliance and the Horde.”
I frowned. “The Alliance and Horde, fighting side by side? They don’t fight each other?”
She shook her head. “Not in this war. The Scourge is a greater threat than any faction conflict. If we do not stand together, we will all fall.”
I took a deep breath. “What’s the situation in Lordaeron?”
Pureheart’s expression darkened. “I won’t lie to you, Sergeant. The lands you remember are gone. Stratholme still burns. Andorhal is in ruins. The cities that once thrived are now crawling with the dead. The very air is tainted with the plague. The land itself refuses to heal.”
She continued, her voice heavy with grim truth. “The Argent Dawn holds outposts scattered throughout the Western and Eastern Plaguelands. Our main strongholds are Light’s Hope Chapel in the east and Chillwind Camp in the west. From these footholds, we launch raids into Scourge territory, cut down their necromancers, and sabotage their operations.”
Her tone turned bitter. “But we are not the only human resistance in Lordaeron. The Scarlet Crusade still operates in these lands.”
I inhaled sharply. I had heard whispers of them before but knew little of what they had become. “The Scarlet Crusade? I thought they were part of the fight against the undead.”
319
She shook her head. “Once, maybe. But not anymore. The Scarlet Crusade was formed by those who could not let go of their hatred—those who lost everything and sought revenge, not justice. They claim to fight the undead, but their fanaticism has twisted them. They see enemies everywhere—not just the undead, but the Argent Dawn, the Horde, and even those within their own ranks. Anyone they suspect of being infected, or even of being a sympathizer, is put to the sword.”
I clenched my fists. These were my lands, my people. What remained of Lordaeron was nothing but a shattered battlefield, torn between the dead and the zealots who had lost their way.
Pureheart met my gaze. “So, what say you, Paladin? Will you join us?”
For a moment, I couldn’t speak. The thought of returning to fight for my home, to strike back at the Scourge, was almost too good to refuse.
But then, reality sank in.
It would mean long campaigns in the Plaguelands, weeks—months—away from Adele and Marcus. I had spent years fighting for survival, for my duty, for the Light. Now, for the first time, I had something to lose.
“I…” I hesitated. “I need time. I have to speak with my fiancée first.”
Pureheart nodded in understanding. “Of course. This is not a choice to make lightly. But know this, Sergeant—we need warriors like you. If you choose to stand with us, report to Chillwind Camp. We will be waiting.”
I watched as she turned and disappeared into the streets of Stormwind, her silver tabard blending into the bustling crowd.
The Plaguelands called to me.
But first, I had to talk to Adele.
That night, after Marcus had fallen asleep and the city’s streets had grown quiet, I sat with Adele in our small home and told her everything.
She listened in silence, her fingers lightly tracing patterns on the wooden table, her expression unreadable. When I finished, she exhaled slowly.
“Do you think it’s possible?” she asked, her voice quiet. “To free our lands?”
I wished I could give her an easy answer. I wanted to tell her that yes, one day, we would walk the streets of Lordaeron again, free from the shadow of the Scourge. But I had seen too much to cling to blind hope.
“I don’t know,” I admitted. “But it seems they are really trying. It’s not just paladins. There are warriors, mages, priests, even rogues—heroes of every kind. And more than that, both the Alliance and the Horde fight side by side. That should tell you how dire things are. The undead don’t care for banners, and in the end, neither do the Argent Dawn.”
A heavy silence fell over us as we sat in quiet reflection, the weight of the decision settling upon our shoulders. The past was not easily forgotten—the loss, the pain, the 320
suffering. We had found peace in Stormwind, built a new life, but could we truly turn away from our homeland?
Adele reached across the table, taking my hand in hers. When I met her gaze, I saw not hesitation, but conviction.
“Tune,” she said softly, “if there is even a small chance that we can free our lands from the Scourge… then we have to try.”
I squeezed her hand in return, and in that moment, no more words were needed. We both understood what was being asked of us. We knew the sacrifices we would have to make, the dangers I would face, the long months apart.
But we could not turn our backs on our home.
“If that’s where the fight needs me,” I said at last, “then that’s where I should go.”
The next day, I met with my senior paladins—Katherine the Pure, my mentor, and even Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker himself, the Highlord of the Order of the Silver Hand in Stormwind.
They listened as I explained my decision, and when I finished, none of them tried to dissuade me.
“You follow a noble path,” Katherine told me. “The Argent Dawn fights a battle that we cannot ignore. If this is where the Light calls you, then go with our blessing.”
Lord Grayson studied me carefully, then gave a slow nod. “Many of our finest have joined their cause. It is a war that must be fought, and I can think of no better soldier to stand on the front lines. Make us proud, Sergeant.”
With the approval of my superiors, there was only one step left.
A few days later, I stood before my commanding officer, my request for transfer in hand. He took the parchment, reading it in silence before setting it aside. When he looked up at me, there was a flicker of something rare in his expression—pride.
“You will be missed, Tune,” he said at last. “Your men speak highly of you. They say it’s an honor to serve under your patrols.” He gave a small chuckle. “Not often I hear that from this lot.”
I straightened my stance. “Thank you, sir.”
He nodded. “I know you will make the Stormwind Army proud with your deeds in Lordaeron. May the Light be with you, Sergeant Tune.”
“And with you, sir.”
And so, a few days later, I found myself standing aboard a ship bound for Southshore, watching as the familiar towers of Stormwind faded into the distance. The winds were strong, carrying us swiftly across the sea, toward the place I had once called home.
The first time I had sailed these waters, I had been running—fleeing the plague, the fall of my city, the death of everything I had known.
But this time… I was not running.
This time, I was going back.
321
Back to face what had taken my homeland.
Back to fight.
The air in the Western Plaguelands was thick—not just with the stench of rot and decay, but with something deeper, something heavier. The weight of the past. This land had once been home. Now, it was a battlefield, a graveyard, a place where the Light and darkness waged an endless war.
As I stepped off the ship and made my way to Chillwind Camp, I saw the Argent Dawn banner fluttering in the wind, a beacon of defiance against the horrors that surrounded us. The camp was small but well-defended—makeshift barricades, tents reinforced with holy symbols, and soldiers of both the Alliance and the Horde working side by side. The sight was still strange to me. I had fought orcs, trolls, and undead horrors alike, yet here, warriors from every corner of Azeroth stood together.
I approached Commander Ashlam Valorfist, a veteran paladin clad in worn but well kept armor, the sigil of the Silver Hand still etched into his shoulder plate. As I saluted, he studied me with an expression that suggested he already knew who I was.
“Sergeant Tune, reporting for duty, sir.”
The commander nodded. “We get reports from those that come to us, Paladin, so we know how to put everyone to good use.” His tone was gruff but not unkind. “You were a paladin of the Silver Hand here in Lordaeron, so I assume you know these lands well, correct?”
“Yes, sir. That’s correct.”
His gaze sharpened. “Good. Then I already have a mission for you. But you won’t be going alone. No one does.”
He gestured for me to follow. “Come, I’ll introduce you.”
We walked through the camp toward a shaded area near a supply wagon. As we approached, two figures stood waiting—both clad in armor that bore no kingdom’s crest, their very presence unsettling.
Forsaken.
They were the first I had seen up close. Though they were undead in form—skeletal features, skin stretched too thin, hollowed eyes that still burned with intelligence— they were not like the Scourge. They stood with purpose, not mindless hunger.
“Sergeant,” Valorfist said, gesturing to them. “Meet your companions for this mission.”
The first was a Forsaken warrior, clad in blackened plate armor, his gauntlets stained from years of battle. His eyes glowed faintly yellow, his jaw partially exposed where flesh had withered away. A greatsword rested on his back, its hilt worn but well maintained.
322
“This is Roderic. He served as a knight of Lordaeron in life. In death… well, he still f ights.”
The warrior gave a slow nod, his voice raspy but strong. “Still fight, still bleed—just not as much.”
The second figure stepped forward—a Forsaken priest clad in dark robes, a staff adorned with an eerie green crystal in his bony hands. His hood was drawn back just enough to reveal the skeletal remains of his face, his empty eye sockets filled with an unsettling shadowy glow.
“And this is Sister Elara, once a priestess of Lordaeron’s cathedral,” Valorfist said, his voice measured. “She has… changed since then, but she remains devoted to the cause.”
Elara inclined her head. “Devoted to the fight against the Scourge, if not entirely to the Light.”
I swallowed hard, studying them. They were once of Lordaeron, just as I was. They had once been knights and priests, walking the same streets, kneeling in the same cathedrals, swearing the same oaths.
And now? Now they were… this.
I couldn’t imagine what it must feel like for them—to return to their homeland as the very thing they once fought against. To see the ruins of Lordaeron not as a soldier of the living, but as one of the dead.
But they still fought. That, at least, meant something.
I took a slow breath and stepped forward, offering my hand. “Sergeant Paladin Tune. I will keep you safe.”
A slow grin spread across Roderic’s decayed face, and Elara let out a dry chuckle.
“Or maybe, Paladin, we will keep you safe.”
And so, the mission began.
We returned to Commander Ashlam Valorfist, standing at attention as I spoke.
“We’re ready, sir.”
He gave a sharp nod, his expression grim.
“Very well. Here is your mission. With Andorhal’s western and northern roads into the city well fortified, I’m looking to strike at it from the less defended eastern road. The Scourge relies on the buffer of undead that infest Sorrow Hill as a first line of defense. If we are to advance on Andorhal, we will need to do it through Sorrow Hill.”
His gaze hardened as he continued.
“Your first assignment will be to clear the way. Thin out the skeletons and ghouls that haunt the area and report back when the task is done. But be prepared, Paladin—dig 323
deep. The fight ahead of us will not be easy. As we rally our forces here, you will be part of our first strike against the Scourge.”
He exhaled, eyes sweeping across our group. “Your mission in Sorrow Hill will begin our path to victory. Now go!”
With that, we left Chillwind Camp, marching toward Sorrow Hill in silence. The further we traveled, the worse the land became. The air grew thick with the scent of rot and damp earth. A sickly mist clung to the ground, creeping between the gravestones like a living thing.
I had seen undead before. I had fought them. But this time… I had two of them at my side.
I stole a glance at Roderic and Elara. The warrior marched ahead, silent but purposeful, his massive sword resting against his back. The priest walked behind, her skeletal fingers gripping her staff, the green gemstone at its head pulsing faintly with unholy power.
Could they feel it? The weight of what had been taken from us?
Before I could ask, Roderic broke into a sprint.
“Enough waiting—let’s get to work!” he growled, drawing his sword.
With no hesitation, he charged straight into the undead-infested graveyard, his battle cry echoing through the mist.
“Light preserve me…” I muttered, gripping my mace.
“Better keep up, Paladin,” Elara said, already beginning her spellwork. “Wouldn’t want us to do all the work, now would you?”
With that, the battle began.
Roderic reached the first group of undead—three skeletal warriors, still clad in the rusted remnants of armor, their broken blades raised as they rushed to meet him.
He swung his greatsword in a wide arc, shattering the nearest skeleton’s ribcage with a sickening crunch. Another lunged at him, only to be caught mid-strike—Roderic slammed his boot into its chest, sending it toppling back into the dirt.
A third skeleton raised its sword, aiming for his exposed back.
“No, you don’t.”
Elara raised a single hand, and with a whispered incantation, shadowy tendrils lashed out from her fingertips. They wrapped around the skeleton’s bones, crushing them like brittle twigs, the dark magic draining what little unnatural life remained. The creature collapsed into dust.
More undead rose from their graves, clawing their way from the dirt, their empty sockets glowing with eerie malice.
I stepped forward, raising my hand, calling upon the Holy Light. A golden glow radiated from my palm, and with a single word of power—
“Consecrate!”
324
The earth beneath us burned with divine energy, golden fire searing the undead where they stood. The ghouls shrieked, their rotting flesh blackening as the Light consumed them.
A hulking abomination of bones and sinew lumbered toward Roderic. He braced himself, but before it could strike, I charged forward, shield raised, slamming into its rotting mass with all my strength.
The creature stumbled. I took my chance—raising my mace high, I brought it crashing down on the abomination’s skull, the force splintering bone and sending the beast toppling to the ground.
“Not bad, Paladin,” Roderic grunted, driving his blade through another foe.
Elara let out a low chuckle. “You’re not just for healing, after all.”
The fight continued, steel clashing against bone, holy magic clashing against necrotic sorcery. The Light surged through me, filling me with purpose, with righteousness, with fury.
By the time the last skeleton crumbled to dust, the graveyard was silent once more.
I wiped the sweat from my brow, exhaling slowly.
“That should do it,” I said.
Roderic cracked his neck. “A good start.”
Elara nodded, but her expression darkened. “The Scourge will reclaim this ground by nightfall if we don’t keep pushing. Andorhal is close.”
“We can’t go into Andorhal alone,” I said, surveying the ruined city from a distance. Even with the undead thinned out at Sorrow Hill, charging in with just the three of us was suicide. “We need to report back to Commander Valorfist.”
Roderic wiped his sword clean, tossing aside a shattered skull with his boot. “A shame. I was just starting to have fun.”
Elara sighed, adjusting her staff. “Back to the camp, then.”
With that, we left the graveyard behind, making our way through the blighted land back to Chillwind Camp.
Commander Valorfist was waiting for us as we arrived, standing near a makeshift war map spread across a wooden table. The moment he saw us approach, he nodded.
“Mission complete, sir,” I reported. “Sorrow Hill has been cleared.”
“Good work, Sergeant,” he said. “Your squad did well.”
I expected the next orders to be a push into Andorhal, to join the larger force and begin reclaiming what was left of the city. But instead, Valorfist folded his arms and regarded me carefully.
“Sergeant, I need you for another mission now.”
325
I blinked. “Sir? What about Andorhal?”
“I have other men that can continue there,” he replied. “But I need you for something else.”
I exchanged glances with Roderic and Elara, both of whom remained silent, listening.
“Very well, sir,” I said. “What’s the mission?”
Valorfist exhaled, as if weighing his words. Then, he said a name I hadn’t heard in a long time.
“Tirion.”
I stiffened. That name was legendary among paladins. “Tirion…?” I repeated. “You mean Tirion Fordring? The exiled paladin?”
Valorfist gave a slow nod. “Before your time, yes. But my scouts have reported sightings of an old knight living in exile, far to the east, near the ruins of Mardenholde Keep in Hearthglen.”
I frowned. “You think it’s him?”
The commander sighed. “I’m not sure of anything, Sergeant. That’s why I need you to check it out.”
It was an unexpected mission. I had always heard the stories—how Tirion had been one of the greatest paladins of Lordaeron, only to be exiled and stripped of his title after defending an orc from execution. That had been years ago, long before the fall of our kingdom. If he was still alive, still capable of fighting…
He could be a powerful ally.
Valorfist studied me. “You’re from Lordaeron. A paladin, like him. If anyone can relate to him, it’s you. And you know these lands better than most. That makes you the best choice for this job.”
I nodded slowly. “I will find him, sir. And convince him to join us.”
A small smile tugged at the corner of Valorfist’s lips. “That’s the spirit. Come, I’ll show you the maps my scouts marked.”
Within the hour, I had gathered supplies, a fresh horse, and a map marked with the last known sightings of the exiled paladin.
As I fastened my sword to my belt, preparing to depart, Roderic clapped me on the shoulder.
“You sure you don’t want backup?” he asked.
“I need to do this alone,” I said. “If it really is Tirion… I have to be the one to convince him.”
Elara smirked. “Well, if you die, I get your horse.”
I chuckled. “If I die, you’ll have bigger problems.”
326
With that, I mounted up, turning my steed eastward.
This was not a mission of war. This was a mission of faith.
And if Tirion Fordring still lived…
I would bring him back where he belonged.
The journey had been long and grueling. I had ridden through blighted lands, across broken roads where the dead wandered aimlessly, through forests where the very trees seemed to wither under the curse of undeath. But still, I pressed on.
By the time I reached the area marked on my map, the first light of dawn had begun creeping over the horizon. Fatigue pulled at my limbs, but I ignored it. If this was truly the home of Tirion Fordring, then nothing—not exhaustion, not fear—would stop me from meeting him.
I scouted the area cautiously, my eyes scanning the landscape. The ruins of Hearthglen loomed in the distance, but here, nestled at the edge of the wilderness, I found it—a small hut, modest and unassuming.
And there, standing at its entrance, was a man.
He was older than I expected, his once-golden hair now streaked with silver, his face lined with the weight of years and battles fought. But there was strength in him still—not just in the way he stood, but in his eyes, sharp and clear. This was not a man broken by exile.
I dismounted carefully, keeping my movements slow, respectful. He watched me in silence as I stepped forward.
“I am Tune, Paladin of the Silver Hand,” I said. My voice was steady, but my heart pounded. “Are you Tirion Fordring?”
The man studied me for a long moment before answering.
“Yes, I am Tirion,” he finally said.
I exhaled. So it was true.
“What brings a paladin of the Silver Hand to these lands?” he asked.
I straightened my posture. “I came looking for you, sir.”
Tirion let out a breath, his expression unreadable. “I’m no longer a paladin, son. Whatever you came seeking… you will not find it here.”
I had expected this. If I was going to convince him, I couldn’t rush things. I had to understand him first.
“I know you were exiled, before my time,” I said carefully. “But I don’t know the details. Why don’t you tell me? What happened?”
Tirion’s gaze lingered on me for a moment, then he sighed.
327
“If you really want to know,” he said, gesturing to a log near the fire, “then sit with me. We can chat.”
I did as he asked, resting my mace against my knee as I settled onto the rough wooden seat. The morning breeze carried the scent of damp earth and distant pine, a stark contrast to the horrors of the Plaguelands.
And then, Tirion Fordring told me his story.
“In my younger days, I was a Lordaeron knight, a proud paladin of the Silver Hand,” Tirion began, his voice filled with both pride and sorrow. “I had lands, a family, and a duty to uphold the Light. I fought against the enemies of our kingdom—undead, trolls, the Horde. That was all I knew.”
He gazed into the dying embers of the fire, his face illuminated by the soft glow.
“But one day, I rode out on patrol near Mardenholde Keep, and I found something unexpected—a lone orc, an elder warrior named Eitrigg. He was living in an abandoned tower, wounded but not hostile. At first, I saw him as an enemy, as we were taught to. But when I challenged him, he did not fight to kill. He fought with honor.”
Tirion paused, as if recalling the moment in vivid detail.
“I had been taught that orcs were monsters, beasts with no sense of morality. But this one? He was different. He was once a warrior of the old Horde, but he had turned away from the bloodshed, seeking solitude and redemption. I spared him. More than that… I befriended him.”
I listened intently, saying nothing.
“When my superiors learned of what I had done, I was put on trial for treason,” Tirion continued, his voice bitter. “Despite all I had done for Lordaeron, for the Silver Hand, King Terenas himself presided over my sentencing. They declared me a traitor for aiding an orc and stripped me of my title, my lands, my knighthood. I was exiled.”
I frowned. “That was before my time, but… I remember hearing whispers of a fallen paladin. I never knew the full truth.”
Tirion sighed. “They told me to never wield the Light again. But they could not take it from me.” He lifted his hand, and for a brief moment, I saw it—the Light still burned within him. Dim, perhaps. But never gone.
I swallowed hard. “And now… you live here, alone?”
He nodded. “For years, I lived in exile. I watched as Lordaeron fell to ruin, as the plague consumed our people, as Arthas became the monster he is now. I wanted to f ight, to help, but what was I? A man stripped of title and home? Who would follow an exile?”
I leaned forward. “The Argent Dawn would.”
Tirion’s eyes flickered. I saw it—the spark of something long buried beneath his grief.
328
“They need warriors, paladins,” I continued. “And not just the Silver Hand, not just the Alliance. Both factions, all people, united against the Scourge. That is the fight now, sir. Not orcs against humans. Not kings and politics. The living against the dead.”
Tirion’s hands tightened into fists. “Andorhal. Stratholme. Hearthglen. I failed them all. What makes you think I can save them now?”
“Because,” I said firmly, “you are Tirion Fordring. And your fight isn’t over.”
Silence stretched between us.
I had said my piece. Now, it was his choice to make.
Tirion exhaled slowly, as if the weight of my words pressed upon him. His hands, once resting calmly on his knees, clenched into fists. He turned his gaze to me, his eyes fierce, determined, yet burdened with sorrow.
“You are asking for my redemption,” he said at last. “But before I can fight alongside you, I must right a wrong of my own.”
I remained silent, letting him speak.
“It is about my son, Taelan Fordring.” His voice wavered slightly, but he quickly steadied it. “He was only seven years old when I was exiled. After I was banished, his mother… she told him that I had died. That I had fallen in battle.”
I felt a lump in my throat.
“He was taken to my false grave at the Undercroft,” Tirion continued. “There, he buried the last memory he had of me—his most cherished possession.”
I frowned. “What was it?”
Tirion’s expression softened. “A miniature warhammer—an exact replica of my own. I gave it to him on his seventh birthday.”
I inhaled sharply. A child’s toy, a symbol of his father’s legacy… left behind in a grave that never truly held the dead.
“If you would have me fight again, Paladin,” Tirion said, “then first, you must help me bring my son back to the Light. Recover the hammer from the Undercroft, and return to me.”
I rose to my feet, determined.
“It shall be done.”
With that, I gathered my gear, mounted my horse, and rode toward my new assignment.
The Undercroft was a place of desolation—an old, abandoned burial site south of the ruins of Andorhal. The earth here had been disturbed, graves unearthed by scavengers and the dead alike.
I approached the false grave, kneeling as I dug through the cold, damp soil. My f ingers brushed against something solid, something metallic.
There it was—the hammer.
329
It was small, perfectly crafted to resemble the weapon of a true paladin. Though rusted by time, its symbolism remained intact.
But before I could lift it from the dirt, I heard footsteps—multiple, closing in fast.
I rose to my feet, gripping my mace and shield, just as four dwarves emerged from the shadows. Their armor was mismatched, their weapons crude but well-used.
Scavengers. Grave robbers. Thieves.
They didn’t speak. They didn’t need to. Their hungry eyes and the way their hands tightened around their weapons told me everything.
They wanted the hammer. They wanted everything I carried.
And they wanted my life.
I raised my shield, stepping back into a defensive stance.
The largest of them, a brute with a chipped axe, smirked. “Should’ve stayed in your chapel, Paladin.”
They rushed me all at once.
The first dwarf swung his sword at my chest, but I raised my shield in time, the impact ringing out across the graveyard. With a twist of my arm, I deflected the blow and bashed the shield forward, sending him stumbling back.
Before I could follow up, another charged from the right, slashing with dual daggers, trying to get past my armor.
“The Light shields me!”
I called upon my power, my entire body glowing in golden radiance, and as his daggers struck, they merely scraped harmlessly against the Light’s protection.
Seizing the moment, I twisted my mace in a brutal arc, the head of the weapon colliding with his ribs. The dwarf let out a sharp grunt, dropping one of his daggers as he staggered back.
The third dwarf, wielding a rusted hammer, came from behind—aiming for my head.
I ducked at the last moment, the hammer slamming into my shoulder instead, sending a shock of pain through my arm. Gritting my teeth, I pushed forward, using my shield to slam into his gut, knocking the wind out of him.
“Enough!”
I raised my mace high, calling upon Divine Storm—a surge of holy power erupted from my weapon, blinding light bursting forth, striking all four of them at once.
They screamed, staggering as the Light burned their flesh, forcing them to their knees.
I wasted no time.
330
The first thief—the brute with the axe—was still reeling. I closed the distance, brought my mace down on his knee, and heard the sickening crack of bone.
He collapsed with a howl of pain, clutching his leg, but I was already turning to the next.
The dual-dagger thief—still dazed from the Divine Storm—barely had time to raise his weapon before I slammed my shield into his jaw, sending him sprawling into the dirt.
The third thief tried to run.
I raised my hand, channeling the Light—a golden hammer of energy formed above me, spinning with righteous fury.
I threw it—Hammer of Wrath.
The holy projectile struck him in the back, knocking him face-first into the dirt, his body motionless.
The fourth thief—the one with the rusted hammer—dropped his weapon and scrambled back on his hands. “Please—I surrender!”
I stepped forward, planting my mace under his chin, forcing him to meet my gaze.
“You should have surrendered before raising a blade against the Light.”
He nodded frantically, too terrified to move. I let him live—but only because I had no more time to waste.
I retrieved Taelan’s hammer, wiping the dirt from its surface, and mounted my horse once more.
It was time to return to Tirion.
And with this relic of his past, I would bring him one step closer to reclaiming his future.
The ride back to Tirion’s hut was long, but I pushed my horse as much as I dared, eager to complete my task. The weight of Taelan’s childhood hammer rested in my pack—a small, rusted relic, but one that carried years of meaning.
As I dismounted near the small, quiet home, Tirion was already waiting, standing near the fire. His eyes flickered to the satchel at my side.
“Did you find it?” he asked.
I pulled the miniature warhammer from my pack and handed it to him. Tirion took it in his hands, turning it over, running his fingers across the worn handle. He was silent for a long moment, lost in thought.
“This was his most cherished possession,” he murmured, more to himself than to me. “And he buried it alongside the memory of his father…”
331
I could see the sorrow in his expression, the weight of years spent in exile, knowing his son had grown up believing he was dead.
But I knew this was not the end.
Tirion exhaled, tucking the warhammer into a chest near the fire, then turned back to me.
“But we are not done yet.”
I nodded, waiting for his next words.
“The Order of the Silver Hand was utterly decimated when Uther was slain,” Tirion said, his voice hardening. “And my son… he held out for as long as he could. Pushed to the war-torn hamlet of Northdale, he made his final stand.”
I had heard of Northdale—a ruined settlement in the Eastern Plaguelands, once a place of refuge, now little more than a haunted memory.
Tirion’s hands tightened into fists.
“Were any of the Order left alive, he wondered? Did it even matter?” Tirion’s gaze darkened. “It was in that moment that Taelan threw down the standard of the Silver Hand and renounced all that he had known. His honor was left behind—abandoned upon the blood-soaked ground of Northdale.”
I clenched my jaw, feeling the weight of his words.
“You must travel to Northdale and recover that symbol of lost honor,” Tirion said.
I didn’t hesitate.
“I know the place,” I replied. “It’s just another mission. It shall be done.”
Tirion studied me carefully, then gave a solemn nod.
“My faith will guide you, Paladin. The Light knows no bounds.”
I turned to my horse, adjusted my pack, and set off once more.
It took almost a full day of riding to reach Northdale. The road was long and treacherous, twisting through lands that had long since fallen to darkness.
I didn’t push my steed too hard—the journey was long, and I would need my horse strong and ready for the return trip. But even at a measured pace, I felt the heaviness of the land pressing upon me.
By the time I reached Northdale, the sky had begun to darken, casting long shadows over the broken village ruins. The stench of death clung to the air, and shambling f igures lurked in the distance, their hollow eyes glowing in the dim light.
But I was not here to fight them—not today.
I moved cautiously, my mace at the ready, as I made my way toward the lake in the center of the ruined hamlet.
332
Just as Tirion had said, the banner of the Silver Hand lay at the bottom of the water, half-buried in the muck and silt—forgotten, abandoned.
I waded in, ignoring the chill that seeped through my armor. My fingers wrapped around the fabric—even in its tattered state, it still bore the golden emblem of our Order.
I lifted it high, letting the water drip from its edges, and for a moment, I simply stared at it.
This was a symbol of honor lost.
But it would soon be a symbol of redemption.
I wasted no time. I mounted my horse and rode back to Tirion.
By the time I returned, the moon hung high in the sky. Tirion stood where I had left him, as if he had never moved.
As I dismounted, I pulled the banner from my pack and handed it to him.
Tirion unfurled it slowly, his eyes softening as he ran his fingers over the worn fabric.
“It is as glorious now—” he whispered, “**even in its tattered state—as the day I looked upon it and took my oath of allegiance.”
He clenched the banner tightly, his shoulders rising and falling with a heavy breath.
“His redemption comes…” he murmured, his voice thick with emotion.
Then, after a long pause, he added:
“And perhaps mine with it.”
Tirion’s fingers traced over the tattered Silver Hand banner, lost in thought. The f irelight flickered against his weathered face, the weight of old wounds settling upon his shoulders. His gaze remained fixed on the fabric, but I could tell his mind was elsewhere— lost in the past.
“When Taelan was a child,” he said at last, his voice quieter now, “we would oft visit Caer Darrow on family excursions. We would walk the shores of the island, taking in the beauty of the lake. It was… peaceful.”
I remained silent, letting him speak.
“On our last visit, an artist by the name of Renfray painted a portrait of us, posed along the beachside. My wife, Karandra, stood at my side, and my son, Taelan, was held in my arms. That moment—that single moment—was the last time I felt true peace, true happiness.”
Tirion’s voice faltered for a moment, but when he spoke again, his tone was resolute.
“If that painting still exists, you must find it. Bring it back to me.”
I nodded. “Where do I start?”
333
“Travel to the ruined island of Caer Darrow and find Renfray. See if the painting—or the artist—remains.”
Another journey. Another piece of his past that I would need to recover.
Without hesitation, I gathered my supplies and set off toward Caer Darrow.
The island of Caer Darrow was a place frozen in time—a ruined memory of what once was. Once a thriving town, once a place of peace. But that was long ago. Now, it stood in the shadow of Scholomance, its once-proud fortress corrupted by the foul practices of the necromancers who ruled within.
I rode cautiously along the worn cobblestone paths, the silence pressing in around me. The village was abandoned, its houses empty husks, long since picked clean by scavengers and the horrors lurking in the crypts below.
Then, near the remains of an old wooden shack, I found her.
Renfray.
She sat upon a broken bench, her thin frame wrapped in a tattered shawl, her silvered hair spilling over hunched shoulders. Her hands, aged and worn, held a small brush, moving idly over a canvas that had long since faded. Though she seemed lost in thought, I could tell—she had been expecting me.
I approached carefully. “Are you Renfray?”
She stopped painting, though she did not turn at first. Then, after a long pause, she lifted her gaze to me—sharp, knowing eyes meeting my own.
“I am,” she said, her voice worn with age but steady. “And who are you?”
“I am Sergeant Tune, a paladin of the Silver Hand.” I hesitated only briefly before continuing, “I came on behalf of Tirion Fordring. He sent me here to find something—a painting.”
For the first time, her expression changed—her tired features tightening at the mention of Tirion’s name.
“A painting?” she repeated.
“Yes,” I nodded. “Many years ago, you painted a portrait of Tirion, his wife Karandra, and his son, Taelan, on the shores of this island. It was a family outing, their last before his exile. Tirion remembers that moment as one of his happiest, the last time he felt true peace.”
Renfray’s hands stilled completely.
“He told me it was titled ‘Of Love and Family’,” I continued. “If that painting still exists, he wishes to see it again.”
Renfray let out a slow breath, her hands tightening around her brush. “The painting you seek…” she murmured. “It hung on the wall of my workshop—inside the Order’s barracks—for years.”
My chest tightened. The Order’s barracks… That meant Stratholme.
334
Renfray shook her head. “After Tirion’s trial, I knew I could no longer keep the painting visible. To do so would have been dangerous. The Silver Hand abandoned him—they turned their backs on a good man. To them, he no longer existed.”
She hesitated before continuing. “But I could not bring myself to destroy it. So, I did what I could. I hid it.”
I frowned. “Where?”
Renfray’s eyes locked onto mine.
“Stratholme.”
A cold feeling spread through my chest, but I said nothing.
She continued, “Deep inside the Scarlet Bastion. Search for a painting of our twin moons. Chip away at the paint, and you will uncover my masterwork—’Of Love and Family.'”
The name alone made my stomach tighten.
The city where I was born. The city where I trained as a squire. The city where I once walked with Adele.
The city that Arthas burned.
A simple mission had become a journey into my past—a past that had been reduced to ash and undeath.
I exhaled slowly. I would not go alone.
With renewed urgency, I turned my horse and rode back to Chillwind Camp.
By the time I reached Chillwind Camp, the sun had begun to set behind the ashen hills of the Plaguelands, casting long shadows over the camp. The air was thick with tension, but there was still a sense of purpose among the soldiers and paladins gathered here.
As I approached, Commander Valorfist turned to greet me, his expression hopeful.
“Paladin, what news do you bring?” he asked. “Did you find Tirion?”
I dismounted, standing tall as I replied. “Yes, Commander. He considers redemption, but before he takes up the fight, he seeks redemption for his son. He has asked for my help.”
Valorfist’s expression grew more serious. “What does he require?”
I exhaled. “I have already assisted him with some tasks. But now, he has asked me to recover something from inside Stratholme.”
The commander’s hopeful look faded, replaced by a deep furrow in his brow.
335
“Inside Stratholme?” His tone was measured, but I could hear the concern behind it.
“In the Order’s Barracks, within the Scarlet Bastion,” I clarified.
Valorfist folded his arms, staring at me for a long moment.
“Well, you can’t go alone, that’s for sure,” he said at last.
I nodded. “I was thinking the same.”
The commander sighed, rubbing his chin thoughtfully. “Truth be told, I’ve been wanting to send a team into Stratholme for some time now. Their leader is Saidan Dathrohan, Grand Crusader of the Scarlet Crusade, if we strike him down, will be a major victory for us.”
“I will gladly join the team, Commander,” I said without hesitation.
Valorfist nodded approvingly. “Good, Paladin. Good. But gathering a team fit for such a mission will take time. I hope Tirion is not in a rush—I may require a few days to assemble the rest.”
I gave a firm nod. “Understood, sir.”
His expression softened slightly. “For now, take a rest, Paladin. You’ve earned it.”
As I turned toward my tent, I allowed myself a deep breath. Stratholme. The place where everything changed.
And soon, I would walk its streets again—not as a refugee, not as a victim of its fall—
But as a warrior of the Light.
The days passed in a strange calm, a stillness before the storm.
I spent my time in meditation, kneeling before the flickering flames of the camp’s central firepit, hands clasped in quiet prayer. My thoughts drifted between the past and the present, between duty and purpose.
When I wasn’t reflecting, I was patrolling the roads and watching over the camp. I saw soldiers of both the Alliance and the Horde moving through the camp, speaking in cautious tones, fighting side by side in the field.
It had taken the destruction of my kingdom for this to happen.
The Alliance and Horde—two forces locked in endless war—now stood together against the horrors of the Scourge.
Perhaps… that meant there was hope.
Hope that one day, our people could stand together not just out of necessity, but by choice.
Or was this just another fleeting alliance? Would they turn on each other when the greater enemy was gone?
I had no answers, only questions that lingered in my mind.
336
And so, on the fourth day, I saddled my horse and set off alone—toward a place I had not seen in a long time.
A place where I had almost died.
I rode along winding, ruined roads, through broken fields where war had long since left its mark. The land was different now—choked with decay and silence, the very air thick with the remnants of what had been lost.
It was here that I had collapsed, my wounds deep, my strength failing.
And it was here… that a band of orcs had saved my life.
I dismounted slowly, walking across the uneven ground.
The memories struck me with unexpected force.
I had been raised to see orcs as enemies, as monsters who had invaded our lands.
But here, in my darkest hour, it had been them—a band of wandering warriors, not bound by the Horde, not driven by war—who had spared me. Who had tended my wounds, given me shelter, and left me alive.
And I had never seen them again.
I crouched down, running my gloved hand over the faint markings left in the dirt. Scars of old campfires, places where warriors had once rested, spoken, perhaps even laughed.
What had become of them?
Did they still live?
Would they remember me, if they saw me now?
Or was this just another story, swallowed by the endless turning of time and war?
I closed my eyes, inhaling deeply.
Perhaps I would never know.
But I would never forget.
Standing, I turned my gaze toward the distant horizon, toward the battles still to come.
The past had brought me here. But my path was forward.
Days passed, but I remained patient. Stratholme was not a mission to be rushed. We would only have one chance to strike at its cursed heart, and for that, I needed the right people beside me.
And then, one morning, Commander Valorfist approached me with purpose in his stride.
“Paladin Tune, the time has come.”
337
I straightened immediately, setting down the sharpening stone I had been using on my blade.
“You have a team?” I asked.
He nodded. “The perfect heroes for your mission. Come, I will introduce you.”
I followed him across the camp, past training paladins and gathered warbands, until we reached a quiet corner where four figures stood waiting. The moment I saw them, I knew this was no ordinary group.
Valorfist stepped forward and gestured to each in turn.
First, the warrior.
A towering Orc with scarred green skin stood before me, his presence alone exuding sheer strength. His armor was heavy plate, reinforced with thick rivets and battle-worn edges, built to withstand the heaviest of blows. Strapped to his back was not an axe, but a massive shield, its surface dented and scratched from countless battles.
“This is Gor’mak Bloodcleaver,” Valorfist said. “A veteran of the Horde, a warrior of the old ways. He has stood against the might of armies and held the line where others would fall.”
The orc gave a slow, assessing nod, his yellow eyes narrowing slightly as he studied me.
“Paladin, if you lead well, I will fight well. Let us hope you are worthy.”
I met his gaze without hesitation. “We’ll see soon enough.”
Next, the rogue.
A Forsaken, his features gaunt but alert, his eyes dim yellow embers beneath his hood. He wore dark leathers, light and flexible, a pair of wicked daggers at his belt.
“This is Verrin Duskblade, a rogue of Lordaeron.” Valorfist’s tone was neutral, but I caught the hesitation in his voice.
Another from Lordaeron. Another who had died with it.
Verrin grinned, his exposed teeth gleaming. “Stormwind paladin leading a Forsaken? Oh, the irony.”
I didn’t flinch. “We fight the Scourge today. Old wars can wait.”
He chuckled. “For now, paladin. For now.”
The healer.
A Night Elf priestess, standing tall and graceful, her violet skin illuminated by the soft glow of Elune’s blessing. She wore flowing robes of deep blue and silver, and a golden crescent pendant hung around her neck. A true child of the Goddess.
“This is Sylwen Starwhisper, a priestess of Elune,” Valorfist said.
338
She bowed slightly, her voice calm and serene. “It is an honor to fight the darkness beside you, Paladin Tune. The Light and the Moon shall stand together.”
I inclined my head. “Your wisdom and healing will be invaluable, Priestess.”
She smiled. “And your faith will guide us.”
And finally, the mage.
A small figure, barely reaching my waist, but standing with confidence. A Gnome, her fiery red hair tied in two tight braids, her robe embroidered with arcane runes that shimmered faintly. She grinned up at me, eyes twinkling with excitement.
“And this is Lirra Sparksprocket, a master of the arcane,” Valorfist introduced.
Lirra clapped her hands together, beaming. “Master might be a bit much, but yes, I do know a thing or two about fire! And frost! And explosions! Oh, this is going to be fun.”
I raised an eyebrow. “I assume you can keep your magic under control?”
She winked. “Mostly.”
I sighed, but there was a hint of amusement in it.
Valorfist took a step back, looking over the assembled team with approval.
“Here you have it, Paladin Tune. Heroes from all across Azeroth, joining forces for the greater good. May the Light be with you all.”
I turned to my new companions, letting my gaze rest on each of them in turn. Orc and Human. Night Elf and Forsaken. Alliance and Horde.
We had no banner in common, no shared homeland.
But we had a purpose.
“Thank you all for joining me,” I said, my voice strong. “This mission is personal to me, but more than that—it is a battle against the darkness that has plagued our world for too long.”
Gor’mak grunted. “Then let us fight.”
Verrin smirked. “And win.”
Sylwen gave a solemn nod. “For the Light.”
Lirra rubbed her hands together. “And for a bit of fun!”
I couldn’t help but smile, something I hadn’t done in days.
We spent the next few hours getting to know each other, discussing battle tactics, and sharpening our blades and spells for what was to come.
It brought hope to my heart to see these warriors from both the Horde and the Alliance standing together.
We had different pasts, different beliefs, and different reasons for fighting.
But together, I knew we would get the job done.
339
“Lead the way, Paladin,” they said.
And so I did.
I knew these lands well—too well. Every ruined path, every shadowed road. I had walked them before, in another life, when Lordaeron still stood, when Stratholme was a city of faith and commerce, not ruin and death.
We marched at a steady pace, no need to rush into danger. We avoided densely packed undead patrols—our fight was not here, not yet. The true battle waited within.
Then, at last, we reached the city gates.
The great doors, once symbols of Stratholme’s might, now lay broken and shattered, torn down by the Argent Dawn in their past campaigns against the Scourge. The air smelled of ash, rot, and something else—something old and wrong.
We paused, gathering our strength for what lay ahead. Weapons were checked, spells prepared, armor adjusted.
“Gor’mak, don’t charge too far ahead,” I said, glancing at the Orc warrior as he tightened the straps of his heavy shield.
“And Sylwen, Lirra—stay close, but not too far back.” I turned to the priestess and the gnome mage. “We stay together, and we all make it out alive.”
A murmur of agreement passed through the group, and I was about to turn back toward the city when Sylwen spoke up.
“Tune, a word please.”
I turned to her—only to feel my heart nearly jump from my chest.
She was no longer standing in her usual form.
Instead, a dark, shifting aura of shadow surrounded her, warping the air like a living mist. Her deep violet skin had darkened, her features blurred by the ethereal energy that pulsed around her.
“What is going on?” I asked sharply, taking a step back.
“Calm, Paladin,” she said, her voice still hers—but layered, almost whispering over itself. “**This is only my Shadowform.”
I had heard tales of such things, but I had never seen it up close.
“Shadowform? From a priestess?” I asked, struggling to keep my voice even.
“Yes,” she replied. “We priests can channel the shadow, just as we channel the Light. We strike at our enemies with the very darkness they fear—but we do not succumb to it. The Light and the Shadow are both parts of the same force.”
340
I frowned, my instincts screaming against the idea. A priest of Elune, wielding shadow? To me, priests were symbols of healing, of purity, of faith. But this? This felt wrong.
“How can a priest wield the Shadow?” I asked.
Sylwen smiled knowingly. “The Light is about faith, hope, and healing. It is the force of creation, of protection. But what many forget is that the Shadow is its counterpart. Not evil, not corruption—just another side of the same cosmic force.”
She lifted her hands, and the shadows around her pulsed, dark tendrils flickering like f ire in the wind.
“Shadow magic is about perception and the unseen. It is the magic of fear and doubt—but also truth. We do not simply strike with dark power, we manipulate the mind. A shadow priest’s power is not just in their spells—it is in breaking their enemy’s will before their body.”
I narrowed my eyes. “You break the mind?”
Sylwen nodded. “Shadow magic can do many things. It unravels sanity, warps thoughts, and turns fear into a weapon. But it can also be used with discipline, to weaken the Scourge, to fight fire with fire.”
She gestured toward Stratholme.
“The undead feel no pain, no doubt, no fear.” Her shadowed eyes gleamed. “But I can change that.”
I stared at her, still uneasy. A warrior of the Light, standing beside a wielder of shadow—it felt unnatural.
But then I thought of my mission. Of Tirion, of Stratholme, of the horrors we were about to face.
Would I let my personal discomfort blind me?
Or would I accept that Light and Shadow both had their place?
I took a deep breath, gripping the hilt of my mace.
“Just make sure that power never consumes you, priestess.”
Sylwen gave a slight bow. “I assure you, Paladin, I know my limits.”
As I turned toward the city gates, preparing to move forward, Sylwen spoke once more.
“So, I would ask you something, Paladin,” she said. “If you don’t mind, focus on your healing spells instead of charging into battle with your mace. If you do, then I can unleash the full power of the Shadow upon our enemies.”
I frowned slightly, gripping the handle of my weapon. It wasn’t an unreasonable request. I had fought as both a warrior and a healer before, adjusting to the needs of the battle. But healing alone, relying entirely on others to do the fighting?
It was a shift in my usual role—one that required trust.
341
She tilted her head slightly. “Is that acceptable to you?”
I exhaled and gave her a nod. “Sure. I have done it before, many times.”
Sylwen’s shadowed form pulsed slightly, almost like a living thing. “Thank you, Paladin. Let’s move, then.”
I didn’t say it out loud, but I was curious. Curious to see how she fought, how she wielded the Shadow without succumbing to it.
As we turned back to the group, I addressed them, my voice firm.
“Remember all, we are not here to destroy everything that moves. We go quietly— our mission comes first. We move with purpose, not recklessness.”
A murmur of understanding passed through the group.
I tightened my grip on my shield. “Let’s move.”
And with that, we stepped forward into Stratholme, into the ruins of my past, and into the unknown battle ahead.
Stepping past the gates and into the ruins of Stratholme, I felt my chest tighten. I had known. I had always known what had become of my home. I had heard the stories, seen the reports, even fought the Scourge in these very lands.
But nothing—nothing—could have prepared me for the sight before me.
The city still burned.
Even after all this time, the fires of Arthas’ purge refused to die. The streets, once cobbled and clean, were now cracked and blackened, lined with ashen corpses, their forms twisted in silent agony. The stench of rot and fire choked the air, mixing with the distant, guttural moans of the undead wandering aimlessly, trapped in the remnants of their former lives.
These were my neighbors.
My friends.
People I had once known and spoken to, people whose names I had once remembered. Now, they were mindless husks, puppets of a darkness they had never chosen.
We moved carefully, keeping to the shadows, avoiding combat whenever possible. Every battle, every sound, could draw dozens more to us.
Verrin, the Forsaken rogue, took the lead. I couldn’t see him—but I saw his work.
Here and there, undead stood eerily still, their forms locked in unnatural, upright slumber. They had been silenced before they could even struggle, their deaths swift, efficient, merciful.
I watched as we passed one such motionless figure, its hollow eyes still glowing with the faint remnants of unholy power.
I shuddered.
342
One day, I thought, I must study these rogues—learn how they move unseen, how they kill without a sound. There was power in it. Not the power of the Light, but power nonetheless.
We turned down one road, then another, moving deeper into the scarred city. Every street was a memory—a faint echo of a time before the culling.
And then, I saw it.
My street.
I froze, the breath catching in my throat.
“Hold,” I said, lifting a hand.
The group stopped behind me. Gor’mak shifted slightly, gripping the hilt of his sword. “What is it, Paladin?”
I swallowed hard, my voice quieter now.
“This… is where I lived.”
Silence.
I felt their eyes on me, waiting, watching. I barely heard Sylwen’s voice, soft and cautious.
“You had family here?” she asked.
I shook my head. “No… my mother passed before the plague reached us. And now, I see that as a blessing.”
I took a step forward, then another.
“But Adele’s family was still here.” My voice nearly broke as I spoke her name. “Her home… was just ahead.”
For a moment, no one spoke. No one moved.
Then, Verrin muttered, “Damn.”
I didn’t ask for permission—I just walked forward, toward the house that had once been filled with warmth and laughter, the home where I had spent so many stolen moments with Adele, dreaming of a future that never came to pass.
I reached the door—or rather, what was left of it.
It had been torn away, leaving only a hollow frame. The inside was a ruin—furniture overturned, wooden beams blackened by fire, belongings scattered and broken.
I took a deep breath, stepping over the threshold.
“Please, Light, let it be empty,” I whispered.
And it was.
No bodies. No undead horrors.
Just silence.
343
I moved carefully, stepping over shattered remains of what had once been a home. I knew what I was looking for.
There had been a trinket, something Adele cherished—a small silver locket, engraved with the symbol of Lordaeron, given to her by her father when she was just a child.
If I could find it, I could bring it back to her. A piece of the past, something from before the darkness, before the fall.
I searched through burnt cloth, fallen beams, broken shelves. Behind me, I heard Gor’mak shifting uneasily, the scrape of Lirra’s boot against stone.
“We shouldn’t linger,” Verrin muttered.
“Just a moment,” I replied, voice tight. “I know it’s here.”
And then—
My fingers brushed against cool metal beneath a pile of ash and broken wood.
I lifted it.
The locket was tarnished, dented, but intact.
I turned it over, wiping away the soot with my thumb, revealing the faint golden emblem of Lordaeron on its surface.
It was all that remained of her home.
I closed my fingers around it, clutching it tightly for a moment before tucking it into my belt.
Then, I turned back to the others.
“I’m sorry,” I said. “Let’s move on.”
No one spoke, but they understood.
I had come back to a graveyard, to the remnants of a city that could never be saved.
But at the very least…
I could take one memory back to the living.
We had lingered too long.
The grotesque sounds of the undead echoed through the streets—low, gurgling moans, the clatter of bones on stone, the wet shuffling of rotting flesh. They were coming.
Verrin hissed under his breath. “We need to move.”
“This way!” I said, urgency in my voice.
344
I knew this city. Even after all these years, even in ruin, the layout was burned into my mind. There was a narrow passage ahead, an alleyway with an iron gate we could close behind us. If we reached it in time, we could cut off the horde of undead closing in from behind.
We ran.
Boots pounded against the cracked cobblestone as we dashed through the street, the roar of the undead growing louder behind us. I could hear them now—claws scraping on stone, hollow growls of hunger.
“Faster!” Sylwen urged, her robes billowing as she moved.
We reached the passage. One by one, we pushed through—and as soon as the last of us cleared the threshold, Gor’mak and I slammed the iron gate shut.
CLANG!
The undead threw themselves against the bars, their rotting hands reaching, their faces twisted in silent rage. But the gate held.
“They won’t pass this now,” I said, catching my breath.
Lirra let out a nervous laugh. “Good. But now where?”
“Not far,” I replied. “Just up ahead.”
We followed the alleyway until the path opened into a clearing—and then, I saw it.
My stomach tightened.
There, standing just beyond the broken remains of the city square, was the massive fortress that had once been the home of the Silver Hand in Stratholme.
Once, this had been sacred ground.
It was here that paladins trained under the finest knights of Lordaeron. It was here that hopeful squires took their vows. It was here—in this very square—that I was appointed Paladin of the Silver Hand.
But that was a lifetime ago.
Now, it was a stronghold of the Scarlet Crusade.
The grand building of the Cathedral of the Light still stood, but its walls were lined with barricades, the sigil of the Scarlet Flame replacing the old banners of the Silver Hand. Torchlight flickered beyond the fortifications, and in the square before it, figures patrolled in disciplined formation.
They were not undead.
They were living men and women—knights in gleaming red and gold armor, their tabards bearing the sigil of the Scarlet Crusade.
And they would not let us pass peacefully.
Ironic.
345
We had spent the last hour avoiding combat with the undead—only to now be forced into a fight with the living.
Verrin let out a sharp breath. “Scarlets.”
“Stand ready,” I said, tightening my grip on my mace.
The others readied their weapons.
“As soon as they spot us, they’ll most likely attack.” I scanned their patrol patterns, their rigid formations. “No questions. No hesitation. They believe all outsiders— especially those who fight alongside the Horde—are enemies.”
Gor’mak let out a low chuckle, rolling his shoulders as he unslung his massive shield from his back.
“If they do so, we strike back.”
He grinned.
“That’s what I wanted to hear.”
I had to try.
The Scarlet Crusade were zealots, fanatics—but they were not mindless. Somewhere, buried beneath their madness, they were still men and women of Lordaeron. Paladins, warriors, priests, once sworn to the same Light I still served.
I had to give them a chance.
We moved slowly, carefully stepping toward their patrols, hands hovering near our weapons—but not drawing them.
For a moment, I thought perhaps—just perhaps—they would listen.
But then—
“Heresy!” one of them shouted.
“One patrol!” another yelled. “Attack!”
I barely had time to react before the first of them charged—but in the same instant, Verrin vanished.
One moment, he was at my side. The next—
A flash of steel. A strangled gasp. A body crumpling to the ground.
The Scarlet knight at the front fell with a blade in his throat—his ally beside him dropped the next second, his life extinguished before he could even cry out.
And then, chaos erupted.
The Scarlet Crusade soldiers surged toward us, their armor gleaming red and gold, their voices rising in battle cries of fanatic fury.
But we were ready.
346
Gor’mak roared, slamming his shield into the charging Scarlet Knight, sending him staggering back. Another Crusader swung at him, but the Orc was a fortress, his plate armor absorbing the blow with ease. He turned his shield, smashing its edge into the knight’s helmet with a deafening crack before following up with a brutal swing of his sword, cutting the man down.
“You call this zeal?!” Gor’mak bellowed. “I have seen REAL faith!”
Behind him, Sylwen lifted her hands, and the shadows around her deepened, coiling like living tendrils.
“You worship blindly, without thought, without doubt.” Her voice was low, almost a whisper—yet it echoed in the minds of those before her. “Let me show you the price of such faith.”
The air shimmered—and then a wave of pure darkness surged forward, enveloping three Crusaders at once. They froze mid-charge, their eyes widening in silent horror as the Shadow took hold. Their minds were fracturing, their sanity unraveling. One of them fell to his knees, clutching his head, muttering prayers to the Light that would not answer.
And then—
Frost.
A howling blizzard erupted across the battlefield as Lirra raised her hands, summoning a burst of freezing winds. The charging Scarlet warriors were slowed, their movements hindered by the ice creeping up their armor.
One of them lunged toward her, sword raised—
But she smirked, muttered a word—and in an instant, her form blinked away, reappearing behind him.
“Too slow!” she chirped, launching a massive spike of ice directly into his exposed back.
The man fell, frozen solid.
I stayed back, holding my ground as my allies fought in perfect synergy. I had agreed—I would heal, not fight.
The Light surged through me, warm and powerful, flowing from my hands as I called upon its blessing.
“Gor’mak! Stand firm!” I shouted, casting Beacon of Light on him. A golden radiance surrounded him, healing his wounds even as he took blows meant to break him.
I saw Sylwen stagger, a Scarlet Crusader breaking free from her spell and slashing across her shoulder. I raised my hand—
“Blessing of Protection!”
A barrier of pure Light encased her, the next strike glancing off harmlessly. She gave me a quick nod before turning back to her tormentor, her shadows swallowing him whole.
“Tune, I need healing!” Lirra called, barely dodging an incoming spear.
347
I lifted my hammer toward the sky.
“Let the Light mend your wounds!”
A wave of golden energy spread across the battlefield, healing my allies, closing their wounds, and reinforcing their strength.
Verrin appeared beside me, blood staining his daggers. “Paladin, you’re actually useful.”
“Try not to get stabbed and I won’t have to heal you,” I shot back.
He grinned. “No promises.”
The Scarlet Crusaders fought fiercely, but they were not prepared for us.
One by one, they fell. Some were frozen in place, some driven mad by shadow, some crushed by Gor’mak’s shield, others silenced forever by Verrin’s daggers.
As the last of them collapsed to the ground, a heavy silence settled over the square.
I exhaled, lowering my hands as the Light around me dimmed.
We had won.
But the true fight still lay ahead.
Before us, the doors of the Scarlet Bastion loomed, waiting to be opened.
Inside, more of them would be waiting.
I tightened my grip on my shield.
“Let’s move.”
“Go, Paladin, go find what you came for.”
With the battle behind us and the Scarlet Crusaders dead or scattered, I stepped into the inner chambers of the Scarlet Bastion, the once-hallowed halls of the Order of the Silver Hand—my Order, my home—now corrupted by zealots and madness.
The room was dimly lit, old banners of the Scarlet Crusade hanging from the walls, covering the sacred emblems that once stood for honor, faith, and unity. But my focus was not on the ruined legacy of my Order—it was on the painting.
Renfray’s words echoed in my mind.
“Search for a painting of our twin moons. Chip away at the paint, and you will uncover my masterwork—‘Of Love and Family.’”
There it was—a simple landscape, a painting of Azeroth’s twin moons, mounted on the wall like it belonged. No one would suspect what lay beneath.
I stepped closer, raising a gauntleted hand, and with careful precision, I chipped at the surface.
348
The false paint cracked and flaked away, revealing something brighter, more vibrant beneath. Slowly, the hidden image emerged—
A man in golden armor, standing at the shore of a lake. His wife beside him, their son in his arms. A moment of peace. A moment of love. A moment of family.
By the Light… It was here.
After all these years, after all that had happened—Tirion’s painting had remained, hidden but untouched.
“Time to move,” Verrin called from the doorway. “We’re not alone in this place.”
I carefully lifted the painting from the wall, wrapping it in cloth and securing it to my pack. This was more than just a memory—it was proof that some things had survived, even in darkness.
“What about their leader, Saidan Dathrohan, the Grand Crusader of the Scarlet Crusade?” Gor’mak asked, adjusting his shield. “We’re here already. If we take him down, it’ll cripple their command.”
I hesitated. “That wasn’t our mission. We got what we came for.”
But the Rogue shook his head. “I went ahead to check,” Verrin said. “There’s someone in the next room… but he’s not human.”
I narrowed my eyes. “What do you mean?”
Verrin frowned. “I mean he looks human, but the smell is wrong. Something isn’t right.” He crossed his arms. “If you ask me, I’d say it’s a demon in disguise.”
A demon?
The others exchanged looks.
Gor’mak’s lips curled into a grin. “Good. Might turn out to be a decent fight.”
Sylwen tilted her head, her eyes flickering with shadow. “A demon hiding within the Scarlet Crusade? If true, this is not just their corruption—it is their undoing.”
Lirra adjusted her gloves, cracking her fingers. “Well, that changes things, doesn’t it?”
I took a breath, trying to measure my next words carefully. “We don’t know what’s in that room.”
“Does it matter?” Verrin asked. “If he’s a demon, he’s a threat to all of us—to the Crusade, to the Horde, to the Alliance.”
“No hesitation,” Gor’mak growled. “If it’s a demon, we kill it.”
I looked at all of them, trying to see if they were truly ready for this. But in their eyes, I saw determination, certainty—eagerness.
They had already made up their minds.
I tightened my grip on my shield.
“Very well. Get ready.”
349
I turned to the door ahead, where our true battle awaited.
“We’re going in.”
We stepped into the chamber, weapons at the ready. At the far end of the room, standing tall and imposing, was Saidan Dathrohan, Grand Crusader of the Scarlet Crusade. His red and gold armor gleamed in the dim torchlight, his expression stern and unreadable.
This was the man who led the Scarlet Crusade, the force that had taken over Stratholme, hunting the undead with unrelenting zeal. The man who had twisted the teachings of the Silver Hand, turning it into a fanatical purge.
But was it truly him?
I stepped forward, keeping my voice firm. “Are you Saidan Dathrohan?”
For a moment, he didn’t answer. His gaze swept over us, his lips curling slightly, as if he already knew why we were here.
Then, without a single word, darkness erupted from his form—a swirling cloud of pure shadow, warping the air around him.
I lifted my shield, instinctively bracing myself.
The shadows coiled and twisted, growing larger, darker—until, from within them, a massive figure emerged.
His true form.
Not a man. A demon.
A Nathrezim.
His towering, bat-like wings spread wide, his red eyes burned with malice, his jagged claws flexing with unnatural ease.
His voice rumbled through the chamber, dripping with confidence, with arrogance, with cruelty.
“I am Balnazzar, and I will be your doom.”
“Spread out!” I commanded.
We scattered, moving to surround him, leaving no room for retreat.
Gor’mak roared, lowering his shield and charging forward like an unstoppable force. The moment his massive plate-clad form collided with the demon, the impact sent a shockwave through the room. Balnazzar staggered slightly—but his laughter echoed, deep and mocking.
“Foolish mortal,” the demon sneered.
But Gor’mak had done his job. Balnazzar’s attention was on him—leaving him open.
350
Verrin struck like a shadow, appearing behind the demon in a flash of steel. His daggers sank deep into Balnazzar’s back, twisting as he ripped them free.
Balnazzar snarled, lashing out, but Verrin was already gone, rolling away into the darkness.
Lirra raised her hands, her eyes glowing with arcane light.
“Time to cool you off!” she cried.
A massive spike of ice formed in the air, then hurled forward, striking Balnazzar square in the chest. The demon shuddered, his movement slowing as frost crept across his body.
Sylwen stood behind us all, her shadow-infused form pulsing with raw power.
“The Light will not answer you, demon,” she said coldly, lifting her hands. “But the Shadow does not fear you.”
With a single whisper, tendrils of pure darkness shot from her fingertips, wrapping around Balnazzar’s limbs, tightening, twisting, draining his strength.
The demon howled, but his retaliation was swift and brutal.
With a flick of his clawed hand, shadow bolts erupted from his fingertips, striking all of us at once. The impact was like being hit by pure darkness itself—cold, suffocating, heavy. I felt my armor grow hot, my vision blurring for a moment.
“Stay standing!” I shouted, pushing through the pain.
I raised my hands, calling upon the Light, and a golden wave of healing energy spread across my allies.
“The Light sustains us! Keep fighting!”
Balnazzar snarled, his wounds mounting, his arrogance fading. His red eyes burned, his wings flaring wide.
“Enough of this.”
The air around us warped, darkened, and before we could react—terror struck.
A wave of pure dread erupted from Balnazzar’s form, slamming into all of us at once. My vision went black—not from darkness, but from something deeper, something internal.
I heard whispers, voices from the past.
I saw Stratholme burning all over again. I saw Adele’s lifeless eyes staring back at me. I saw my home in ruins, my people lost, my faith shattered.
It was as if I had been dragged into a nightmare I could not wake from.
Somewhere in the distance, I heard screams—my allies, trapped in their own horrors.
No.
351
No.
“Resist!” I shouted, though my voice felt distant, muffled. “This won’t last! Resist!”
The Light burned within me, and I clung to it, forced it outward.
“Begone, demon. You have no hold on me!”
Golden radiance exploded from my body, breaking the nightmare’s grip. I turned, placing a hand on Gor’mak, then Sylwen, then Lirra, channeling my blessing into them.
One by one, they snapped free, their strength returning.
“Strike! Now!” I roared.
Balnazzar’s eyes widened in shock as we charged him again, his spell broken, his power failing.
Gor’mak’s shield slammed into his side, knocking him off balance. Verrin’s daggers found their mark once more, sinking into his throat. Lirra unleashed a massive bolt of frost, freezing his wings mid-motion.
And then—
Sylwen raised her hands one final time.
The shadows around her surged, coalescing into a spear of pure void energy.
“You fall today, demon, as all your kind will.”
She hurled it forward—the spear pierced Balnazzar’s chest, dark energy ripping through him like wildfire.
The demon let out a final, agonized roar, his form twisting, writhing—before he f inally collapsed.
It was over.
The room was silent except for our heavy breathing. The massive corpse of Balnazzar lay before us, his once-proud form now nothing more than a pile of smoldering remains.
But one question lingered in my mind.
Had Saidan Dathrohan ever truly existed here?
Had the demon replaced him? Corrupted him? Killed him in secret and taken his form?
We would never know.
I looked around at my companions, who were already searching the room for anything that could aid us.
352
“If you find anything useful, take it,” I said. “We should not leave empty handed.”
Verrin stopped near a row of crates, his eyes narrowing. He reached down, pried one open—then grinned.
“Nice,” he muttered.
I stepped closer. “What is it?”
I immediately recognized the glowing glass bottles inside.
Holy Water.
Bottles and bottles of consecrated Stratholme Holy Water, one of the most potent weapons against the undead.
“We take at least one crate,” I said. “This might be of great use.”
Verrin chuckled. “No complaints here.”
With our prize secured, we turned toward the exit.
The way was still clear.
But it wouldn’t stay that way for long.
“Let’s move,” I said, and we left the Scarlet Bastion behind us.
For the first time since stepping foot into Stratholme, the streets ahead felt clear.
No more fights. No more killing. No more hesitation.
We had what we came for—Tirion’s painting, a weapon against the undead, and a dead demon behind us. There was nothing left but to leave this cursed place behind.
“No point in going slowly,” I said. “The faster we get out, the better.”
And so we ran
As we raced through the blackened ruins, the undead stirred, drawn by the sound of footsteps against stone.
They were everywhere—former merchants, former guards, former families. Shambling, groaning, clinging to an existence they no longer understood.
But they were slow. Clumsy.
We did not stop.
There was no need to fight them.
Their lifeless eyes turned toward us, their arms reached, but by the time they reacted, we were already gone—weaving through broken alleyways, ruined marketplaces, deserted halls.
Their home.
353
My home.
I pushed the thought away.
Only when we reached the city’s outer gates did we finally stop, our breaths heavy, our weapons still gripped tightly out of instinct.
I turned, looking at the faces of my companions—bruised, tired, but victorious.
We had made it.
Sylwen, still bathed in the lingering shadows of her magic, regarded me with quiet approval. “For someone so young, you fought well, Paladin.”
Gor’mak chuckled, rolling his shoulders as he sheathed his sword. “You make your Alliance look good.”
Verrin simply smirked. “For a Light-worshipper, you weren’t bad.”
Lirra, despite the exhaustion on her face, beamed. “And we got to blow things up. That’s always a win!”
I allowed myself a small smile.
“You all fought well,” I said. “I will make sure you receive commendations for this. The Argent Dawn will hear of your deeds.”
There were no grand speeches. No parting words of glory. Just a nod of understanding, the silent respect of warriors who had fought and survived together.
“Now, we move.”
And we did.
The road stretched ahead, the air growing lighter the farther we traveled from Stratholme’s cursed walls.
But eventually, our paths diverged.
The others turned toward Chillwind Camp, back to Commander Valorfist and the Argent Dawn.
I turned east—toward Hearthglen, toward Tirion Fordring, toward the man who had sent me on this mission not for war, not for glory—but for love, for family, for remembrance.
And so I rode.
Back to the only Paladin Lordaeron had left.
When I arrived at Tirion’s humble dwelling, I saw something in him I had not seen before.
Hope.
354
As soon as his gaze fell upon me, he stepped forward, his voice carrying a tremor of urgency.
“The painting, Paladin.” His hands clenched at his sides. “Do you have the painting?”
I unfastened my pack, carefully unwrapping the cloth-bound treasure I had carried across the cursed streets of Stratholme. The moment I revealed it, Tirion nearly collapsed.
His breath hitched. His fingers trembled as he took the frame in his hands, eyes wide with disbelief and overwhelming emotion.
“By the Light…” he whispered.
Then, like a flood breaking through a dam, the weight of years of grief and exile overtook him.
Tirion sobbed, his shoulders shaking, his ironclad composure shattering in a way I had never thought possible.
For the first time, he was not a warrior, not a paladin, not a legend.
He was simply a father—holding the last memory of the family he had lost.
But it was not over.
Tirion wiped at his face, trying to compose himself, but when he lifted his gaze to me, it was steady, filled with renewed determination.
“Paladin, you have done all that I have asked thus far.” His voice was stronger now, tempered by purpose.
“Only one step remains in your quest of redemption.”
I squared my shoulders, listening intently.
“You must deliver the items you have collected to Taelan.”
At the mention of his son’s name, my stomach tightened.
Tirion’s expression darkened. “Unfortunately, Taelan and his Scarlet Crusaders will attack you on sight.”
I frowned. “Then… how do I reach him?”
“There is only one way to deliver my message,” Tirion continued, “and that is through deception.”
I remained silent, waiting.
“To the south, you will find Uther’s Tomb—the final resting place of our noble Uther the Lightbringer. An old and trusted confidant of mine, Myranda, now resides there. Seek her out. Show her the items of Taelan’s past, and she will assist you.”
The name struck me like a blade of memory.
Uther’s Tomb.
I knew this day would come.
355
To walk upon the ground where Uther the Lightbringer was laid to rest, where the greatest of all paladins had fallen, was no small thing.
If this was where my path led next, I would not delay.
I took a steady breath and met Tirion’s gaze.
“Then I go to Uther’s Tomb.”
I traveled night and day, pushing forward at a steady pace, the weight of my mission heavy upon my shoulders.
The road south was long, but I did not allow myself to dwell on exhaustion. The thought of Tirion’s sorrow, of Taelan’s fate, of what must be done—these were the things that carried me forward.
When I finally reached Uther’s Tomb, the first rays of morning light stretched across the sky, casting a golden glow over the solemn monument.
There, standing amidst the sacred ground, was Myranda.
She’s a Gnome, older than I had imagined, her form wrapped in dark robes, her sharp eyes filled with knowledge and experience. Yet, despite her weathered appearance, I could sense the strength of her convictions, a presence that spoke of one who had once stood beside paladins and lords alike.
I approached, wasting no time.
“I come from Tirion Fordring,” I told her. “He has asked for your aid, and I have come to fulfill his request.”
Myranda studied me for a long moment before speaking.
“I was Tirion’s most trusted advisor when he held rank as Lord of Mardenholde,” she said, her voice tinged with old memories. “I openly dissented the verdict passed by the Order of the Silver Hand and was banished for my insolence.”
Her gaze darkened.
“He has been through much heartache and disappointment in his life, human.” Her tone softened slightly, though there was still a hint of steel behind it. “Are you prepared to right the wrongs set upon the Fordrings?”
I straightened my stance, my grip tightening on my reins.
“I am ready for whatever comes next.”
“Come with me,” Myranda said.
I followed her behind Uther’s tomb, where a small tent stood among the trees. It was a simple shelter, likely used by those who tended the memorial of the fallen Lightbringer. But inside, there were no offerings, no holy relics—only the armor and weapons of the dead.
Among them, a set of Scarlet Crusader armor and a tabard.
356
I ran my fingers over the crimson fabric, feeling the weight of what I was about to do.
“Since you are human, you just need to wear their armor and tabard,” Myranda explained, her voice calm but firm. “And, of course, behave like a fanatic.” A wry smile touched her lips. “That should be the easy part.”
I let out a slow breath, nodding.
“I take it you know where Hearthglen is?” she asked.
“Yes,” I replied. “I know it very well.”
“I had dealt with their patrols before—fought them, avoided them, studied them. And, just in case, I had kept their armor. Now, it seemed that had been a wise decision.”
Myranda watched me for a moment, then gave a small nod of approval.
“Paladin, be well. May the Light guide your path.”
I met her gaze. “Thank you, Myranda.”
With that, I fastened the Scarlet Crusader armor, securing the tabard over my chest, and adjusted the straps to fit just right. The final piece was the helmet, which I held in my hands for a moment before placing it upon my head.
From this moment on, I was no longer Sergeant Tune of Stormwind.
I was just another Scarlet Crusader, marching to Hearthglen.
The journey was quiet, but my mind was not.
Hearthglen had not fallen to the Scourge—and in some ways, that was a small mercy. But in another, it was a tragedy all its own.
The people who now ruled its walls had once fought beside us—true knights of the Silver Hand, warriors of Lordaeron’s faith and honor.
But they had lost their way.
In their desperation to purge the undead, they had abandoned compassion, forsaken reason, and turned their blades on any who did not share their blindness.
This was not a city of heroes anymore.
I tightened my grip on the reins.
“Light protect me,” I murmured under my breath.
For I was walking into a den of zealots, where the Light still shone upon the wicked.
When I arrived at Hearthglen, my heart pounded against my chest.
Many things could go wrong.
357
One misstep, one wrong word, and I would be surrounded by zealots, cut down before I could reach Taelan.
As I approached the gates, a Scarlet Knight stepped forward, his eyes narrowing slightly beneath his helmet.
“Are you the messenger from Tyr’s Hand?”
My breath caught for a moment. They were expecting someone—and that meant they wouldn’t ask questions if I simply played the part.
“Yes,” I said, keeping my voice even. “I have a message for Taelan.”
The knight gave a curt nod and stepped aside.
And just like that, I was in.
No one gave me a second glance.
They saw only another Scarlet soldier, marching through their stronghold with purpose. No one expected anyone so foolish as to enter their domain alone.
I moved through Hearthglen’s streets, past zealous warriors, past proud banners of the Scarlet Crusade, past the twisted remnants of what was once the Silver Hand.
And then, I reached the main hall.
Where I would find Taelan Fordring.
I entered the chamber, my steps steady, though my mind raced.
Before me stood Taelan Fordring, towering and strong, clad in gleaming red and gold armor, his massive blade resting at his side.
He turned as I approached.
“What is this, soldier?” he asked, his deep voice carrying authority.
I said nothing. I only offered the box.
Taelan took it, his brow furrowed as he opened the lid and began to examine its contents.
Inside lay his childhood hammer, the Silver Hand banner, and the painting of his family.
For a long moment, he said nothing.
His hands trembled. His breathing grew unsteady.
“This… this cannot be true.” His voice was barely more than a whisper.
Then, his knees buckled.
He fell to one knee, gripping the box as if it were the only thing keeping him upright.
“But all that you have shown me…”
I swallowed hard, watching him.
358
It was working.
The memories were flooding back.
The chains placed upon him by the Scarlet Crusade were breaking.
For a fleeting moment, I thought to myself, I might just make it out alive after all.
Then, Taelan clenched his fists, his breathing ragged.
“For so long, I have been a puppet of the Grand Crusader.” His voice grew sharper, angrier. “What reason was there to fight against what the Scarlet Crusade had become?”
I remained silent.
“It has been decades, yet the memories of my father—those precious memories— they are what have kept me alive.”
He lifted his gaze to me, his eyes no longer clouded with fanaticism, but with sorrow… and rage.
“I have dreams, stranger.” His voice softened. “In these dreams, my father is with me. He stands proudly at my side as I am inducted into the Order. We battle legions of Scourge, side by side. We bring honor to the Alliance, to Lordaeron.”
He exhaled.
“I want not to dream anymore.”
His eyes hardened, his resolve set in stone.
He stood tall once more, his massive blade lifted from its resting place.
“Take me to him.”
I nodded.
And so, we departed Hearthglen, a father and son about to reunite—or so I hoped.
We rode through Hearthglen’s streets, making for the gates, the weight of Taelan’s decision pressing upon us. He was no longer a Scarlet Crusader—but to the zealots who still ruled this place, he was a traitor.
As we neared the exit, I spotted movement on the road ahead.
A rider approached on horseback, his crimson tabard fluttering in the wind. He pulled his reins sharply, stopping before the gate guard.
“I am the scout sent by Tyr’s Hand!” he announced.
My blood ran cold.
The guard turned to me—realization dawning in their eyes.
359
“If you’re the scout, then…” He narrowed his eyes. “Who might you be? And where are you taking Taelan?”
I froze, trying to find the words—anything that could get us out of this. But my mind went blank.
Then, the second guard emerged from the entrance tower—his hand already moving toward the alarm bell.
No choice. We fight.
Taelan did not hesitate.
With a roar, he lunged forward, his massive sword cutting clean through the first guard, sending him crashing to the ground before he could even reach for his weapon.
The second guard barely had time to react before I rushed him, slamming my shield into his chest and following up with a swift strike of my mace. The force sent him sprawling, and before he could cry out, I finished him.
But the scout had already turned his horse, galloping down the road at full speed.
“Damn it!” I hissed.
Taelan wasted no time. “We must stop him before he reaches the outpost!”
We rode hard, our horses thundering down the road as we pursued the scout. But he had too much of a lead.
And as we crested the next hill—
We saw them.
A Scarlet Crusade outpost—and the scout had already reached them.
A full squad of Crusaders stood ready, blocking the road, their shields raised, swords drawn. But they weren’t just soldiers.
At the center of their formation stood a figure clad in regal Scarlet robes, his cold eyes filled with disdain.
I felt a chill creep down my spine.
I knew that man.
Everyone who had ever crossed paths with the Scarlet Crusade knew his name.
He stepped forward, raising a hand, and his voice rang through the air like a death sentence.
“I am High Inquisitor Isillien.”
He sneered, his hand crackling with divine magic twisted by zealotry.
“And this is your doom, heretics.”
We were out of options.
360
No more running. No more hiding.
We had to fight.
Taelan gripped his sword tightly, stepping forward without hesitation. His golden armor gleamed, the emblem of the Silver Hand still etched into his chestplate beneath the Scarlet colors.
“There is no redemption for traitors, Fordring!” Isillien spat, his voice laced with hatred.
“There is redemption in the Light!” Taelan roared back, his blade igniting with righteous fury.
“Then let’s see if your Light can save you!” Isillien gestured sharply, and his soldiers charged.
And so, the battle began.
The Scarlet soldiers came at us in a wave of steel and fury.
Taelan met them head-on, his massive blade swinging in wide arcs, cutting through their defenses like paper. His strikes were not reckless, not blind—but precise, controlled, and deadly.
I fought beside him, calling upon the Light, my mace and shield crashing against the zealots who sought to cut us down.
One Crusader swung high—I raised my shield, deflecting the blow before bringing my mace into his ribs. The crack of breaking armor rang through the air as he crumpled to the ground.
Another tried to flank me, but Taelan was there first, driving his blade clean through the man’s chest before kicking him off.
“Stay on me, Paladin!” Taelan shouted, and I did.
Side by side, we were unstoppable—a storm of steel and Light, cutting through the Scarlet ranks one by one.
Holy energy surged through me, guiding my strikes, healing my wounds before they could take me down. The Light was with us.
But then—
Everything changed.
“Enough!” Isillien’s voice thundered, and the battlefield shifted.
A wave of corrupt power burst forth from him, the air growing heavy, suffocating. The Light’s warmth dimmed, replaced by a cold twisting darkness.
Then, before I could react, he turned his full attention to Taelan.
361
“Your father was a fool, and so are you!” Isillien raised his hands, and from them, tendrils of shadow magic lashed out, wrapping around Taelan’s body.
“No!” I lunged forward, but I was too slow.
The darkness pulsed, draining the very life from Taelan, his strength fading as his knees buckled.
He let out a choked gasp, his sword slipping from his grasp.
His golden armor dulled, his radiance dimming.
Isillien’s lips curled in a sneer. “All must serve the Crusade or perish. And you… you will perish.”
I threw my shield aside, calling upon the Light, my hands glowing with divine power, trying to reach him—
But then, Isillien turned to me.
“And now, you die.”
He lifted his hand—darkness gathering, forming into a final, killing spell.
I braced myself.
This was it.
Then—
A blur of silver and gold.
A roar of fury.
A flash of Light so brilliant it shattered the darkness.
A blade cut through the air, piercing Isillien’s side before the spell could be loosed.
The High Inquisitor staggered back, his eyes wide in shock and pain.
And there, standing between us, his sword burning with righteous fire, was Tirion Fordring.
“Enough of your poison, Isillien!” Tirion’s voice boomed like thunder, his blade cutting through the lies and corruption of the Scarlet Crusade.
I felt a surge of strength return to me.
I grabbed my mace, turned, and saw the remaining Scarlet Crusaders hesitating, their leader wounded.
I charged.
I slammed my mace into one soldier’s skull, sending him sprawling. Another raised his sword, but I dodged and drove my weapon into his chest.
Tirion fought beside me, his strikes clean and precise, the fury of a father, a paladin, a man with nothing left to lose.
One by one, the Scarlet soldiers fell.
362
Until none remained.
But it was too late.
I turned, breath ragged, eyes searching for Taelan—
He lay on the ground, unmoving.
“No, no, no…” Tirion rushed to his son, dropping his sword as he knelt beside him.
I fell to my knees, reaching for the Light, pouring every ounce of healing magic into him.
“Come on, Taelan! Stay with us!” I pleaded, the golden radiance washing over his body.
Tirion did the same, his hands glowing with holy light, his voice breaking.
“Light, hear me! Save my son! Take my strength—take everything, but don’t take him!”
But the Light did not answer.
The power flickered, then faded.
Taelan’s body remained still.
His face was peaceful, his battle fought and lost.
Tirion stared down at him, his hands shaking, his breath ragged.
“No… please…” he whispered. His voice was not that of a paladin or a knight. It was the voice of a father who had just lost his son.
His grief consumed him.
He trembled, gathering Taelan in his arms, cradling him as he had when he was a child.
“My son… my boy…” Tirion’s voice broke completely, the weight of years of separation, exile, regret—of hope that had just been restored, only to be ripped away again.
Tears fell freely, unashamed.
I could do nothing but bow my head, my hands clenching into fists, my own sorrow mixing with the silence that followed.
We had fought so hard.
We had won the battle.
But we had lost Taelan.
And no victory could make up for that.
363
Eventually, Tirion regains his composure. The weight of grief still hung heavy, but he was no longer broken.
Together, we carried Taelan’s body back to his father’s home—a place long abandoned, yet never forgotten.
The burial was solemn, quiet, with only the wind through the dying trees bearing witness to a father laying his son to rest.
I helped Tirion place the final stone, sealing the grave of the last true heir of Mardenholde.
When it was done, Tirion stood, his gaze fixed on the horizon, his fists clenched with newfound purpose.
Then, he spoke.
“The death of my son at the hands of these monsters will not pass without incident.”
His voice was low, but filled with steel.
I could feel it—the fire returning to him. The exile was over.
He turned to me, his eyes clear and unwavering.
“Take solace in knowing that the Order is reborn.”
A moment passed before he placed his hand over his chest, standing tall.
“I now take my place as Highlord of the new Order of the Silver Hand.”
His words carried conviction, a vow that would shake the world in the years to come.
“May we meet again, in better times, and reminisce of days long past… battles hard fought… dreams redeemed.”
I nodded, knowing that this moment was history in the making.
But I could not ignore the cost.
Taelan was dead.
Hearthglen remained in the hands of zealots.
The Argent Dawn had gained a powerful ally… but at what price?
With nothing left to do here, I turned toward the Plaguelands once more.
It was time to return to Chillwind Camp.
Upon reaching Chillwind Camp, I made my way to Commander Valorfist’s tent. The air was thick with the scent of burning torches, and weary soldiers moved about, tending to weapons, repairing armor, or simply recovering from yet another battle against the undead.
364
The Commander looked up as I entered, his weathered face unreadable, though I could see the weight of command in his eyes.
“Paladin, what news do you bring?”
I took a breath and began my report.
I told him everything—from the mission in Stratholme, the way my team acted with precision, how they deserved commendations for their bravery. Then, my voice lowered, and I told him of Taelan Fordring’s fate.
Tirion had risen once more, but the cost was high.
Valorfist listened in solemn silence, nodding as I finished.
“I understand,” he said finally.
He studied me for a long moment, then added, “Your team also spoke highly of you—of your skill in battle, but also your leadership. Your actions won’t be forgotten.”
I gave a small nod of acknowledgment, but there was no victory in me.
As I turned to leave Commander Valorfist’s tent, he called out once more.
“By the way, Sergeant Tune.”
I stopped, glancing back.
“We received reports from Stormwind. The raid against the trolls of Zul’Gurub was a success.”
I felt a small weight lift from my shoulders.
The threat of the Blood God Hakkar had loomed over Azeroth, and the forces of the Alliance and Horde had united to strike down the Gurubashi High Priests before their dark rituals could unleash ruin.
It was a rare thing—to hear good news amidst all this death.
I gave a small nod of respect.
“Thank you, sir.”
Valorfist returned the nod, then waved me off. “Get some rest, Paladin.”
And so, I did.
For a little while, at least.
The next several weeks passed in a blur of duty and combat.
I rode alongside patrols, ensuring the roads remained clear for supply lines and travelers. I fought alongside my fellow soldiers, cutting down wandering undead that strayed too close to the camp. I even joined a strike force that hunted necromancers in Andorhal, ensuring their dark magic would no longer raise the dead.
365
But one day, while patrolling Sorrow Hill, a strange feeling washed over me.
It was not quite the cold of the undead, but something close—something lingering, something lost.
I slowed my horse and turned toward the sensation.
A whisper on the wind.
A presence.
I moved carefully, stepping down from my mount, my hand hovering near my weapon. The land here was scarred by old battles, the graves overgrown, forgotten, marked only by the occasional flicker of restless spirits.
Then, I saw her.
A ghostly woman stood among the gravestones, her form faint, but unmistakably human.
Her gaze fell upon me, and for a moment, relief flashed across her spectral face.
“A Paladin. Good.”
Her voice carried the echoes of a battle long past, of lives lost, of memories that refused to fade.
But she continued, her words heavy with sorrow.
“So many of us died at the Battle of Darrowshire. So many died… and worse.”
A chill ran through me.
Darrowshire.
One of the last stands of Lordaeron’s defenders against the Scourge, a battle that had ended in tragedy and horror.
She clasped her hands together, her glowing eyes pleading.
“When the battle began, I hid my niece Pamela. I do not know what happened to her.”
Her voice wavered, the pain in it still fresh, as if the battle had only happened yesterday.
“I am but a wandering spirit, but my heart still longs to know Pamela’s fate.”
She looked at me again, her form flickering in the dim light.
“Please, good Paladin.”
I straightened.
“Will you go to Darrowshire and search for her?”
She pointed east, beyond the ruins of Gahrron’s Withering.
I hesitated only for a moment.
366
A child in danger. A fate unknown.
I could not ignore this.
“I will find her.”
And with that, I turned toward Darrowshire, where the past still lingered like a shadow, waiting to be uncovered.
Upon reaching Darrowshire, it wasn’t hard to find her.
Little Pamela.
She stood in front of the ruins of an old home, a small figure in a tattered dress, her hair shifting lightly in the ghostly wind. Her form was pale, flickering faintly, yet her eyes held an innocence that should not exist in a place like this.
She was a ghost, like her aunt.
But at least she wasn’t undead.
Still, something about her felt… off.
She didn’t seem to know she was dead.
I took a steady breath and approached carefully.
“Pamela?”
She turned to me, her expression brightening at the sight of someone new.
“Hello! Are you here to play with me?”
I hesitated for a moment, then gently said, “Your aunt sent me. Marlene. She’s looking for you.”
Pamela’s face lit up at the mention of her aunt, but as she spoke, my chest tightened.
“My Auntie Marlene told me to stay here in our house because my father had to go and fight.”
Her voice was full of childlike certainty, untouched by the horrors of the world around her.
“My father’s the bravest man in the whole world!”
I said nothing.
I knew what had happened here.
She had been waiting for him.
For years.
And then, her voice grew quieter, tinged with something like worry.
“But I’ve been here for a long time, and he hasn’t come for me.”
I swallowed hard, feeling the cold weight of tragedy settle in my chest.
367
“Sometimes, bad people come and whisper to me, and I want my dad to make them go away… but he’s not here!”
I clenched my fists. The Scourge. Even in death, they tormented this poor child.
Pamela fidgeted slightly, looking down.
“And sometimes when it gets dark, I want to play with my doll, but I can’t because I left it in town.”
She looked back up at me, her spectral eyes hopeful.
“Will you find my doll for me?”
A ghostly girl, trapped in the ruins of a battle long lost, asking for nothing more than a doll to comfort her.
The weight of everything I had seen, the war, the death, the horror of this cursed land—it all faded for a moment.
Right now, I wasn’t a Paladin fighting a holy war.
I was simply someone who had been asked to help.
I gave her a small nod.
“I’ll find your doll, Pamela.”
There could be no harm in giving this little girl one small piece of peace.
For once, I was not here to slay the undead or battle the Scarlet zealots.
This was different.
I searched the broken streets of Darrowshire, looking for the place Pamela had last played with her doll.
Some areas were shrouded in shadow, remnants of the Scourge’s lingering corruption. In those places, I infused my weapon with Holy Light, the glow pushing back the darkness just enough for me to see clearly.
And then, after a careful search, I found it—
A small, delicate doll, resting half-buried beneath fallen debris, untouched by the years.
With a heavy heart, I picked it up and returned to Pamela.
Her eyes lit up as I approached.
“Did you find my doll?” she asked eagerly.
I knelt before her, holding it out. “I did. Here.”
She gasped, clapping her hands together.
“You found it! You found my doll! Oh, thank you!”
368
For a moment, she hugged the toy close, as if she could still feel warmth from something so simple.
But then, her joy faded, replaced by something uncertain, lost.
“Oh, I’m so lonely…”
She looked around, as if finally realizing how empty Darrowshire had become.
“Where is my family?” she asked, her voice small.
“Auntie Marlene told me to stay here, but then she left and never came back!”
She hesitated. Then, more softly—
“And my dad… Have you seen him?”
Her voice carried so much hope—hope that I knew would be crushed if I told her the truth.
I swallowed, my grip tightening around my mace.
She wasn’t ready for the answer.
“Please, Paladin. You’re my new friend! Will you talk to my Auntie for me?”
I nodded.
“I will.”
Even if I knew the truth, even if I feared what I would hear, I owed Pamela that much.
When I returned to Marlene’s spirit, she turned to me with wide eyes.
“You saw Pamela?”
I nodded.
“How is she? Is she alive??”
I hesitated for a moment, but I couldn’t lie.
Her expression fell as she already knew the answer.
“Oh, no… Poor Pamela!” Her voice wavered, grief from a lifetime ago surfacing anew.
“She was so young, and such a happy child…”
She paused, then asked carefully, “She… she doesn’t know what happened to her father, does she? My brother, Joseph?”
I shook my head.
“No… she couldn’t understand what happened to Joseph.”
Marlene let out a slow breath, and when she spoke again, her voice was heavy with sorrow.
“And even if she could, I don’t have the heart to tell her…”
369
She turned away, as if lost in thought, but then clenched her fists.
“I wish Joseph could again be with his daughter, but it cannot be so.” She looked back at me, and there was pain in her ghostly eyes.
“His soul was twisted by the Scourge, and he became a monster. Oh, he is doomed!”
The words hung between us, final, absolute.
But then—
She straightened, as if struck by sudden resolve.
“But perhaps we can change his fate.”
Marlene pointed to the graves outside Andorhal.
“**Search for Joseph’s monument. His body’s not there—it was trampled and destroyed years ago—but under the monument is his wedding ring.”
I frowned. “His ring?”
She nodded.
“Take that ring to Chromie… a strange gnome with very strange powers.”
I arched an eyebrow.
“Chromie?”
“She is staying in the ruined inn at the northwest corner of Andorhal. She may be able to help where we cannot.”
I had heard rumors of this gnome before—a figure who was more than she appeared.
A child trapped in the echo of death… a father twisted into a monster… and now a mysterious gnome with the power to change fate itself?
This mission was turning into something far greater than I had expected.
I nodded.
“I will find the ring. And I will find Chromie.”
With that, I turned eastward, toward Andorhal, where time and tragedy intertwined like never before.
After retrieving Joseph Redpath’s wedding ring, I made my way to the ruined inn in the northwest corner of Andorhal.
It wasn’t hard to find Chromie.
Among the broken furniture and rotting beams, there she stood—a small gnome, dressed in intricate robes, her eyes shimmering with a strange wisdom far beyond her appearance.
370
The moment I stepped inside, she turned toward me, a bright smile on her face.
“There is something timely about your visit,” she said cheerfully. Then, tilting her head, she added, “You’re not from the future, are you?”
I blinked.
“What?”
She giggled. “Never mind, never mind!” She waved a hand dismissively.
I cleared my throat and held up Joseph Redpath’s wedding ring.
Her golden eyes widened with recognition.
“What is this? A wedding ring? Let me see…”
She took the ring, turning it over in her small hands. Then, her expression grew serious, something I hadn’t expected from such a seemingly cheerful gnome.
“Ah! This ring was once on the hand of a great man, but there is much tragedy in that man’s past.”
She looked up at me, her gaze piercing.
“Are you here to help him?”
I nodded. “His sister, Marlene, told me about his fate. I don’t know if anything can be done, but—”
Chromie held up a finger.
“It’s far too late for him now…”
I frowned. “Then what am I doing here?”
She grinned.
“Perhaps we can help him in the past!”
I stared. In the past?
She said it as if it were the most normal thing in the world.
“To save Joseph Redpath, we must first discover his past,” she explained, pacing slightly. “We can learn this in the Annals of Darrowshire, a book held in the city hall of Andorhal.”
I crossed my arms. “And how does a book help us change the past?”
Chromie simply smiled.
“Bring me that book. We can then learn Joseph’s fate, and with luck… change it!”
I had no idea what she was planning.
But something about her felt… different.
371
There was power in her words, something beyond magic, beyond anything I had ever encountered.
I sighed, adjusting my pack.
“Alright, I’ll play along.”
She clapped her hands. “Splendid! Off you go, then! And try not to get eaten by ghouls!”
I narrowed my eyes. “Wait, what—?”
But before I could finish, she had already turned away, humming to herself.
With no other choice, I left the inn, heading deeper into Andorhal—toward the city hall, where the past waited to be uncovered.
I knew this town too well.
Andorhal had once been a thriving city, a center of commerce and strength for Lordaeron. Now, it was a ruined husk, a breeding ground for the Scourge, where only ghosts and the undead remained.
I moved quickly through the broken streets, making my way toward the town hall.
Inside, shambling corpses stirred at my arrival.
I had fought these things before—they were slow, clumsy, and easy to put down, as long as I didn’t let them surround me.
With a few precise strikes, I cleared the room and searched for the book.
It wasn’t hard to find.
A large, dusty tome sat on a cracked wooden table, untouched by time. The cover read:
The Annals of Darrowshire
I picked it up and turned back toward the inn, where Chromie was waiting.
The moment I returned, Chromie perked up.
“Did you find the book, Paladin?”
I held it out. “I did.”
Her eyes sparkled. “Well done!” She clapped her hands together, then tilted her head.
“Did you read it? Is Joseph Redpath mentioned?”
I hesitated. I had flipped through a few pages but hadn’t had time to truly read it.
She took the book from me and flipped through the pages, her expression growing more serious.
“Ah… The Annals of Darrowshire tell a very unsettling tale,” she murmured.
I listened carefully as she continued.
372
“It says that during the battle, Joseph Redpath was corrupted… and joined the ranks of the Scourge.”
I stiffened.
“He then betrayed the defenders of Darrowshire.”
A chill ran through me.
Pamela had spent all these years waiting for her father—and he had been the very reason Darrowshire fell.
Chromie closed the book and sighed.
“That is an ill fate, indeed. If we can, we should try to change that fate, don’t you think?”
I studied her carefully.
“And how exactly do you plan to do that?”
She smiled knowingly. “Through magic, of course!”
She lifted the Annals of Darrowshire, and I watched in silent astonishment as new pages began to form at the end of the book—pages that had never existed before.
I had seen powerful magic before. I had witnessed miracles through the Light.
But this?
This was something else entirely.
Chromie’s golden eyes twinkled as she examined the newly formed pages.
“Ah! One of these passages tells of another Redpath—Carlin. He survived Joseph’s betrayal.”
I looked up. “Carlin?”
“Yes. And it seems he’s still alive. The book now tells us that Carlin Redpath is in the Plaguelands to the east, at Light’s Hope Chapel.”
She handed the book back to me with a grin.
“Take it and speak with him.”
I stared down at the Annals of Darrowshire, then back at her.
“Am I supposed to understand this magic?” I asked.
She simply giggled. “Not at all!”
I sighed. I had never seen a mage do something like this before.
But, I wasn’t about to quit now.
“Alright, Chromie. I’ll play along.”
373
She beamed. “Good! Light’s Hope Chapel is far— try not to get lost in time on the way!”
I frowned. “What does that even—”
But before I could finish, she had already turned away, flipping through the book as if I weren’t even there anymore.
With more questions than answers, I turned toward the eastern road.
To Light’s Hope Chapel I go.
The journey was long, the roads harsh and empty.
Once, these lands had been fertile, full of life—fields of golden wheat swaying in the summer breeze, villages bustling with the sounds of laughter and hard work.
Now, nothing remained but death and rot, a land poisoned by the Scourge’s unholy touch.
The air itself felt heavy, filled with the lingering echoes of a kingdom that no longer existed.
By the time I reached Light’s Hope Chapel, I felt the weight of the Plaguelands pressing on my shoulders.
I found Carlin Redpath among the ranks of the Argent Dawn, his armor battle-worn, his eyes hardened by years of war.
The moment he saw me approach, he straightened.
“You’ve come from the west?” His tone carried a mix of hope and dread.
“How fare the rest of Lordaeron?”
I took a breath, considering my words carefully.
“I know that Andorhal is lost,” he continued before I could answer, “but has the Scourge yet reached fair Tirisfal?”
I shook my head. “I don’t know.”
I had not been to Tirisfal Glades in years—not since the Forsaken claimed it as their own.
“Those lands are ruled by the Horde now,” I added, my voice even. “I have not been there in a long time.”
Carlin’s face darkened, but he said nothing.
Instead, his gaze fell on the large tome I carried.
“What is this book?”
I handed it to him. “The Annals of Darrowshire.”
His expression froze.
374
“Darrowshire… That was my home before the war. My home before the battle that destroyed it!”
He ran his fingers over the weathered pages, his voice almost distant, lost in memory.
Then, his eyes lifted to mine, filled with confusion.
“Why did you bring me this book?”
“I was told to,” I replied. “By a gnome named Chromie.”
His brow furrowed as he flipped through the pages—and then, his breath hitched.
“Look here!” He pointed at the last pages, his hands trembling.
“At the end, there are passages that tell tales of the days beyond the battle!”
His voice wavered.
“Here is a passage about me… and one about my brother, Joseph!”
He looked up at me, his eyes filled with disbelief.
“Is this book true?”
Carlin closed the tome slowly, his mind clearly racing.
When he spoke again, there was a quiet certainty in his voice.
“We must discover the truth.”
I nodded.
He turned the Annals of Darrowshire to a specific passage, his finger tracing the words.
“This book tells of the villains of that battle. It says that the ghoul lord, Horgus the Ravager, was destroyed by Alliance forces during the battle. His body was cast into a lake, northwest of Corin’s Crossing, and his skull remains there.”
His eyes narrowed as he read further.
“And here—Marduk the Black. He was never defeated, but his fabled sword was shattered and lost. The pieces lie at the bottom of the gorge west of Corin’s Crossing.”
He exhaled, then looked up at me.
“Retrieve these items, Paladin. I know not why, but I am certain their fate lies with you.”
I tightened my grip on my weapon.
“Very well,” I said, my voice firm.
“I shall see it done.”
375
With that, I turned to the wastelands once more, where the past refused to remain buried.
I knew these lands too well.
Before the war. Before the plague. Before everything changed.
I had played in these fields as a child, running barefoot through the tall grass, my laughter mixing with the songs of the birds that nested in the trees of eastern Lordaeron.
The air had once been fresh and clean, carrying the scent of wildflowers in the spring, of harvested wheat in the fall. The villages were full of life, the farmers tending their fields, the merchants calling out their wares, and the church bells ringing in the distance.
Now?
Now, all of it was gone.
I made my way northwest of Corin’s Crossing, toward the lake where Horgus the Ravager’s skull lay forgotten.
The water had once been clear, reflecting the sky like polished glass, a place where children played along the banks and fishermen cast their nets.
I remembered splashing in its waters, laughing with my friends, pretending we were knights of the Silver Hand slaying imaginary dragons.
But as I stood at the edge of the shore, I saw what the Scourge had done to it.
The water was blackened and still, thick with disease and rot. No fish swam, no ripples disturbed the surface. The trees along the banks stood dead and twisted, their branches hanging like skeletal fingers over the cursed waters.
The air was heavy, thick with the stench of decay, and I could hear them—whispers of the dead, faint, lingering echoes of those who had perished here.
I swallowed hard, forcing myself to step forward.
As I waded into the shallow waters, my boots sinking into the muck, I reached down—
And there it was.
The skull of Horgus the Ravager, half-buried beneath the filth of the lakebed, its jagged teeth still locked in a silent snarl.
I lifted it from the water, watching as blackened sludge dripped from its hollow sockets.
This was no longer the lake of my childhood.
It was a grave.
376
Leaving the lake behind, I made my way west, to the gorge where Marduk the Black’s shattered blade had fallen.
This place had once been a gentle valley, where wild horses roamed free, their manes catching the golden light of the setting sun.
I had ridden here as a boy, laughing as I raced with the other children, feeling the wind rush past me as my father called after me, pretending to scold me for straying too far from the village.
Now, I stood at the edge of a wasteland.
The gorge was a scar upon the land, its cliffs jagged and broken, the earth blackened and cracked as if poisoned from within.
There were no horses anymore, only the shattered remains of armor, rusted weapons, and long-dead bones.
The banners of Lordaeron still lay half-buried in the dirt, torn and faded, the symbol of a kingdom that no longer existed.
I descended carefully, stepping over twisted remains, until I reached the center of the gorge.
And there, among the wreckage of a battle long lost, lay the fragments of Marduk’s blade.
The metal was blackened and cracked, still humming with the foul magic of its former master.
I knelt, gathering the pieces, feeling the weight of all that had been lost.
This had once been a place of beauty, of life.
Now, it was nothing but ruin.
As I stood, the skull of a fallen ghoul lord in one hand and the shattered remains of a cursed sword in the other, I let out a long, slow breath.
I had seen what this land once was.
I had played in its fields, bathed in its waters, raced through its valleys.
And now, I walked through its ruins, carrying the remnants of its destruction.
But I would not let it end like this.
I would not forget what this place had once been.
Even if I was the last living soul who remembered—
I would carry its memory.
With one final glance at the wasted landscape, I turned my horse eastward.
Back to Carlin Redpath.
Back to Light’s Hope Chapel.
Back to the fight to restore what little could still be saved.
377
When I returned to Light’s Hope Chapel, Carlin Redpath was waiting.
His eyes immediately fell upon the items I carried—the skull of Horgus the Ravager and the shattered sword of Marduk the Black.
“Did you find the skull and the sword, Paladin?” he asked, his voice measured but expectant.
I nodded and laid them before him.
“You found them!” he said, his voice tinged with both relief and unease. “Well done!”
He stared at the relics, running his fingers over them carefully.
“These hold a power I do not fully understand,” he murmured. “A power you will one day harness.”
I wasn’t sure what he meant by that. Power? Harness? These were the remnants of monsters—what use could they have?
But I saw it in his face—this was not just about magic. These relics carried more than corruption.
They carried memories.
“They also bring dark memories to my mind,” he continued, his eyes distant. “Memories of death and treachery… and of the last night of Darrowshire.”
I waited in silence as Carlin gathered his thoughts, staring at the relics as if they might whisper to him.
Then, he spoke again.
“Chromie said the relics you gathered are reagents to a powerful spell, and one more is required.”
I frowned. “Another?”
He nodded and produced a faintly glowing crystal, handing it to me.
“Take this crystal and hunt the Scourge champions who took part in the battle of Darrowshire.”
I turned the crystal over in my hand. Its pale light pulsed faintly, giving off a strange warmth, completely unlike the cold, deathly energy of the Plaguelands.
“The crystal is enchanted; if a champion took part in the battle, then when you pass the crystal over its skull, it will resonate.”
I exhaled sharply.
“So, I need to collect these resonating skulls.”
Carlin nodded grimly.
378
“Go, Paladin. You’ll find the Scourge champions in the Noxious Glade to the north.”
I clenched my fist around the crystal, shaking my head slightly.
Another mission. Another battle. Another step deeper into a war that never seemed to end.
But I had come too far to turn back now.
This had to lead somewhere.
With one final nod to Carlin, I mounted my horse, turned north, and rode toward the Noxious Glade.
The “Scourge champions” I was sent to hunt turned out to be nothing more than skeletons in rusted armor, barely strong enough to hold their weapons upright.
They had no formation, no strategy, no sign of the warriors they had once been.
These were not true soldiers—just remnants, barely clinging to the will of their long dead masters.
This wasn’t even a battle.
One strike from my mace or a blast of Holy Light, and they crumbled where they stood.
If this was the Scourge’s army, then their power was dwindling in these lands.
It didn’t take long to gather the skulls Carlin had asked for.
With the enchanted crystal in hand, I moved swiftly through the rotting corpses, collecting the ones that resonated with the magic of Darrowshire’s past.
Once I had what I needed, I turned my horse back south, heading once more toward Light’s Hope Chapel.
As I approached, Carlin Redpath was waiting.
The moment I dismounted, he stepped forward, eyes locked onto the bundle of skulls I carried.
“Do you have them?” he asked urgently.
I nodded. “Here you have it.”
Carlin exhaled, almost in relief, as if he had been holding his breath for days.
“You found them! Wonderful!”
He took the skulls from me, holding them carefully, his expression filled with a strange mix of sorrow and reverence.
“Although I don’t fully understand how they can help us, I feel their power.” He ran his fingers lightly over the relics, as if he could sense the history in them. “And I know in my bones that they are linked to my home village of Darrowshire.”
His gaze lifted to me, and in his eyes, I saw a man haunted by the past.
379
“You have gathered many relics of the battle of Darrowshire. Each time you returned with more, my heart yearned for my village… yearned to protect it from its fate.”
He let out a heavy sigh, shaking his head.
“I know that cannot be,” he admitted.
Then, after a brief pause, he added, “But Chromie, that strange gnome in Andorhal, tells me it is possible. She says you can save Darrowshire!”
I stiffened.
Save Darrowshire?
“She asked me to gather together the relics, and to have you bring them to her.”
He turned, carefully wrapping the relics in cloth before handing them back to me.
“She awaits you in the ruined inn of Andorhal.”
I stared at the bundle of artifacts in my hands—the skull of a ghoul lord, the broken sword of a dark knight, the skulls of the damned.
They were nothing but remnants of the past.
And yet…
Somehow, I was being asked to change that past.
I wasn’t sure how.
I wasn’t sure why.
But I had come this far.
For now, I needed rest.
And a proper meal.
I found a place among the Argent Dawn soldiers, settling in by the campfire, where the air was thick with the scent of roasted meat and warm bread.
It was a rare thing—to sit among comrades, to hear laughter, quiet conversation, and the clinking of metal plates instead of the usual sounds of battle and death.
As I ate, we shared stories—if they could even be called that.
Tales of near-death encounters, of cursed ruins, of things we had seen that no man should ever see.
Some spoke of home, asking if anyone had news from their families, their villages, their cities.
Many had been here too long, their memories of a normal life fading like whispers on the wind.
So, I asked about Stormwind.
380
One of the men, a veteran knight, nodded.
“Stormwind is strong, as always,” he said. “But the kingdom’s attention is far from here.”
I raised a brow. “Oh? What do you mean?”
He leaned forward, lowering his voice slightly.
“Word is, the armies have marched to Silithus.”
That caught my attention.
“Silithus? Why?”
“Something about a raid. About the gates of Ahn’Qiraj.”
I frowned.
I had heard tales of such a place—an ancient, cursed city, buried beneath the sands, home to horrors unseen by men for generations.
“They say the old insect gods stir,” another soldier muttered, shaking his head. “The Silithid are swarming, and the armies of Azeroth are preparing for something big.”
I exhaled, staring into the dancing flames of the fire.
The world never stopped moving.
While we fought against the Scourge in the Plaguelands, others were fighting battles of their own—against dragons, monsters, forgotten evils.
No matter.
That fight was not mine.
Right now, I only needed one thing.
A good night’s sleep before continuing my own assignment.
I finished my meal, stretched my aching limbs, and let the warmth of the fire lull me into a rare, fleeting peace.
At the first rays of sunlight, I gathered my supplies, secured my armor, and mounted my horse.
It was time to return to Andorhal.
Time to meet Chromie, again.
By the time I reached the ruined inn, the air still carried the chill of early morning, but Chromie was already waiting, her small form perched upon a stack of books, as if she had been expecting me for hours.
She smiled brightly the moment I entered.
381
“Ah, there you are!” she said cheerfully. “I have been in contact with your friend Carlin.”
I stiffened slightly.
“He feels great pain for the doom of his village,” she continued, her tone shifting, becoming almost melancholic. “But he speaks very highly of you and knows that you can set things right.”
I let out a slow breath.
“I have no idea how,” I muttered.
Chromie just giggled. “Oh, but I’m drifting from the subject at hand…” She clapped her hands together and looked up at me expectantly.
“Paladin, do you have the relics I asked for?”
I unfastened the bundle from my pack and placed it before her.
“Yes.”
Her golden eyes lit up, and she eagerly unwrapped the cloth, inspecting each item carefully.
“Ah yes, there they are!” she exclaimed. “Together, they weave a powerful spell— one that will raise the spirits of Darrowshire.”
I frowned. “Raise the spirits?”
Chromie nodded, as if what she was saying was the most natural thing in the world.
“With that spell—and with a little luck—we can save Joseph Redpath!”
I stared.
I had heard many insane plans in my time. But this?
This sounded impossible.
Yet, I had come this far.
Chromie hopped down from her perch and looked up at me with absolute certainty in her voice.
“Now, Paladin, you will take part in the Battle of Darrowshire, and you will save Joseph Redpath.”
I tensed.
“What?”
“Listen carefully, now!” she said, wagging a small finger at me. “Place this relic bundle in the Darrowshire town square, and the spirits of Darrowshire will rise.”
I clenched my jaw. The spirits will rise.
382
I had seen ghosts before, I had spoken to the dead—but what she was describing was something else entirely.
She continued, unfazed by my hesitation.
“Join their battle and assure that these two things come to pass:”
She held up one finger.
“First, Davil must survive beyond the death of Horgus.”
Then a second finger.
“Second, Redpath must survive to be corrupted, then defeated.”
I crossed my arms. “So… I have to let him be corrupted?”
She nodded. “Yes. That is the way it happened, and it must happen that way again.”
My stomach tightened at the thought, but I remained silent.
Chromie smiled.
“After you defeat the corrupted Redpath, his spirit will be saved.”
Her eyes softened slightly.
“When that happens, speak with him, then return to his daughter, Pamela.”
I let the words settle in my mind.
Return to Pamela.
Return to the little girl who had been waiting for her father all these years.
I still wasn’t sure if Chromie was serious—if she was truly suggesting that I was about to step into the past and change the fate of an entire village.
But I had come this far.
I couldn’t turn back now.
With one final breath, I reached out and took the relic bundle from her hands.
“Then I will see it done.”
I did as Chromie instructed.
And for my surprise and awe, I saw them—the spirits of the fallen, reliving their last stand in Darrowshire.
The battle that had doomed this village was now unfolding before my very eyes.
Phantom soldiers and Scourge warriors clashed in the streets, their weapons meeting with ghostly echoes of steel upon steel. The undead roared, their decayed forms lunging at defenders of a town long lost to history.
But I wasn’t here just to watch.
I was here to change the past.
383
I stayed back at first, letting events unfold as they once did. I had to ensure that Davil survived past the death of Horgus, that Joseph Redpath lived long enough to be corrupted.
Even as my instincts screamed at me to intervene, I held back, watching as the battle played out exactly as it had before.
Then, when the time came, I stepped in.
When Horgus the Ravager unleashed his dark fury upon the town, I charged forward, calling upon the Light, my mace striking with righteous fire.
“This time, you fall by the hands of the living!” I roared.
Davil fought bravely beside me, his blade cleaving through the monstrous ghoul lord.
With a final strike, we brought him down—sealing his fate once more.
But I could not celebrate.
Joseph Redpath—a noble man, a protector of his people—fell to the Scourge’s corruption, his form twisting into a monstrous reflection of himself.
The defenders cried out in horror, their commander now their enemy.
And then, it was my turn.
With a heavy heart, I stepped forward.
“Redpath!” I called, my voice firm but sorrowful.
His eyes, now clouded with undeath, locked onto me.
A howl of rage and torment erupted from his throat as he charged, his blade blackened by dark magic.
I met him head-on.
I blocked his first strike with my shield, the impact shaking my arm to the bone.
He was strong, but he fought without focus—driven by rage, by corruption.
I countered, striking his armor with my mace, holy energy surging through my weapon.
The battle was brutal, each blow echoing through the ghostly battlefield.
Then, with a final prayer to the Light, I raised my weapon one last time—
And struck him down.
Joseph Redpath collapsed, his form shimmering as the corruption left his body.
A moment passed.
Then, from the fallen shell, a new figure rose—Joseph, as he once was.
384
His spirit stood before me, his eyes clear, his face filled with peace.
It was over.
The battle of Darrowshire was finished.
I stood there for a long moment, surrounded by the echoes of a past now rewritten.
But I wasn’t done yet.
It was time to find little Pamela.
I returned to Pamela’s home, where her small ghostly figure was waiting, standing in the doorway of her ruined house.
Her eyes brightened as I approached.
“I think I heard ghosts outside,” she said, her voice still carrying the innocence of a child. “They whisper scary things to me…”
She paused, then suddenly beamed.
“The fighting is over!” she exclaimed.
Her little hands clutched her doll, holding it tight.
“I heard my daddy whisper to me.”
I stiffened.
“He scared away all the ghosts, and he says he’s coming home! I’m so happy!”
Her smile was so pure, so full of hope—it almost made me forget where we were.
She looked up at me, her expression filled with joy.
“He also said I should welcome you if you came to our house, so I made some tea!”
I swallowed hard, my chest tightening at the thought.
A child’s mind, still living in the echo of the past.
“I hope you like lots of sugar!” she giggled.
Then, suddenly, she held something small and metal in her hands.
“Daddy told me to give you this key.”
I blinked.
“He said it opens a chest out back behind the house.”
She placed it in my palm, her fingers light and cold as mist.
“He also wanted me to thank you.”
She tilted her head.
385
“Did you do a favor for him? Did you tell him you found my doll?”
I took a steady breath, feeling the weight of everything I had done settle upon me.
“Something like that, Pamela.”
She smiled brightly and clapped her hands.
“Well, here’s the key. And thank you, Paladin. Thank you! You’re a very nice man!”
I swallowed down the lump in my throat and nodded.
“You’re welcome, Pamela.”
Then, I turned toward the back of the house, the key warm in my grasp.
The chest was old and covered in grime, tucked away beneath the remains of a crumbling shed.
The metal lock was rusted, its surface worn by time and decay—yet the key fit perfectly.
With a click, the lock turned.
I lifted the heavy lid, revealing a single item inside.
A ring.
It was beautiful, even after all these years—crafted from silver, with a large sapphire gemstone set in its center, its edges lined with intricate engravings of swirling patterns.
It was the kind of ring noble families wore—something that had once belonged to a man of honor, of love.
A wedding ring.
I carefully picked it up, turning it over in my fingers, feeling its cold weight.
I knew exactly who was going to receive it.
Adele.
The perfect wedding gift.
Something from Lordaeron’s past, carried into our future.
With one final glance toward Pamela’s home, I placed the ring safely in my pack and turned away.
The ghosts of Darrowshire could finally rest.
And now, so could I.
The days passed quickly, yet slowly all the same.
386
Each morning, I would wake to the same grey skies, the same cold winds, the same distant cries of the restless dead.
Each night, I would fall asleep to the knowledge that while we had cleansed the land today, the Scourge would rise again tomorrow.
A never-ending war.
For months, I had fought, patrolled, and endured.
I had walked through the ruins of my homeland, faced the ghosts of the past, and fought battles that seemed impossible to win.
I had watched men and women lose themselves to despair, their hope fading like the light of a dying candle.
And yet—
I had also seen acts of courage, moments of brotherhood and sacrifice, and people who still stood firm against the darkness, even knowing they could never truly defeat it.
I had changed here.
I could feel it in my bones, in my very soul.
The man who had arrived in Chillwind Camp all those months ago was not the same man who was leaving now.
I had come here as a soldier, a Paladin of Stormwind.
I was leaving as something more.
I had seen the worst of what the world could become, and I had endured.
But most importantly—
For the first time in years, I was not leaving with loss in my heart.
This time, I was not running away from the past.
This time, I was walking toward a future.
The morning of my departure, I reported one last time to Commander Valorfist.
He looked up as I approached, a rare small smile forming beneath his grizzled beard.
I gave a respectful nod. “Commander.”
He folded his arms, studying me.
“You’ll be missed, Paladin. You fought well here.”
I met his gaze. “The fight isn’t over, sir. But I’ve done my part, for now.”
He exhaled, nodding in understanding.
“Hope we see you again.” He extended his gauntleted hand.
387
I clasped it firmly.
“May the Light guide your path, Commander.”
And with that, I turned to the men I had fought beside for months.
There were farewells, pats on the back, and quiet nods exchanged between warriors who understood what it meant to stand on the same battlefield.
The war would continue without me—but I had earned my leave.
I had a family waiting for me.
I mounted my faithful steed, took one last look at Chillwind Camp, then turned south.
This time, I was not fleeing from a doomed kingdom.
This time, I was not riding toward uncertainty.
This time, I had a home to return to, a family.
This time, I had a purpose.
And with that, I rode to Southshore—where my journey home would begin.
I missed my family so much.
The journey on the ship felt like it took a lifetime, each wave dragging out the hours as I stood at the edge of the deck, staring at the horizon, willing Stormwind to appear faster.
I longed to kiss Adele again, to feel her warmth, her touch, her love.
I longed to hold my son Marcus in my arms, to see his tiny hands reach for me, to hear his laughter.
“Soon,” I whispered to myself. “Soon.”
And then, at last—
The city came into view.
The towering white walls, the banners of gold and blue waving in the wind, the bustling harbor filled with life.
The moment the ship docked, I ran.
I didn’t stop.
I pushed past merchants, sailors, and guards, ignoring their calls as I rushed through the crowded streets of Stormwind.
Straight to our home.
But she wasn’t there.
388
Without hesitation, I turned and headed for the alchemist’s shop—the place where she worked, where she had found a purpose.
The scent of potions, herbs, and strange reagents filled the air as I stepped inside the familiar alchemist’s store.
Behind the counter, Lilyssia Nightbreeze, the Night Elf alchemist, turned to greet me.
“Ah, Paladin!” she said warmly. “Good eyes see you. How were your adventures in Lordaeron?”
I opened my mouth to answer, but she stopped, studying my expression.
She saw it in my eyes—the longing, the impatience, the ache of being apart from Adele for too long.
She chuckled.
“Oh, don’t worry,” she said. “She went on an errand—she’ll be back soon. You can wait here. Just a little patience.”
I exhaled sharply, forcing myself to calm down.
“Okay, I’ll wait.”
But then, as I settled in, she glanced at my travel-worn satchel and raised an eyebrow.
“By the way… did you ever manage to find some herbs for me?”
Herbs?
For a moment, I had forgotten.
But then, as I reached into my pack, I smiled.
“Yes, actually, I did. Not sure if you need them all, but I was told at least one of these was very rare.”
I carefully unwrapped the cloth bundle, revealing the herbs I had gathered during my patrols in the Plaguelands.
Lilyssia’s eyes widened the moment she saw them.
“Oh my… you found a Black Lotus?” she whispered in astonishment. “That’s… impressive.”
I simply nodded.
She examined the bundle carefully, picking through the various plants I had collected.
Lilyssia carefully examined each herb, running her fingers over the leaves and stems, inspecting them with the practiced eye of a master alchemist.
“This one,” she said, holding up a dark green plant with twisted, jagged leaves, “is Plaguebloom. It thrives in tainted soil, absorbing the corruption around it. Dangerous if 389
handled carelessly, but properly refined, it is one of the best ingredients for antidotes and potions that grant resistance to poison and disease.”
She placed it aside and picked up a delicate white flower, its petals still faintly glowing under the shop’s light.
“Arthas’ Tears,” she murmured, her voice quieter now. “A sorrowful name, but a useful plant. It grows in places where death has left a mark—ruins, graveyards, battlefields. It is often used in cleansing potions, holy elixirs, and remedies meant to dispel dark magic. Paladins and priests value it highly.”
Next, she lifted a bundle of silver-streaked leaves, bound together by their thick stems.
“Mountain Silversage,” she said with approval. “A hardy plant, strong and long-lasting. This one is often brewed into elixirs that enhance stamina and endurance, used by warriors and adventurers who need to push their limits. It lasts a long time after being picked, making it a reliable choice for travel.”
Her hands moved to a plant with thin, delicate leaves that curled at the edges. As she crushed one lightly between her fingers, a faint, calming scent filled the air.
“Dreamfoil,” she said with a smile. “A versatile herb, found in many powerful potions. It is a key ingredient in mana elixirs and brews that sharpen the mind, allowing spellcasters to maintain their focus in battle. Its scent alone is known to clear the mind and ease stress.”
Finally, her fingers hovered over the last plant. She lifted it with great care, her expression shifting to one of admiration and caution.
“And this,” she said, her voice barely above a whisper, “is Black Lotus. Rare. Sought after. It only grows in places where the balance of magic has been disturbed, and even then, only in the deepest, most dangerous parts of the world.” She studied it for a moment, then looked at me with curiosity. “You must have been careful to find one and leave with your life. It is used in the most potent of elixirs, those that enhance magic itself or create powerful alchemical enchantments. Few ever come across it, and even fewer know how to use it properly.”
She set it down gently, then looked at me with approval.
“You have gathered well, Paladin. These are not just plants; they are the essence of the world’s magic, waiting to be shaped into something greater.”
“You have done well, Paladin,” she said with a satisfied nod. “Not everything you brought is in the best condition, but a good amount is still usable. You have a keen eye.”
She set the herbs aside, carefully arranging them for later use.
“And Adele,” she continued, a small smile on her lips. “She has been helping me a great deal. She is eager to learn, and that is good. To be a true alchemist, one must first be an expert in plants and herbs. She will surely learn much in time.”
I felt a warmth in my chest at her words.
390
Adele had always been determined, always chasing after knowledge and purpose. To know she was thriving here, carving her own path, filled me with pride.
“And here,” Lilyssia added, handing me the pouch of coins. “As promised. Good coin for your work.”
I glanced inside—more than I had expected.
“I may have to do this more often,” I said with a smirk.
She chuckled, shaking her head. “You are welcome to try, Paladin.”
And then—
I heard it.
The faint creak of the door, the sound of soft footsteps, the presence I could feel before I even turned around.
I knew who it was.
I turned—
And there she stood.
Adele.
My beloved.
The moment our eyes met, the world vanished.
The bustling city of Stormwind, the alchemist’s shop, the weight of months spent in the Plaguelands, the battles, the losses, the long nights of longing—none of it mattered anymore.
She was here.
And I—
I couldn’t wait another second.
I closed the distance between us in two quick steps, reaching for her as she rushed into my arms, pressing herself against me.
I held her tight, my arms wrapped around her as if letting go would mean losing her again.
She buried her face into my chest, gripping the fabric of my armor with trembling hands.
“I missed you,” she whispered, her voice shaking with emotion.
I pressed a kiss to her hair, her forehead, anywhere I could.
“And I missed you,” I murmured against her skin. “More than I can ever put into words.”
She pulled back just slightly, just enough for me to see the unshed tears in her eyes, the way she looked at me as if I was the only thing that mattered in this world.
And then, without hesitation, I cupped her face and kissed her.
391
It was desperate, full of longing, love, and relief—a kiss that spoke of months of separation, of whispered prayers that this moment would come.
Her fingers tangled in my hair as she kissed me back, as if she needed to make sure I was real.
And I was.
I was here.
Finally.
When we finally broke apart, she rested her forehead against mine, breathless, smiling through her tears.
“You’re home,” she whispered.
I brushed a stray lock of hair from her cheek, my heart so full it ached.
“Yes,” I said softly.
“I’m home.”
Then, Lilyssia said the words I had been waiting to hear.
“Adele, why don’t you take the rest of the day off? Be with your man—you deserve it.”
Adele turned to her with wide, surprised eyes, then back to me.
“Are you sure?” she asked.
Lilyssia chuckled, waving a hand dismissively. “You’ve worked hard, and I am not heartless. Go on.”
I didn’t wait for further convincing. “Thank you,” I said quickly, already reaching for Adele’s hand.
She laughed as I pulled her along. “You act like we won’t see each other again tomorrow.”
“Tomorrow is too far away,” I said, and together, we stepped out onto the streets of Stormwind.
From the alchemy shop, we made our way toward the Cathedral Square, where the orphanage stood.
The midday sun cast a golden glow over the city, and the air was filled with laughter and cheerful shouts as children ran across the cobbled square, playing games, chasing each other, and rolling wooden toy swords across the ground in mock battles.
Adele and I slowed our steps, watching them.
One boy, perhaps seven or eight years old, held a makeshift shield in one hand, raising it as another child swung at him with a stick shaped like a sword.
“I am Uther the Lightbringer!” he declared proudly.
392
His opponent, a girl with braided golden hair, twirled her own stick. “And I am a mage of Dalaran! You will never defeat me!”
Their laughter filled the air as they continued their playful duel.
Adele squeezed my hand gently.
“One day,” she said, softly, dreamily, “Marcus will be among them.”
I turned to look at her. “You think so?”
She nodded, her eyes filled with warmth. “I can already see it. He’ll be running across this square, making friends, playing knights and heroes. And he’ll look up to you.”
A warmth spread through my chest at the thought.
A child—a boy who still needed to be carried in my arms today—would one day stand on his own, his laughter joining these other children’s voices, playing without fear in a city that stood strong.
That was the future I wanted to fight for.
But suddenly—
“Look! A paladin!”
A small voice rang out, and before I could react, a group of children surrounded me, their eyes wide with excitement.
“Show us a spell!” one boy said.
“Make the Light shine!” another begged.
A tiny girl, no older than four, clutched my leg. “Can you make my teddy bear glow?” she asked, holding up a worn-looking stuffed animal.
Adele laughed beside me, covering her mouth as the children all clamored at once, their eagerness filling the air.
I chuckled, shaking my head. “Alright, alright,” I said, raising my hands. “One at a time.”
I focused, calling upon the Light, and let a gentle, warm glow spread from my palms.
The children gasped in awe, their eyes reflecting the golden radiance.
Then, with a small pulse of energy, I sent tiny motes of light drifting through the air, twinkling like fireflies.
The children giggled and clapped, reaching out as the shimmering light danced around them.
“My teddy!” the little girl reminded me.
393
I smiled and lightly touched the stuffed bear, allowing a faint, gentle glow to surround it.
She gasped, hugging it tightly. “He’s magic now!”
Adele leaned toward me. “You’ve made their day.”
I gave her a playful smirk. “A paladin’s work is never done.”
We left the children still laughing and playing, making our way toward the orphanage and the Cathedral Crèche where Marcus was waiting.
Inside the orphanage, we were greeted by the head priestess in charge of the Cathedral Crèche—an elderly woman with soft grey hair and gentle blue eyes.
“Ah, you must be here for Marcus,” she said kindly. “Welcome back, Paladin. I am Sister Evelyne.”
I inclined my head respectfully. “Sister Evelyne. Thank you for watching over him.”
She smiled. “It is our honor to care for the little ones, especially the child of a noble paladin. Your son is a blessing.”
She led us into a quiet, sunlit room, where the air was thick with holy magic, humming like a warm, comforting embrace.
It wasn’t just a place of care—this was a place of Light.
Soft golden auras hovered over some of the cribs, filling the space with an almost divine presence. The babies here were not just cared for, but protected, blessed, watched over.
And then, I saw him.
Marcus.
He was bigger than when I had left—no longer the tiny newborn I had held before my journey to the Plaguelands.
His chubby little hands reached toward the air, his bright blue eyes wide as he looked around the room, taking in the glowing light that filled it.
When he saw me, he froze for a second, as if trying to understand.
Then, his face lit up, and he laughed, reaching toward me with both hands.
I stepped forward, my chest tight with emotion, and lifted him into my arms.
“Marcus,” I whispered, holding him close, feeling his tiny warmth against me.
His tiny fingers clutched at my armor, his cheeks rosy and full, his laughter soft and pure.
He had grown.
He was healthy.
He was safe.
394
Adele stepped closer, running her fingers gently over Marcus’ hair as he gurgled happily between us.
“You’ve been in good hands,” I murmured, pressing a soft kiss to his forehead.
Adele nodded, her eyes misty. “Welcome home,” she whispered.
I held my family close, standing in a place filled with Light, with warmth, with love.
For months, I had fought in a land of death and despair, wondering if I would ever make it back.
But I was here now.
This was my reward.
This was my purpose.
This was home.
After thanking Sister Evelyne, we left the Cathedral Crèche, making our way through the streets of Stormwind—not as a lone soldier returning from war, but as a father, a man with a future ahead of him.
Adele walked at my side, her fingers laced with mine, and Marcus rested peacefully in my arms, his tiny hand clutching a piece of my cloak.
For the first time in what felt like forever, I had nothing to rush toward.
No battle to fight. No undead to slay. No mission pulling me away.
For the first time, I was simply going home.
Once at home, I took off my gear and turned to Adele.
“Adele, I have a surprise for you.”
She looked at me, curiosity flickering in her eyes. “What is it, my love?”
I reached into my satchel and pulled out a small silver locket, its surface still gleaming despite the years. The symbol of Lordaeron was engraved upon it—a relic of a kingdom long gone, yet still carried in the hearts of those who once called it home.
I held it out to her.
“I found this,” I said softly. “Inside your home. In Stratholme.”
Her breath hitched.
Her hands covered her mouth, her eyes filling with tears before she even touched it.
“Tune… by the Light, how is this possible?”
395
Her fingers finally closed around it, holding it as if it were the most precious thing in the world.
Her shoulders shook, her tears falling freely now. She turned to me, her expression a mix of shock, sorrow, and disbelief.
“My love… did you… you went inside Stratholme?”
I sighed and nodded.
“I had to,” I said gently. “It was part of my mission. I fought there. I saw what it had become. I found this in your family’s home.”
She clutched the locket tightly, pressing it against her chest as if it could bring back the people she lost, the home she would never see again.
She sank onto the edge of the bed, staring down at it.
“This locket…” she whispered, running her fingers over its worn edges. “My father gave it to me when I was just a child. He told me that as long as I carried it, I would always remember where I came from. That no matter where life took me, I would always be a daughter of Lordaeron.”
She opened it with trembling hands. Inside, the tiny portrait of her family remained untouched—a faded but still clear image of her father and mother standing beside her younger self.
A sob escaped her lips.
“I thought this was lost forever,” she murmured.
She traced the faces inside the locket, as if committing them to memory all over again.
For the first time since I had returned, I saw not just my beloved Adele, but the child who had once lived in Stratholme, before the fires, before the plague, before everything was taken from her.
I knelt beside her, placing a hand on her trembling fingers, wrapping mine around hers.
“You still carry Lordaeron with you,” I whispered. “You always have. This locket… it’s just a reminder. But your home, your family, your past—they live in you.”
She leaned into me, pressing her face against my shoulder, her tears warm against my skin.
“I miss them,” she whispered.
I held her close, running my fingers through her hair, letting her cry.
“I know,” I said softly. “I know.”
The past was gone, but the memories remained.
And now, she had a piece of it back.
“I have more, Adele, my love.”
396
She looked up at me, her tear-streaked face filled with wonder.
“What?” she asked softly, as if unsure how much more her heart could take.
I took a breath, steadying myself.
“It is time,” I said.
“Time for what?” she asked, her voice barely above a whisper.
I took her hands in mine, holding them gently yet firmly, letting her feel the certainty in my touch.
“You have been my fiancée for years now,” I said. “Our lives are stable, we are safe, we have a home. It’s time, Adele. Time for us to be married.”
Her eyes widened, and for a moment, she simply stared at me, her lips parted, as if she couldn’t believe what she had just heard.
Then, her hands flew to her mouth, and fresh tears spilled down her cheeks.
“Are you sure?” she choked out.
I smiled, wiping away one of her tears with my thumb.
“Yes,” I whispered. “Tomorrow, I will ask my commander for an extended leave, and we will go to the Cathedral of Light to speak with the priests. We will arrange the ceremony.”
She let out a shaky laugh, half joy, half disbelief.
And then, I pulled out the small pouch of coins I had earned from selling the herbs I had gathered.
“Plus, we have this,” I told her, holding it up.
She blinked at the pouch, then looked back at me.
“You got all of that from herbs?”
I chuckled.
“You taught me well,” I said. “I just did what you told me—it’s all thanks to you.”
She let out a soft sob, her hands clutching my tunic as she buried her face into my chest.
I held her, feeling her warmth, her love, her joy.
Her fingers tightened against me, as if anchoring herself to this moment—to us.
“By the Light, I love you,” she whispered against my chest.
“And I love you,” I murmured, pressing a kiss to the top of her head.
She pulled back just enough to look up at me, her eyes shining with emotion.
397
And then, she kissed me—deeply, desperately, as if sealing our fate with that one moment.
I held her close, feeling her heartbeat against mine, her love wrapping around me like a blessing.
This was our moment.
A moment meant to last forever.
The next morning, just as the first light of dawn crept through the windows, there was a f irm knock on the door.
I rose to my feet and opened it to find a young Stormwind soldier, standing upright with a sealed letter in hand.
“Sergeant Paladin Tune,” he said, saluting sharply. “You are summoned to the Commander’s office immediately.”
Adele appeared behind me, concern flickering in her eyes.
“What is it?” she asked.
I frowned, breaking the seal on the letter. “Should be nothing,” I said, scanning the brief message inside. “Maybe they just want reports from Lordaeron.”
I turned back to her with a small smile. “I’ll be back soon.”
She nodded, though I could still see worry in her eyes as I stepped out.
As I entered the Stormwind military headquarters, the air was heavier than usual, f illed with the murmurs of officers and the occasional clang of armored boots against stone.
When I stepped inside the Commander’s office, I immediately straightened my posture.
A room full of officers awaited me—senior knights, decorated war veterans, and even paladins of high standing.
At the head of the room stood my commanding officer, his eyes locked on me with a look of measured pride.
“Sergeant Paladin Tune,” he said, his voice carrying across the room. “Welcome.”
I stepped forward, saluting. “Commander.”
The room was silent for a moment, and then the Commander nodded.
“You have served with honor, bravery, and unwavering dedication, both to your brothers-in-arms and to the people of Azeroth,” he began.
I kept my stance firm, listening as he continued.
“Your actions in Lordaeron have reached beyond our city, beyond our kingdom. Your valor in the battle against the Scarlet Crusade within the ruined city of Stratholme, your 398
defiance against the demon Balnazzar, and your role in returning Tirion Fordring from exile—these are deeds that will be remembered.”
There was a murmur of approval from the gathered officers, but I remained still, absorbing the weight of his words.
The Commander stepped forward, his eyes steady.
“You make your order and the Stormwind Army proud, Sergeant.”
He held out a small, finely crafted medal, its silver surface engraved with the crest of Stormwind and the sigil of the Silver Hand.
“Well done.”
I stepped forward, accepting the medal with both hands, feeling its weight—not just in metal, but in meaning.
This was not just a commendation for battle.
It was recognition.
It was honor.
I clenched the medal tightly in my fist, then stood at attention, raising my hand to my chest in a firm salute.
“Thank you, sir,” I said, my voice steady.
The Commander nodded, then took a step back.
“Your deeds are known, Sergeant,” he said. “And now, they are honored.”
With that, the room erupted in applause, the sound of armored hands clapping against metal filling the hall.
I stood there, feeling the weight of it all.
The battles, the sacrifices, the long road that had led me here.
And yet—
Despite all the honor, despite the recognition, my greatest reward was still waiting for me.
And her name was Adele.
I took a breath, feeling the weight of the moment. This was the perfect opportunity, and I wasn’t going to let it pass.
“Sir,” I said, stepping forward. “I would like to ask for an extended leave, if possible.”
The Commander raised an eyebrow, waiting for me to continue.
“So I can marry my beloved,” I said. “She has been my fiancée for years, and I feel now would be the right time.”
399
For a moment, the room was silent. Then, a slow smile spread across the Commander’s face.
“Sergeant,” he said, his voice filled with approval. “If anyone deserves it, it’s you.”
There were nods of agreement from the officers and paladins around the room.
“As long as I’m invited to the ceremony, of course,” he added with a chuckle.
I smiled. “Everyone here is invited.”
A round of congratulations and good-natured laughter filled the room, the tension of the earlier commendation replaced with warmth and camaraderie.
“Thank you again, sir,” I said, saluting once more.
“Go, Paladin,” the Commander said. “Enjoy your time. The battlefield will wait.”
And with that, I turned and headed home—to give Adele the news.
As soon as I stepped inside, Adele turned to greet me, her eyes immediately falling on the medal pinned to my tunic.
She gasped, stepping forward, her fingers lightly tracing the engraved crest.
“By the Light… what is this?”
“A commendation,” I said, smiling. “For my service in Lordaeron. But more importantly—”
I reached for her hands, holding them between mine.
“I got permission from my Commander for an extended leave.”
Her breath caught, her eyes widening in realization.
“You mean—?”
I nodded.
“We’re getting married, Adele. It’s time.”
She let out a sob of happiness, covering her mouth before throwing herself into my arms.
I held her tightly as she laughed and cried at the same time, clutching onto me like she never wanted to let go.
“Finally,” she whispered against my chest.
“Get Marcus,” I said softly, running my fingers through her hair. “We’re going to the Cathedral—right now.”
She pulled back just enough to look at me, pure joy in her tear-streaked face.
“Yes,” she whispered. “Let’s go.”
400
The grand halls of the Cathedral of Light were bathed in golden radiance, the towering stained-glass windows casting shimmering colors across the polished stone f loor.
Priests and priestesses moved quietly through the halls, their whispers blending into the soft hymns echoing from within the great chamber.
With Marcus cradled in Adele’s arms, we approached one of the senior priests of the Cathedral.
An elderly, wise-looking man in flowing white and gold robes turned toward us, his calm eyes filled with Light’s wisdom.
It was High Priest Rohan.
“Paladin,” he greeted me, his voice kind yet filled with authority.
“High Priest,” I said, bowing respectfully.
His gaze flickered to Adele and the child in her arms, then back to me.
“How may the Light guide you today?”
I took a deep breath, then spoke firmly.
“I wish to arrange a wedding,” I said. “To stand before the Light and take Adele as my wife.”
The High Priest’s expression warmed into a gentle smile.
“It will be an honor, Paladin,” he said. “The Light smiles upon your union.”
The next few days were a blur of preparations, laughter, and anticipation.
I took Adele to see Elaine Trias, one of the most skilled dressmakers in Stormwind.
“Get the best dress,” I told her, my voice firm with certainty. “Anything you want.”
She turned to me, her eyes shimmering with emotion, a mix of joy, disbelief, and excitement.
I had seen her smile many times before, but never like this.
The next days were filled with purpose—sending invitations to my comrades in the army, fellow paladins, and the friends who had fought beside me.
Adele invited her closest friends, including Lilyssia Nightbreeze, her mentor and friend at the alchemist shop.
Every moment felt unreal, as if we were living in a dream.
And then—
On the third day, beneath the towering spires of the Cathedral of Light, it finally happened.
401
The grand doors of the Cathedral of Light stood open, golden sunlight pouring through the stained-glass windows as the bells tolled softly in the distance.
The air was filled with sacred hymns, voices of the clergy whispering blessings upon those who entered.
The grand hall had been adorned with white and gold banners, fresh flowers arranged with care along the pews.
Paladins in ceremonial armor stood at attention, their shining plates reflecting the f lickering candlelight of the great Cathedral.
At the altar, standing tall in my polished armor, I waited.
My heart pounded with a feeling unlike any battle, any war, any fight I had ever faced.
Then, as the music shifted—
She appeared.
Adele.
Dressed in a gown of the purest white, woven with delicate silver embroidery, her dark hair cascading down in soft waves, adorned with small silver accents.
She looked like a vision—like the very Light itself had shaped her for this moment.
With Marcus in her arms, she walked toward me, tears shining in her eyes as she smiled.
I felt my breath catch, my chest tightening with a wave of emotion so strong I nearly forgot to breathe.
This was real.
She was here.
We were finally here.
As she reached the altar, a priest stepped forward—High Priest Rohan, one of the Cathedral’s most revered voices of the Light.
He smiled warmly, his gaze filled with wisdom and kindness.
“Paladin Tune,” he said. “Adele. You stand before the Light, before your friends, before all that is sacred, to bind your souls in union. The Light is a path of devotion, of unwavering faith, of service to others. And so too is love.”
Adele and I turned to face each other, hands clasped between us.
“Do you, Tune, take Adele as your wife, to walk beside her in honor, in love, and in faith, through all trials and triumphs?”
I swallowed hard, my voice steady but thick with emotion.
“I do.”
Rohan turned to Adele.
402
“And do you, Adele, take Tune as your husband, to stand with him in love and faith, and walk the path the Light sets before you?”
Tears slipped down her cheeks, but her smile never wavered.
“I do,” she whispered.
I reached into my satchel and pulled forth the silver ring I had carried all this time.
The ring from Darrowshire, once belonging to a man who lost everything, now becoming a symbol of hope, of love, of a future reclaimed.
I took her hand, gently sliding it onto her finger, watching as it settled perfectly— meant to be.
With that, High Priest Rohan lifted his hands.
“Then by the Light’s blessing, by the oaths you have spoken, let it be known to all that you are now husband and wife.”
A pause—
And then—
“You may now share your first kiss as one.”
I didn’t wait.
I lifted her into my arms, claiming her lips with all the love, all the longing, all the years we had waited for this moment.
The Cathedral erupted into cheers, my comrades clapping their armored hands together, the paladins saluting, Adele’s friends crying and laughing all at once.
Marcus, held now by Lilyssia, giggled at the sound, his small hands reaching toward us as if he understood.
I held Adele close, pressing one last kiss to her forehead.
“We did it,” I whispered against her hair.
She smiled up at me, her fingers tightening in mine.
“Yes,” she whispered back. “We did.”
With the Cathedral’s blessings behind us, we made our way to the open courtyard near the Stormwind Barracks, where a great feast had been prepared.
Long wooden tables lined the stone courtyard, filled with roasted meats, fresh bread, honeyed fruits, and the finest ales Stormwind had to offer.
The soldiers and paladins I had fought beside raised their mugs in a great toast, voices ringing into the night.
403
“A toast to Sergeant Tune and his bride! May their love stand as strong as the gates of Stormwind!”
Laughter, stories, and the warmth of family and comrades filled the air.
Adele and I sat together, our fingers entwined, watching as Marcus laughed in the arms of those who had become our family.
I looked around at the faces that surrounded me—faces that had once been only comrades, now becoming brothers and sisters in a different way.
I raised my mug and silently thanked the Light.
For guiding me through war and loss. For bringing me back to love and life. For giving me a family, a home, and a future.
I turned to Adele, pressing a soft kiss to her knuckles, smiling as she laughed at some joke Lilyssia had made.
This was it.
My greatest victory.
Not the battles I had fought. Not the enemies I had slain. Not the medals on my chest.
But this moment.
A wedding. A family. A home.
By the Light’s grace, I had been blessed.
The next day marked the beginning of our Marriage Rest—a time for us to step away from duty, from battles, from everything that had consumed our lives for so long.
Adele had spent much time gathering herbs in Elwynn Forest, learning from her alchemist mentor, but I wanted her to see more—to know what else was out there beyond the streets of Stormwind.
So, for the first time, we set out as a family—Adele, Marcus, and I—toward Ironforge.
We took the Deeprun Tram, Adele’s first time riding the underground marvel crafted by gnome engineering.
She clutched Marcus tightly in her arms as the tram hummed to life, the tunnels rushing past in a blur of stone and steel.
“I can’t believe this,” she whispered, eyes wide as she took in the speed, the intricate machinery lining the walls, the glow of the lamps that illuminated the underground passage.
I smiled.
404
“You’ve seen magic, potions, and even the wonders of alchemy,” I said. “Now you see gnomish ingenuity at its finest.”
As the tram slowed to a stop, the air changed—from the crisp, clean breeze of Stormwind to the deep warmth of Ironforge, carrying the scent of smoke, stone, and metal.
And then, we stepped into the heart of the mountain.
Ironforge was a fortress of stone and fire, carved deep within the snowy peaks of Dun Morogh.
Massive pillars of carved rock stretched into the high ceilings, glowing braziers lined the streets, and the air thrummed with the ringing of hammers upon anvils.
Adele’s breath caught in her throat as she took in the sheer scale of the city, unlike anything she had ever seen before.
“Stormwind is grand,” she murmured, “but this… this is something else.”
I grinned. “Come, there’s much to see.”
Our first stop was the Military Ward, where dwarven warriors sparred in training grounds, their battle axes clashing in fierce duels.
We watched as a grizzled dwarven commander barked orders at his recruits, drilling them in formation and tactics.
“These are some of the toughest warriors in the Alliance,” I told Adele.
She nodded, watching as a young recruit was knocked to the ground but got up again immediately.
“They fight with fire in their hearts,” she said. “Just like you.”
From there, we wandered toward the beating heart of Ironforge—the Great Forge.
A massive pool of molten metal burned in the center, its fiery glow lighting up the entire district.
Dwarven blacksmiths and artisans worked the anvils, shaping weapons and armor with precision and skill.
Adele’s eyes gleamed as she watched a master smith hammer glowing runes into the blade of a newly forged sword.
“The craftsmanship here is incredible,” she said.
I nodded. “Dwarves take great pride in their work. Every weapon, every piece of armor, is more than just steel—it’s a legacy.”
We stop to greet Jordan Stilwell, and give him the news of our marriage. Good to see you, kid, she said, and congrats.
Then I had to tell Adele how I meet him and what he crafted for me.
405
Next, we visited the Hall of Explorers, a great library and museum filled with ancient relics, maps, and books detailing the history of Azeroth.
Adele ran her fingers along the spines of old tomes, her curiosity as strong as ever.
“Look at this,” she said, pointing to an ancient dwarven artifact encased in glass. “It must be thousands of years old.”
I chuckled. “Dwarves love their history. Some spend their entire lives uncovering forgotten places and lost knowledge.”
A gnome scholar nearby overheard us and chimed in enthusiastically.
“Aye, that’s right! If ye ever get the chance, ye should visit Uldaman! Some o’ the oldest secrets of Azeroth lie beneath those sands!”
Adele laughed at his excitement, shaking her head. “Maybe one day.”
We then ventured into the Mystic Ward, where mages and priests of the Light practiced their craft.
Unlike Stormwind’s Mage Quarter, which was filled with human wizards and scholars, Ironforge’s magic users were dwarves, their spells infused with ancestral wisdom and elemental power.
We watched as a Runemaster traced glowing symbols into a stone tablet, causing it to pulse with arcane energy.
“Fascinating,” Adele murmured.
I glanced at her. “Getting ideas for your alchemy?”
She smirked. “Always.”
Finally, we explored Tinker Town, where the gnomes of Gnomeregan had made their home within Ironforge.
Bright gears, cogs, and strange machines filled the streets, and tinkers in goggles hurried past with blueprints and metal parts in hand.
Adele laughed as a small mechanical squirrel ran up to her, chittering in a metallic voice.
One of the gnome engineers rushed up, panting.
“Ah! Sorry, sorry! He got away from me!”
She handed the squirrel back, watching in amusement as the little machine twitched its nose before being tucked into the gnome’s satchel.
“This city never ceases to amaze me,” she said, shaking her head.
I wrapped an arm around her waist. “I told you there was more to Azeroth than forests and potions.”
She leaned against me, smiling. “And I’m glad you did.”
406
By the time night fell, we had seen every corner of Ironforge, and the great halls were alive with music and celebration.
Dwarves drank deep from their mugs, singing loud, raucous songs about battle, gold, and adventure.
A bard played a lively tune on a lute, and even Marcus clapped his tiny hands in delight.
Adele and I sat together in one of the great halls, drinking warm spiced cider, watching the revelry around us.
“You were right,” she admitted. “This was worth the trip.”
I kissed her temple. “And this is only the beginning.”
She looked at me, tilting her head. “Oh? Where to next, my Paladin?”
I smirked, finishing my drink.
“How about Darnassus?”
Her eyes widened with excitement. “Truly?”
I nodded.
“If we’re going to see the world, we might as well see it all.”
She laughed, resting her head against my shoulder.
After a peaceful night in Ironforge’s inn, we rose early in the morning and made our way back to Stormwind, eager to continue our journey.
We headed straight to the docks, searching for the first ship bound for Auberdine, in Darkshore.
The sea voyage was long but peaceful, the waves rocking the ship gently beneath us. Adele held Marcus in her arms, humming softly to him as he gazed in wonder at the endless blue expanse.
The ship finally docked in Auberdine, the small Night Elf harbor town in Darkshore.
Tall twisting trees lined the coast, and the scent of salt and pine filled the air.
We spent some time wandering the town, taking in the purple-hued architecture, the gentle glow of enchanted lanterns, and the eerie beauty of the Night Elves’ home.
As we passed a stable filled with magnificent, striped saber cats, Adele gasped, clutching my arm.
“Are those… tigers?” she asked in awe.
I chuckled. “Close. They’re called Nightsabers—the mounts of the Kaldorei.”
407
She stared at the sleek, muscular creatures with glowing eyes, her fingers itching to reach out and touch them.
“You’ve ridden one before?” she asked in disbelief.
I nodded with a grin. “Yes, during my time fighting alongside the Night Elves. It takes time to earn their trust, but once you do, there’s no faster or more loyal mount.”
Adele shook her head, still amazed.
“You never fail to surprise me, Paladin.”
From Auberdine, we boarded another ship, this one taking us to Teldrassil, the home of the Night Elves.
As we approached, Adele’s eyes widened in wonder.
“Is that… a tree?” she whispered.
I smiled. “Yes,” I said. “A World Tree. The Kaldorei built their city upon its branches.”
She turned back to the massive trunk rising from the sea, its towering canopy stretching beyond sight, shrouded in violet mist.
“I can’t believe something like this exists,” she murmured.
The ship docked at Rut’theran Village, the small settlement at the base of Teldrassil, where Night Elves prepared goods for transport and welcomed travelers from distant lands.
At the center of the village stood a glowing purple portal, humming with soft energy.
“This,” I said, gesturing toward it, “will take us to the city.”
Adele took a breath, gripping my hand tightly as we stepped through.
The moment we emerged from the portal, we were greeted by a breathtaking sight.
The Temple Gardens of Darnassus stretched before us—lush, moonlit groves, stone bridges over glistening ponds, and elegant archways bathed in the silver glow of enchanted lanterns.
The city felt timeless, untouched by the world outside.
“This place is… magical,” Adele whispered, holding Marcus close.
I smiled. “Come, let’s see it all.”
Our first stop was the grandest structure in the city, the Temple of the Moon—a towering marble sanctuary, where priestesses of Elune walked in silent grace, their f lowing robes catching the light.
Adele stood in awe of the massive statue of Elune, her hands clasped before her.
“This is their faith?” she asked.
408
“Yes,” I said. “They follow Elune, the Moon Goddess, who guides them through peace, wisdom, and the balance of night and day.”
She nodded, her gaze filled with curiosity and reverence.
We moved next to the Tradesmen’s Terrace, where Night Elf artisans and merchants displayed their fine silks, enchanted gems, and handcrafted wooden carvings.
Adele was drawn to the alchemists’ stalls, examining bottles filled with glowing liquid, jars of rare herbs, and enchanted powders.
“Some of these ingredients… I’ve never even seen before,” she said, her voice tinged with excitement.
“Maybe you should speak to one of them,” I suggested. “Learn something new.”
She smiled playfully. “Maybe I will.”
From there, we wandered into the Warrior’s Terrace, where Night Elf Sentinels trained with their gleaming glaives, practicing fluid, acrobatic combat styles.
I watched with admiration as a pair of warriors sparred, their movements almost dance-like, blending agility and power.
“Elegant, yet deadly,” Adele murmured beside me.
I nodded. “That’s the way of the Sentinels.”
She smirked. “I bet even you would struggle against them.”
I chuckled. “Perhaps. But I’d put up a good fight.”
In the Craftsmen’s Terrace, woodworkers, tailors, and blacksmiths worked with graceful precision, shaping armor and weapons infused with natural beauty.
Adele admired a finely crafted bow, its limbs adorned with intricate carvings of vines and leaves.
“They turn everything into art,” she said.
I nodded. “To the Night Elves, even war is an extension of nature. Everything must be in harmony.”
Finally, we arrived at the Cenarion Enclave, the heart of Druidic teachings, where Druids in flowing robes practiced their nature magic beneath the towering boughs of ancient trees.
We paused, watching as several druids gathered in a circle, channeling energy into a wounded deer, its wounds closing before our eyes.
I turned to Adele. “I’ve seen Druids before,” I admitted. “But I still don’t fully understand them.”
“Then let’s talk to one,” she said.
Nearby, a female Night Elf Druid stood with a calm, watchful gaze, her long purple hair cascading down her back.
I approached and offered a respectful nod.
409
“Hello,” I said. “I am Sergeant Paladin Tune.”
She turned to me, her expression serene. “Greetings, Paladin. I am Sylvaria Moonbloom. How may I assist you?”
“In my travels, I have seen Druids, but I would like to understand more,” I said. “Your magic, your faith… I am eager to learn.”
She gave a knowing smile.
“Your curiosity is understandable, Paladin,” she said. “Very well, I shall teach you.”
She explained how Druids draw their power from nature itself, guided by Elune and the balance of life.
“The world breathes,” she said. “And we breathe with it.”
She demonstrated her various forms, shifting effortlessly:
Bear Form – “A form of strength, like a warrior.”
Feral Form – “A predator, fast and stealthy as a rogue.”
Moonkin Form – “A conduit of celestial magic, a force of destruction.”
Restoration Magic – “The power to heal, to restore life, to mend what is broken.”
Travel Form – “We do not need horses, for we can take the shape of the swift beasts of the wild.”
I watched in fascination, her transformations seamless, each form embodying a different aspect of nature’s might.
“That is… impressive,” I admitted.
She nodded. “Balance, Paladin. That is the key to all things.”
I bowed slightly. “Thank you, Sylvaria. I will remember your words.”
She placed a hand over her heart. “May the winds guide you.”
As we left the enclave, Adele took my hand.
“That was incredible,” she said.
I smiled. “Azeroth is full of wonders.”
“And I can’t wait to see more,” she whispered.
And with that, our journey continued.
Before leaving Darnassus, we decided to take one last peaceful moment together—a boat ride across the tranquil city lake, its waters shimmering under the silver glow of the moonlight.
Adele sat beside me, her fingers tracing the surface of the water, a serene smile on her lips.
“This place feels like a dream,” she whispered.
410
I nodded, watching the soft ripples dance around our boat, the towering trees of Teldrassil casting long, elegant shadows across the lake.
“It does,” I agreed. “But even dreams must end.”
She turned to me, her eyes filled with warmth, and I leaned in, capturing her lips in a soft, lingering kiss.
For a moment, there was nothing but the quiet sounds of water, the distant songs of owls, and the warmth between us.
“Are you ready to go home?” I asked.
She smiled, resting her head against my shoulder.
“Yes,” she whispered. “This was lovely… thank you so much.”
The next morning, we boarded the ship back to Darkshore, then another to Stormwind.
By the time we reached the Stormwind docks, night had already begun to fall, the golden lanterns reflecting over the water as workers finished their evening tasks.
The city felt different after our travels—still grand, still bustling, but now with the warmth of home.
Adele yawned, cradling Marcus in her arms, his tiny body curled up peacefully against her chest.
“Come,” I said softly, placing a hand on her back. “Let’s get home.”
We walked through the familiar streets, the sounds of horse hooves and distant chatter filling the air as we made our way to our home in the Old Town.
The moment we stepped inside, a wave of exhaustion settled over us, the comfort of our own walls welcoming us back.
Adele sighed, sinking into the chair.
“I think I’ll sleep for a week,” she murmured, smiling sleepily.
I chuckled. “You deserve it.”
I bent down, brushing a soft kiss on Marcus’ forehead, then one on Adele’s cheek.
“Rest well, my love.”
She smiled, already drifting off, and I stood there for a moment, taking in the quiet peace of our home.
It was good to be back.
The next morning, as the first light of dawn streamed through our window, I rose early, strapping on my armor once more.
411
I turned to Adele, who was still wrapped in the warmth of sleep, Marcus nestled beside her.
I smiled, running a gentle hand through her hair, before stepping outside.
Duty called once again.
Arriving at the barracks, I stepped into the Commander’s office, standing at attention.
“Sergeant Paladin Tune, reporting for duty.”
The Commander looked up from his paperwork, a knowing smirk on his face.
“Good to have you back, Paladin,” he said. “I trust married life suits you?”
I smirked slightly. “It does, sir.”
He nodded. “Good. Because your next assignment awaits.”
And just like that, I was back.
Back in service to the Light. Back to protecting the Alliance. Back to fulfilling my oath.
The Commander’s voice was grim and unwavering, his expression as steeled as the armor he wore.
“Sergeant Paladin Tune,” he began, his tone heavy with the weight of new orders.
I stood at attention, my chest tightening as I sensed the severity of what was coming.
“The Alliance has secured a major victory in the Temple of Ahn’Qiraj,” he continued. “But now, a new threat looms.”
My hands clenched at my sides. Another war was upon us.
“In Lordaeron, in what is now called the Eastern Plaguelands, near Stratholme, a f lying fortress of the minions of the Lich King—Naxxramas—has appeared.”
A chill ran through me at the name.
Naxxramas.
“A stronghold of the Scourge, a citadel of death and corruption, drifting above the plagued lands like a dark omen.”
“The Argent Dawn has fought valiantly,” the Commander went on, “but their efforts may not be enough. If this threat is not contained and eliminated, Lordaeron will be lost forever.”
I swallowed hard, the memories of my homeland flashing through my mind—the streets of Stratholme burning, the horrors of the undead, the friends I had lost.
The Lich King’s grasp was tightening.
412
And we had to stop it.
The Commander straightened, his gaze hard and unyielding.
“Prepare your men, Sergeant. The army will be mobilized to provide support to the strike team being assembled. We have not yet decided who will be deployed, but we want everyone ready.”
I bowed my head in respect.
“I will train my men well, Commander,” I vowed.
He gave a single nod. “Good. Dismissed.”
For the next several days, I pushed my men harder than ever.
Our patrols became drills, our drills became battles, our battles became tests of endurance.
Sword and shield formations—we drilled them until the motions became instinct.
Battle readiness against the undead—we trained with enchanted weapons, learning how to fight enemies who did not tire, did not feel pain, did not fear death.
I pushed myself as hard as I pushed them, knowing that if we were to face the horrors of Naxxramas, we had to be ready for anything.
But even as I trained, as I sparred and shouted orders, my thoughts lingered on one thing.
Was this my true calling?
Had the Light led me through war, through love, through peace, only to bring me back to the frontlines?
Or was something greater still ahead?
For now, I buried my doubts.
There was no room for weakness.
War was coming.
And the Light needed its champions.
Days passed in relentless training. The weight of responsibility sat heavy on my shoulders, yet I bore it without hesitation, without question.
But one day, an unexpected summons changed everything.
As I stepped into the Commander’s office, I found not only my superior waiting— but another man as well.
A proud figure clad in white and gold, with a stern yet kind expression and eyes f illed with the wisdom of the Light.
Duthorian Rall.
413
I straightened, saluting.
The Commander turned to me.
“Sergeant, Duthorian Rall here wishes a word with you.”
I frowned slightly but bowed my head in respect. “Of course.”
Duthorian stepped forward, his voice calm yet filled with conviction.
“The time has come, Tune, for you to learn what it will take to acquire something you have no doubt long awaited… your charger.”
I felt my breath still in my chest.
“Speak with Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker, in Stormwind’s Cathedral District,” he continued. “It is he who will guide you—not only through the rituals and trials of obtaining a Paladin’s most trusted mount, but through the sacred duty that comes with it.”
He placed a firm hand on my shoulder, his gaze unwavering.
“This is no simple gift, no mere prize of war.” His voice was solemn. “You must earn this mount, as all before you have. The Light demands a trial of faith, courage, and unwavering dedication.”
His grip tightened slightly, as if to emphasize the gravity of this moment.
“I wish you the best in this trial, noble brother. For the Light!”
A Charger.
A mount of divine blessing, of unmatched strength and loyalty.
I had fought many battles, faced darkness and despair, but now… now the Light itself had set a task before me.
I met his gaze and nodded firmly.
“If I am deemed worthy, I shall not fail.”
With purpose in my stride, I made my way to Stormwind’s Cathedral District—a place that had shaped me since the day I took my first steps as a Paladin.
The Cathedral of Light loomed before me, its towering spires casting long shadows in the morning sun.
Inside, priests whispered prayers, their voices blending into the distant echoes of chanting hymns.
And at the center of it all, standing tall in his resplendent armor, was Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker.
The moment his sharp, knowing eyes fell upon me, he nodded.
“I am glad to see you, Tune,” he said, his voice carrying the weight of authority and divine purpose.
414
“I know you have awaited word on how to acquire your charger,” he continued, “and now that time has come.”
He folded his arms, his expression grave.
“You will be tested in many ways, Sergeant—not just in strength, but in faith, in perseverance, in your willingness to rise above the trials placed before you.”
I stood at attention, listening carefully.
“These trials are not for the sake of learning. You are beyond simple educational tests.”
His gaze hardened.
“You must save your future companion from the clutches of the very evil you have spent your life fighting.”
The words sent a chill down my spine.
“Take heed, Paladin. Your time has come.”
I took a slow breath, letting the weight of his words settle upon me.
This was more than earning a mount.
This was a divine mission. A sacred duty.
And I would not fail.
Lord Grayson watched me carefully, as if measuring my resolve.
Then, his expression shifted, and his next words carried a weight I did not expect.
“You may think of the trials other Paladins have taken, but no.”
I frowned slightly, listening intently.
“The Light has chosen you for a special assignment, one unlike any other. Your path will not be the same as those who came before you.”
There was something unspoken in his gaze, something greater at play.
“If you do not feel ready for it, then you shall not even begin.”
He took a step closer, his eyes boring into mine.
“What say you, Paladin Tune?”
I did not hesitate.
“I am ready for whatever the Light has chosen for me.”
A flicker of something—approval? Satisfaction?—passed through his expression.
“Very well,” he said, his voice steady.
“Let us begin.”
Lord Grayson’s expression remained firm, his gaze steady as stone.
415
“In order to prepare yourself for this task,” he began, “you must first show due sacrifice and judgment… with an emphasis on sacrifice.”
I gave a slow, deliberate nod, mentally preparing myself for what was to come.
“You must acquire High Priest Rohan’s exorcism censer for your task.”
I had heard of this relic before—a powerful tool, used in sacred rites to drive out the darkest of spirits.
“Even though its use will be for good and just reasons,” Grayson continued, “due compensation must be given for it. Sacrifice is the foundation of all things righteous.”
He handed me a small, heavy pouch of coins.
“The Order has collected enough coin for your task, but it is not merely about the exchange. It is about what this coin represents—offering, devotion, selflessness. Go now, Tune. Time is of the essence.”
I bowed my head in respect.
“By the Light, I will not fail.”
My journey led me back to Ironforge, where the heat of the Great Forge and the unwavering faith of the dwarves always left a lasting impression.
As I walked through the Temple of the Light, my armor clanking softly against the polished stone floors, I found High Priest Rohan—his presence as serene and unwavering as ever.
He turned to me with a warm, knowing smile.
“Greetings, noble Paladin!” he said, his voice deep and reassuring.
I reached for the pouch of coin and placed it before him. “I have come for your trusted censer, High Priest,” I said. “I will need it in the trials to come.”
Rohan nodded, as if he had expected me.
“I have prepared my trusted censer with the freshest of incense and blessed it thrice for your use.”
He took the pouch of coin, glancing at it briefly before looking back at me with a soft expression of gratitude.
“Your donation will help us in Ironforge, not only to create a new censer but also to bolster sagging reserves of food for our needy.”
My chest tightened slightly at his words.
I had come for a tool, but in giving, I had provided for others in need.
He placed a firm hand on my shoulder, his grip strong yet reassuring.
416
“Blessings onto you, friend Paladin! Your donation goes far beyond what was needed. Your sacrifice will not only help us recover what we have lost, but also help us care for those who need it most.”
I bowed my head, feeling the warmth of the Light settle over me.
High Priest Rohan then turned, lifting the ornate censer from its resting place—a relic of polished silver, etched with runes of purification, its incense already glowing with a faint, sacred shimmer.
He held it before me.
“Now, let me make sure I’ve suitably prepared this censer for your future needs…”
He whispered a final blessing, his voice carrying the weight of countless exorcisms, countless battles against the darkness.
The censer glowed faintly in response.
Then, he offered it to me.
“With my blessings, take this censer. I myself have wielded it against dark forces, and it shall serve you well in the arduous tasks that lie ahead.”
I accepted it reverently, gripping it firmly, yet with the respect it deserved.
“Thank you, High Priest Rohan,” I said. “I will wield it in the name of the Light.”
He nodded.
“Return now to Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker in Stormwind, Paladin. Your quest continues with him.”
As I made my way back to Stormwind, the censer safely secured, I couldn’t shake the weight of the moment.
This was not merely a task of strength or skill—this was a test of spirit, of sacrifice, of faith.
And I could feel it in my soul…
My trial would be unlike any before it.
Lord Grayson’s eyes met mine as I stepped forward, the censer gripped firmly in my hands.
“Welcome back, Tune,” he said, his voice steady. “Have you acquired the exorcism censer?”
Wordlessly, I held it out, the metal cool in my hands, its incense already faintly smoldering with the blessings of High Priest Rohan.
Lord Grayson examined it carefully before nodding.
“Yes, this will do.”
417
He set it down upon the altar beside him, the silver glinting in the candlelight of the Cathedral.
“You will be called upon more than once during this process to make acts of sacrifice,” he continued. “I am glad to see that you are willing to do just that.”
His expression was stern yet approving.
“Sacrifice is a key component in what it takes to uphold the duties of being a Paladin… but I don’t have to lecture you on that.”
I gave a small nod. I had lived by sacrifice. Given my time, my strength, my faith— everything to the Light.
And now, I would give more.
Lord Grayson turned back to me.
“Now, Tune, you will need to show due judgment in your actions.”
I stood straighter, listening carefully.
“To that end, this censer will act as your vessel to dispense such judgment upon tortured spirits of lands lost to us.”
He lifted the censer once more, but now, I saw that he had added something new.
A pinch of dirt, dark and ominous, nestled within the sacred incense.
“I have taken this soil from Terrordale, a place where the land itself is cursed, forever tainted by the Scourge.”
I felt a cold weight settle in my chest at the name.
Terrordale. Near Stratholme.
“With the censer infused with its essence, you will now use it to seek out places of spiritual unrest.”
He stepped closer, his voice lowering slightly, as if the task itself bore a weight even he could not ignore.
“Look for the green auras that permeate the ground, where the physical world buckles under the torment of the spirit realm.”
I nodded, already feeling the familiar ache of duty pulling me forward.
“Use the censer there, and drive out the evil spirits that linger.”
A breath passed between us, heavy with meaning.
“When you have passed sufficient judgment on the spirits, you will be ready to proceed.”
I exhaled, steadying myself.
This was it.
The next step.
418
And once again, the Light was leading me back to Lordaeron.
Once again, I found myself at the Stormwind docks, boarding a ship bound for Southshore.
The familiar chill of Lordaeron’s winds greeted me as I stepped onto the shore, the scent of salt and pine filling the air.
But unlike before, I was not here to patrol, to command, or to fight in open battle.
This time, I came for judgment.
I took the northern roads, passing the scarred remnants of a once-thriving land, and by nightfall, I reached Chillwind Camp—a place that had become something of a second home to me.
I greeted Commander Valorfist, and he gave me a firm nod, his face as weary as ever.
“Good to see you back, Sergeant,” he said. “What brings you here?”
“A trial of faith,” I replied.
He studied me for a moment before nodding.
“Lordaeron is full of trials,” he muttered. Then, as if remembering something, he continued, “I am assembling a strike team to go inside Scholomance. The dark halls of that accursed place need cleansing.”
I was honored by the offer, but I shook my head.
“Thank you, Commander, but my mission takes me elsewhere.”
He didn’t press further.
“Whatever it is you seek, Paladin, I hope you find it.”
I spent the night in the barracks, resting among the men I had once led.
And at the first light of dawn, I left.
Terrordale lay ahead—a desolate ruin, a place where the dead far outnumbered the living.
The closer I got, the heavier the air became, thick with the lingering corruption of the Scourge.
Then, I saw them.
Green, spectral figures, their forms twisted with anguish, trapped between the world of the living and the damned.
I reached for the censer, gripping it tightly. The weight of the High Priest’s blessing still radiated from the silver vessel.
Taking a steady breath, I stepped forward.
419
The moment I crossed into the area, the air grew colder, and the spirits turned their hollow gazes upon me.
One of them, its form barely holding together, let out a whispered wail, a sound not of rage—but of despair.
I did not hesitate.
Lifting the censer high, I let the blessed incense burn, releasing a thin trail of silver smoke.
“By the Light, I release you.”
The first spirit shuddered violently, the green mist twisting and writhing as the cleansing smoke surrounded it.
It let out one final whisper, a voice lost to time—before vanishing into nothingness.
One by one, I moved through the ruined land, banishing the tortured souls, their forms dissolving like mist in the morning sun.
Some resisted, trying to cling to their cursed existence, but the Light was stronger.
Stronger than their pain. Stronger than the torment that bound them. Stronger than the darkness that sought to consume them.
And when it was done, silence fell upon Terrordale.
Not the silence of death, but the silence of peace.
I let out a slow breath, lowering the censer.
My trial was complete.
Before leaving, I glanced around, remembering something else.
In these ruined lands, despite the corruption, I had once gathered herbs—rare plants that could be used by the alchemists in Stormwind.
I would not waste this opportunity.
I moved through the overgrown remains of what had once been gardens and wild f ields, searching for anything untouched by decay.
With careful hands, I gathered as many as I could carry.
Some would go to Lilyssia Nightbreeze, for her alchemical work.
Some, perhaps, to Adele, if she wished to continue learning the craft.
And as I rode away from Terrordale, I felt not just duty fulfilled—but a sense of completion.
One more step toward whatever fate the Light had chosen for me.
420
The moment I stepped through the grand doors of the Cathedral of Light, I felt a familiar warmth settle over me.
The Light welcomed me back.
Lord Grayson stood at the center of the hall, his expression unreadable as he watched my approach.
“It is good to see you again, Tune,” he greeted, his voice steady.
I bowed my head respectfully.
“Is your work done in Terrordale?”
I met his gaze.
“It is done.”
He studied me for a moment before nodding.
“Well done.”
His tone was firm, but I caught the faintest trace of approval in his eyes.
“To render the judgment of the Light on those that dwell in darkness is a task we must approach with vim and zeal.” He stepped forward, placing a heavy hand on my shoulder.
“You have done just that—with your sacrifice in Ironforge and your judgments upon the spirits of Terrordale.”
I let out a slow breath, knowing that this was only the beginning.
And I was right.
Lord Grayson’s expression darkened.
“Your next steps will call on both sacrifice and judgment again,” he continued, “as you now strive to reclaim the spirit of a fallen charger.”
My chest tightened slightly.
“A fallen charger?”
He nodded gravely.
“This noble beast now serves a Death Knight known as Darkreaver.”
I felt a chill run through me.
A Charger, once a steed of Light, now twisted into darkness, bound to the will of the Scourge.
I clenched my fists.
“We will not allow this corruption to remain,” I vowed.
Grayson gave a firm nod. “No, we will not.”
421
“But know this, Tune.” His voice took on a weight of warning. “Your charger will be nothing more than a pack animal without proper barding.”
I furrowed my brow.
“The barding used by your charger must not only be of the finest materials possible,” he explained, “but due to the circumstances involved, it must also be sufficiently attuned to the spirit realm.”
It made sense.
This was not just a warhorse—it was a spirit bound to darkness, and I would need more than steel and leather to bring it back.
Lord Grayson took a step back.
“First things first, Tune—let’s get your barding made.”
He folded his arms.
“In Stormwind’s Dwarven District, there is one of the finest craftsmen in all of Azeroth—Grimand Elmore. His work has the quality that we seek.”
I nodded. “I will see it done.”
The familiar clang of hammers against metal rang through the Dwarven District, the heat of the forges mixing with the scent of burning coal and molten steel.
I found Grimand Elmore by his forge, the elderly dwarf adjusting the edge of a newly crafted sword.
At my approach, he looked up, grinning through his thick beard.
“Ah, lad!” he called out. “Lord Shadowbreaker sent word ahead o’ time that ye’d be coming!”
I gave a respectful nod.
“I’m told you’re the finest craftsman in Azeroth.”
He let out a gruff chuckle, shaking his head.
“I don’t like to boast, but aye, I’ll not argue that!” He crossed his arms. “Now, I know what ye need—but let’s get one thing clear before we start.”
His gaze grew sharp.
“This won’t be easy.”
I held my breath for a moment.
I met Grimand’s gaze without hesitation.
“Very well. What do you require?”
Grimand Elmore leaned against his forge, arms crossed, his rough, calloused fingers tapping against his anvil.
422
“Right, lad,” he began, his voice steady and firm. “Ye’ll need four things to craft the barding—runecloth for the lining, arcanite bars for the plating, Arthas’ Tears for the spiritual attunement, and Stratholme holy water for the spiritual imbuement.”
I listened carefully, committing each item to memory.
He continued, “Yer Order’s covering my fee—that includes all labor, as well as a handcrafted saddle and stirrups. But you’ll have to gather the rest.”
I exhaled, already expecting as much.
“Once you’ve got all that,” Grimand said, “I’ll be able to finish your barding. Until then, there are some things I can get started on for you while ye assemble your collection of goods.”
I gave him a firm nod.
“Very well,” I replied.
This would be a different kind of mission.
Not one of battle or judgment—but of preparation and patience.
I turned, already forming a plan in my mind.
First, I needed to check Adele’s alchemist shop.
I knew I had collected Arthas’ Tears before—perhaps enough to cover what I needed.
And if the rest of my herbs could be sold for good coin, maybe I could afford the Arcanite bars without needing to spend weeks gathering them myself.
With purposeful strides, I left the Dwarven District, heading toward Adele’s workplace.
I hoped the Light was with me—because this time, it wasn’t just about strength or faith.
It was about resourcefulness, sacrifice… and proving myself worthy in yet another way.
The Stratholme Holy Water was the easiest part. I had brought some back from my missions with the Argent Dawn—a small blessing amidst this difficult task.
Now, I turned my attention to the alchemy shop in the Mage Quarter, where Lilyssia Nightbreeze worked, the same place Adele trained.
As I stepped inside, the familiar earthy scent of dried herbs and bubbling potions f illed the air. Shelves lined with elixirs, vials, and flasks surrounded me, the gentle hum of arcane energy lingering in the background.
Lilyssia Nightbreeze greeted me with a warm smile.
“Hello, Tune,” she said. “You’ve come at a busy time. Adele is out gathering herbs.”
“It’s alright,” I replied. “I came to see you.”
423
Her eyebrow arched slightly in curiosity as I placed a pouch on the counter.
“I gathered some herbs—tell me if you can use them.”
She opened the pouch and carefully sorted through the plants, occasionally muttering softly as she identified each one. Finally, she nodded.
“Yes, some of these will do nicely,” she said. “I’ll pay you for them.”
But before she could start counting coin, I raised a hand.
“I need to keep the Arthas’ Tears,” I told her. “I need them for a special crafting.”
Her eyes flickered with surprise and interest.
“Oh?” she mused. “How interesting. What could a Paladin need such herbs for?”
I smiled faintly. “You will hear about it soon enough.”
She didn’t press further. Instead, she handed me a pouch of coin for the rest of the herbs.
With the money in hand, I left the alchemist shop and made my way to the tailoring shop.
The runecloth was easy to find—stacks of fine, tightly woven fabric that would serve well as the lining for my Charger’s barding.
I paid the tailor and left, but as I counted the remaining coin in my hand, I frowned.
I didn’t have enough left for the Arcanite Bars.
And those were crucial.
Thorium Bars and Arcane Crystals. Both were rare, valuable, and not something I could simply buy on a soldier’s pay.
I needed another solution.
Then, an idea struck me.
If there was anyone in Stormwind who might have access to these materials, it would be the Miners’ Guild.
I made my way toward the Dwarven District, where the air was thick with smoke and the steady clang of hammers against anvils.
Inside the Miners’ Guild, I approached Kurdram Stonehammer, the supplier. The older dwarf was busy sorting through crates of ore, his hands blackened with soot and dust.
He looked up as I approached.
“Ah, Paladin! What can I do for ye?”
I hesitated for only a moment before speaking.
424
“I need Thorium Bars and Arcane Crystals.”
Kurdram’s bushy eyebrows rose slightly, and he let out a low whistle.
“That’s no small request, lad. What ye’re askin’ for ain’t cheap.” He folded his arms, studying me closely. “Arcane Crystals are rare, and Thorium’s in high demand.**
I nodded. “I figured as much. But I have a feeling you may be able to help me.”
He stroked his beard thoughtfully.
“Maybe. But I need to talk with me partners first, see what we can do for ye.**”
I exhaled slowly.
At least they were considering it.
Now, I just had to wait and see what their decision would be.
When Kurdram Stonehammer returned, he wasn’t alone. Two other sturdy dwarves accompanied him, both grizzled miners, their expressions as serious as their craft.
Kurdram crossed his arms, eyeing me carefully.
“Well, Paladin, we may have a way we can help each other, if ye’re up for it.”
I straightened, meeting his gaze.
“Of course. How?”
He exchanged a glance with his companions before nodding.
“We can give ye what ye need—Thorium Bars and Arcane Crystals—but in return, ye do something for us.”
I expected as much. Nothing this rare came without a cost.
“In yer travels and adventures,” he continued, “ye might come across rare things. A forgotten ore vein in some deep cavern. Crystals buried in ancient ruins. These things are valuable to us, but some places are too dangerous for us.”
He stroked his thick beard thoughtfully.
“Do ye have a pickaxe?”
I blinked. That was an unexpected question.
“Actually, I do. From a mission some time ago.”
Kurdram grinned approvingly.
“Good. Keep it with ye at all times. And when ye find rare ores or crystals, ye gather ‘em and bring ‘em back here. That’s how ye’ll repay yer debt.”
I nodded, the deal seeming more than fair.
“Of course. I would gladly gather what I can for you.”
Kurdram’s companions murmured their approval.
425
“A Paladin, and a sergeant no less. I believe we can trust ye’ll keep yer part of the bargain.”
I met their gaze without hesitation.
“You have my word.”
Kurdram clapped me on the shoulder, nearly knocking me off balance.
“Then the deal’s struck. And mind ye, lad, the world’s got riches hidin’ in the strangest places. Keep yer eyes open.”
I gave him a final nod, thanking him before heading out.
With the Thorium Bars and Arcane Crystals secured, I made my way back to the alchemy shop.
The scent of brewed elixirs and fresh herbs greeted me as I stepped inside.
Lilyssia Nightbreeze looked up, a knowing smile on her lips.
“Tune, you’re here again.”
I placed the precious materials on the counter.
“Yes. And I was hoping you could do something for me.”
She tilted her head slightly.
“If I can, of course. What is it you need?”
“I need Arcanite Bars.” I gestured to the bars of Thorium and the gleaming Arcane Crystals. “Could you do the transmutation for me? I can pay for your work.”
Lilyssia chuckled softly, shaking her head.
“No need for that, Tune. I will gladly help you.”
She took the materials and began chanting softly, her hands glowing with alchemical energy.
The room filled with a faint shimmer, and the crystals melted into the Thorium, binding together in a slow, magical fusion.
Within moments, the dull gray metal transformed—taking on a shimmering, silver blue hue.
She carefully handed me the freshly created Arcanite Bars.
“There you go. One step closer to whatever it is you’re working on.”
I smiled.
“One step closer, indeed.”
Now, I had everything I needed.
426
With the Arcanite Bars, Runecloth, Arthas’ Tears, and Stratholme Holy Water gathered, I returned to Grimand Elmore’s forge in the Dwarven District.
He looked up as I approached, his sharp dwarven eyes narrowing as he saw the materials in my hands.
“Have you gotten everything together?”
I nodded. “Yes, I’ve got everything you asked for, right here.”
The old craftsman inspected each item carefully, running his fingers over the smooth bars of Arcanite, testing the quality of the Runecloth, and giving a slow nod of approval at the Arthas’ Tears.
“This… well, this is exactly what I needed.”
He crossed his arms and smirked.
“You’re quite the resourceful Paladin, aren’t ye?”
I simply nodded again, determined to see this through.
Grimand chuckled and cracked his knuckles.
“All right then, let’s get this barding finished up for you!” He took a step toward the forge. “Come back tomorrow, Paladin. This will take some time.”
And so, I did as he said.
The next day, I returned to find the barding laid out before me.
It was a thing of beauty—Arcanite plating polished to a mirror sheen, bound with enchantments, layered over Runecloth embroidered with sacred symbols of the Light.
This was no ordinary armor.
This was a suit of barding fit for a Charger of the Light.
Grimand stood beside it, arms crossed, looking proud of his work.
“There ye go, lad. That’s a proper barding, that is. A work o’ art if I do say so meself.”
I ran my hand over the metal, feeling the power that had been forged into it.
But I knew this wasn’t the end of my trial.
What more would the Light demand of me?
I didn’t have to wait long for an answer.
Back at the Cathedral of Light, I presented the barding to Lord Shadowbreaker.
He examined it carefully, then nodded.
“This is fine work, Paladin. But know this—your Charger’s barding, though strong, is still incomplete.”
I frowned slightly.
427
“It needs a special form of blessing,” he continued, “one from an appropriate spirit.”
I felt a chill run through me.
“**In Dire Maul is such a spirit—**the Ancient Equine Spirit.”
Dire Maul. A ruin of the past, a shattered city left to time and corruption.
Shadowbreaker’s expression darkened.
“It is currently held captive by a corrupt treant—Tendris Warpwood.”
I clenched my fists.
“Pass judgment upon this foul beast, Tune.”
His voice was steady, filled with conviction.
“But know this—freedom alone is not enough.”
I raised an eyebrow.
“You must soothe the spirit before receiving its blessing.”
He turned away for a moment, then looked back at me.
“For that, special horse feed is needed. Travel to Southshore and speak with Merideth Carlson. She will provide what you need.”
Southshore. A place of peace before another trial of war.
“And prepare for more sacrifice, Paladin.”
His gaze was piercing.
“And more travel.”
I exhaled slowly.
Southshore first. Then… Kalimdor.
Southshore was as I remembered it—peaceful, a rare place of refuge amidst the scars of Lordaeron.
I made my way through the familiar town, searching for Merideth Carlson, the renowned breeder and caretaker of fine horses.
It didn’t take long to find her. She stood near the stables, tending to a strong, well groomed steed, brushing its coat with care.
As I approached, she looked up, recognizing the armor of a Paladin instantly.
“Greetings, Paladin. What brings you to Southshore?”
“Lord Shadowbreaker sent me,” I told her. “I am on a sacred trial to reclaim a lost Charger, and I was told you could provide what I need.”
Her expression softened, and she nodded.
428
“I know what you need, Paladin.” She stepped away from the horse, moving toward a carefully sealed bag resting near the stable.
She lifted it and handed it to me.
“Here, Manna-Enriched Horse Feed.”
I took the bag, feeling the light weight of it in my hands.
“That’s it?” I asked.
She smiled knowingly.
“Yes, that’s what you need.”
I looked down at the seemingly simple grain, then back at her.
“This will soothe the spirit?”
“Aye. This feed is more than just nourishment.” She patted the steed beside her. “It is enriched with essence of the Light, a sacred blend used for only the most noble of steeds. If the spirit of your Charger still holds onto any memory of what it once was… this will awaken it.”
I gave her a grateful nod.
“Thank you. I will not forget this. And I will pass your regards to Lord Shadowbreaker.”
“Safe travels, Paladin,” she said warmly. “May the Light guide your path.”
Another step complete.
But now, the real journey began.
I made my way to the docks of Southshore, where ships regularly set sail to Auberdine, on the far coast of Kalimdor.
The voyage would be long. A crossing of the Great Sea, into lands unknown to most in the Eastern Kingdoms.
I stood at the dock, waiting for the next ship, watching as seagulls cried overhead and the waves crashed against the wooden pier.
Ahead of me, beyond the horizon, lay Dire Maul.
A land of ruins and forgotten power, where a corrupt treant held captive the spirit of my future Charger.
I exhaled slowly, gripping the bag of Manna-Enriched Horse Feed in one hand, the weight of my mission settling deep into my chest.
The road ahead was uncertain.
But the Light was with me.
And I would not falter.
429
Auberdine’s docks were peaceful, the crisp sea breeze rolling in from the northern waters, carrying the scent of salt and pine. I stepped off the ship, my boots meeting the wooden planks of the familiar pier.
But this time, I wasn’t here for a simple stop.
This time, my journey led me farther than I had ever traveled before.
I made my way into the town, seeking out Thundris Windweaver, a wise and trusted leader of the Night Elves.
He had helped me before. Perhaps he could do so again.
The old druid was waiting atop the raised wooden platforms, overlooking the vast sea. His long silver hair flowed in the wind, and his piercing eyes held the wisdom of centuries.
He turned as I approached.
“Greetings, Paladin,” he said, his voice calm, like the whispering leaves of an ancient forest.
I bowed my head respectfully.
“This time, my journey takes me far south—to Dire Maul.”
Thundris’s expression remained unreadable, but he slowly nodded.
“Dire Maul… If that is where your mission takes you, then so be it.”
He stepped forward, his robes rustling in the sea wind, and motioned for me to follow.
“I can provide you with a map,” he continued, “and mark the places where you should rest. The way is simple—always south.”
He gestured to the roughly drawn parchment laid out before us, tracing a path with his finger.
“Your first stop should be at Orendil’s Retreat, deep in the forests of Ashenvale. There, you may find supplies and guidance.”
His hand moved downward, following the curve of mountains and valleys.
“If you cross the Stonetalon Mountains quickly, you may find rest at Nijel’s Point, north of Desolace.”
Desolace. A land of shattered earth and ancient bones. I had only heard stories of its desolation.
“From there, continue south into Feralas, past the Twin Colossals. Follow the coast, and you will find Feathermoon Stronghold—our bastion near Dire Maul.”
His gaze lifted to meet mine.
“There, you will find safety. And perhaps… guidance.”
I nodded, committing his words to memory.
“Thank you, Thundris. Your wisdom is invaluable.”
430
He gave a small nod in return.
“May Elune guide you, Paladin.”
With my path set, I made my way toward Auberdine’s stables, where a stable master greeted me with a swift saber mount, its sleek fur dark as the night.
The beast snorted, eyes alert and strong, sensing the long road ahead.
I mounted, gripping the reins firmly, my heart steady.
Ahead of me lay forests, mountains, and untamed lands.
A journey across an entire continent, toward a place of corruption and lost spirits.
I took a deep breath.
“South, then. Always south.”
And with a light kick, my mount surged forward.
The journey had begun.
The journey south began with familiar paths—ones I had taken before.
Orendil’s Retreat, nestled within the heart of Ashenvale, welcomed me with the soft glow of moonwells and the whispering voices of ancient trees. The night elves who dwelled here were ever-watchful, their keen eyes gleaming in the moonlight as they moved with the grace of shadows.
I rested among them for a night, taking in the peaceful songs of the forest, but I knew my path was only beginning.
At first light, I mounted my saber and continued my journey.
Ashenvale was a land unlike any other—a sacred forest, untouched by time, where giant trees stretched toward the sky, their violet and emerald canopies casting long shadows over the winding roads below.
The air was cool and heavy with the scent of pine and damp earth, and the occasional soft hum of an owl echoed through the woods.
As I rode, I passed glowing moonwells, their pristine waters pulsing with ancient energy. Elven sentinels stood guard, their gleaming silver armor blending seamlessly into the trees.
But Ashenvale was not without its dangers.
Dark memories still lingered of wars waged here, the scars left behind by battles between the night elves and their enemies.
Further along the road, I saw signs of Horde encampments, banners of the orcs f luttering among the dense foliage, marking their claim on this land.
431
I pressed on, avoiding unnecessary conflict, riding swiftly toward the mountainous passage that would take me south.
Ahead, the towering peaks of Stonetalon loomed, jagged and unyielding.
The forest of Ashenvale began to thin, and soon, the towering oaks and glowing moonwells faded into the harsh, rocky slopes of Stonetalon Mountains.
The moment I set foot into Stonetalon, I felt the change.
The lush greens of Ashenvale gave way to rugged terrain, winding cliffs, and narrow passes, where the land itself seemed to war with the sky.
The air was thinner, and the winds howled as they rushed through deep valleys, carrying with them the distant roar of waterfalls and the echoes of unseen creatures.
I rode cautiously along the crumbling paths, where loose stones threatened to give way beneath my mount’s hooves.
Here, nature had been twisted by conflict. The Horde had established massive lumber mills, cutting deep into the land, their machines devouring ancient trees that had stood for centuries.
I saw tauren braves patrolling, their massive forms clad in woven armor, while goblin shredders carved through the land, the sound of their saws piercing the once silent mountain air.
But there were still pockets of peace.
To the west, I glimpsed the peak of the Charred Vale, where fire elementals roamed freely, their bodies twisting flames and ash—a scar left by some forgotten catastrophe.
To the east, the Wyvern nests clung to the cliffsides, majestic beasts circling high above, watching the world below with sharp, golden eyes.
The journey through Stonetalon was not easy, but I pressed on, knowing what lay beyond.
And as I descended from the last rocky path, the world changed once more.
Before me stretched a land barren and lifeless, where sand and cracked earth replaced the forests and mountains I had known.
I had reached Desolace.
Following the path laid out by Thundris Windweaver, I made my way toward Nijel’s Point, the lone bastion of the Alliance in this forsaken land.
There, I would rest and recover, before continuing to Feralas—and the final leg of my journey.
I left Nijel’s Point behind at first light, my mount carrying me farther south.
The air was dry, heavy with the scent of dust and decay.
432
The ground beneath my mount’s hooves crumbled like brittle bone, and the landscape stretched endlessly in all directions, a wasteland of pale rock and withered trees.
Here, there was no birdsong, no rustling of leaves in the wind. Only the distant howls of unseen beasts and the occasional gust of hot wind stirring the dust.
Ruins of an ancient war were scattered across the land—crumbling pillars, half buried statues, and forgotten battlegrounds, where the bones of the fallen still lay untouched by time.
The land was not empty, however.
To the east, I saw the centaur clans, their war banners raised high, their riders galloping through the sands, forever locked in conflict with one another.
To the west, the tauren of the Ghost Walker Post had built their encampment, their ritual fires flickering against the twilight.
And at the heart of it all, looming like a shadow over the land, stood Maraudon—an ancient burial ground of the centaur, where even the bravest warriors feared to tread.
I did not linger.
My goal was clear.
I had reached Feralas—a land of untamed beauty, ancient ruins, and towering wilderness. The dry, cracked lands of Desolace slowly began to change.
The air grew heavier with moisture, the barren earth giving way to lush grass and scattered groves of trees.
The deeper I rode, the more the land awakened.
Feralas was alive.
The towering emerald-green trees loomed high above, their dense canopies weaving together, casting the land in perpetual twilight. Shafts of golden light pierced through the foliage, illuminating the thick jungle undergrowth, where vibrant flowers bloomed and mist curled over hidden pools.
I could hear birds singing, their calls echoing through the trees, a stark contrast to the silence of Desolace. Strange creatures moved in the shadows, their eyes watching from the dense foliage.
Here, nature ruled.
The roads were barely more than worn trails, swallowed by roots and creeping vines. Every now and then, I glimpsed massive hippogryphs soaring high above, their majestic wings gliding effortlessly over the jungle.
The ruins of lost civilizations dotted the landscape—crumbling Elven temples, their columns overtaken by moss, and ancient obelisks, half-sunken into the earth, whispering of forgotten stories.
But not all was peaceful.
433
The Gordunni Ogres had made their home here, their massive stone fortresses built among the jungle cliffs. I could hear their deep, guttural voices echoing from their camps as I passed, though I did not linger to draw their attention.
I pressed on, following the winding path that led me deeper south, where the trees began to thin, revealing a distant coastline.
Soon, the land opened up, revealing two towering rock formations reaching high into the sky—the Twin Colossals.
These massive stone spires loomed over the jungle, their weathered surfaces carved with strange, forgotten symbols. I had heard rumors that some brave (or foolish) adventurers sought to scale their heights, but my journey had another purpose.
Beyond the colossal peaks, the jungle sloped downward toward the western coast, where the azure waters of the sea stretched endlessly into the horizon.
And there, on a small island just off the shore, stood Feathermoon Stronghold—the Alliance’s main bastion in Feralas.
A lone dock stood at the water’s edge, where a small ferry awaited to take travelers across the sea.
I dismounted, leading my saber onto the wooden planks, and approached the night elf boatmaster.
“Feathermoon Stronghold?” I asked.
He nodded silently and gestured to the waiting boat.
I stepped aboard, the gentle rocking of the vessel unfamiliar after so many days on horseback.
As the ferry began its short journey across the waves, I stood at the bow, watching as the fortress of the night elves drew closer.
High stone walls, woven with vines and greenery, rose from the island. Archers stood at their posts, their keen eyes scanning the waters for threats.
This was the final stop before Dire Maul.
Here, I would rest.
And here, I would prepare for the greatest trial yet to come.
Feathermoon Stronghold was a fortress of balance—not just of stone and steel, but of discipline and nature, of the old ways and the new.
As I entered, the Sentinels watched me closely, their silver eyes sharp, their bows never far from hand.
At the center of the stronghold, standing tall and unwavering, was Shandris Feathermoon.
434
She was a warrior first, dressed in ornate Sentinel armor, her long blue hair tied back, her movements precise like a blade ready to strike.
I approached, placing my fist over my chest in salute.
“Sergeant Paladin Tune, from Stormwind, my lady.”
Her gaze met mine, steady and appraising.
“A Paladin in Feathermoon Stronghold? And on a mission, no less?”
I gave a firm nod.
“I am bound for Dire Maul.”
Her expression did not change.
“Dire Maul…” she repeated, her voice low and measured.
Then she tilted her head slightly.
“And what do you know of the ruins you walk toward, Paladin?”
I exhaled.
“Not much, to be honest. Only that it was once a place of my allies. And now it is… lost.”
She nodded slowly.
“Then let me tell you what you walk into.”
“Long ago, before the Sundering, Dire Maul was not a ruin, but a city of the Highborne—Eldre’Thalas.
A place of power and arrogance, where the Highborne hoarded their knowledge, their magic, their pride.
When the Well of Eternity was shattered, and the world was torn apart, they were cut off from the rest of our people.
We forsook arcane magic. We turned to the Light of Elune, to the balance of nature.
But the Highborne of Eldre’Thalas?
They clung to their power.
They imprisoned a demon—Immol’thar—draining him to sustain their lives.
And so, their city decayed, and they with it.**”
She paused, her eyes narrowing.
“Now, Dire Maul is nothing but a shattered husk. Ogres have taken its halls. Satyrs lurk in its shadows. And the cursed remnants of the Highborne still cling to their wretched sorcery.”
She folded her arms, watching me carefully.
435
“You walk into a place that has long since fallen from the Light, Paladin. Are you prepared for that?”
I met her gaze.
“If the Light wills it, I am.”
She studied me for a long moment, then sighed.
“Do you plan on heading there alone, Paladin?”
I hesitated.
“If I have to. I came alone, without companions.”
Her eyes narrowed slightly.
“Then you are either brave, or foolish.”
Her expression hardened.
“You cannot go alone. That place is treacherous, even for those who know it well. I will assign you an escort.”
I started to protest, but she raised a hand to silence me.
“Rest for now, Paladin. You have traveled far. Seek me again tomorrow, and we shall see that you do not enter Dire Maul alone.”
There was no room for argument.
I bowed my head in respect.
“As you command.”
And so, once again, I rested.
Tomorrow, my next trial would begin.
The next morning, as the first rays of sunlight bathed Feathermoon Stronghold in gold and silver hues, I made my way to meet Shandris Feathermoon once more.
But this time, she was not alone.
Standing beside her were two other night elves, their expressions calm yet watchful, their posture disciplined and poised like the warriors they were.
Shandris turned as I approached.
“Tune, good. You return as expected.”
She gestured to the two elves beside her.
“Let me introduce your escort.”
The first was a priestess of Elune, clad in flowing silver robes, a soft glow radiating from the crescent moon pendant upon her chest.
“This is Anarial Moonveil, a Priestess of Elune. She will ensure your wounds do not slow you down.”
Anarial gave a graceful nod, her luminous silver eyes studying me.
436
“The Light and the Moon share their purpose, Paladin. I will aid you where I can.”
The second, a Sentinel archer, stood clad in intricately woven leathers, her longbow slung across her back, a quiver of moonsteel arrows resting at her hip.
“And this is Syndess Starshadow, one of my finest archers. She will ensure nothing approaches you unseen.”
Syndess placed a hand over her chest in a warrior’s salute, then smirked slightly.
“I will watch the shadows for you, Paladin. Just don’t charge into them blindly.”
I bowed my head in gratitude.
“It is an honor. Thank you both for doing this.”
But Shandris wasn’t finished.
Her expression hardened as she met my gaze.
“One last thing, Paladin. Listen well.”
She took a step forward, voice firm.
“Stick to your target. Do not wander any further than you must.”
I nodded.
“If you stray too far, you will not find mere ogres or spirits in that ruin.” Her gaze darkened. “There are demons lurking in the depths of Dire Maul, and you are not prepared to face them.”
I tightened my grip on my weapon.
“Understood. I will not waver from my mission.”
Shandris studied me for a moment longer before finally nodding.
“Then go. May Elune watch your steps.”
With our mission clear, Anarial, Syndess, and I made our way to the dock.
The ferry waited, its wooden planks creaking softly in the gentle waves. The Sentinels standing guard gave us a nod as we stepped aboard, and soon, the boat set off toward the mainland.
As the ocean breeze rolled over us, I glanced at my companions—one who wielded the Light of the Moon, and one who struck from the shadows.
The road ahead was uncertain, but one thing was clear—
I was not walking it alone.
437
The journey through Feralas had been long and quiet, the dense jungle surrounding us like a living wall, its ancient trees whispering secrets in the wind.
But as we neared Dire Maul, the once vibrant forest began to change.
The further we rode, the more the trees grew gnarled and twisted, their roots gripping the ground like desperate hands. The air felt heavier, charged with something unnatural, something wrong.
And then, through the tangled canopy, I saw it.
Dire Maul was massive, its colossal stone walls looming high above the jungle, half consumed by creeping vines and the passage of time.
At first glance, it was beautiful, a testament to the grandeur of an age long gone.
But beneath its beauty, corruption festered.
The once elegant spires of the Highborne were now shattered and broken, their carvings eroded, their arches collapsed into piles of rubble.
Great courtyards lay in ruin, their once-pristine stone floors now cracked and overgrown with thick moss. Arcane runes still flickered dimly along the walls, remnants of spells cast thousands of years ago, now fading into nothingness.
And the silence…
It was not peaceful.
It was the unnatural silence of a place that had forgotten the Light.
Then, from behind a crumbling column, I saw them—
The ogres.
Massive, hulking creatures, their grayish-blue skin scarred from battle, their makeshift armor of bone and metal barely containing their bulk.
They stomped through the ruins, their deep, guttural voices echoing through the broken halls, speaking in simple, crude tones.
One ogre, twice the size of a normal man, let out a gruff laugh, tossing a rusted helmet aside like a child discarding a toy.
Another sat upon a stone bench, gnawing on what looked like the remains of some unfortunate beast.
These were not just brutes.
They were the new lords of Dire Maul.
And they had no intention of leaving.
Syndess raised a hand, motioning for us to halt.
“Keep to the shadows,” she whispered. “The ogres are strong, but slow. If we do not disturb them, they will not know we are here.”
438
I followed her lead as we moved silently through the ruins, weaving between fallen pillars and creeping along ivy-covered walls.
The ogres’ deep voices rumbled through the halls, but they were too engrossed in their crude conversations to notice us.
Anarial, the priestess, moved with grace, her soft robes barely making a sound.
Syndess was practically invisible, her form blending into the shadows as though she had walked these ruins a hundred times before.
Me? I was used to standing in the light, not hiding in the dark.
But for now, stealth was our weapon.
As we slipped through the half-collapsed corridors, I realized just how vast this place was.
Hallways stretched endlessly into dark, unknown chambers, broken archways led to sunken courtyards, and the whispers of the past seemed to echo from every crack in the stone.
Syndess suddenly stopped, turning back to me with a smirk.
“You are fortunate we came with you, Paladin,” she said quietly, her voice carrying a hint of amusement.
She gestured to the twisting halls ahead.
“Dire Maul is fairly large, and you would have trouble finding your target on your own.”
She pointed toward a winding path, half-hidden beneath a fallen archway.
“Now, come. This way.”
I nodded and followed, feeling the weight of the ruins around me.
The path ahead was dark, but the Light had not abandoned me yet.
As we stepped deeper into the ruins, I felt it—a shift in the air.
It was no longer just dust and decay that filled these halls.
There was something else.
Something alive.
At first, I mistook them for overgrown roots—twisted vines creeping along the cracked stone floors.
But then they moved.
I froze, my grip tightening around my mace as I realized the truth.
These were no simple plants.
Tall, gnarled trees, their bark twisted into unnatural shapes, their limbs moving like clawed fingers, wandered the halls like lost sentinels.
439
Some were small, barely taller than a man. Others were massive, their heavy branches dragging against the ground, releasing clouds of pollen and dust into the air as they moved.
Syndess stopped, pressing herself against the remains of a broken archway, her bow drawn.
“We can avoid some of them… but not all.”
She was right.
One of the larger ones, a massive warped treant, had turned toward us, its deep rooted legs shifting, its branch-like arms creaking as it sensed our presence.
With a deep, rumbling groan, it lurched forward.
I stepped in front of my companions, raising my shield high.
“Get behind me!”
Anarial whispered a soft prayer to Elune, her hands glowing with silvery light, ready to heal when needed.
The treant swung a heavy limb, its branches striking like a club.
I braced for impact.
The force rattled my bones, but my shield held.
Slamming my mace against the ground, I called forth the Light—
A golden glow erupted around me, spreading outward as I cast Consecration, filling the space with sacred energy.
The smaller treants shrieked, their twisted forms burning in the holy light.
Syndess took advantage of the distraction, loosing an arrow that buried itself into a weak joint in the creature’s bark.
It groaned in pain, staggering.
I lunged forward, swinging my mace, striking hard against its core.
It recoiled, bits of withered bark splintering away, but it was not yet defeated.
The treant let out a deep, guttural roar, its limbs twisting together, vines snapping into place.
It was preparing to lash out.
But before it could strike, Syndess loosed another arrow, this one glowing with enchanted energy.
The shot pierced straight through its core.
With one final groan, the treant shuddered, its limbs convulsing—then, at last, it collapsed.
440
The great, twisted tree fell, its branches cracking apart, its form turning to lifeless wood.
I exhaled, lowering my shield.
“Well fought, Paladin,” Anarial said softly, stepping forward to place a healing hand on my shoulder, mending the bruises left from the battle.
Syndess retrieved her arrows, glancing ahead.
“We’re close now.”
She pointed toward the heart of the ruins, where an even larger shadow loomed.
Tendrils of arcane corruption clung to the walls, twisting through the cracks in the stone.
“Tendris Warpwood is near.”
I rolled my shoulders, tightening my grip on my mace.
“Then let’s finish this.”
We stepped into a wide, overgrown chamber, where the ruins of ancient stone archways crumbled beneath the weight of thick roots and creeping vines.
At its center, Tendris Warpwood stood.
He was larger than the others, his bark darkened and warped, pulsating with an unnatural energy. His gnarled limbs stretched high, his twisted roots cracking the stone f loor beneath him as he shifted his massive frame.
This was no simple guardian.
This was a beast of corruption, a remnant of a fallen city, a force that had long since lost its way.
Tendrils of ancient magic coiled through his form, pulsing with every movement, feeding his rage.
His hollow eyes, deep and sunken within his bark-covered face, glowed with a sickly green hue.
He saw us.
And with a sound like thunder cracking through the roots of the earth, he let out a deep, guttural roar.
The fight had begun.
I raised my hands, calling upon the Light’s blessings, casting Greater Blessing of Might upon myself and Blessing of Wisdom upon Anarial, allowing her to call forth Elune’s magic without exhaustion.
She whispered a soft prayer, and we felt her magic surround us, strengthening our stamina, shielding me in a protective barrier.
441
Syndess drew her bow, her keen eyes already searching for weak spots in the treant’s form.
I gripped my mace tightly and charged forward.
“Light guide my hand!”
The first blow landed hard, cracking against the thick wooden plating of his body, but Tendris barely flinched.
Instead, he raised a massive limb, swinging it down with the force of a falling tree.
I barely had time to raise my shield before the impact sent me staggering back, my arms rattling from the sheer power.
Syndess took the opening, letting loose an enchanted arrow that pierced through a knot in his bark, splintering the wood with a sharp crack.
Tendris howled in anger, vines bursting from the ground, twisting toward us like snakes of living wood.
I slammed my mace to the ground, summoning Consecration, the golden glow of holy energy spreading in a radiant circle around us.
The vines withered in the Light, curling back as their corrupt essence burned away.
Tendris recoiled, but he was far from finished.
He reared back and slammed both limbs into the ground, sending a shockwave through the ruins, forcing loose stones and broken rubble to shake free from above.
One of the vines wrapped around my leg, trying to pull me under.
I gritted my teeth, summoning the cleansing power of the Light, casting Purify to break free from its grasp.
Anarial’s voice rang out behind me, chanting a prayer to Elune, her hands raised as she summoned a bolt of silver light, striking against the treant’s form.
Syndess moved with precision, ducking and weaving, her arrows finding the weakened joints in Tendris’ structure, chipping away at his defenses.
But he would not fall so easily.
Tendris let out a furious bellow, his body glowing with deep green energy, his wounds sealing, his rage boiling over.
“He’s healing himself!” Syndess shouted.
I knew what needed to be done.
Raising my mace high, I called upon the Light—
442
A radiant glow erupted from my hands, the sacred power coalescing into a great surge of energy.
I brought my mace down in a final, decisive strike, pouring all of my strength, my faith, into the blow.
The impact shattered through the twisted wood, the force of the Light burning away the corruption from within.
Tendris let out a final, shaking roar, his limbs cracking, splitting apart, his roots curling inward as if the very essence of his being was crumbling.
With one last shuddering groan, he collapsed.
The chamber fell silent.
Only the distant sounds of the ruins remained—the whispers of wind, the shifting of old stone.
I exhaled heavily, lowering my shield.
The battle was over.
And then, from the remains of Tendris’ fallen form, a soft glow emerged.
A spirit.
Not one of corruption—but one of purity, of wisdom, of something lost yet now freed.
The Ancient Equine Spirit.
This was what I had come for.
I took a slow step forward, watching as the spirit’s luminous form shimmered in the dim light.
The Ancient Equine Spirit stood before me, its form shimmering with an ethereal glow, neither fully of this world nor entirely beyond it.
I carefully unfastened the Manna-Enriched Horse Feed, lifting the container with steady hands.
The spirit lowered its head, nuzzling the offering with a sense of recognition—as if some distant part of its being still remembered the simple joys of life, of care, of purpose.
It took slow, deliberate bites, the grains and oats vanishing into the soft radiance of its being.
And then, it turned toward me.
Its gaze fell upon the barding I carried, and without a word, it shifted its stance, positioning itself as though it wished to wear it once more.
A silent request.
A symbol of acceptance.
443
I stepped forward, lifting the finely crafted barding, the weight of my journey resting in my hands.
As I draped it over the spirit’s back, the air around us hummed with energy—a sensation that prickled against my skin, thick with power beyond mortal comprehension.
The barding glowed softly, as if the spirit’s very essence was woven into its fabric, blessing it with something more than mere craftsmanship.
And then—
It vanished.
Gone from the spirit’s back.
I blinked in surprise, my hand moving instinctively to my pack, where I could feel its familiar weight.
It had returned to me.
Only now, it was changed.
Blessed.
It was time.
As per Lord Shadowbreaker’s instructions, I was to return with the barding to Stormwind.
We left Dire Maul’s broken halls, stepping once more into the dense jungles of Feralas.
The night elves walked in calm silence, their expressions unreadable, their movements precise.
As we reached the outskirts, where the ruined city gave way to lush greenery, I turned to Anarial and Syndess.
I took a deep breath, nodding in gratitude.
“I could not have done this without you.”
Anarial placed a gentle hand over her heart, offering a graceful bow.
“You walk a path blessed by the Light, Paladin. It was our honor to aid you.”
Syndess gave me a small smirk, adjusting the quiver at her hip.
“Just try not to get lost in ancient ruins next time. I might not be there to lead you out.”
I chuckled, shaking my head.
“I will keep that in mind.”
We stood in shared silence for a brief moment, warriors of different faiths, bound by a single cause.
“May the Light be with you,” I said finally.
444
“And may Elune guide your path,” they replied.
With that, we parted ways.
I turned toward the long road north, my mission now complete.
Three days later, I arrived once more at the docks of Auberdine, standing on the familiar wooden planks, waiting for the next ship to Stormwind.
The sea stretched endlessly before me, the waves lapping against the hull, carrying me home.
I had journeyed far.
And yet, my final trial was still ahead.
I stood before Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker, the weight of my journey pressing upon me.
The blessed barding was secured in my pack, a testament to the trials I had faced in Feralas.
But I knew this was not the end.
Shadowbreaker’s piercing gaze met mine, his tone measured yet resolute.
“You’ve come far, Tune. Your barding is now suitably prepared for the last task at hand.”
I nodded, standing at attention, awaiting the next step.
His expression darkened slightly, as if the gravity of what was to come settled upon him as well.
“You will be using this barding to harness your charger once the task of redemption is complete. Before that, however, you will have a monumental struggle to overcome. Your time draws near—huzzah!”
A struggle.
I expected no less.
But before I could ask, he continued.
“There is one last item that needs to be made before we begin this, Tune. Hopefully, your resourcefulness has not departed you since you had your barding made…”
I arched a brow.
“What do you need, my lord?”
He folded his arms.
“We must assemble a Divination Scryer. This will begin the trial that will allow you to redeem the fallen charger.”
I listened intently as he explained.
445
“Your scryer, actually, is almost done.”
That surprised me.
“The exorcism censer you used in Terrordale is the catalyst for it, and I will fashion a suitable housing for the device.”
He gestured toward the cathedral’s high windows, where the morning light streamed through the stained glass.
“The last components needed, though, are two diamonds. They must be as juxtaposed in brilliance as they are in purpose—an Azerothian Diamond and a Pristine Black Diamond.”
His gaze returned to me, measuring my reaction.
“These two will be the beacon by which the scryer will pierce the shadows!”
I took a deep breath.
Two diamonds.
One bright and pure, the other dark and rare.
And just like with the Arcanite Bars, I knew these would not come cheap or easily.
A Paladin is not expected to have great wealth, nor should one seek riches. But I understood now—this was part of my trials.
Not just a test of strength or faith, but of resourcefulness and wisdom.
And so, there was one place I needed to go—
“Thurman’s Elegant Gems.”
The small gem shop sat nestled within the Trade District, sharing its space with a tailoring shop. Though humble in appearance, it was said that Thurman Mullby, its owner, had access to rare and precious stones from across Azeroth.
If anyone could help me, it was him.
As I stepped inside, the scent of polished stone and incense filled the air.
Behind the counter, a middle-aged man with sharp eyes and steady hands carefully examined a gem under candlelight.
He looked up as I approached.
“Ah, a Paladin!” He straightened, offering a polite nod. “And how may I serve you, sir?”
I placed my hands on the counter.
“My name is Tune, Sergeant Paladin of Stormwind, and I require your aid.”
His brow lifted slightly.
“Oh? And what is it you seek?”
446
“I need two diamonds, one Azerothian and one Pristine Black.”
At that, his expression shifted from curious to wary.
“That is an unusual request, Paladin. Not to mention… expensive.”
He studied me for a moment before continuing.
“Even if I can provide them, what is your plan? Buying such stones is no small matter.”
I expected that response.
So, I told him my idea.
“You have suppliers and clients across Azeroth, do you not? Transporting such valuable gems can be dangerous. In my free time, I can assist you. I will bring supplies from distant lands, and when needed, deliver orders to clients—no matter where.”
He stroked his beard, considering my offer.
“A Paladin running gemstones across Azeroth? Hah! Interesting. You are trained in war, not trade.”
“That may be true, but I travel far in my duties,” I replied. “And if it ensures my mission’s success, I am willing to take on the burden.”
Thurman was silent for a moment, tapping his fingers against the counter.
Then, at last, he grinned.
“Very well, Paladin. You have yourself a deal.”
He extended his hand, and I took it, sealing the agreement.
“I will procure your diamonds. In return, you let me know whenever you travel far— should I have need of you.”
I nodded with a small smile.
“A fair trade.”
Job done.
Now, it was time to return to Lord Shadowbreaker.
Back at the Cathedral, I placed the two diamonds in Lord Shadowbreaker’s hands.
He turned them in his palm, his expression filled with certainty.
“You have come so very far, Tune.”
His voice carried the weight of pride and finality.
447
“Your final act of worldly sacrifice will be the genesis of one of your greatest accomplishments. I can feel it in the very fiber of my being!”
He held the diamonds aloft for a moment, inspecting their brilliance.
“These are fine stones—the final pieces are now in place. At long last, your time has come!”
He stepped forward, his expression darkening as he spoke of the final trial.
“In the depths of the Great Ossuary of Scholomance lie the skeletal remains of many fallen souls. Among them is a once-noble charger.”
I stiffened at his words.
“This charger was noble once,” he continued, “but its hollowed soul now serves as the steed of Death Knight Darkreaver.”
I clenched my fists.
“It is he whom you will face,” Shadowbreaker said, his tone grave. “And it is this steed that you will pass judgment upon.”
His hand fell upon my shoulder, gripping tightly.
“Only you, Tune, can redeem its soul and save it from the torment of its servitude.”
He then handed me a leather satchel, the weight of its contents heavy in my hands.
“Take this satchel. Inside are the items you will need for your task.”
I opened it slightly, seeing holy relics, blessed salts, and the Divination Scryer.
Shadowbreaker spoke again.
“Use the scryer in the heart of the Great Ossuary’s basement. It will draw forth the accursed spirits bound to that place—you must pass judgment upon them.”
His piercing gaze met mine, a final warning in his voice.
“You must choose your weapon’s seal wisely, for your judgments will prove more potent than you realize.”
He exhaled, as if preparing himself for the weight of what came next.
“And when the spirits have been judged… the Death Knight will come.”
I nodded slowly, understanding the magnitude of what was ahead.
“Defeat him, reclaim the lost soul of the charger, and only then, Tune, will you be able to redeem it and place your barding upon your new steed.”
He took a step back.
“May the Light be with you.”
I secured the satchel over my shoulder, gripping it tightly.
This was it.
448
Everything I had endured—every trial, every hardship, every lesson—had led me to this moment.
I turned on my heel and stepped out of the Cathedral.
My destination was set.
Scholomance awaited.
Once again, my journey took me north, into the cursed lands of Lordaeron, now known as the Plaguelands.
The air was thick with decay, the land itself a scarred remnant of what once was.
I made my way to Chillwind Camp, a beacon of Alliance resistance in this forsaken land.
Commander Valorfist stood near the war table, discussing reports with his officers.
As soon as he saw me, his expression brightened.
“Paladin, good to see you.”
I approached, offering a respectful nod.
“Commander, I have returned on a mission. I must enter Scholomance.”
His brow furrowed.
“Scholomance? But that place is empty.”
I raised an eyebrow.
“Empty?”
He nodded.
“I sent a strike team there. They cleared the halls of whatever filth remained. No necromancers, no cultists—just dust and bones.”
That caught me by surprise.
I had expected resistance, another battle through the cursed halls of the necropolis.
But instead—
“That makes my task easier,” I said.
Commander Valorfist folded his arms.
“What exactly are you looking for?”
“The Great Ossuary’s basement.”
At that, the commander’s expression darkened.
“The men told me that room is empty. Just piles of bones.”
449
I met his gaze firmly.
“That’s exactly where I need to go.”
He hesitated for a moment, then sighed.
“Do you need any assistance, Paladin?”
I smiled, shaking my head.
“Thank you, Commander, but if the place is empty, then only my mission remains. This is something I must face alone.”
Valorfist studied me for a moment before nodding.
“Very well, Paladin. Light be with you.”
With that, I turned on my heel and set off toward Scholomance.
The once-ominous gates of Scholomance now stood eerily silent.
No undead patrols.
No cultists chanting their vile incantations.
Only ruin and death.
I stepped through the crumbling corridors, the air still heavy with the stench of dark magic long since cast.
The halls were exactly as Valorfist had described—
Empty.
The grand rooms that once held forbidden rituals were now littered with shattered bones and broken artifacts.
Yet, I knew—something still lingered here.
Even if no living being remained, the taint of undeath was not so easily erased.
I made my way deeper, my boots echoing against the stone floor, until I reached the Great Ossuary’s basement.
The chamber was just as they had described—a vast pit of bones, a graveyard of the forgotten and the damned.
I took a slow breath, stepping forward, feeling the weight of unseen eyes upon me.
I reached into my pack, pulling forth the Divination Scryer, the very tool that would call forth the accursed spirits bound to this place.
I held it tightly, my grip steady.
“Let judgment begin.”
With those words, I activated the scryer—
And the bones around me began to stir.
450
I took a steady breath, gripping my hammer tightly as I placed the Divination Scryer upon the pile of bones.
The air shifted instantly.
A chilling wind swept through the Great Ossuary, carrying with it an unnatural whisper—a voice neither male nor female, neither living nor dead.
It spoke, echoing through the chamber like a forgotten prophecy.
“To fel the ghost of Banality, teach it Wisdom.”
I narrowed my eyes, remembering Lord Shadowbreaker’s words:
“You must choose your weapon’s seal wisely, for your judgments will prove more potent than you realize.”
I called upon the Light, weaving it into Seal of Wisdom, letting its radiance course through my weapon.
The first wave of spirits appeared, their forms shifting and hollow, their faces expressionless, devoid of reason.
I raised my hammer high.
“Begone!”
With a mighty swing, I unleashed Judgment of Wisdom, sending golden energy surging through them.
The spirits shuddered, their formless bodies twisting as they faded into nothing.
It worked.
But before I could exhale in relief, the voice returned.
“To curse the Malicious, bless it with Justice.”
A new wave of spirits emerged from the darkness.
These were different.
They snarled, their forms flickering with malevolence, their eyes filled with hatred and spite.
I shifted my stance, calling forth Seal of Justice, letting its divine weight settle upon my weapon.
“The Light will break your wickedness!”
I brought my hammer crashing down, releasing Judgment of Justice upon them.
A blinding surge of power struck the spirits, their forms convulsing before they dissipated into the void.
Silence followed.
451
Then—
The whispering voice spoke again.
“To right the Corrupt, wield Righteousness.”
I tightened my grip, feeling the weight of my trials pressing upon me.
More spirits rose from the remains, but these were grotesque, twisted, their ethereal bodies warped by deceit and suffering.
I called forth Seal of Righteousness, channeling the holy fire of retribution into my weapon.
“May the Light cleanse your sins!”
I unleashed Judgment, and the radiant force burned through them, reducing them to nothing but scattered echoes.
Only one wave remained.
And the voice spoke one last time—this time, almost sorrowful.
“To send the spirit to its mother Shadow, show it the Light.”
I felt a chill creep into my bones as the final spirits appeared.
Unlike the others, these were silent, lingering in agony, cloaked in shadow, yearning for release.
Their pain was palpable.
I knew what had to be done.
I called upon Seal of Light, feeling its warmth spread through my very being.
“The Light has not forgotten you.”
I swung my hammer, unleashing Judgment of Light—
A radiant wave washed over the spirits.
Their shadows peeled away, and for the briefest moment, their faces softened— grateful, at peace.
Then, they were gone.
The trial had ended.
Or so I thought.
The bones beneath my feet trembled, rattling as though the very room was awakening from its slumber.
And then—
A terrible force erupted from the pile of remains.
452
A dark wind howled through the Great Ossuary, carrying with it the stench of undeath and the weight of something truly cursed.
From the swirling bones, a figure emerged.
Mounted upon a warped, skeletal charger, clad in blackened, unholy armor, and wielding a blade that bled shadow, he rose from the pit of death itself.
His glowing blue eyes locked onto me, filled with nothing but hatred and contempt.
His voice was a low, menacing growl.
“Another wretched pawn of the Light, come to perish beneath my blade…”
He raised his corrupted runeblade, and the very air around me grew heavier, thick with the presence of necrotic magic.
The battle had begun.
I braced my shield, calling forth the Light’s protection.
With a thunderous charge, Darkreaver’s skeletal charger surged forward, his blade cutting toward me in a vicious arc.
I raised my shield just in time, deflecting the blow, but the sheer force sent a shock through my arm.
His blade pulsed with dark energy, each strike seeking not just to wound me, but to sap my very strength.
I retaliated with a swing of my mace, aiming for the joint in his armor—
A direct hit!
The impact sent a shudder through his cursed form, but Darkreaver barely reacted, his unnatural body shrugging off the pain.
He twisted his reins, forcing his mount to rear up, hooves kicking toward me.
I rolled aside, dodging the deadly strike.
“Your Light is weak, Paladin!” he snarled, raising a hand wreathed in shadow.
A wave of necrotic energy rushed toward me, the air turning frigid, the power seeking to drain my very soul.
I had only a moment to react—
I called forth a divine shield, and a barrier of golden light surrounded me, absorbing the dark magic before it could reach my core.
His eyes burned with rage.
“Tricks will not save you.”
I had to turn the tide.
453
I called upon the Light, summoning a golden hammer of energy, and hurled it forward—
Judgment of Righteousness!
The hammer slammed into Darkreaver, his armor cracking beneath the divine force.
He staggered, his mount screeching in pain, the holy power searing through the corruption.
Before he could recover, I charged forward, slamming my shield into his chest with all my might.
The impact threw him from his mount, and he crashed into the pile of bones, the undead remains scattering around him.
Darkreaver growled, rising to his feet, his blade pulsing with unholy energy.
“You think you have won? This fight is far from over!”
Raising his sword, he struck the ground, sending a shockwave of shadow magic through the chamber.
I felt it pulling at my soul, trying to weaken my very essence.
I clutched my hammer, gritting my teeth—
“The Light does not break so easily.”
I called upon my final blessing, channeling all my remaining strength—
A radiant glow erupted around me, blinding in its brilliance.
“Begone, servant of darkness!”
With one last strike, I brought my mace crashing down upon his cursed blade—
The weapon shattered, its dark power dispersing into the air.
Darkreaver let out a final, wretched scream, his body consumed by the Light’s wrath.
Then—
Silence.
His form crumbled into nothing, leaving behind only his skeletal remains and the cursed armor he once wore.
The battle was over.
I turned, my breath heavy, my body aching.
There, standing amid the fallen bones, was the spirit of the fallen charger.
It was no longer bound to Darkreaver’s will, yet it still stood in sorrow.
454
Its hollow, mournful eyes met mine, filled with a sadness deeper than death itself.
For so long, it had served in torment, twisted into a beast of unholy servitude.
I stepped forward, slowly, kneeling before it.
“You are free now.”
It watched me, as if uncertain.
But then, I removed the blessed barding from my pack, holding it up for the spirit to see.
A soft glow surrounded the spectral charger, the Light’s presence washing over it like a long-lost memory.
It lowered its head, allowing me to place the barding upon it.
And as I did—
The spirit began to change.
The skeletal form melted away, replaced by shining white fur, a radiant mane, and armor gleaming with divine power.
The charger—my charger—had been reborn.
The mighty warhorse stepped forward, standing before me with pride and strength.
It was no longer bound by darkness.
No longer a slave to the Scourge.
It was a true Charger of the Light once more.
I reached out, my hand resting against its strong neck, feeling the warmth of its divine energy.
This was no ordinary mount.
This was my companion, my ally, my steed.
And together, we would ride for the Light.
With my mission complete, I took a deep breath.
But my journey was not yet over.
Now, I had to bring my charger home.
Back to Stormwind.
Back to where my path as a Paladin truly began.
And for the first time since stepping into the Plaguelands, I smiled.
The Light had prevailed.
455
As I rode into Chillwind Camp, I immediately sensed that something was different.
The air, usually thick with fatigue and grim duty, now buzzed with excitement and relief.
Men cheered and laughed, their faces no longer burdened with exhaustion. Some raised their weapons in triumph, while others clasped each other’s shoulders, sharing in the hard-earned joy of a battle won.
I dismounted, making my way through the celebrating soldiers until I found Commander Valorfist, who stood among his officers, a rare smile on his usually stern face.
“Commander, what has happened?” I asked, confused by the sudden shift in morale.
He turned to me, his eyes gleaming with a mixture of pride and relief.
“Paladin, we have just received reports from the east. The raid on Naxxramas was a success.”
I felt my breath catch slightly.
“Success?”
He nodded.
“Yes. Our forces stormed the flying citadel, struck at the heart of its corruption, and defeated Kel’Thuzad.”
I exhaled slowly, letting the words sink in.
Kel’Thuzad—the necromancer who had unleashed the plague upon Lordaeron, the Scourge’s twisted mastermind in these lands—was finally gone.
This was no small victory. This was a crushing blow to the Scourge in the Eastern Kingdoms.
I glanced around at the soldiers celebrating.
They had fought for so long in these cursed lands, waiting for a moment like this—a sign that the nightmare was ending.
A part of me felt relief, but another part…
“That is great news,” I said sincerely, though there was a lingering feeling in my chest.
I had spent months in the Plaguelands, fighting in my own way, and yet I had not been part of this final battle.
“A part of me wishes I could have helped,” I admitted, clenching my gauntlet.
Commander Valorfist studied me for a moment before placing a firm hand on my shoulder.
“The Light had other plans for you, Sergeant.”
456
I glanced at my blessed charger, standing beside me—a sacred steed, freed from darkness through my trials.
He was right.
The Light had sent me on a different path, one that was no less important.
I nodded.
“You’re right, Commander. The Light guided me where I was needed.”
Valorfist smiled.
“Rest here tonight, Paladin. You have earned it.”
I accepted with gratitude.
Tomorrow, I would return to Stormwind.
This long trial was finally over.
Upon returning to SW, first thing I did was report to Lord Shadowbreaker.
Other senior Paladins stood waiting for me. Their expressions were solemn but proud, their eyes filled with the wisdom of those who had walked this path before me.
Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker stepped forward.
“You have done it, Paladin. Your trials are complete.”
He placed a firm hand on my shoulder.
“The Light was right in choosing you for this path. You have proven yourself—not only in strength and skill but in faith, sacrifice, and judgment.”
I bowed my head, feeling the weight of everything I had endured.
The battle in Terrordale, the journey across Kalimdor, the spirits in Scholomance, and the final battle against Darkreaver—all of it had led me here.
The trials had tested not only my body but also my spirit.
And I had emerged victorious.
I took a slow breath, feeling the warmth of the Light within me, a silent reassurance that this had all been worth it.
After my conversation with the Paladins, I led my charger toward the Stormwind military stables.
Even before we arrived, I could feel the eyes of the soldiers upon us.
By the time we reached the stables, a small crowd had gathered.
457
Some were young recruits, their eyes filled with awe and curiosity. Others were seasoned warriors, veterans who understood the significance of what they were witnessing.
A sergeant from the cavalry, a burly man in chainmail, stepped forward, eyes locked on my steed.
“By the Light… What kind of horse is this?”
Another soldier, a young stable hand, shook his head in disbelief.
“I’ve never seen a charger like this before. It almost glows…”
I gave them a knowing smile, patting the horse’s side.
“He is blessed by the Light, freed from darkness, and now rides in its service once more.”
The burly sergeant let out a low whistle.
“That’s no ordinary warhorse, that’s for damn sure.”
One of the younger soldiers, still in training, hesitated before asking,
“Sergeant Tune… How did you get him?”
I looked at them, seeing the same curiosity I once had as a recruit.
“It was not given to me. I had to fight for it, to earn it. My trials took me across Azeroth—to the cursed lands of the Plaguelands, through the ancient ruins of Dire Maul, and into the depths of Scholomance itself. There, I faced Death Knight Darkreaver and freed this charger from undeath. Only then did he become mine.”
The young soldier’s eyes went wide.
“You fought a Death Knight alone?”
I nodded.
“The Light was with me. And now, it is with him.”
There was a moment of silence before the sergeant clapped a hand on my shoulder.
“The army could use more Paladins like you, Tune.”
I smiled.
“We all serve in our own way.”
I handed the reins to the stable master.
“Take good care of him. He has earned his rest.”
With one last gentle nuzzle, my charger turned and allowed himself to be led into the stables.
I watched him disappear inside, then turned toward the barracks.
It was time to report in.
458
I stepped into the command office, standing at attention as Commander Valorfist turned to me.
“Sergeant Paladin Tune, reporting for duty.”
The commander gave me an approving nod.
“How were your trials, Sergeant?”
I met his gaze, standing tall.
“A success.”
He studied me for a moment before offering a rare smile.
“I had no doubt.”
He leaned back in his chair.
“Very well. Take the rest of the day off, and report tomorrow first thing in the morning.”
I saluted.
“Yes, sir.”
With my duty fulfilled for the day, I made my way to Adele’s alchemist shop.
She wasn’t there.
Lilyssia Nightbreeze greeted me instead.
“Paladin Tune, back from another adventure, I see.”
I nodded.
“I have some herbs for sale.”
She took them, sorting through what was usable.
“Adele stepped out earlier, went to Elwynn Forest to gather some herbs herself. Should be back later.”
I thanked her and left, making my way home.
There, I finally removed my armor and weapons, allowing myself to breathe without the weight of steel on my shoulders.
As I sat down, a peaceful silence filled the room.
For the first time in what felt like weeks, I could rest.
And then, I heard the door open.
I turned—
And there she was.
459
Adele stepped in, carrying a small basket of herbs, her face lighting up the moment she saw me.
In her arms was Marcus, our son.
The weight of war, of duty, of trials and hardships—all of it melted away.
I rose to my feet, stepping toward them, wrapping them both in my arms.
Adele rested her head against my chest.
“You’re home.”
I kissed her forehead.
“I am.”
Marcus let out a small giggling sound, his tiny hands reaching for my armor straps, as if trying to take them off himself.
I chuckled, lifting him into my arms.
For so long, my life had been battle after battle, trial after trial.
But here, in this moment—
This was peace.
This was home.
Tomorrow, duty would return.
But tonight—
Tonight was for my family.
For several weeks, life was peaceful. My days were spent patrolling the roads, training with my men, and ensuring the security of Stormwind and its surrounding lands.
But amid duty, there was also joy.
One evening, after returning home, Adele greeted me with a smile, holding Marcus in her arms.
“He has a surprise for you,” she said, setting him down.
I watched as my son, no longer just a baby in my arms, took his first few steps toward me.
I knelt, arms open, and he stumbled forward, his tiny legs shaky but determined.
When he reached me, I scooped him up, lifting him high into the air, laughter escaping both of us.
“You’re already walking, Marcus? By the Light, you’ll be running by next week!”
Adele chuckled, placing a gentle hand on my arm.
460
“He’ll be chasing you around the training yard before you know it.”
For a brief time, I allowed myself to believe in this peace.
But I knew well enough—
Peace never lasts forever.
One day, the orders came in.
Reports from Nethergarde Keep spoke of disturbances at the Dark Portal—strange, ominous energy flickering across its long-dormant surface.
Worse still—
Demons had been sighted in the Blasted Lands.
Scouts confirmed incursions of Burning Legion forces, their numbers growing with each passing day.
Stormwind had no choice.
Reinforcements were to be dispatched immediately.
A large contingent of soldiers was assembled, led by Captain Alric Westbrook, a seasoned officer with years of campaign experience against the Horde and the Scourge.
I was assigned with my men to his command, tasked with both defending Nethergarde Keep and scouting the Blasted Lands.
We needed to find the source of the demons—and determine if it was linked to the growing activity at the Dark Portal.
In just a few days, we marched.
Our journey took us southeast, where the roads of Elwynn Forest gave way to the eerie, shadowed corridor of Deadwind Pass.
Here, the air grew thick and still, the towering cliffs looming on either side like watchful sentinels.
The wind barely stirred, and even the horses grew restless, their hooves clattering uneasily against the ancient stone road.
Deadwind Pass had long been a place of dark legends, spoken of in hushed tones by travelers and merchants.
It was said that nothing truly lived here, only whispers carried by the wind and the echoes of a long-forgotten past.
Some of the men muttered about Karazhan, the ruined tower of the last Guardian of Tirisfal. Its broken spire stood far off in the distance, barely visible in the gloom.
No one spoke of it out loud, but its presence was felt.
461
Emerging from the dreary cliffs, we entered the Swamp of Sorrows—and immediately, the humid air wrapped around us like a suffocating fog.
The damp earth squelched beneath our boots, and the sound of insects droned endlessly in the thick vegetation.
Vast pools of murky green water stretched between winding tree roots, and large bulbous plants released a pungent, sour scent as we passed.
The soldiers ahead raised their hands, signaling a stop.
Something moved within the mists ahead, dark shapes shifting through the trees.
We tensed, gripping our weapons, but as the figures emerged, we saw the banners of the Green Dragonflight.
The Dreaming Guardians.
The dragons, once cursed by the Emerald Nightmare, now roamed these lands again, watching over what remained of their sacred groves.
We moved on without disturbing them, but their piercing, watchful eyes followed us long after we had passed.
As we crossed the final stretch, the swamp faded behind us, and the world ahead changed.
The Blasted Lands were unlike anywhere else in Azeroth.
Where once lush fields had stretched, now only cracked red earth remained.
Jagged rocks and charred husks of trees jutted from the land like the bones of some ancient, forgotten beast.
The air shimmered with strange heat, though there was no sun strong enough to justify it.
The deeper we rode, the more unnatural it felt.
Strange arcane storms flickered in the distance, bolts of energy crackling in the skies like distant echoes of long-past battles.
And then—
The Dark Portal came into view.
Even from afar, it was monstrous, its towering green frame pulsing with unsettling energy.
It had been silent for years, a monument to the war that had nearly torn Azeroth apart.
But now, it was active again.
The swirling emerald vortex at its center crackled, flashes of lightning arcing from its surface.
Even the most battle-hardened among us shifted uneasily in their saddles.
“By the Light… It’s waking up.” one of the men whispered.
462
Near the portal, we saw movement—
Figures, stalking the broken terrain.
They moved in loose groups, their shifting, demonic forms unmistakable.
“Demons,” Captain Westbrook muttered, narrowing his eyes.
He turned toward us.
“Nethergarde Keep is just ahead. We make our report, and then we find out what exactly is going on here.”
But before we could move, our attention was drawn to the west.
There, sitting atop a jagged hill, was Dreadmaul Hold—the Horde’s outpost in the Blasted Lands.
Once a base for Ogre warbands, it was now a Horde stronghold, claimed and reinforced by Orcs from Orgrimmar.
We saw red banners flapping in the wind, the emblem of the Horde staring down at us.
From the ramparts, a few figures watched us closely.
Not aggressively—
But warily.
The tension was there, but the Horde had as much reason as we did to be here.
If demons were coming through the portal again, then this was no longer just an Alliance problem.
This was a war coming for all of us.
I looked back at the Dark Portal, watching as its surface pulsed, like a heartbeat waiting to be unleashed.
Something was coming.
And I feared we were not ready for it.
As we rode through the gates of Nethergarde Keep, the watchmen on the walls eyed us carefully before relaxing at the sight of our banners.
We were met by Commander Vines, a veteran officer with a scarred face and piercing blue eyes, flanked by Sergeant Krolan—a hardened infantryman—and Corporal Nobsy, a gnome tactician who looked eager to speak.
“Welcome to Nethergarde Keep, soldiers,” Commander Vines said, his voice firm. “Stormwind has sent you just in time. The situation is… developing.”
Our captain, Alric Westbrook, saluted.
463
“We are here to assist, protect, and scout, Commander. Reinforcements at your disposal.”
The commander nodded.
“Good. The demons are growing bolder, and the Dark Portal is stirring. We need every sword and spell we can get.”
He gestured to his officers.
“Come, Captain. We have much to discuss.”
As the commanders entered the war room, the rest of us waited for orders.
I was placed in charge of the scouts.
It was my job to assess the demonic threat and—if possible—identify key targets for elimination.
I gathered my men, their expressions grim but ready.
“Listen up, soldiers. We are here to do a job, and we will do it well. Our task is to scout the Blasted Lands, track demonic activity, and report back with anything that can help us plan our counterattack.”
I turned to my most experienced men.
“We will divide into three groups. Each group has a role to play.”
1. Tower Watch – Eyes on the Horizon
“First group, you will take positions along the Nethergarde Watchtowers. Your job is to monitor movement beyond the walls—watch the Dreadmaul Hold to the west and keep track of anything unusual near the Dark Portal. Any signs of movement, you report immediately. No hesitation.”
The soldiers assigned nodded sharply, already moving toward the towers to relieve the current watchmen.
2. Patrol Units – Holding the Line
“Second group, you are on patrol duty. You will cover the perimeter of Nethergarde Keep and the roads leading toward the Swamp of Sorrows. The demons aren’t our only problem—there are also bandits, beasts, and whatever else lurks in these cursed lands. Stay sharp, and if you encounter trouble, fall back and regroup. Do not engage unless absolutely necessary.”
A mix of foot soldiers and cavalry formed up, preparing their routes.
3. Forward Scouts – Eyes in the Wastes
“The third group—my group—we are heading out. We will be moving deep into the Blasted Lands, identifying demon encampments and possible targets for an attack. We move fast, stay low, and we do not fight unless we have no other choice. Our mission is intelligence. We find out what’s coming… before it finds us.”
464
The scouts exchanged glances, adjusting their gear and weapons, ready for what lay ahead.
I glanced at them all, my expression serious.
“You all know the Blasted Lands are not like any other battlefield. You will see horrors that should not exist. You will feel the heat of fel fire, the taint of dark magic in the air. But we are soldiers of the Alliance, and we stand against the darkness.”
I paused for a moment.
“Stay focused. Stay alive. Dismissed.”
With that, we moved out.
The hunt for the demons had begun.
For days, our scouts tracked the demon warbands, identifying their patterns and movements across the Blasted Lands.
One name kept coming up—
Commander Thar’zul.
A massive Felguard, clad in obsidian-black armor, wielding a wicked, rune-etched battleaxe.
He was no mindless brute.
Thar’zul commanded the demons that raided our supply lines, ambushing caravans and cutting down our messengers before they could reach Nethergarde Keep.
If we didn’t stop him soon, we would be fighting a war with no reinforcements and no supplies.
I requested men for the attack, and my captain approved the operation.
“We take him out now, Sergeant, before his warbands strike us again. You lead the charge. Get it done.”
And so, we planned the ambush.
We found our ideal battleground in a rocky ravine, where jagged cliffs overlooked a narrow pass.
A perfect place for archers to rain death from above.
My best archers took position on the high ground, arrows notched and ready, hidden behind boulders and scorched trees.
Below, I stood alone in the open, my armor reflecting the eerie glow of the Dark Portal in the distance.
I had to be the bait.
I had to make the demon see only me.
465
The Felguard warband approached, marching through the pass—a dozen felhounds prowling at their sides.
And there he was.
Thar’zul.
A walking nightmare of steel and fire, his glowing green eyes locking onto me the moment he spotted my banner.
“An Alliance whelp dares stand alone before the might of the Legion?”
His voice was deep, guttural, and filled with contempt.
I raised my shield, standing firm.
“If you think I stand alone, demon, you are more blind than I thought.”
He laughed, the sound a booming growl that shook the ground.
“Then come, Paladin! Let me break you before I burn your keep to the ground!”
With a roar, Thar’zul charged forward, his warband following, felhounds snarling and howling.
I held my ground, my heart pounding—
And then, I raised my hand to the sky.
“NOW!”
From the cliffs above, my archers loosed their arrows.
A storm of steel-tipped projectiles rained down, striking the felhounds first, sending them yipping and snarling as they collapsed.
More arrows found their marks, piercing the lesser demons, sending their twisted forms crumbling into the dust.
The warband fell into chaos—and that’s when my soldiers rushed in.
We struck with precision, shields raised, swords gleaming in the eerie glow of the Blasted Lands.
“FOR STORMWIND!”
The battle exploded into motion—
Steel clashed against fel-forged weapons, cries of war and pain filled the ravine, and green fel fire erupted as demons were cut down one by one.
But Thar’zul was not so easily slain.
As the fight raged, Thar’zul turned his gaze back to me.
“You will not escape me, Paladin!”
He raised his massive axe, its glowing runes flaring to life—and with terrifying speed, he brought it crashing down.
I raised my shield, bracing for impact—
466
BOOM!
The force sent me skidding back, my boots digging into the scorched earth.
I barely had time to recover before he swung again, his fury relentless.
I moved, dodging left, his axe missing me by inches, carving into the ground with a shower of sparks.
Then, I countered.
I lunged forward, slamming my shield into his chest, making him stagger.
With my free hand, I called upon the Light.
A flash of radiance burst from my palm, searing against the demonic taint of his armor.
He roared in agony.
I pressed the advantage.
I brought my sword down, striking at his exposed flank, the blessed steel biting into his corrupted flesh.
He snarled, but I could see it—
He was weakening.
“Your kind is finished, Paladin!” Thar’zul growled, swinging wildly in desperation.
I ducked under the strike, pivoting behind him, and raised my blade high.
The Light surged through me, my sword radiating holy energy.
With a final cry, I drove my blade deep into his back, piercing through his armor, his f lesh—his very essence.
His eyes widened, a look of shock overtaking his monstrous features.
“No… this cannot be…”
The fel fire in his body flickered—
And then, with one last, agonized roar, Thar’zul collapsed.
The Felguard warband, leaderless and broken, scattered, their remaining forces cut down by my men.
The battle was over.
I stepped back, breathing heavily, watching as Thar’zul’s corpse smoldered, his dark essence unraveling into nothingness.
One less demon to threaten our world.
One step closer to securing the Blasted Lands.
467
As my men gathered around, checking for wounded and confirming the last of the demons were eliminated, Captain Westbrook arrived.
He surveyed the battlefield, nodding at the dead Felguard commander.
“A clean operation, Sergeant. Well executed.”
I wiped my blade clean.
“Another demon down, but more will come. This is only the beginning.”
He sighed.
“Aye. And it won’t be long before we find out what’s really waiting for us beyond that portal.”
I turned my gaze to the Dark Portal in the distance, its green glow flickering ominously.
Something was coming.
And this battle was just the start.
The next day, fresh reports came in from the scouts—
The Horde had begun their own battles against the demons.
We saw their banners clashing with the Burning Legion, war cries echoing across the Blasted Lands as they fought for survival.
It seemed that, at least for now, we had a common enemy.
But that wasn’t our only concern.
A few days later, my captain introduced me to a new ally—
A Rogue from SI:7, sent to assist in our scouting operations.
His name was Kaelen Vey—a quiet, shadowy figure, with the sharp gaze of a man who had seen too much.
“Sergeant,” he greeted me, his voice as smooth as a blade being drawn from its sheath.
“SI:7 believes the Legion’s corruption runs deeper than just demons rampaging through the wastes. Our intelligence suggests that a Dreadlord is here—not leading an army, but infiltrating, spreading its poison where it can do the most damage.”
“Where?” I asked.
He handed me a parchment, marked with rough sketches and notes.
“A mercenary camp, two miles northeast. They’ve been hired blades for years, but our informants believe the leader has been compromised. If a Dreadlord has its claws in them, it won’t be long before we have traitors in our ranks.”
I didn’t hesitate.
468
I requested men from my captain, and soon after, our strike team was assembled.
Our mission was clear—
Find the Dreadlord, force its hand, and destroy it before it could spread further corruption.
The mercenary encampment sat near a jagged hill, overlooking the cracked red earth of the Blasted Lands.
We approached at dusk, surrounding them with precision, our archers positioned in the ridges above.
The mercenaries saw us coming—dozens of them, hardened fighters armed to the teeth.
But when they saw the banners of Stormwind, they didn’t reach for their weapons.
Instead, their leader, a grizzled warrior in chainmail, stepped forward.
“State your business, Sergeant,” he called, eyes narrowing. “We’re no friends of the Legion, and we’ve got no fight with you.”
That meant one thing—
The Dreadlord was still hidden.
I turned to Kaelen Vey, and the Rogue nodded.
He would find our enemy.
Without a sound, Kaelen slipped into the crowd, vanishing among the mercenaries as though he were never there.
I watched as he moved like a shadow, brushing past the hired swords, his eyes scanning, calculating.
Then, he paused.
His posture shifted—
His fingers drifted toward his belt, ready to strike.
He had found our target.
A robed spellcaster, standing near the campfire, speaking calmly with the mercenary leader.
Nothing about him seemed unusual—
Until Kaelen’s dagger flashed.
The moment steel met flesh, a shockwave of shadow erupted, blasting the Rogue backward.
“Clever, little worm,” a voice sneered—one that was no longer human.
469
The robed man’s form twisted, shadows peeling away like smoke, revealing what lay beneath.
A Nathrezim.
His skin turned a sickly gray, bat-like wings unfurled, and his piercing yellow eyes gleamed with amusement.
“So, you found me. A pity—it only means I’ll have to end you sooner than I planned.”
The mercenaries backed away, hands on their weapons—but they did not draw.
They had no intention of fighting for him.
That was all I needed to know.
I raised my sword.
“Attack!”
The moment the order was given, our archers fired, arrows raining down, but the Dreadlord twisted his form, vanishing into the shadows before they struck.
Then, he reappeared behind us.
With a flick of his clawed hand, he sent a wave of dark magic crashing into our ranks, sending soldiers sprawling.
I charged first, shield raised, calling upon the Light.
The moment my blade struck him, holy energy flared, burning into his corrupted f lesh.
He snarled, retreating into the air, his wings beating against the wind.
“Your Light will not save you, Paladin. It only makes your suffering more delicious!”
His claws wove through the air, and suddenly, my men turned against each other.
A spell of mind control.
They hesitated—confused, dazed.
I had to break the spell—fast.
I slammed my sword into the ground, channeling the Light’s radiance outward.
A shockwave of divine energy pulsed through the battlefield, shattering the Dreadlord’s hold over my men.
“Focus! He is alone! Do not let his tricks divide us!” I bellowed.
Kaelen reappeared beside me, his daggers gleaming in the dim light.
“Then let’s cut off his escape.”
470
He vanished again, and moments later, the Dreadlord let out a screech of pain—a dagger buried in his exposed wing joint.
He faltered.
He tried to flee—
But we would not let him.
The Light surged within me, my blade glowing brighter than the fel flames around us.
I thrust it forward, striking deep into his chest, the holy power searing through his form.
He howled in agony, his body twisting, dissolving into blackened wisps of smoke.
His final words whispered through the air—
“You think you have won… but the shadows… will always return.”
And then—
He was gone.
The mercenaries stood in silence, watching as the last of the demon’s remains faded to nothing.
Their leader, still gripping his sword, exhaled.
“We didn’t know,” he muttered. “He was just another employer, offering coin. We never knew what he was.”
I nodded, lowering my blade.
“You are free to leave. But if you take coin from demons again, we will not be so merciful.”
He held my gaze for a long moment—then gave a short nod.
“Understood.”
The mercenaries gathered their belongings and rode away, leaving us alone in the silent ruins of their camp.
Kaelen stepped beside me, cleaning his blades.
“That was one. There will be more.”
I looked toward the Dark Portal, its ominous green glow pulsing in the distance.
The tension in the Blasted Lands grew heavier with each passing day.
The demonic incursions were no longer scattered skirmishes.
They were organized.
471
The Legion’s forces were preparing for something far greater—and we had to stop them before it was too late.
Then, three reinforcements from Stormwind arrived.
But these weren’t ordinary soldiers.
These were heroes—veterans of past wars, warriors who had earned their titles through blood and fire.
They rode in under the banners of Stormwind, their arrival bringing a renewed sense of strength to our forces.
I stepped forward to greet them.
“Welcome, all. You arrived just in time.”
Each of them dismounted, their eyes sharp, their weapons ready.
A Warrior, clad in heavy plate armor, a massive shield on his back.
Name: Dain Ironvalor
A veteran of the Burning Steppes, known for his relentless assault and impenetrable defense.
A Mage, draped in flowing blue and gold robes, his staff crackling with arcane energy.
Name: Eldric Starweaver
A master of frost magic, trained in Dalaran, with spells that could freeze the very air around him.
A Priest, wearing robes adorned with holy symbols, a golden glow surrounding his f ingertips.
Name: Father Lucian Alden
A battle-cleric of the Cathedral of Light, whose prayers could shield allies and smite the wicked.
“We received word from our scouts,” I continued. “A Doomguard is leading a ritual to summon more demons. If we do not stop him now, he may call forth more than we can handle.”
Dain grunted, tightening his gauntlets. “Then what are we waiting for? Let’s crush this fiend before he brings more of his kind into our world.”
Eldric smirked, the air around his fingers turning icy. “I’ve always wanted to test my spells on a Doomguard.”
Father Lucian merely nodded, gripping his holy staff. “The Light compels us forward. Lead the way, Sergeant.”
This time, we didn’t bring the full army—
472
They would provide support if needed, but the fight itself belonged to the five of us.
The scouts led the way, guiding us through the cracked and scorched terrain of the Blasted Lands.
As we approached the ritual site, we saw it.
A circle of fel fire burned on the ground, twisted runes glowing with unholy energy.
Demons stood guard—
Felguards patrolled the perimeter, and smaller imps danced in the flames, cackling as their master chanted in Eredun.
And there, at the center, towering over them all—
The Doomguard.
His wings stretched wide, his eyes burning green, his clawed hands raised to the sky, calling forth even more horrors.
“We strike now!” I commanded.
Dain charged first, his armor reflecting the eerie green glow of the fel runes.
“FOR STORMWIND!”
With a mighty roar, he crashed into the first Felguard, his blade carving deep into the demon’s tainted flesh.
The Felguard staggered, but another lunged from the side—
Dain barely had time to raise his shield, catching the demon’s strike with a thunderous clash of steel.
I followed close behind, holy light surging through me, my blade gleaming with righteousness.
“Kaelen! Find the Doomguard’s weakness!” I called.
The Rogue was already gone.
A shadow among shadows, Kaelen Vey vanished into the chaos.
His form blurred, weaving between the demons like a specter, daggers flashing in the dim light.
He slipped past the front lines, closing in on the Doomguard, unseen—waiting for his moment to strike.
Eldric, the mage, stepped forward, his staff crackling with raw power.
“Let’s turn down the heat.”
He raised a hand, and suddenly—
A blizzard erupted from the sky.
473
The air turned frigid, ice forming over the cracked red earth, freezing lesser demons in place.
The Felguards, now slowed, became easy targets—
Dain smashed through them, cutting them down with brutal efficiency.
Then, the Doomguard turned to us.
“INSOLENT MORTALS!”
The beast roared, raising a massive claw—
Fel fire erupted from his fingertips, a storm of green flames hurling toward us.
Father Lucian stepped forward, raising his staff high.
“The Light shields us!”
A golden dome materialized, absorbing the infernal blast before it could incinerate us all.
The ground shook beneath the force of the spell, but we stood unharmed.
The Doomguard snarled in frustration.
“Enough of your Light tricks! DIE!”
He raised his massive greatsword, prepared to bring it down upon us—
But suddenly—
His body stiffened.
A dagger, coated in black poison, had pierced his side.
Kaelen stood behind him, smirking, his other dagger already sinking into the Doomguard’s back.
“I found your weak spot, demon,” he whispered.
The Doomguard roared, spinning around, but Kaelen was already gone—vanished into the smoke and shadows.
This was our chance.
Dain took advantage of the opening, slamming his shield into the demon’s wounded side.
The Doomguard stumbled, growling in pain.
“Now!” I shouted.
Lucian raised his staff, channeling holy power into my blade.
Eldric unleashed a final burst of frost, encasing the demon’s legs in ice, holding him in place.
Kaelen reappeared one last time, his daggers finding their mark, slicing deep into the creature’s tendons.
And then, I rushed forward.
474
Calling upon the Light, I drove my sword into the Doomguard’s chest, piercing through his infernal heart.
The demon’s eyes widened, his snarl turning into a choked growl.
A pulse of holy energy surged through his body—
And with one last horrifying scream, the Doomguard erupted into flames, his form collapsing into ash.
The battlefield fell silent.
The remaining demons, leaderless and weakened, crumbled into dust or fled back into the wastes.
Dain planted his sword in the dirt, catching his breath.
“That one actually put up a fight.”
Eldric smirked. “If you call getting frozen solid a fight, sure.”
Kaelen wiped his daggers clean. “At least he won’t be recruiting more demons.”
Father Lucian whispered a quiet prayer, before turning to us.
“The Light guides us, but we must remain vigilant. This is far from over.”
I turned to look at the Dark Portal, still glowing ominously in the distance.
He was right.
We reported back to the captain in Nethergarde Keep, our mission a clear success.
“I’ll make sure you all receive commendations,” the captain said, nodding in approval.
The next days more reports arrived—
Bigger demons were coming.
Soon, our strike team would not be enough to hold them back.
“I will send word to Stormwind,” the captain declared. “They will send reinforcements—but until then, we must hold.”
Then, one day, a chilling report came in—
A massive Pit Lord had been spotted near the Dark Portal.
A Taskmaster of the Burning Legion.
I feared this battle would be too much for us.
But we had to try.
And so, we moved out.
We approached the Dark Portal, our weapons drawn, our spells ready.
475
In the distance, through the scorched red haze of the Blasted Lands, we saw it—
A colossal Pit Lord, its hooves shaking the ground, its wings stretched wide, its massive axe dragging through the dirt, leaving a molten scar behind.
This was no ordinary demon.
“Light help us,” muttered Father Lucian, gripping his staff.
Then, to the west, I saw them.
A Horde war party.
Their banners fluttered in the dry wind, their warriors standing ready, staring at the same monstrous foe.
Their leader, a towering Orc Warrior, stood at the front, his massive axe resting on his shoulder.
They had the same idea as us.
“Horde,” Dain growled. “Do we fight them or the Pit Lord?”
“Wait here,” I said.
“What?! You can’t be serious,” Eldric scoffed.
“We can’t defeat that thing alone,” I answered. “We need them.”
Dain gritted his teeth but said nothing.
And so, I moved forward alone, making my way toward the Horde strike team.
Their leader stepped forward, meeting me halfway.
His scarred face studied me with careful suspicion, but he did not raise his weapon.
That was a good sign.
“Greetings,” I said, stopping just a few paces away. I am sergeant Paladin Tune.
The Orc’s red eyes narrowed slightly, but he gave a small nod.
“Speak your mind, Paladin.”
“This Pit Lord is a threat to both the Horde and the Alliance,” I said firmly.
“I say we join forces and strike as one.”
His eyes locked onto mine, unreadable, as if weighing my words.
For a moment, there was only silence.
Then, he gave a toothy grin.
“Gladly,” he said. “Just don’t get in our way.”
“We have a deal then,” I replied.
476
He turned back to his warriors and lifted his axe.
“Lok’tar ogar! Let’s send this beast back to the abyss!”
I turned to my own team.
“For the Alliance! We move!”
And so, together—
We charged into battle.
The earth trembled, the very air thick with fel energy as we neared the massive Pit Lord.
Zor’khan the Tyrant stood before the Dark Portal, his hulking form wreathed in green f ire, his burning eyes filled with hatred and amusement.
The Legion’s Taskmaster let out a thunderous laugh, the force of his voice shaking the very ground beneath our feet.
“FOOLISH MORTALS!” he roared. “YOU DARE STAND AGAINST ZOR’KHAN?! YOU WILL DIE SCREAMING, AND YOUR BROKEN SOULS WILL SERVE THE LEGION FOR ALL ETERNITY!”
His massive axe scraped across the ground, leaving a trail of molten rock in its wake.
I gripped my sword tightly, standing at the frontline beside Gorath Bloodcleaver, the Orc warrior leading the Horde strike team.
“Enough talk, demon,” Gorath snarled, slamming his axe against his shield. “Let’s see if your strength matches your arrogance!”
The orc shaman beside him lifted her totems, the wind around us surging with power.
“The elements hear our call,” she murmured, her eyes glowing with raw energy.
The Troll hunter beside her nocked an arrow into his bow, his raptor companion snarling at his side.
The Forsaken priest clutched his staff, the shadows twisting around him like living tendrils.
The Tauren druid, standing tall, let out a deep growl, his massive bear form rippling with primal energy.
My own team stood ready.
Dain Ironvalor, shield raised.
Eldric Starweaver, already calling the cold into his hands.
Kaelen Vey, his daggers glinting in the dim light.
Father Lucian, murmuring a prayer to the Light.
477
“For the Alliance!” I shouted.
“For the Horde!” Gorath bellowed.
And together—
We charged.
Zor’khan raised his axe, the air thick with fel magic, and brought it crashing down—
Dain threw up his shield, meeting the massive blow head-on, his boots digging into the cracked earth.
The shockwave sent dust and debris flying, but he held strong.
“Strike now!” I called, stepping forward with my blade shining with holy energy.
The Troll hunter let loose an arrow, the tip glowing with poison, piercing Zor’khan’s thick hide.
His raptor companion lunged, clawing at the demon’s legs, dodging as the Pit Lord swiped in fury.
Kaelen Vey vanished in a blink, reappearing beneath the demon’s belly, his daggers f inding soft points between the armor plating.
The Forsaken priest let out a twisted chant, his hands wreathing Kaelen in shadow magic.
“A gift of darkness, Rogue, use it well.”
Kaelen felt the energy surge through him, his attacks hitting with unnatural speed.
Above us, the Tauren druid roared, shifting into his massive bear form and rushing forward, slamming his bulk into Zor’khan’s leg.
The Pit Lord snarled, swiping his massive claw—
Only for the orc shaman to raise her hands, summoning a barrier of wind, deflecting the strike just in time.
“The storm is with us!” she called.
Zor’khan spread his wings, rising into the air, and with a guttural snarl, unleashed a wave of fel fire—
“TAKE COVER!”
Eldric threw his hands forward, and suddenly—
A dome of frost formed over us, the fel fire hissing as it met the icy shield.
The flames licked the edges, but the mage held firm.
478
The shaman slammed her totems into the earth, calling forth rushing waters, extinguishing the rest of the flames.
The air steamed, but we stood unharmed.
“He’s coming back down!” the hunter shouted.
The Pit Lord landed hard, shaking the ground beneath us.
“I WILL END YOU ALL!”
Gorath Bloodcleaver grinned, his teeth bared.
“You talk too much, demon!”
He charged.
His battle axe, now crackling with lightning from the shaman’s enchantments, cleaved deep into Zor’khan’s leg.
The Pit Lord staggered, howling in pain.
Dain followed suit, ramming his shield into the other leg, knocking the demon off balance.
“NOW!” I roared.
Eldric cast one last spell, the ice surging forward, freezing the demon’s arms in place.
Kaelen leapt onto the demon’s back, his daggers plunging into the exposed flesh near the neck.
The Forsaken priest lifted his staff, shadow magic swirling around his fingers, and whispered—
“Be unmade.”
A wave of dark energy surged into Zor’khan, weakening his already failing form.
And then—
I stepped forward.
The Light surged through me, my sword glowing with divine fire.
“By the Light, you will fall!”
I drove my blade straight into his chest.
A blinding pulse of energy erupted, surging through his massive form.
Zor’khan’s eyes widened in horror—
Then, he let out one final, soul-wrenching scream, his body collapsing into a pile of burning ash.
The Legion’s Tyrant was dead.
The Blasted Lands fell silent.
479
The last remnants of fel energy burned away, fading into the dying wind.
We stood together, bloodied and exhausted.
Gorath Bloodcleaver exhaled deeply, wiping the demon’s black blood from his blade.
“That was a fight worth remembering,” he muttered.
The orc shaman nodded. “And it was won together.”
Dain Ironvalor, looked at me, his expression unreadable.
Finally, he grinned.
“You were right, Tune.”
He glanced at the Horde warriors, then back to me.
“We could not have done this without their help.”
He extended a gauntleted hand.
“I won’t doubt your judgment next time.”
I gripped his forearm tightly.
“The fight against the Legion is far from over,” I said. “But today, we struck a mighty blow.”
Gorath stepped forward, his gravelly voice breaking the moment.
“Do not think this makes us friends, Paladin,” he said with a grin. “But… I would stand beside you in battle again.”
I nodded.
“And I, you.”
With that, we turned toward Nethergarde Keep.
The war was far from over—
But today, the Legion had suffered a great loss.
The following days were eerily calm.
With the defeat of Zor’khan the Tyrant, we hoped the worst had passed.
The battalion from Stormwind arrived, bolstering Nethergarde Keep’s defenses, bringing more swords, more shields, more Light to the fight.
Another strike team joined us—battle-hardened champions ready to face whatever lay ahead.
For the first time in weeks, things were looking better.
480
One morning, as we gathered near the war room, the newly arrived battalion commander addressed us.
“Soldiers, strike team, you have done your duty well. You are relieved.”
There were murmurs among the ranks.
“Stormwind wants your reports, and your place is now back home,” he continued. “Another force will hold the Keep.”
We nodded, gathering our belongings, preparing for the long journey back.
For the first time in weeks, we could return to our families, our homes.
Then—
The sky darkened.
The air grew heavy, thick with an unnatural presence.
The very ground trembled beneath our feet as a voice—no, a roar—echoed across the Blasted Lands… and beyond.
A voice of pure malice.
A voice of doom.
“MORTALS!”
A thunderous boom, shaking the very heavens.
A voice that seemed to press into our souls, clawing at the edges of our courage.
“YOU THOUGHT YOU COULD STEM THE TIDE OF THE LEGION? FOOLS! YOUR WORLD BURNS, AND YOU WILL PERISH IN FLAMES!”
A foul wind howled through the Keep, carrying with it the stench of sulfur and ash.
The horizon glowed green, and then—
We saw him.
A massive Fel Lord, towering over even the Pit Lords, his body wreathed in shadow and fire.
His glowing eyes burned with hatred, his colossal blade dripping with fel energy.
He stood at the crest of a hill, looking down upon Nethergarde Keep with contempt.
“I AM LORD KRUUL, HAND OF THE LEGION! I COME TO FINISH WHAT WAS STARTED!”
With a single step, the earth cracked beneath his weight.
And behind him—
The Burning Legion followed.
481
We turned to the battalion commander, who stood frozen for a moment, watching the horrors unfold.
Then, his expression hardened.
“Stormwind can wait,” he said. “We stay and fight.”
We dropped our bags and drew our weapons.
A cheer rose from the soldiers, the strike team readying their spells and steel.
I tightened my grip on my sword, watching as horrors poured forth—
Wrathguards, Felhunters, Infernals crashing into the earth in burning meteors.
And at the center of it all—
Lord Kruul, striding toward us like death itself.
“By the Light…” Father Lucian whispered.
Dain gritted his teeth.
“Well, so much for peace.”
I exhaled slowly, feeling the holy power surge through me.
“To arms, soldiers of the Alliance! The battle is upon us!”
And as the Legion charged—
We met them head-on.
The ground shook as Lord Kruul and his demon horde advanced, the air thick with fel energy and the stench of burning sulfur.
From the horizon, more Infernals crashed down, their molten bodies bursting into f lames as they rose. Wrathguards and Felhunters snarled, their weapons and claws gleaming in the eerie green glow.
The commander barked orders, his voice cutting through the chaos.
“Archers! Hold your fire until they’re in range! Mages, prepare your spells! Shield bearers, form up at the front!”
The Legion was upon us.
And just as we braced for impact—
From the west, another force appeared.
Orcs, axes and hammers raised high.
Trolls, their bows drawn, their raptors snarling.
Forsaken, their shadows swirling in the air.
482
And leading them— Gorath Bloodcleaver, the orc warrior I had fought beside days before.
He locked eyes with me.
“Paladin! It seems we meet again!” he bellowed, raising his axe. “And this time, we f ight together!”
I turned to our commander.
“Sir, the Horde is not our enemy today.”
He studied the approaching orcs, his hand tightening on his sword hilt.
“The Legion is the true threat,” I urged. “We strike together, or we fall apart.”
For a moment, he hesitated.
Then, he gave a single nod.
“All forces, focus fire on the demons! The Horde fights with us today!”
A wave of cheers and battle cries erupted, voices from both Alliance and Horde joining as one.
And as Lord Kruul raised his colossal sword, ready to strike—
We charged.
The first wave of demons crashed into our front lines like a storm of claws and steel.
Dain Ironvalor stood firm, his shield locked with the other warriors, absorbing the f irst massive blow from a wrathguard’s glaive.
Gorath met another head-on, his battle axe cleaving through demonic flesh, green fel blood splattering onto the sand.
“Is that all you’ve got?!” he roared, swinging his weapon into another demon’s chest.
The Forsaken priest raised his arms, dark energy swirling, twisting around an Infernal, crushing it into dust before it could strike.
“Ashes to ashes, filth,” he muttered, his skeletal grin widening.
The Troll hunter loosed arrows, each shot finding weak points in demon armor.
“Keep dem’ wraths off de’ warriors!” he called to his raptor, the beast darting in, ripping through the felspawn’s legs.
I stood near the backline with the priests, raising my hands to the sky.
“Light, bless these warriors!”
A golden radiance burst forth, enveloping the frontline fighters, their wounds knitting together, their strength renewed.
483
“Shields up! Hold the line!” the commander barked, as our forces clashed against the endless tide of demons.
Behind me, Father Lucian and the Forsaken priest exchanged a glance.
“Never thought I’d be casting alongside the undead,” Lucian muttered.
“And I never thought I’d heal a man still burdened by a beating heart,” the Forsaken sneered. “Yet, here we are.”
They both lifted their staves, their powers of Light and Shadow intertwining, bolstering our allies.
And then—
A deafening roar shook the land.
Lord Kruul strode forward, his massive frame dwarfing us all.
“ENOUGH! YOU ARE INSECTS BEFORE THE LEGION! YOU WILL BOW!”
He raised his colossal sword, fel lightning crackling along its edge.
“Heroes! With me!” I called, stepping forward.
Eldric Starweaver, our mage, lifted his hands, summoning a blizzard of ice, freezing the Pit Lord’s left leg in place.
“Pin him down!”
Kaelen Vey, the rogue, appeared behind the demon, his daggers flashing, stabbing into Kruul’s lower spine.
“For once, I think we’re actually in over our heads,” he muttered.
The orc shaman slammed her totems into the ground, her eyes glowing with stormlight.
“The elements will answer!”
Lightning surged through the ground, striking Kruul in the chest, staggering him momentarily.
Gorath Bloodcleaver charged, his axe glowing red-hot, empowered by the shaman’s f ire magic.
With a mighty swing, he cleaved deep into Kruul’s side.
The Pit Lord snarled in pain, but retaliated with a backhand swing—
Gorath was sent flying, crashing through a ruined wall.
“Get up, orc!” the Forsaken priest sneered, casting a dark blessing upon him.
Gorath grunted, blood dripping from his lip, but he rose again, axe in hand.
“That all you got, demon?!”
Kruul lifted his sword once more.
The blade crackled with unholy energy.
484
“FALL BEFORE ME!”
He brought it down.
But before it could land—
The Tauren druid shifted, taking the full force of the impact in his bear form.
The ground shattered beneath him, but he held strong.
“Now! Hit him now!” I shouted.
Dain Ironvalor charged, his shield slamming into Kruul’s knee, forcing him to stagger.
Eldric unleashed a final blast of frost, freezing the demon’s limbs solid.
Kaelen leapt onto his shoulder, plunging both daggers into his throat.
And I—
I raised my sword high, calling upon every ounce of the Light within me.
“By the Light, be purged!”
A golden shockwave erupted, engulfing the Pit Lord, burning away the fel magic that sustained him.
Lord Kruul let out a final, monstrous howl—
Then, with a blinding explosion, he was no more.
The battlefield was a ruin of flame and shadow.
Demon corpses littered the Blasted Lands, their twisted forms dissolving into ash and fel mist. The ground still smoldered where Infernals had crashed, their fires slowly dying.
Lord Kruul was no more.
His colossal form had collapsed, the fel energy that once sustained him scattered to the winds. The very air felt lighter, the crushing presence of the Legion’s might fading into silence.
For a long moment, no one spoke.
Then, a cheer erupted from the Alliance ranks—a victorious roar of soldiers who had fought against impossible odds… and won.
But it was not just our forces who raised their voices.
Across the battlefield, the Horde warriors howled, beating their chests, raising their weapons high in triumph.
Both armies of Azeroth stood together, celebrating the defeat of a common enemy.
As the dust settled, our commanders gathered.
485
Commander Vines stepped forward, his face still stern, but his posture relaxed. He looked across the battlefield and turned to Gorath Bloodcleaver.
“I won’t waste time with speeches,” he said. “Without your warriors, we would have been overrun.”
The orc grunted, resting his massive axe across his shoulder.
“Hmph. You speak truth, human. But do not forget—without your men, we would have fallen, too.”
There was a pause, a silence filled with unspoken thoughts.
Then, Gorath extended his hand.
For a moment, the commander hesitated.
Then—
He gripped the orc’s forearm firmly.
A sign of respect.
A sign of acknowledgment.
A sign that, for now, at least, there was no war between us.
As the sun set over the Blasted Lands, we gathered the wounded and prepared for the days ahead.
There would be no lasting peace between the Horde and Alliance.
Old grudges ran deep, and wars were not so easily forgotten.
But on this day, in this battle, we had fought as one.
Later that day, as the dust settled over the Blasted Lands, the commander gathered the first group of soldiers and my strike team.
“Your duty here is done,” he said. “The next battalion will hold the Dark Portal, with the new strike team reinforcing them. You are relieved.”
It was time to return to Stormwind.
As we rode north, leaving behind the war-torn wasteland, I turned for a final look at the Portal.
It still glowed, pulsing with ominous green energy, the very air around it distorted and unstable.
Something told me this was far from over.
Upon arriving in Stormwind, we wasted no time.
We reported everything—the demonic forces, the arrival of Lord Kruul, the unprecedented cooperation between the Alliance and the Horde, and finally, the continuing reopening of the Dark Portal.
The news spread quickly.
486
Tensions rose in the streets. Rumors of a new war beyond the Portal filled every tavern and barracks.
And then, the official word came.
The Dark Portal had been fully breached.
Both the Alliance and the Horde had sent their armies through, along with their greatest heroes.
A war had begun… on another world.
And though we had returned to Stormwind, we knew—
One day, we would have to follow.
And when that day came…
We needed to be ready.
A week had passed since my return from the Blasted Lands.
Life had settled, if only briefly.
But I knew.
Peace does not last forever.
Word of war spreads fast in Stormwind. The Blasted Lands burn, and the Dark Portal looms like an open wound in the land. Demons have poured into Azeroth, but for the first time in what feels like an eternity, the Alliance is not standing alone.
There are whispers of new allies—not just warriors from distant human kingdoms, but beings from another world entirely.
The Draenei, they are called. Survivors of a war against the Burning Legion, refugees from beyond the stars. The rumors say they arrived on a shattered vessel, seeking refuge and offering their aid against the demons. Some claim they’ve been hunted by the Legion for centuries, that they know things about our enemy that we can only guess at.
And then… there is the other rumor.
The Horde has gained new allies as well. The Blood Elves, the same High Elves who once stood beside us in war, now march under the Horde’s banner.
I still don’t understand it. How could they? The High Elves have been part of the Alliance for as long as I can remember. Have they forgotten our shared battles, our history? Or have they changed that much since the fall of Quel’Thalas?
I shake my head. It’s not my place to question politics. My duty is to the Light and to my people.
487
Still, I won’t deny it—I’m curious to see these Draenei for myself when they reach Stormwind. If they’ve fought the Burning Legion for so long, maybe they have knowledge that can help us.
But that’s a thought for another time. Now, im being summoned to the commander office.
When the summons came, I felt the familiar weight of duty settle upon my shoulders.
I wondered, is it time?
Was the order finally given to cross the Dark Portal and take the fight to the Burning Legion on the other side?
There was only one way to find out.
I adjusted my tabard, fastened my blade, and made my way to the Commander’s office.
Upon stepping inside, I immediately sensed this was no ordinary meeting.
Around the room, officers and senior paladins stood in quiet anticipation.
At the head of the table, my Commander waited, his expression measured and stern.
Beside him, Lord Grayson Shadowbreaker, a man whose approval was not given lightly.
Their eyes met mine—not with the weight of discipline, but with something else.
Recognition. Respect. Acknowledgment.
“Sergeant Tune,” the Commander began, his voice firm yet resolute.
“We have gathered here today, not to send you across the Dark Portal… but to honor the deeds you have done before it ever opened.”
A quiet murmur spread through the room.
“When the Legion returned, you were among the first to answer the call,” he continued.
“You did not just wield your sword; you wielded wisdom.”
“You led men into battle and brought them back alive.”
“You saw not only the enemy in front of you, but the war that lay beyond the battlefield.”
He paused, his gaze unwavering.
“Through your actions, the Alliance stood victorious in the Blasted Lands.”
“Through your judgment, our forces allied with the Horde against the demons, securing victory where there would have been only death.”
488
“Through your leadership, your men placed their trust in you—not just as a soldier, but as a commander.”
“It is time that rank reflects reality.”
My breath caught in my throat.
“Sergeant Tune, kneel.”
I dropped to one knee, my armor clinking against the stone floor.
Lord Shadowbreaker stepped forward, his hand resting over the insignia on my chest.
“You have carried your duty with honor, Tune,” he said.
“Not just as a warrior, but as a leader of men. That is what makes a true Paladin.”
He reached into a small wooden box, withdrawing a polished insignia.
The Master Sergeant’s Insignia.
“Rise, Master Sergeant Tune.”
As I stood, he affixed the insignia to my tabard, the weight of it far heavier than mere metal.
It was a burden.
It was a duty.
It was a promise.
The room erupted in applause.
The officers saluted.
The paladins nodded in approval.
The Commander clasped my forearm.
“Well done, Master Sergeant. May you continue to serve with honor.”
I took a deep breath, steadied myself.
“For the Light.”
And as I walked from that room, I knew—
My war was far from over.
Paladin. Writer. Gamer since the early days.
I’ve been a World of Warcraft player since the Vanilla era, where I earned the title of Grand Marshal with my human paladin, who remains my main and faithful companion through every journey.
I wrote A Paladin Tale as a tribute to the Light, to honor, and to the stories that shaped my life within Azeroth. This book is born from my passion for the WoW universe and for the paladin archetype noble, resilient, and guided by something greater.
When I'm not wielding the Hammer of the Light, I’m building worlds with words, reliving the nostalgia of the early raids, or engaging with the community that still keeps the spirit of the Alliance alive.
© 2024 Bruno Tune Rodrigues All rights reserved. | World of Warcraft is a registered trademark of Blizzard Entertainment.
Developed by WrathCODE